Home

Moore 353 USER'S MANUAL

1. EE READY INTRLK INIT p 1 y uy ras OK gt gt AND IK i i Ey gt unconfigured 1 IK 24 lt EN gt DFAIL min FF AND FAILED 2 PF unconfigured 0 DONE AND OR Ro RESET fm gt RS 53 5 59 AND ABORTED 27 RS RS 60 READY RS 25 READY RD AND unconfigured 1 RS 19 OR K R READY READY 5 5 RUN READY lt gt RO START mn gt ENS pes READY m 2 DONE _ gt AND gt ABORTED gt RO EE s RESTART 255 ap 25 HO 20 AND ST EN ne gt EN gt 65 ST HO AND 43 ST lt ST gt 31 RUN 1 0 RN 3 AND gt gt AND unconfigured 1 ST BEN EN RUN HELD 2 RUN lt 68 RUN gt 33 RO RUN M AND 3 HOLD w E 34 OR L130 5 5 AND gt HO HO 35 AND EN 69 FD 8 HO lt lt lt 70 R 1 0 HE gt gt AND gt gt AND unconfigured 1 HO 36 EN 4 HE
2. UM353 1 Data Mapping Analog Indicator ODA V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L PIALI R W Process 1 Alarm A Limit 96 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40451 30 1 n 1 13 L P1BLI Process 1 Alarm Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40452 30 1 n 1 14 L P2ALI R W_ Process 2 Alarm Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40453 30 1 n 1 15 L P2BLI R W Process 2 Alarm B Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40454 30 1 n 1 16 L P3ALI R W Process 3 Alarm A Limit 96 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40455 30 1 n 1 17 L P3BLI Process 3 Alarm Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40456 30 1 n 1 18 L P4ALI R W Process 4 Alarm A Limit 96 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40457 30 1 n 1 19 L P4BLI Process 4 Alarm B Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0 40458 30 1 1 20 Process 1 Alarm 0 3 0000 0003 40459 30 1 n 2 13 L PIBTI R W Process 1 Alarm B Type 0 3 0000 0003 40460 30 1 n 2 14 L P2ATI R W Process 2 Alarm 0 3 0000 0003 40461 30 1 n 2 15 L P2BTI R W Process 2 Alarm B Type 0 3 0000 0003 40462 30 1 2 16 L P3ATI R W Process 3 Alarm A 0 3 0000 0003 40463 30 1 2 17 L P3BTI R W Process 3 Alarm 0 3 0000 0003 40464 30 1
3. RTG_ function blocks provide a high 1 output for one scan RISING EDGE TRIGGER cycle each time input transitions from low 0 to high _ 1 RTG 000 uere Pulse Input E RISING Output 1 i TRIGGER 01 LIN PUIT INPUT P loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No 001 to 250 7770077 BI SED REAL TIME TRIP 3 2 89 RTT Real Time clock Trip V2 0 a TiMe Trip y TiMe Tri RTT function blocks provide high 1 outputs when time TIME 4 7 36 16 io from the CLOCK block coincides with the TIME DATE amp Trip DAYS of the Week TRIP settings The block outputs will Days Trip remain high while the CLOCK coincides with the settings 12 DAY 30 YEAR 11999 DaYs Trip DAYS 0 0 TIME TRIP 5 00 00 00 23 59 59 0 DAYS 5 SMTWTFS 1111111 P MNTH TRIP S 01 12 01 P DAY TRIP 5 01 31 01 YEAR TRIP 5 1970 3099 1999 3 94 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 90 SCL Scaler SCL function blocks provide a means to scale an analog signal It will re range a signal by using the range pointer to reference the function block w
4. 2003 11 11 UM353 1 11 5 ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT The following describes replacement of the controller s assemblies The subsections below are organized in the sequence of controller disassembly and reassembly Most subsections have Removal and Installation paragraphs Controller disassembly is described by the Removal paragraphs and controller assembly is described by the Installations paragraphs TOOLS inch pounds is recommended Before handling an assembly refer to Section 11 2 4 for electrostatic discharge prevention procedures See Figure 11 1 for an exploded view of the controller that shows field replaceable assemblies and individual parts Common hand tools for electronic equipment servicing are needed and a torque screwdriver calibrated in 5 JUMPERS There are three jumpers on the MPU Controller board W2 W4 and either W7 or W8 Their settings are described in the following sections and shown in Figures 11 2 and 11 3 FIELD UPGRADES The procedures below are provided for servicing an assembled controller When installing a circuit board in the controller to add or change performance features always refer to the Kit Installation Instruction supplied in the circuit board kit for details specific to the supplied board 11 5 1 Fuse A power input fuse is located on the MPU Controller board as shown in
5. 3 2 13 AND AND Logic AND_ function blocks perform a logical AND on the three inputs Any unused input will be set high 1 AND AND EsN 000 gt gt 2 01 Input LD Input B B AND Output 1 Input C E INPUT A loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT C loop tag block tag output null ES Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 24 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Function Blocks 3 2 14 Analog Output Ethernet V2 4 AOE_ function blocks are available when the optional Ethernet communication board is installed Up to 32 AOE blocks are available and are assigned in sequence with each use station wide ANALOG OUTPUT ETHERNET Range R N The range pointer parameter Input R enables the block to Inputs s pass the range scaling to function blocks in other i Moore and Procidia controllers connected over the Ethernet ANALOG OUTPUT ETHERNET network RG P T RanGe PoinTeR s loop tag block tag null S INPUTS loop tag block tag output null Rev 2 3 2 15 AOL Analog Output LIL AOL function blocks
6. 1 7 1 2 ISO IEG SymbolS eee ti aee t dates c aee C Ue e Uer te Ud t E 1 8 3 1 Security Level vs Accessible Operations 3 4 3 2 Modbus Port Baud Rate Parameters eene eene nennen nnne E E EE 3 6 3 3 Board Description and ID with Example Hardware and Software Revisions 3 6 34 um or RUE UR EE MU m 3 19 3 5 Calibration Input 6 cete el Dei itai tem ier lite eer te 3 19 3 6 Sen Min Max amp Min Max Scale Parameters enne enne nnne 3 19 8 1 Rear Terminal Assignments cec eee eee ic 6 8 8 2 Factory Calibration eite etre eae dee Hie 6 26 Or X totunc god estis 9 6 9 2 Aut tun eee 9 6 11 1 RTC CB and Boards Off Line Error Codes nn 11 9 11 2 On Line Error and Status 21 4 4002 0 440440060 000000000 00 11 10 14 1 Moore 353 Model Designation 12 2 Changes for Revision 11 March 2003 Significant changes for Rev 11 are indicated by change
7. ODP_ Operator Display for Pushbuttons Input 11 Output 11 Input 12 ES Output 12 Group 1 Input 1A EJ Output 13 Input 1M EJ Input 1F Input 81 Output 81 82 ES Output 82 Group 8 Input 8A ES Output 83 Input 8M Input 8 EJ IG 1 Group 1 TAG 6 6 ASCII Char G1P 1 Group 1 1 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char 1 1 Group 1 PB1 Hold In Time s 0 1 10 sec 2 Group 1 PB2 5 6 ASCII Char 1 2 1 Group 1 PB2 Hold In Time 5 0 1 10 sec G1 SA Group 1 Switch Position TAG 5 6 ASCII Char G 1 SIM T AIG Group 1 Switch Position TAG s 6 ASCII Char G1 F 1 Group 1 Feedback 1 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char G 1 F 0 Group 1 Feedback 0 TAG 5 6 8 Groups 5 6 G8P 1 T A G Group 8 PB1 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char G8 P 1 Group 8 PB1 Hold In Time s 0 1 10 sec G8 P 2 Group 8 PB2 5 6 ASCII Char G 8 P 2 1 T Group 8 PB2 Hold In Time 5 0 1 10 sec G8 S Group 8 Switch Position TAG s 6 ASCII Char 618 5 Group 8 Switch Position TAG s 6 ASCII Char 8 1 Group 8 Feedback 1 TAG 9 6 ASCII Char G 8 F O Group 8 Feedback 0 TAG 9 6 ASCII Char LOOP LOOP 5 01 to 25
8. 5 Number of RECIPES number of STEPS GIRIO U P S Number of GROUP 01016 0 Current RECIPE falso QUICKSET 2 1109 1 L A S T Power Up LAST NO YES YES INP UT input tv loop tag block tag output null input TC loop tag block tag output I NP U T S F input SF loop tag block tag output inputs loop tag block tag output null 1 65 INPUT GS loop tag block tag output null INPUTSN tag block tag output null INPUTH loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUTR loop tag block tag output I NIPIUT RIN INPUTRI loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUTLR tag block tag output null E S N Exec Seq No sss 000 to 250 000 INP UT INPUT loop tag block tag output null r Six x x G n Recipe r Step xxx Grp n In Mask 0000 to FFFF 0000 r S x x x G n O Recipe Step xxx Grp n Out Mask 0000 to FFFF 0000 r S x x x T M Recipe Step xxx TIMe Period minutes Real 0 0 r S x x X A E P Recipe Step xxx Analog End Point Real 0 0 transition will select the step number which is the SN input The SN input will round the number to the nearest integer value A step number that is out of range will have no effect and the sequencer wi
9. is one of five controller types that can be used on a one per ON_OFF CONTROLLER loop basis ONOFF ESN 000 When P S Process Setpoint reaches the HDEV limit the Range R Absolute Error Boolean output HO will go high 1 when 5 Setpoint Process OFF VA Process reaches the LDEV limit the output LO will go Setpoint S CONTROLLER high 1 When the deviation drops to less than the Output 1 DEADBAND setting the outputs will go low 0 piss Low Output Derivative action 1s added to the process variable when the TD parameter is other than 0 0 RG RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag null When single ended action gap action is desired set the 4 IB EAT DEADBAND equal to gap and HDEV parameter for MDE M High DEViation 5 Real 500 _ Low DEViation Real 5 00 half the For example if DEADBAND 20 0 set DEAD BAND g LL Real HDEV to 10 If the setpoint S 1S 50 0 output HO will go INPUT P INPUTP loop tag block tag output null INPUT S INPUTS loop tag block tag output null high 1 when P equals 60 0 and HO will 50 low 0 when P INPUT E INPUTE t 4 equals 40 0 Exec Seq No 001 to 250 Input E asserted high 1 will enable the block outputs when low 0 all outputs will set low 0 The process range pointer p
10. Real SxxxAEP Step x Analog End Point Real SxxxGnlM Step x Group n Input Mask 16 bit mask word SxxxGnOM Step x Group n Output Mask 16 bit mask word DYTxxT Delay Timer x Time Real OSTxxT One Shot Timer x Time Real RCTxxNT Repeat Cycle Timer x ON Time Real RCTxxFT Repeat Cycle Timer x OFF Time Real ROTxxT Retentive On Timer Time Real CP 150 151 152 153 154 169 1 0 185 186 187 4 somm soap S001GOMM 50016 1 0016 SOOIGFOM 2 50021 So02AEP S002GOIM 50026 1 S002G00M S002GFOM 3 50031 5003 S003GOIM SOOSGFIM S003G00M SO0SGFOM 4 soam 5004 S004GOIM SO04GFIM 5004G00M S004GFOM s soostM soosaEP S005GOIM SO0SGFIM S005G0OM S0O5GFOM soostM So06AEP 5006601 SO06GFIM S006G0OM S006GFOM 7 sorm Soo7AEP S00760M S007GFIM S007G0OM S007GFOM l 150 151 152 153 154 15 169 ATO eet 185 186 187 244 _52 S2MAEP 524460 S244GFIM S244G0OM S244GFOM 245 5245 S245AEP S245G0MM S245GFIM S245G00M Sz44GFOM 246 5246 S246AEP S24
11. B z 2 a TV A B gt Tracked TQ TC Output TV BLOCK DIAGRAM When a configuration containing the BIAS function block is edited in i config and then downloaded to an on line controller the controller will ignore a change to the BIAS parameter value and continue to run with the pre download value 3 34 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 25 CIE_ Coil Inputs Ethernet V3 0 CIE_ function blocks are available when the optional Ethernet communication board is installed in the controller It enables the controller to obtain Coil data from other stations over the Ethernet network GE COIL INPUTS 16 CHAN ETHERNET Output COIL INPUTS 16 CHAN ETHERNET 32 CIE blocks are available Blocks are assigned in sequence controller wide with each use Up to 16 Coils can be obtained from a Modbus device Each Coil is assigned to block outputs CF Output CF Output QS The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the P S IPADdRESs nnn nnn nnn nn n 192 168 0 0 IP address of the source Modbus device The S mMBADARESS t 1 255 1 MB ADRES parameter allows a Modbus address D ATA m Coil lnPut to be configured When connecting to other UpDete RATE t PAPIGE Pa Siemens MOORE controllers Modbus
12. snp qon 19j 0 13u07 5592014 XXXXXXXXXXXXEGE yonpoid ay yey IqIsuodsar sy LLY6T Vd Funds ld uMojAsuumng 07 syonporg 3100 A flOSt 0 Surpioooe ALINYOANOD Declaration for Controllers with Case Option 2 14 15 March 2003 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1 14 16 March 2003 UM353 1 Abbreviations And Acronyms 15 0 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS This section contains definitions for many of the abbreviations and acronyms that frequently appear in this User s Manual Less frequently used terms are defined where they appear Where term has more than one meaning context will usually indicate the meaning Terms that identify function block are indicated by FB A ampere s AC action alternating current ACS Arccosine FB ACT acting ADD Addition FB address AIE Analog Input Ethernet FB AIN Analog Input FB AINU Analog Input Universal FB A M auto manual Analog Output Ethernet APACS Advanced Process Automation and Control System ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASN Arcsine FB AT adaptive time autotune transfer ATD Analog Trend Display FB ATN Arctangent FB AWG American Wire Gauge BAT battery BATSW Batch Switch FB BATOT Batch Tota
13. Transmitter Supply gt gt Suppl gt ee 36v c 9 MIF PR 26 vac 39 9 A Common Current 11 4 35 0 V 9 Y 5 DINU1 8 24V m 24V Tee Y 3 External O External 8 Suppl o Suppl P A 13 L _ DINE UN 2 ping HHL Y 14 38 x 7 Common Ground Bus 22 Common Ground Bus E Earth Note See Table 8 1 for Earth Limits current to 6 mA maximum Ground DINS terminals Ground A DIN1 and 2 B DINU1 and 2 FIGURE 8 14 Digital Inputs DIN and DINU Digital output wiring 1s shown in Figure 8 15 Three diagrams are provided showing current and voltage outputs Note the use of transient suppression diodes in Figure 8 15C Always install a transient suppression component across a reactive component such as a relay coil to protect the semiconductor devices in the Moore 353 Digital output common DOUTC is connected to station common 8 16 March 2003 UM353 1 Installation Controller Terminals Resistive Load E re 5 26 Vdc 9 x 5 v 8 Digital Output 5 9 Common E Controller Terminals Common Ground Bus E ri 5 B MUS Resistive Load Earth Bo 10K Typical 1 Ground 8 Digital Output A Current Output Isolated 9 Common Inductive Load
14. TRANSFER SWITCH TSW ESN 000 Input A IpputB B TRANSFER SWITCH f 1 Output 1 Switch Command INPUT A loop tag block tag output null INPUT loop tag block tag output null N N P com INPUT SC loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No 001 to 250 tn tn zou XOR XOR EsN 000 Input A Input B Output 1 Input A gt gt XR gt gt 01 INPUT INPUT A loop tag block tag output null X03136S0 INPUT INPUT B tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT C loop tag block tag output null XOR TRUTH TABLE ES Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 0 0 0 3 102 March 2003 UM353 1 Factory Configured Options 4 0 FACTORY CONFIGURED OPTIONS Factory Configured Options provide an easy way to configure a Model 352 Model 353 or Model 354 In most cases Factory Configured Option FCO will provide a complete functional loop controller once the proper I O connections are made Changes can be made to an FCO to meet individual requirements The FCO listings on the following pages document the parameters that are different than the default values listed in section 3 Some things to keep in mind when maki
15. The SPLIM function block has an RG PTR parameter input R that defines the normal operating range of the block Limit settings can be made within 10 to 110 of the range pointer values If the range pointer is not configured a range of 0 0 to 100 0 will be used If a range be the same value within the new range change is made the current limit value will be moved to PRIORITIES The priority assigned to SL PRIOR will affect the operation as follows the outputs HS and LS will go high with all priority assignments including 0 when event is active 1 Bargraphs event LEDs and condition will flash ACK button must be used to stop flashing 2 Bargraphs event LEDs and condition will flash Flashing will stop if ACK or if event clears 3 Event LEDs and condition will flash ACK button must be used to stop flashing 4 Event LEDs and condition will flash Flashing will 5 Event LEDs and condition will turn on when event stop 1f ACK or event clears is active and off when the event clears 0 No display action occurs when event is active The HL and LL status bits are always set to 0 A HISELECTOR LO SELECTOR ams oi High limit Status gt HS Low limit Status gt LS LO LIMIT HI LIMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 98 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 95 SRF_ SR Flip Flop SRF_ function blocks perform a set dominant flip f
16. Digital Isolation intei 100 Vdc Universal Digital Inputs 2 Logic 1 Range est 4 30 Vdc Input Current usu ua lt 7 mA 30 V Logic 0 R nge i scietis 0 1 Vdc Overvoltage 30 Vdc Frequency Range 0 to 25 000 Hz 0 03 of reading Minimum Operating Frequency 0 05 Hz Pulse 20 minimum Sistial Types Sine Square Pulse Triangle Contact Closure contacts require external power Software Output Types a Scaled Frequency Analog b Scaled Count Analog c Current Input State Digital WSOlaHON odeur 100 Vdc Relay Outputs 2 Nd C Sealed meets requirements of Division 2 applications Software Input Type Digital Contact Configuration SPDT Contact Rating 5A a 115 Vac 2 5A 230 Vac resistive load Minimum Current 100 mA 10 mVdc or 150 mA 50 mVac 14 8 COMMUNICATION BOARDS Communication boards plug into the Controller Board and provide digital communication as required by the application These boards provide digital communication for remote I O and NETWORK communicati
17. O m oumu gmaHoOOOO0 A AaMmaHccccjcciioommummJlmaamuy r gt lt lt gz H U DU NO 3 70 00 VVVVZ22 2 2 2 rr MW Zz m Valve RanGe PoinTeR 5 Local Operation Not Local Watch Dog Process RanGe PoinTeR s loop tag block tag null loop tag block tag Input X RanGe PoinTeR s Input Y RanGe PoinTeR 5 User 1 STATUS 5 8 Char ASCII U1 STAT User 2 STATUS s 8 Char ASCII U2 STAT User 1 PRIORIty 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 User 2 PRIORIty s 2 3 4 5 5 Hor BAR ACtion s ev Dir Dir Valve Bar NETwork ACtion 5 Rev Dir Dir Hor BAR Left Display s 5 Char ASCII CLOSE Hor BAR Right Display s 5 Char ASCII OPEN looptag blocktag loop tag blocktag LOOP 3 s 0110 25 LIL starting CHANnel 008 to 251 null VIEW Operator Display NO YES YES INPUT P H INPUT S INPUT V INPUT X INPUT Y INPUT A INPUT U1 H INPUT U2 H INPUT CL H INPUT EL loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output Global alarm acknowledge null loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag
18. INputAT n dd Adapt d OFF TIME 0 0 lt CYCLE Time elle UNNE ON TIME gt 0 0 ON OFF nON OFF gt ET INputAT RT S START Start Output1 gt 01 BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 91 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 84 Rate Limiter V3 0 RLM_ function blocks limit the rate of change of analog input A Separate up and down rates are entered in configuration in engineering units per minute Output RL will be high 1 if the block is limiting a rising input signal and output FL will be high when the block is limiting a falling input signal The Adaptive Rate inputs will vary the configured adaptive rate between 0 100 as the input varies from 0 to 100 When the input is not configured the adaptive rate will not apply Input E asserted high 1 will enable the limit action of the block When input E is low 0 the output will track the analog input If input E is not configured the limit action of the block will be enabled RATE LIMITER RLM ESN 000 Output 1 Analog Input Enable RATE LIMITER Rising Limit Adaptive Up AU Falling Limit Adaptive Dn uP RATE units minute s Real 100 0 DOWN RATE units minute s Real 100 0 INPUTA loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUTE H
19. Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 21 AWE Analog Write Ethernet V3 0 AWE function blocks are available when the optional Ethernet communication board is installed ANALOG WRITE ETHERNET in the controller It enables the controller to write analog data to other Modbus devices over the ET Ethernet network E Range R Upto 32 AWE_ blocks are available Blocks are Input 8 sD i assigned in sequence controller wide with each TD use Quality Status lt Data can be written as a real floating point number orasa 16 bit integer as configured by the DATA P A D R E IPADdRESs By nnn nnn nnn nnn 192 168 0 0 TYP parameter Floating point number can be RIG P T R RanGe PoinTeR loop tag block tag selected to have one of four byte orders BYTE 8 i se I 8 enn 2 i H 22222 tag block tag outpu null ORD with 1 being the most common see Table 1 MbADdRESs p iim under block description integer is R E G modBus REGister 4 00000 65535 00000 converted from the block input S which 15 T Y Modbus DATA TYPe i FP Uint Sint FP floating point number by the MIN INT amp MAX NHM E ORD BYTE ORD er amp n VISAS 2 5 UD T Y P E UpDate TYPE oncE P2P Ct oncE INT parameters using the range scaling information TRIGger Dead Band 3
20. Warning R G RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag null B 4 4 DIRect 5 When input 1 high 1 the controller will operate the Be nig al aie he normal auto mode when low 0 causes controller Time Derivative 9 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 E Ec rd ivati i P 1 00 to 30 00 output to track the feedback signal to eliminate bumping UE output when switching to auto This is accomplished MR TIL AIG Manual Reset Time LAG 5 0 001 to 4000 0010 forcing the reset component R to a value that will keep m MN a D GE R equal to the feedback value When the controller IMA X CIA L E maximum SCALE 100 0 2 D P P Decimal Point Position preferred 5 0 0 15 switched to auto the value of the reset component will IERI INE B ENGneerng UNITS amp n change back to the manual reset MR value at a rate AUTOTUNE 6 YES determined by the MR TLAG setting When MRTRCK is DEV DEViation during Autotune S AUTO 2 5 to 25 0 AUTO n H Y HYSteresis during Autotune S AUTO 0 5 to 10 0 AUTO set to e manuali rese also trac 9 T E IP output STEP on first Autotune S 5 040 10 t to YES th 1 t MR will also track th l 1 1 AT DYNAMic settings S Fast Medium Slow M feedback signal when input
21. Output O1 March 2003 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 24 BIAS Bias BIAS function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis and provide a means to bias a signal such as the setpoint in BIAS an external set application Inputs A and E external bias ERE are summed and then added to the operator adjustable bias Range R Input InputE BIAS Track Command input TC asserted high 1 will cause the Track Command O B A E block output to track input TV and BIAS to be recalculated Track Variable TV as TV AXE The value of B will be clamped at the Hland LO LIMIT settings It is important to realize that the Output 1 Tracked Output w I an RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag inputs and outputs are in engineering units and the limits BIAS 9 must be adjusted accordingly with the expected minimum IH E maximum required range values default values I NIPIUT A input ac have been set to 150 00 and 150 00 which might be the LNP UT E INPUT E loop tag block tag output LN P UTT INPUT TC loop tag block tag output null normal expected limits when using the default range of 0 0 TIV INPUT TV loop tag block tag output to 100 0 These values can be set lower but have
22. March 2003 3 99 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 97 SUB Subtraction SUB_ function blocks perform arithmetic subtraction on the two input signals Any unused input will be set to 0 0 All inputs should have the same engineering units If units SUBTRACTION SUB Input A aD are not consistent a SCL function block can be used or an MD SUBIR ON gt Output 1 alternative 15 to use a MTH function block that has built in Mali scaling functions INPUT INPUT A H loop tag block tag output null INPUT loop tag block tag output ES Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 Input A o Nod Output 1 Input B BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 98 TANGENT TAN function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher accept radian input and output the tangent of that angle TANGENT MAN ESN 000 Input X X gt Output 1 X ST TAN X 01 Input X Output1 X inpurx loop tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 lt BLOCKDIAGRAM 3 100 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 99 TH Track amp Hold TH function bl
23. INPUT IO Exec Seq No Output 1 Switch position E Switch position I Internal Status External Status NO YES YES loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output null 001 to 250 position set by the POWER UP parameter If PU LAST is set to NO the E I switch will power up in the last position during a hot start but during a warm or cold start will power up in the position set by the POWER UP parameter The IO Internal Override input enables a HI 1 input to temporarily select the Internal Input as the function block output O1 This input does not affect the position of the E I switch Outputs SE and SI indicate the actual position of the E I switch SE is HI 1 when in the E position and LO 0 when in the I position SI is HI when in the I position and LO when in the E position Outputs IS and ES indicate the actual source of the block output IS is HI when O1 is the Internal input and is LO when O1 is the External input ES is HI when O1 is the External input and is LO when Ol is the Internal input Transfer Switch Switch Transfer er Switch Control Network Command 0 9 gt SE Switch position 0 1 gt SI Switch position 1 E External gt 01 1 Internal IS 10
24. Installation UM353 1 External Power Model 353 X03107S3 Source External Devices Rear Terminals 1 5 Vdc E Analog Signal 20 2 AINT 4 Wire Transmitter 1 4 20 mA Output 18 1 5 5 Analog Signal 22 tA gt AIN2 B 4 Wire Transmitter 578 5 4 20 mA Output 21 5 5 1 5 x Analog Signal r 23 7 4 Wire Transmitter 4 20 mA Output 24 1 Common Ground Earth Note Range resistors are 250 Ohms Ground FIGURE 8 10 Analog Inputs AIN1 2 and 3 4 Wire Transmitters Model 353 Model 353 Rear Terminals Rear Terminals z em 45 Bade Isolated N ower 45 SS Power gt 8 EN g 46 Universal 46 Universal s 8 Millivolt Converter 5 4 20 mA Converter Source 47 a _ Es 5 1 Isolated 8 3 75 A 48 M x Isolated Ground 48 S L Note Table 8 1 for AINU2 terminals 0311751 Note Table 8 1 for AINU2 terminals MG000611 A 4 20 mA Input B Millivolt Input FIGURE 8 11 Universal Analog Input AINU1 2 4 20 mA Input Only Select a 2500 for AIN 3 750 for AINU resistor from the installation kit and insulate the bent resistor lead with a piece 0 8 of sleeving At the lead end approximately 1 4 6 mm to 5 16 8 mm of 20 3mm bare resistor lead should be exposed
25. NO YES YES MD HI STatus message S 5 ASCII Char GREEN MD LO STatus message 5 5 ASCII Char RED MD HI ACtion message S 5 ASCII Char RED MD LO ACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char GREEN INPUT NO H loop tag block tag output null INPUT NC loop tag block tag output null INPUT MD H loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No 001 to 250 This block operates with an operator faceplate that includes green red LEDs that are turned on using input MD A HI 1 input will turn on the Green LED and a LO the Red LED The default connection will be the PS output of the block but should be changed as required to display the correct status The message parameters do not apply to the current product PB2 Switch Operator Display Interface BOD LEDS UOD MSG 29990 MD HIST MDHIAC N G y kkkkk kkkkk PB2 u MDLOST MDLOAC lt MD R Input gt 1 gt PS PB Switch NO gt Output Momentary Action Los Sustained Action BOD Basic Operator Display MD Message Display 0312750 Universal Operator Display BLOCK DIAGRAM POWER UP When the switch is configured for momentary action it will always power up in the NC position For sustained action with the POWER UP parameter set to YES the switch wi
26. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 cw pod L 2003 3 47 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 42 DOS Digital Output State DOS function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher transmit up to 16 on off signals received from controller block interconnection to a remote node on the LonWorks network as single 16 bit word value A maximum of 6 DOS blocks can be used up to the limit of nodes allowed on the Lon network or the memory limit of the controller Each use of the block will be assigned a unique station wide ID e g DOSO1 The transmitted value is of type SNVT state and can be bound to a network variable in a remote node that can receive a network variable of this type These blocks will be available when the LonWorks option board is installed in a 352P 353 or 354N controller Each function block input has a mode associated with it The mode can be either NORMAL or FORCED When using a PC capable of sending LIL or Modbus commands the mode can be changed and the forced state can be assigned a high 1 or low 0 value The values accessible over the network are the two switch inputs N and F and the position of the SPDT switch illustrated in the block diagram A mode of 0 is Normal and 17 is Forced The function block also has a quality status associated with it This status will go high 1 when the block determines it has lost output communication with the Lon node bound
27. m 100 00 Pulse oN pu A Global Alarm Acknowledge gt Pulse ofF gt BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 66 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 66 ODD Operator Display for Discrete indication amp control V2 2 ODD function blocks are one of five operator displays that can be used on a one per loop basis to configure the local operator display functions as well as network parameters See the i ware PC faceplate example on the next page The ODD function block displays up to 16 discrete variables Each input has a corresponding block output that is equal to the input when the variable mode is in Auto Each input variable can be assigned a mode The value of the output can be changed while in Man by using the pulser and pressing the ACK button When a variable is switched to Manual it will always equal the input value until changed The LOOP parameter is used to index reads and writes to Modbus and LIL network parameters When using the LIL the LIL CHAN parameter must also be configured See Section 6 for more information on network parameters The VIEW OD parameter when set to YES enables the operator display to be viewed and accessed locally In cases where it is desired to view display or operation parameters only from a network workstation the parameter should be set to NO During a cold or warm start each input variable
28. 0 5 If a crimp on connector is to be used go to step 3 Otherwise go to step 4 12 7mm Place sleeving this lead V 8 14 March 2003 UM353 1 Installation Crimp On Signal Input Wire Connector 3 Crimp On Connector Insert the resistor lead and any signal wiring into the 2 5 connector until the wire ends are visible at the pin end of the connector 8 Use standard electrical connector crimp tool to crimp the connection Range Resistor mmu 9 certain that all resistor leads and signal input wires are inserted in the connector before crimping 4 Loosen the two terminal screws using a straight blade screwdriver with 1 8 3 mm blade width Insert wires resistor leads or a crimp on connector pin into the two openings in the side of the connector adjacent to the selected terminal numbers 5 Check that all involved components and station wiring are fully inserted and carefully tighten the screws to 5 in lbs Do not over tighten 6 Repeat steps 1 5 for each 4 20 mA 1 5 Vdc and millivolt input 7 Carefully dress resistors and wiring so that excessive stress is not placed on a component wire or connection 8 4 3 Analog Output Wiring 4 20 mA 1 5 Vdc Analog output functions blocks are AOUTI AOUT2 and AOUT3 Figure 8 12 shows connections for an external device that accepts 4 20 mA For an external device that needs 1 5 Vdc see Figure 8 13 Refer to
29. 10 INPUT F Input F 01 1 INPUT A Input Loop01 A M AS Analog Output 1 Function Block INPUT I Input I Loop01 E I ES Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR ESN Exec Seq No 25 INPUT Input 01 1 4 6 2003 UM353 1 Factory Configured Options ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR X RG PTR X Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P Process Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT Input Setpoint 01 1 INPUT V Input V Valve Loop01 A M O1 INPUT X Input X X Variable Loop01 AIN2 O1 LOOP Loop 01 DOUTI Digital Output 1 Function Block INPUT Input Loop01 ALARM A1 DOUT2 Digital Output 2 Function Block INPUT S Input S Loop01 ALARM A2 March 2003 4 7 Factory Configured Options UM353 1 4 5 FCO105 Ratio Set Control w Operator Setpoint Limits Factory Configured Option FCO105 provides a ratio set controller in Loop01 The setpoint to the Captive Flow controller can be maintained as a ratio of the Captive Flow to Wild Flow The controller has complete setpoint tracking as well as ratio tracking The local setpoint will track the Captive Flow signal when the loop is no
30. DosR 2 DOSxx Input 2 Normal State I highO low DOSxx R 2 3 DOSxx Input 3 Normal State I highO low DOSxx R 1 3 4 DOSxx Input 4 Normal State I highO low DOSxx R 4 S DOSxx InputSNormalState I highO low DOSxx R 5 6 DOSxx Input 6 Normal State I highO low DOSxx R 6 8 DOSxx Input 8 Normal State I highO low DOSxx 8 9 DOSxx Input 9 Normal State _ I highO low DOSxx R 9 11 DOSxx Input B Normal State I high O low DOSxx 13 DOSxx Input D Normal State 1 highOdow DOSxx R D March 2003 7 41 Data Mapping UM353 1 Discrete Output Remote xx Mode Word of Function Block Inputs DOSxxM Description Mode of Input 0 OSxx Mode of Input 1 OSxx Mode of Input 2 OSxx Mode of Input 3 g g OSxx Mode of Input 4 Mode of Input 5 Mode of Input 6 Mode of Input 7 7 Mode of Input 8 Mode of Input 9 OSxx Mode of Input A OSxx Mode of Input B OSxx Mode of Input C OSxx Mode of Input D OSxx Mode of Input E 8 Mode of Input F g g g Input 5 7 1 Writes are made using parameter data send command CMD 9 to the entire word 7 42 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 3 12 Trend Data Loop Defined by Included in MPU Controller boa
31. LOOPO1 AIN1 01 INPUT TC Input TC LOOPO1 A M NA ESN Exec Seq No 5 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOPO1 AINL OR INPUT P Input P LOOPO1 AIN1 01 INPUT D Input D LOOPO1 SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 LOOPO1 LOOP02 Rev 2 PID PID Controller Function Block RG Range Pointer LOOPO1 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P LOOPOI AINI OI INPUT S Input S LOOPOI SETPT OI INPUT F Input F LOOP01 A M O1 INPUT Input LOOPOL A M AS ESN Exec Seq 15 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOPO1 PID OR INPUT Input LOOPO1 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 March 2003 Factory Configured Options UM353 1 Loop 01 cont ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer LOOPO1 AINL OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer LOOPO1 PID OR INPUT Input Process LOOPO1 AIN1 01 INPUT Input Setpoint LOOP01 SETPT O1 INPUT V Input V Valve LOOPOL A M O1 LOOP Loop 01 Analog Output 1 Function Block Range Pointer LOOPO1 PID OR INPUT Input LOOPOL A M O1 Loop 02 SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOP02 AIN2 OR INPUT Input TV
32. Loop01 RATIO O1 ALARM Alarm Function Block INPUT I Input I Loop01 SETPT O1 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR ESN Exec Seq No 25 INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT D Input D Loop01 SPLIM O1 SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block ESN Exec Seq No 15 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR INPUT A Input A Loop01 E 1 01 ESN Exec Seq No 30 4 8 March 2003 UM353 1 Factory Configured Options PID PID Controller Function Block PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT S Input S Loop01 SPLIM O1 INPUT F Input F 01 1 INPUT A Input A Loop01 A M AS INPUT I Input I 01 5 ESN Exec Seq No 35 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT P Input A Loop01 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 40 Analog Output 1 Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT S Input S Loop01 A M OI ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR X RG PTR X Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR Y RG PTR
33. n 5 March 2003 6 9 Network Communications UM353 1 6 2 5 Discrete Indicator Loop Data Discrete Indicator loop data occupies four LIL channels The starting channel is entered during configuration of the ODD operator display function block for each loop as LIL CHAN n The first channel for each loop can be viewed in station data starting at channel 6 parameter 38 The station configuration entry both local and graphical PC based will indicate the next available open space of six contiguous channels Another starting channel can be entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total number of channels Channel locations n through n 3 in the table below identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each analog indicator loop parameter 1 data e g discrete input states is global and is transmitted every 0 5 second All other data is sent out on command 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 n L DISW 1 10 L I3TAG L I6TAG L I9TAG L DSSW 11 L I4TAG L I7TAG L IATAG L DOSW L I2TAG L I5TAG L ISTAG L IBTAG n 3 L SW L TAG 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 no j j nt DAG j j o LD ETAG pp j O j n 3 L IFTAG 6 10 March 2003 UM353 1 Network Communications 6 2 6 Pushbutton Loop Data Pushbutton loop data occupies two LIL channels The starting channel is entered during configuration of th
34. NN N N N N N gt Sees o0 Q N O O Q ACH DC ACN DC NCA NCB XMTR COM XMTR DOUT1 DOUTC DOUT2 DIN1 DIN1 DIN2 DIN2 DIN3 DIN3 AOUT1 AOUTC AOUT2 AIN1 AINC AIN2 AIN3 AINC IOA IOB TM ROUT 1nc ROUT 1c ROUT 1no ROUT2nc ROUT2c ROUT2no AOUT3 AOUTC DINU1 DINU1 DINU2 DINU2 XMTR COM AIN4 AINC DIN4 DIN4 AINU1a AINU1b AINU1c AINU1d AINU2a AINU2b AINU2c AINU2d Case Safety Ground 27 Relay Output 1 Normally Closed 28 Relay Output 1 Common 29 Realy Output 1 Normally Open 30 Relay Output 2 Normally Closed 31 Relay Output 2 Common 32 Relay Output 2 Normally Open 33 Analog Output 3 34 Analog Output 3 Common 35 Digital Input Universal 1 36 Digital Input Universal 1 37 Digital input Universal 2 38 Digital Input Universal 2 39 Transmitter Power 26Vdc 40 Transmitter Station Common 41 Analog Input 4 42 Analog Input Common 43 Digital Input 4 44 Digital Input 4 45 Analog Input Universal 1 46 Analog Input Universal 1 b 47 Analog Input Universal 1 48 Analog Input Universal 1 d 49 Analog Input Universal 2 50 Analog Input Universal 2 b 51 Analog Input Universal 2 c 52 Analog Input Universal 2 d 1 Terminal letters and numbers are printed on individual connectors Model 353 1 N has 2 connectors Model 353 2 1 has 4 connectors and an I O Expander board Underscore i
35. Code Description Range Register MB C P LIL L PIF R Process 1 Real 41951 20 1 n 2 3 L P2F R Process 2 Real 41953 20 1 n 1 2 3 L P3F R Process 3 Real 41955 20 1 n 2 2 3 L P4F R Process 4 Real 41957 20 1 n 3 2 3 spare 0 00000000 41959 69 20 1 Discrete Indicator ODD amp ODP V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL n a A Write command will force the Step or Remaining Time to the write value The current recipe can be changed if the Sequencer is in the HOLD mode March 2003 7 11 Data Mapping UM353 1 7 3 5 Variable Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit IEEE Controller ODC Code L TSPF L HLF L LLF LZRTF LZRRF LZAILF LZA2LF LZA3LF L A4LF LZTIF LHT2F 1 2 L BHLF L BLLF L BPLF L BGF Sequencer Timers Running Values ODS Code L DYTOIET L DYTOIRT LZOSTOIET LZOSTOIRT LZRCTOIET LZRCTOIRT LZROTOIET LZROTOIRT LZDYTO2ET LZDYTO2RT LZOSTO2ET LZOSTO2RT LZRCTO2ET LZRCTO2RT LZROTO2ET LZROTO2RT LHDYTO3ET LHDYTO3RT LHOSTO3ET LHOSTO3RT LHRCTO3ET LHRCTO3RT LHROTO3ET LHROTO3RT R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R R W R R W R R W R R W R R W R R W R R W R R W R R W R R W R R W R R W Description Target Setpoint Setpoint High Limit Setpoint Low Limit Setpoint Ramp Time min Setpoint Ramp Rate units min Alarm 1 Limit A
36. t I r SIN INPUTSN loop tag block tag output null 4 Messages will now function as follows with the local IRIN INPUT RN Block tag output faceplate display INPUT CL loop tag block tag output null INPUT EL loop tag block tag output null When the local display first enters a loop the convention 5 6 xx 2 MR 21 loop tag and sequence step number will be displayed PM xx 55 Primary Message xx Starting Step s 0 255 dary MeSsGe 5 12 char When the D button is pressed Numeric display will 5 5 9 E ud Macs show MSG and the alphanumeric display will show the C M S G x x Condition MeSsGe xx 8 16 char ASCII INP UT nln l INPUT nn 9 es loop tag block tag output null first message it comes to in the order shown below e Conditional messages will be displayed in the order in which they occurred The latest message will be displayed first e Anew message will override the current message The ACK button can be used to scroll through active messages It will stay on the last message until a new message overrides it or the ACK button is again pressed When an active message clears the message display will loop back and start at the top and display the first message it comes to Events
37. Program Sequencer QHD0O 99 Quickset Hold RATIO Ratio RCT01 99 Repeat Cycle Timer RLMO 99 Rate Limiter V3 0 99 Retentive Timer 0 99 RS Flip Flop RTG01 99 Rising Edge Trigger 99 Real Time clock 2 0 SCL01 99 Scaler SEL01 99 Signal Selector SETPT Setpoint SIN01 99 Sine V1 3 SPLIM Setpoint Limit SRF01 99 SR Flip Flop SRT01 99 Square Root SUB01 99 Subtraction 99 Tangent V1 3 99 Track amp Hold 01 99 TOTalizer V2 3 TSW01 99 Transfer Switch XOR0I 99 Exclusive OR Logic These function blocks are available in the quantities indicated within each loop when the optional LIL Network board is installed The total number of global function blocks will be limited by the number of global channels available A controller has 256 channels Each global data block occupies one global channel In addition each configured Control LOOP occupies 5 channels each configured Sequencer LOOP 6 channels and the Station itself the first 7 channels See Section 6 for more information on network communications AILO0I 99 Analog Input LIL 0 99 Analog Output_LIL DIL01 99 Discrete Input_LIL DOL01 99 Disc
38. first channel for each loop can be viewed in station data starting at channel 5 parameter 38 The station configuration entry both local and graphical PC based will indicate the next available open space of six contiguous channels Another starting channel can be entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total number of channels Channel locations n through n 5 in the table below identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each analog indicator loop All parameter data e g P process is global and is transmitted every 0 5 second All other data is sent out on command C P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 n ui LPTF LAPIT PIU E nei L P L P2F n2 L PE nra swi tno j T S 5 L SW2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 n L P3ALF L P3BLE net L PTALI LAPTBLI 2 1 L P2BLI CAPSALI L PSBLI L P4ALI L PdBLI O n 2 LAPTATI L P1BTI LAPZATI L 2BTI L PATI L P3BT L PAATI L P4BTI 20 n 3 L P1API L P1BPI L P2API L P2BPI L P3API L P3BPI L P4API L P4BPI 1 030 EN n 5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 n por pp O O S o L Q1N L Q1F L Q1MNF LHQIMF L Q2N L Q2F L Q2MNF L Q2MXF L Q3N L Q3F L Q3MNF L Q3MXF L Q4N L Q4F L Q4MNF 1 4
39. For the purpose of this publication and product labels a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation construction and operation of the equipment and the involved hazardous In addition he or she has the following qualifications e 5 trained and authorized to energize de energize clear ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices e 5 trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as rubber gloves hard hat safety glasses or face shields flash clothing etc in accordance with established safety practices e strained in rendering first aid Scope This publication does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation operation or maintenance Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser s purposes the matter should be referred to one of the support groups listed in the Product Support section of this manual The contents of this manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement commitment or relationship The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens Any statements continued herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty
40. INPUT 5 INPUT 5 loop tag block tag output null address to be configured When connecting to INPUT 6 INPUT 60 7 lop tag block tag output other Siemens MOORE controllers the Modbus INPUT T input 7 loop tag block tag output dd LI her Modb INPUT 8 INPUT 8 loop tag block tag output nul a Tess Is set to 1 n some cases other 08005 INPUT 9 INPUT 9 H loop tag block tag output null devices may use a different address or when I gt INPUT A loop tag block tag output INPUT B loop tag block tag output null going through a Modbus TCP IP gateway a INPUT input C loop tag block tag output null Modbus network may have multiple devices each IN I D INPUT loop tag block tag output I N INPUT E loop tag block tag output nul having unique address INPUT F INPUT F loop tag block tag output null INPUT T INPUT Beat loop tag block tag output null 2 2 H ADRES IP ADGRESs nnn nnn nnn nn n 192 168 0 0 The START CL parameter identifies the location ADRES mpavaress of the first Coil The parameter START L START ing CoiL 0000 65535 0 OF CL NO OFC obs h 1 16 m identifies the total number of coils up to 16 to UD Update TYPE dim write There are three write update options that can be configured by th
41. Loop01 AIN1 01 ALARM Alarm Function Block INPUT S Input S Setpoint Loop01 SPLIM O1 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT V Input V Valve 01 1 INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 O1 LOOP Loop 01 INPUT D Input D Loop01 SPLIM O1 ESN Exec Seq No 15 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer _ Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S Loop01 SPLIM O1 INPUT F Input F Loop01 A M 01 INPUT A Input A Loop01 A M AS ESN Exec Seq No 20 4 10 March 2003 UM353 1 Factory Configured Options 4 7 FCO107 Dual Loop Controller Factory Configured Option FCO107 provides two independent loops with tracking setpoints The block diagram of the configuration of the two loops is shown below along with the changes made to the default parameter values of the configured blocks This configuration provides setpoint tracking If a fixed setpoint is desired the TC input to the SETPT function block can be set to UNCONFIG The process range of the first loop can be changed in Analog Input 1 and the range of the Second loop in Analog Input 2 Process aint Process AIN2 Loop 01 SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG Range Pointer LOOPOI AINI OR INPUT TV Input TV
42. SSSQDoSQDSQDSSSSQODOoQ N SPY E HAH 20 17 Ethernet Ne Connector Terminal Number Function and ID Z 35 Digital Input Universal 1 DINU1 36 Digital Input Universal 1 DINU1 37 Digital Input Universal 2 DINU2 38 Digital Input Universal 2 DINU2 39 Transmitter Power 26 Vdc XMTR 40 Transmitter Station Common COM 41 Analog Input 4 AIN4 Terminal Function ID and Number 2 Analog Input 1 2 Common 21 Analog Input 2 AIN2 22 Analog Input 3 AIN3 23 Analog Input 3 Common AINC 24 I O Bus A IOA 25 Bus IOB 26 Relay Output 1 Normally Closed ROUT inc 27 Relay Output 1 Common ROUT 1c 28 Relay Output 1 Normally Open ROUT1no 29 Relay Output 2 Normally Closed ROUT2nc 30 Relay Output 2 Common ROUT2c 31 Relay Output 2 Normally Open ROUT2no 32 42 Analog Input Common AINC Analog Output 3 AOUT3 33 Analog Output 3 Common AOUTC 34 AG00326b Notes 43 Digital Input 4 DIN4 44 Digital Input 4 DIN4 45 Analog Input Universal 1 AINU1a 46 Analog Input Universal 1 b AINU1b 47 Analog Input Universal 1 AINU1c 48 Analog Input Universal 1 d AINU1d
43. ese Re eet ts 800 Ohms Over voltage Protection 30 Vdc Digital Inputs 3 Logic 1 Range 15 30 Vdc Logic 0 Range a sss 0 1 Vdc Over voltage sse 30 Vdc Minimum Required ON time gt Scan Time Software Output Type Digital ISolatiOfi u u y E 100 Vdc Digital Outputs 2 Type dean dte ee Open Collector Transistor emitter tied to station common Load 2 30Vdc maximum Load Current man cette o ete 100 mA maximum Off State Leakage Current 200 uA 30 Vdc Transmitter Pow t iere e ees 25 Vdc 120 mA short circuit protected 14 7 EXPANDER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS Analog Inputs Universal 2 Type J Thermocouple Range Limits 185 to 1100 300 F to 2010 Performance Range 0 to 1100 C AGCULACY ss iii A eee 0 5 C Conformity sese lt 0 06 Software Output Analog configurable C F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 08 C C Thermocouple Range Limits s a as 185 C to 1370 C 300 F to 2500 F Performance Range 0 to 1370 C March 2003 14 7 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1 ACOUTACY eiit heeded 0
44. 185 C to 610 C 300 F to 1130 F 1000 0 C amp alpha 0 003916 2850 502 94 ai ver Narrow Millivolt 19 0 mv 19 0 mv 0 mv amp 15 mv Wide Millivolt 30 0 mv to 77 mv 0 mv amp 75 mv Not available in Model 352Plus TABLE 3 6 SEN MIN MAX amp MIN MAX SCALE Parameters SEN TYPE SEN MIN SEN MAX MIN SCALE MAX SCALE min operating max operating min operating max operating value value value value 12 0 ohms 5000 ohms 0 0 PRCT 100 0 PRCT 14 19 mv 19 mv 0 0 PRCT 100 0 PRCT 15 15 mv 75 mv 0 0 PRCT 100 0 PRCT 0 100 0 0 100 0 3 20 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 11 AIP Analog Input lev Percent AIP function blocks convert an analog signal with a lev percent type SNVT Standard Network Variable Type received from the LonWorks network into a block output scaled in engineering units for interconnection to other function blocks within the controller A maximum of 25 AIP _ blocks can be used up to the limit of nodes allowed on the Lon network or the memory limit of the controller Each use of the block will be assigned a unique station wide ID e g These blocks are available when the LonWorks option board is installed in a 352P 353 or 354N controller The input connection is established by binding a network variable from the remote analog node to the network variable of the AIP _ function block A 6 charac
45. LIL starting CHANnel 008 to 254 V I EW OD VIEW Operator Display 5 INP UT 111 INPUT 11 H loop tag block tag output 1 2 INPUT 12 loop tag block tag output 1 A INPUT 1A loop tag block tag output I NIPUT 1M INPUT 1M loop tag block tag output 1 1 INPUT 14F loop tag block tag output 84 INPUT810 loop tag block output INP UT 82 INPUT 82 loop tag block tag output 8 A INPUT 8A loop tag block tag output I NIPUT 8 INPUT 8M loop tag block tag output 8 F INPUT loop tag block tag output Group1 START 1 sec STOP 1 sec AUTO MAN ON OFF Group8 START 1 sec STOP 1 sec AUTO MAN ON OFF null null YES null null null null null null null null null null Rev 2 During a hot start the A M switch Each group can be displayed on the local faceplate using the D button When first stepping into a loop using the Loop button the loop tag will be displayed e g PBDisp1 Pressing the D button will scroll through the groups displaying the group tag e g MS1036 in the alphanumeric and the value of the feedback in the digital display e g 1 The feedback message associated with this feedback value can be viewed on the local faceplate using the UNITS button The A M button will disp
46. Loop01 SETPT O1 ODC Operator Display for Controllers ESN Exec Seq No 10 P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR PID PID Controller Function Block INPUT P Input P Process Loop01 AIN1 01 RG PTR Range Pointer 01 INPUT S Input Setpoint 01 5 1 INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT V Input V Valve Loop01 A M OI INPUT S Input 01 5 1 LOOP Loop 01 INPUT F Input F Loop01 A M O1 INPUT Input Loop01 A M AS ESN Exec Seq No 15 4 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Factory Configured Options 4 2 FCO102 Single Loop Controller wl Fixed Setpoint Factory Configured Option FCO102 provides a single loop controller configured in Loop01 A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks If the loop tag Loop01 is changed all configured references within the station will automatically be changed to the new tag LOOPO1 Setpoint Function Block A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR ESN Exec Seq No 3 INPUT Input Loop01 P
47. Performance Range ACCULACY eerie erint ette Conformity esee Software Output Ambient Temperature Effect Type Thermocouple Range Limits Performance Range Conformity Software Output Ambient Temperature Effect N Thermocouple Range Limits Performance Range Ne Dog EE e i Conformity ciiisean ii Software Output Ambient Temperature Effect Type DIN 43760 IEC 751 RTD 0 0038 Range ACCULACY iecit an EN Software Output Ambient Temperature Effect 18 C to 1610 C 0 to 2930 F 200 to 1610 C 0 7 C lt 0 06 Analog configurable C F R K 0 15 C C 18 C to 1815 0 to 3300 F 800 to 1815 C 0 7 C lt 0 06 Analog configurable C F R K 0 15 C C 200 C to 1300 C 325 F to 2370 F 0 to 1300 C 0 5 C lt 0 06 Analog configurable C F R K 0 10 C C 50 185 C to 622 C 300 F to 1152 F 0 4 C Analog configurable C F R K 0 04 C C 14 8 Ma
48. 4 Alarm Not Ackd NI l NotAcknowledged ALARM RW 5 AlarmB is Enabled l Enabled ALARM RW 6 P4AlarmAisActive Al l Acive RT 7 P4 Alarm A is Not NI 1 Not Acknowledged _ RW 8 P4 Alarm A is Enabled E l Enabled ALARM RW L9 IP4AlammBisActive A Ae ALARM IR I 10 Alarm Bis Not AcKd N1 l NotAcknowledged ALARM RW 11 P4AlarmB is Enabled 1 l Enabed ALARM RW 12 Alarmsare Out of Service OS l OutofServie RW 13 Configuration has Changed CC l LoopConfigured 14 Unacknowledged Loop Event NA l Unacknowledged Event RW 15 Active LoopEvent AE 1 Active Loop Event March 2003 7 25 Data Mapping UM353 1 Digital Indicator ODD V2 2 Code R W Description Range Coil MB LIL L DOI R Discrete 0 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00296 48 1 n 1 0 LZDII R Discrete 1 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00297 48 1 n 1 1 L D2I R Discrete 2 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00298 48 1 n 1 2 R Discrete 3 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00299 48 1 n 1 3 L D4I R Discrete 4 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00300 48 1 n 1 4 L DSI R Discrete 5 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00301 48 1 n 1 5 L D6I R Discrete 6 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00302 48 1 n 1 6 L D7I R Discrete 7 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00303 48
49. 6 ASCII Char 1 TAG 6 ASCII Char 12 TAG 6 ASCII Char 13 TAG 6 ASCII Char 4 TAG 6 ASCII Char 5 TAG 6 ASCII Char 6 TAG 6 ASCII Char 7 TAG 6 ASCII Char 8 TAG 6 ASCII Char 9 TAG 6 ASCII Char A TAG 6 ASCII Char iB TAG 6 ASCII Char TAG 6 ASCII Char D TAG 6 ASCII Char E TAG 6 ASCII Char 41011025 00810252 loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output Rev 2 March 2003 3 67 Function Blocks UM353 1 DigDisp1 U DigDisp1 4 3 10 A SV 103 O0 T MS gt Manual 1 EN e 5 On On IF A SV 206 2 OF n BETES 1 4 Block Diagram n n i ware PC Faceplate Display 3 68 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 67 ODP Operator Display for PushButtons V2 2 ODP function blocks are one of five operator displays that can be used on a one per loop basis to configure local operator display functions as well as network parameters See the ijware PC faceplate example on the next page The ODP function block can provide up to 8 groups of two pushbuttons and one selector switch Each group includes e One normall
50. A D RIE IP ADdRESs n 192 168 0 0 15 passed to the block output O1 directly orit AIDIRIE 8 ADdRESs ti min 12255 can be obtained as a 16 bit integer A Floating Point MB ModBus REGister 00 65535 00000 number can be formatted in one of four methods as Modbus REGister TYPE InPut Holding InPut gt Modbus DATA FP Uint Sint FP shown table 1 the next page An integer is ORD BYTE ORDer 9 1 2 3 4 1 converted to floating point as scaled by the MIN UD RATE Update RATE e P2P Ct P2P INT amp MAX INT and the MINSCALE amp M I N MINimum INTeger 5 see table 2 IN T MAXimum INTeger 5 see table 2 MAXSCALE parameters Both Unsigned Integer RANGE 5 e Man Auto M Uint amp Signed Integer Sint options are available MII IN S CA L E SCALE Real 0 0 See table 2 on the next page M MAXimum SCALE 5 Real 100 0 D P P Decimal Pt Position preferred S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a S ENGineering UNITS 6 ASCII Char PRCT When A DATA TYP is selected range limits see table 2 are automatically entered This ensures that the user entered integer values fall within the cor
51. Loop data is available as integer or floating point When integer is used more data is obtained with a single command thus improving the communication throughput When integer data is used ranges can be scaled using 3 Linear function MX B scaling The MODBUS DAT file must be modified Under the section Address Chunk Range set UseDefault 0 under section Address Size set itChunkSize 48 and WordChunkSize 60 7 1 3 ProcessSuite RealTime LIL I O Server An optional LIL RealTime I O Server is available to communicate with the Model 320 ICI Independent Computer Interface The 320 communicates over the Local Instrument Link LIL with other stations that have the LIL option boards installed Refer to the literature provided with the LIL RealTime I O Server for proper operation Optimize LIL performance by using Global Data especially for data that is updated on each scan such as the process setpoint valve loop status and alarm I Use individual parameter requests only to obtain data not required frequently e g tuning parameters range scaling Modbus Server A Modbus I O Server comes with Process Suite and it can be used to communicate with the controller Refer to the Modbus I O Server instructions for operating details Certain parameter settings are critical In the Topic Definition use the 584 984 slave type Set the maximum coil reads to 48 and maximum register reads to 60 Maximum coil writes can be set to th
52. Process Engineering P INput units scaling tps 5 1 gt OE y m A ea v gt gt A gt PG gt gt gt dad 3 pp scaling Jj Engineering v O1 s gt gt INput units 1 Output 1 scaling Lag Setpoint R Feedback Y Auto lt A Absolute Value Initialize Absolute Error d BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 83 Function Blocks UM353 1 The controller output has MINSCALE and MAXSCALE parameters allowing the output signal to be scaled for engineering ranges other than the default of 0 100 PRCT This may be necessary when the controller output is the setpoint to another controller The Autotune feature is accessible using the TUNE pushbutton when AUTOTUNE is set to YES and can be initiated while the loop is in Auto or Manual The autotuner when initiated replaces the PID with an on off control function places the A M block in Auto if in Man and cycles the control loop through six on off cycles while learning the process dynamics which it uses to provide tuning recommendations for the PID controller The DEV parameter is the maximum amount in that the process should deviate from the setpoint during the on off cycles This parameter can be set manually or can be configured as AUTO When
53. USER S MANUAL Siemens Energy amp Automation UM353 1 Rev 11 March 2003 Supersedes Rev 10 SIEMENS 242345 TC2053 P TE JS Is ses aK 0 100 cose wawa 353 PROCESS AUTOMATION CONTROLLER UM353 1 Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION AND TITLE PAGE pad EA H el M ix L0 INTRODUCTION eene eet eere von une eere xe ng uve eee ENSE Ree PEN do Dune Dex ERE EE 1 1 HI PRODUCTDESCRIPTION 3 35 itt a e ea a edu e a ot a Ree 1 2 L2PUNCTION BLOCKS vii uq u E E ove o RII 1 4 1 2 1 LOOP Function Block Types 2 s teen ede eerte here Pc Eee Od 1 4 1 2 2 Power Up Initialization 2 eec teen RE ee C He PR EUER ede sees 1 6 1 23 Configuration EP reU ener 1 6 13 PRODUCT SUPPORT encontre t p ee ne Rok i ee ete as Cede Re atten ERR pee etes 1 6 1 4 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY AND a na enne nennen nennen ener E nennen 1 7 1 4 1 Factory Shipment eee ettet eee ee eie iin ree eee Dee dd 1 7 1 4 2 Receipt of Shipment aee tte eti e e ede RR eR Te e 1 7 I EIC EE 1 7 1 44 Typical Shipment Contents cR ee eh srt dined 1 8 2 0 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW sscccsciessssccstsscssssevsssteessessechosonsssussessccvussoss sass osbai ease oes conscbapuss
54. X INPUT x loop tag block tag output null E S N Exec Seq No 000 to 250 000 2003 3 97 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 94 SPLIM Setpoint Limit SPLIM function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis to limit the setpoint of the loop controller Input A SETPOINT LIMIT will pass through the function block to output O1 unless it equals or exceeds the High limit setting or exceeds the SS Low limit setting at which time the block will output the 29 limit value Range R SETPOINT LIMIT E input High Status If the HI LIMIT is set lower than the LO LIMIT the block Low Status will always output the high limit value Output status HS 1 5 will be high 1 if the block 15 In a RG P T R RanGe PoinTeR H loop tag block tag null limit condition The status event S HI LIM or S LO F N High LIMIT 6 pn LOW LIMIT 8 eal 0 LIM will be displayed in the alphanumeric if the SL INPUT INPUT A H loop tag block tag output null PRIOR is greater than 0 A priority of 0 disables the ISL _ Setpt Limit PRIORity 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 E SIN Exec Seq No P 001 to 250 reporting of the limit function and sets the bits in the status word to 0 See below for additional details regarding priorities
55. X INPUT x loop tag block tag output null E S N Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 3 ADD Addition ADD_ function blocks perform arithmetic addition on three input signals Any unused input will be set to 0 0 ADDITION and will have no affect on the output ADD ESN 000 All inputs should have the same engineering units If Input A A units are not consistent an SCL Scaler function block BD ADDITION output 4 can be used or an alternative is to use a MATH function AD 1 npu J block that has built in scaling functions m SEG AE EMNE NG 1 INPUT INPUT A loop tag block tag output null INPUT loop tag block tag output null INPUT C loop tag block tag output A 7 Exec Seq H 001 to 250 v B EY gt ot BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 10 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 4 AG3 AGA 3 Orifice Metering of Natural Gas AG3 function blocks which can be used on a one per loop basis are available in firmware 1 30 and higher This block AGA 3 uses the AGA 3 American Gas Association Report 3 calculation to accurately measure the flow of natural gas using an orifice meter with flanged taps The basic equations Input hw hwi calculated by this block in accordance with AGA Report No 3 Input Pr M saei Orifice Meterin
56. iiec eee eei eee iie ee Te e Teen de 7 5 7 2 4 Station Status Word SSW 7 5 PLOP DATA E E hD am d ete te tede 7 6 7 3 1 Dynamic Loop Integer a iced teen RR Tee RR ones RE 7 7 7 3 2 Variable Loop Integer Data AE 7 8 7 3 3 Integer bee ut eee e 7 10 7 3 4 Dynamic Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit IEEE n enne 7 11 7 3 5 Variable Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit 2 7 12 7 3 6 Static Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit IEE E n eene 7 14 7 3 7 String Loop Data 8 bit ASCII Char 2 nennen nennen 7 16 EXS Coil Loop Data 7 19 7 39 PCOM Block olei dele a qasa Qa ias 7 31 7 3 10 Sequencer Loop I O Coil Data 1 bit n nn 7 33 7 3 11 LonWorks Remote I O Models 352P 353 354 7 35 7 3 12 Trend Data Loop Defined by 7 43 7 3 13 Configuration Data Sequencer Loop enne 7 46 7 3 14 LIL Alarm Type Word ATW n dete 7 48 er T T 8 1
57. limit setting and it will trip the alarm status high 1 rA when D P is equal to or greater than the limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 when D P is P MINSCALE _ less than the limit setting minus the deadband oR e gt 3v Lam Sau DEV compares the absolute difference between the gt A process input and the deviation input P D with the MAXSCALE gt limit setting and it will trip the alarm status high 1 when P D is equal to or greater than the limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 when P D is less than t s DIACR 22 eee the limit setting minus the deadband OR compares the process input with the range limits referenced by the range pointer parameter and will trip the alarm status high 1 when the process is equal to or greater than the high limit or equal to or less than the low limit The alarm status will clear 0 when the process is less than the high limit minus the deadband or greater than the low limit plus the deadband POWER UP During a warm start all alarms will be handled the same as during a hot start outputs are initialized at the last state all previously acknowledged alarms are treated as acknowledged and any new alarms will be processed on the first scan cycle On a cold start all alarm outputs are initialized at 0 all alarms are reset and any new alarms based on the block inputs will be processed during the first scan cycle Als
58. 1 For 4 20 mA input module order 72005 6 calibrated to 0 2 to Replaces part 27005 3 14 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Model Designation and Specifications SERVICE PART DESCRIPTION PART NO Expander Board Kit for Model 353 1 Contains I O 16353 52 Expander Board and Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit Does not include terminals 27 52 see following notes Notes 1 Case Option 4 Case supplied with all needed connectors 2 Case Option 2 Order Connector Kit PN 16353 133 see below if adding board to case having black side entry connectors Kit contains terminals 27 52 3 Case Option Connector Upgrade Kit PN 16353 230 see below must be installed before the I O Expander Board Kit can be installed Local Instrument Link Network Board Kit with mounting hardware for 16297 22 Model 353 L Ethernet Network Board Kit with mounting hardware for 16353 164 Model 353 E Requires case with new design terminals and MPU board made after 10 01 with battery mounted flat and version 2 40 firmware or greater LonWorks Board Kit with mounting hardware for 16353 69 Model 353 L LonWorks Resistor Kit includes 16353 141 2000 Ohm 5 1 4W qty 8 105 Ohm 1 1 8W qty 2 52 Ohm 1 1 8W qty 4 Diode 1N4005G 1A 600V qty 8 Removable Configuration Board Kit with mounting hardware for 16353 143 Model 353 R for firmware V1 31 or V1 32 Real Time Clock Configuration Backup Board Kit for firmware V2 2
59. 5 1 4 L E2 R W 1 Alarm 2 is Enabled 1 0 00317 48 1 n 5 1 5 L A3 R 1 Alarm 3 is Active 1 0 00318 48 1 n 5 1 6 L N3 R W 1 Alarm 3 is Not Acknowledged 1 0 00319 48 1 n 5 1 7 L E3 R W 1 Alarm 3 is Enabled 1 0 00320 48 1 n 5 1 8 LHA4 R 1 Alarm 4 is Active 1 0 00321 48 1 n 5 1 9 LHN4 R W 1 Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged 1 0 00322 48 1 n 5 1 10 L E4 R W 1 Alarm 4 is Enabled 1 0 00323 48 1 n 5 1 11 L OS2 R W 1 Alarms Out of Service 1 0 00324 48 1 5 1 12 L CC R 1 Configuration has Changed 1 0 00325 48 1 n 5 1 13 L NA R W 1 Unacknowledged Loop Event 1 0 00326 48 1 n 5 1 14 L AE R 1 Active Loop Event 1 0 00327 48 1 n 5 1 15 spare 0 00328 48 1 These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD A write of a 1 will have the same effect as pressing and releasing the button on the faceplate Ifthe action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle 7 22 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Sequencer Loop Status Word L SLS channel n 4 parameter 1 0 Hold Sequencer HS PRSEQ R 2 Reset Sequencer RSQ 1 Reset JPRSEQ W 3 Track Command TC I Trak PRSEQ IR 6 StepForward SSF 1 1 11 1 PRSEQ W 7 SSB 1 C U U r GE 9 Configuration Hold CH 1 Conf
60. block AOUTI Valve output and the Valve input of the ODC block are scaled based on the output of the PID block FCO104 External Set PID controller The external setpoint is displayed as variable X in the ODC block Therefore the ODC RX input uses the range output of the external setpoint AIN2 OR for scaling The 0 100 bargraph will represent the range of AIN1 when displaying the process variable and the range of AIN2 when displaying the X variable FCO105 Ratio Set Control AIN2 are scaled 0 100 of flow The ratio of these flows is displayed on variable Y and the scaler function block is used to define the engineering units as a dimensionless ratio CF WF scaled from 0 50 1 50 Connections between blocks are allowed only with similar data types To help you quickly locate a function block In this section function blocks are listed alphabetically by the block ID e g AIN for Analog Input In Section 2 function blocks are listed by broad function e g station hardware I O 3 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS Station function blocks include factory configured options FCOs security and station parameters Each is described in the following subsections 3 1 1 FCO LIB Factory Configuration Library The FCO LIB function block provides a selection of pre configured applications An FCO can be selected from FCO LIBRARY
61. e The use of unauthorized parts in the repair of the equipment or tampering by unqualified personnel will result in dangerous conditions that can cause death serious injury or equipment damage Follow all safety instructions contained herein A WARNING Electrical shock hazard 9 Explosion hazard Z Can cause death or injury L e Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on equipment e In potentially hazardous atmosphere remove power from equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other circuit e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation in hazardous area 11 1 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT The following tools and equipment are necessary for servicing A Common hand tools for servicing electronic equipment B Digital Multimeter DMM Voltmeter Section Accuracy 0 01 of reading Resolution 1 0 millivolt input Impedance 10 Megohms Ammeter section Accuracy 0 196 of reading Resolution 100 microamperes C Maintenance Kit P N 15545 110 containing wrist strap and conductive mat This kit or an equivalent is required when a circuit board assembly is handled for any reason March 2003 11 1 UM353 1 11 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE The objective for establishing a preventive maintenance program is to provide maximum operating efficiency Every preventive maintenance operation should assist in realizing this objective Unle
62. esie 8 22 8 24 Modbus Communications Personal Computer to Moore 353 or Moore 354 8 23 8 25 Moore 353 to Model 363 VIEWPAC Analog Input Wiring n 8 24 8 26 Controller Power WINE u uu EET NE DU EIE eee 8 24 8 21 Suggested Power x d e E cena Sea 8 25 8 28 Daisy Chained Power Wiring uy asun na s aet hila DI eh weenie 8 25 11 1 Moore 353 Exploded a Ua E n LQ N e uH A u aa ia 11 5 11 2 MPU Controller Board with RTC Jumper W amp nn 11 6 11 3 MPU Controller Board with RTC Jumper W7 nn 11 7 TIA WOE pander Boat eee 11 15 11 5 Accessory Board Installation and 2 14 12 1 442040060000 eene enne 11 16 1156 LIL Network Board a zu s a pa PU e a q eren Ee ARR 11 18 LET na n wS ONERE lis oo ER PIRE ARS 11 18 11 8 LonWorks t qd Aenean ttt 11 19 11 9 Real Time Clock Configuration Backup nnne 11 19 13 1 Moore 353 Block Diagram osse eie i ee n E diei fe eie Rr ce eee a 13 1 vi March 2003 UM3 53 1 Contents LIST OF TABLES TABLE AND TITLE PAGE lid Contact
63. loop tag block tag output block is executed at the start of each controller scan cycle It will be low 0 when the input is low and high 1 when the input is high Output SF is a scaled frequency using the FREQ MIN MAX parameters that can represent flow rate speed or other transmitter variable that has a frequency signal When the FREQ MAX parameter 15 set to 25 or less a 20 msec contact debounce is used When contact debounce is used a pulse input must remain on for 20 msec to be recognized as a valid pulse Output SF is linear with frequency and can be characterized using the CHR function block if necessary An engineering range and units are assigned to this signal using the MINSCALE MAXSCALE DPP and ENGUNITS parameters They are available to other blocks using the OR output connection Input R resets output CT to 0 0 Input D controls the direction of the count When direction input D is low 0 the count will move backwards including negative values The direction input feature enables the use of count down counters and it allows duplication of functions performed by previous computer pulse interfaces having a Pulse Direction format Input TC asserted high 1 will force the scaled count to track an external signal This can be used in applications where the CT output is being used to set a value e g setpoint that can be changed from another source Reset Direction Track Variabl
64. pulser is turned IMIAIXISICIAILIE maximum SCALE n Real 100 00 MAX value must always be set greater than the MIN value D P P Decima Point Position preferred 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 The block can also be forced to track input TV by assertin E NGUN ITS ENgineering UNITS 5 6 ASCII Char PRCT x y QS CHANGE Quick Set CHANGE Continuous Store input high 1 PU VALUE Power Up VALUE 5 0 00 PU LAST 5 YES INPUT T V INPUTTV loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUTTC tag block tag output Pulser ES Exec Seq No H 00110250 TV gt 5 gt 01 Firmware 1 30 added parameter QSCHANGE It enables Track Command the block output to either update continuously in the MINmum SCALE Quickset mode as the pulser knob is turned or to only Pe update the output with the value in the numeric display when the STORE button is pressed BLOCK DIAGRAM When configuring the DPP Decimal Point Position it is important to keep the resolution to the minimum necessary for operation changes It will take the operator longer turning the pulser if the resolution is too high For example if only 0 1 changes are needed configure a 0 100 range as 0 0 100 0 and not 0 000 100 000 During Hot or Warm start the
65. 01 100 02 obtained from the source function block in the M IIN minimum INTeger seetable controller with the range pointer input R Both MAX I N T Maximum INTeger 8 See table Unsigned Integer Uint amp Signed Integer Sint options are available See the table listing parameters and default values below The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP address of the destination Modbus device The MB ADRES parameter allows a Modbus address to be configured When connecting to other Siemens MOORE controllers the Modbus address is set to 1 In some cases other devices may use a different address or when going through a Modbus gateway a Modbus Selection Parameter Default Value Uint MIN INT 0 Uint MAX INT 65535 Sint MIN INT 32768 Sint MAX INT 32767 network may have multiple devices each having a unique address There are three write update options that can be configured by the UD TYPE parameter 1 oncE will write once to the MB REG Modbus Register The controller will write when the input value changes by more than the value set with the TRIG DB parameter This parameter is set based on a percentage of the range determined by the range pointer input R 2 P2P will update at the controller peer to peer rate set in the ETHERNET block 3 Ct will update at the cycl
66. Analog Output Step Number Step Time RemainingTime Step Step 006 AEP 300 00 Step 007 AEP 325 00 Step 008 AEP 325 00 Step 009 AEP 340 00 Analog Output TIMe 2 45 Group 1 TIMe 5 25 Analog Output AO TIMe 0 0 TIMe 25 0 Group 1 Input Output Mask Mask Input Output Mask Mask 2E5B 003E 327A 003E 00 1 00 1 01 0 01 1 02 1 02 1 00 1 00 1 01 0 01 1 02 1 02 1 DIAGRAM Pulse Discrete Outputs 3 88 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 81 Quickset Hold QHD function blocks enable a real value to be changed on line using the QUICKSET feature The block is identified by an 8 character name that will be displayed in the QUICKSET mode The block is configured with range entered as MIN SCALE and MAX SCALE to set usable range and Decimal Point Position parameter can set the allowed precision The hold value can not be QUICKSET HOLD QHD Track Variable TV Track Command fe ESN 000 Output Range QUICKSET HOLD gt Output 1 changed beyond the 10 to 110 value of these limits QS auickSet NAME 8 ASCII Char null 1 MINS CAL minimum SCALE Real 0 00 and will change continuously as
67. FIGURE 1 2 Ethernet Architecture Example Often in this publication reference is made to the labels on the controller to ensure that the controller being installed has the correct power input I O communication options and approvals This is particularly important when non incendive requirements are present or a critical process is involved where a custom configuration or calibration has been created Label locations are shown in Figure 1 1 and typical labels are shown in Section 14 Model Designation and Specifications 1 2 FUNCTION BLOCKS Controller software is built on proven function block designs from previous LIL products and from Siemens APACS products that support the IEC1131 standard In many cases the controller has been enhanced with features only now possible with state of the art technology Function blocks are selected for use within a LOOP Multiple loops can be configured and each loop can be associated with an operator faceplate Certain blocks are used once within each loop e g controller setpoint auto manual others can be used as many times as needed Some notable features include Auto Tuning within the PID function blocks an expandable Sequencer that allows configuration of up to 250 steps and up to 256 discrete inputs and outputs In addition the Graphical Configuration Utility can be used to design the logic in a ladder diagram Combining these features with continuous control loops within the same controller off
68. LOOP02 AIN2 01 INPUT TC Input TC 2 1 ESN Exec Seq No 5 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOP02 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P LOOPO02 AIN2 O1 INPUT D Input D LOOP02 SETPT O1 ESN Seq No 10 PID PID Controller Function Block RG Range Pointer LOOP02 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P LOOP02 AIN2 O1 INPUT S Input LOOP02 SETPT O1 INPUT F Input F 2 1 INPUT Input LOOP02 A M AS ESN Exec Seq No 15 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer LOOP02 PID OR INPUT Input LOOP02 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer LOOP02 AIN2 OR V RG PTR Range Pointer LOOP02 PID OR INPUT Input Process LOOP02 AIN2 O1 INPUT Input Setpoint LOOP02 SETPT O1 INPUT V Input V Valve LOOPO02 A M O1 LOOP Loop 02 AOUT 2 Analog Output 2 Function Block Range Pointer LOOP02 PID OR INPUT Input 2 1 4 12 2003 UM353 1 Factory Configured Options 4 8 FCO121 Cascade Control Factory Configured Option 121 provides two loops configured for Cascade con
69. RAD 48 x round XZ Notes 1 RJ Cold Junction Reference 0311452 2 Table 8 1 for AINU2 terminals 3 Grounded junction shown For ungrounded junction connect cable shield to AINUc_ Analog Input Universal Common FIGURE 8 16 Universal Analog Input AINU1 Thermocouple Input Thermocouple reference junction RJ installation 1 Slip a length of insulating sleeving over the portion of each reference junction lead that will remain exposed after Installation Carefully form the leads as shown below a gt 0 06 lt 15 9 1 5 0 75 E 0 25 lt 5 19 6 4 8 0 3 z 7 9 0 5 Notes l 0 5 12 7 1 Insulate leads with 12 7 sleeving 0 1 _ 2 Dimensions are in lt inches millimeters 0 25 0 1 d otes gt k and are approximate 1 Insulate leads with sleeving 8 0 25 2 Dimensions inches millimeters 8 and approximate 2 Direct Entry Side Entry Connector FIGURE 8 17 Reference Junction Lead Forms 2 Note the connector type and loosen the two terminal screws using a straight blade screwdriver with a 1 8 3 mm width Insert the reference junction leads into the two openings in the side of the connector adjacent to the selected terminal numbers Position the Reference Junction as described for the connector type at hand 1 Direct Entry Connector Carefully press t
70. ROUT_c SPDT Relay ROUT nc PUT INPUT loop tag block tag output null ACTION DIR REV DIR gt o ne Terminal Connections are listed in Section 8 4 BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 93 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 87 RSF RS Flip Flop RSF_ function blocks perform a reset dominant flip flop RS FLIP FLOP function as detailed in the truth table An unused S input will be set high 1 and unused input will be set low RSF ESN 000 0 Rest ED RS FLIP FLOP Output 1 st ED RS FLIP FLOP TRUTH TABLE ILIASIT Power Up LAST 5 NO YES YES R 10 01 R INPUTR loop tag block tag output null S INPUTS loop tag block tag output null Reset 1 x X 0 gt 01 EISIN Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 S gt 0 1 1 Output1 er 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 R RESET Input LO Last Output SET Input 01 Output X don t care BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 88 Rising Edge Trigger POWER UP During a warm start when PU LAST 15 set to YES the block will initialize at the input output states at the instant power down occurred cold start will initialize the input output states to 0
71. T2 Jumpers are factory set for the circuit boards installed at time of shipment Available jumpers may vary with board version W8 Real Time Clock Jumper See Detail Below U11 I II P4 Connects To Display J3 Assembly 46 Ld N JS os Battery P2 gt Kernel Jumper Pads on top and bottom MG00188d of board W4 LonWorks Bus Rear Terminals 25 amp 26 W8 Real Time Clock Battery Jumper 1 As Shown Shunt Installed To Enable HOT WARM Start 2 Place Shunt On N C Pins When Storing Controller Or MPU Controller Board and For Cold Start MG00188d MPU Controller Board W8 lt CLK N C WDT For HOT WARM Start For Storage Factory Use Only W8 Real Time Clock Detail N B Edge View FIGURE 11 2 MPU Controller Board with RTC Jumper W8 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Maintenance W2 LIL Modbus Network Jumper Rear Terminals 3 amp 4 Battery W7 Real Time Clock Jumper X N F 1 Place Shunt Both Pins To F1 EY Enable Hot Warm Start EP P C69 2 Place Shunt On One Pin When E Storing Controller Or MPU NES Controller Board n dd et W6 Hardware Watchdog Timer Control Factory Set T2 Connects To Display Jump
72. loop tag block tag output null The RATIO can be adjusted using the QUICKSET IQU QUICK SET Ratio s NO YES YES 5 E E S N Exec Seq 001 to 250 feature 1f parameter QUICKSET is set to YES The RATIO will continuously change as the knob is adjusted Press the STORE button when the final value is reached to insure that the new RATIO setting will be retained on a Cold power up condition The QS DPP parameter enables setting of the Ratio adjustment resolution when in the QUICKSET mode If input A or E is not configured it s value will be set to 1 When input TC or TV is not configured it s value will be set to 0 The TO Tracked Output is normally used in applications where an external device is being used to set a ratio in place of the RATIO parameter R is then set to 1 0 When it is desired to have the output of the RATIO block track the TV variable the external device 1s forced to track TO Input E will then equal TV Ax 1 0 and therefore the RATIO block output O1 will equal TV x AxE gt RxAxE X y o1 Output 1 E x e R M PN v di ER 1 AxR Tracked TC Output Cominana Track Variable BLOCK DIAGRAM When a configuration containing the RATIO function block is edited in i config and then downloaded to an on line controller the controller will ignore a change to the RATIO parameter val
73. troy RD NCA 3 RxD o RD AK B 2 3 3 120 RS232 TD RxD RS485 L 4 Cable Cable Note 4 Note 1 Note 2 z KE gt BRIS 1 RTS vo 4 4 SG gt 5 SG SG 4 J 2 6 6 Prj F 1 1 P Jumper Settings Note 7 EM Rt 1 Va R Safety Safety 8 5 26 Vdc V Ground Ground Common Ground Bus Single Point d Earth Ground A Modbus Communications APACS ACM to Model 353 or Model 354 Personal Computer RS485 to RS232 Serial Port Isolated Converter Model353 Model 353 Noe g Cable Label Entrelec ILPH 084 233 11 or 354 or 354 gt gt 2 RxD x ORD NOR 3 TxD TD gt Ote 3 3 120 TxD RS485 4 Note 4 4 DTRO Beg Cable gt able Note 2 NCB L D gt 8 CTS Note 1 cm me 4 4 5 SG SG Ke RTS lead is not used AJ 6 6 Cut back and insulate G Sy gt P F EH P Jumper Settings Note 7 G M i3 1 1 Safety Safety 8 5 26 Vdc ve E 1 Ground Ground Common Ground Bus Single Point E Earth Ground B Modbus Communications Personal Computer to Model 353 or Model 354 Notes 1 RS232 cable must be shielded and less than 50 feet 15 meters i
74. 1 n 1 7 L D8I R Discrete 8 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00304 48 1 n 1 8 L D9I R Discrete 9 Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00305 48 1 n 1 9 L DAI R Discrete A Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00306 48 1 n 1 10 L DBI R Discrete B Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00307 48 1 n 1 11 L DCI R Discrete C Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00308 48 1 n 1 12 L DDI R Discrete D Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00309 48 1 n 1 13 L DEI R Discrete E Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 003 10 48 1 n 1 14 L DFI R Discrete F Input 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00311 48 1 n 1 15 005 Discrete 0 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 003 12 48 1 nt 1 1 0 L D1S R W Discrete 1 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 003 13 48 1 nt 1 1 1 L D2S R W Discrete 2 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 003 14 48 1 nt 1 1 2 L D3S R W Discrete 3 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 003 15 48 1 1 1 3 L D4S R W Discrete 4 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 003 16 48 1 1 1 4 055 Discrete 5 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00317 48 1 1 1 5 065 R W Discrete 6 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00318 48 1 n 1 1 6 L D7S R W Discrete 7 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00319 48 1 n 1 1 7 L D8S R W Discrete 8 Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00320 48 1 1 1 8 L D9S R W Discrete 9 Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00321 48 1 n 1 1 9 L DAS R W Discrete A Status 1 0 Manual 1 0 00322 48 1 n 1 1 10 L DBS R W Discrete B Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00323 48 1 n 1 1 11 L DCS R W Discrete C Status 1
75. 999999 2 P U ILIAISIT Power Up LAST 5 NO YES YES INPUT P INPUT P H loop tag block tag output null INPUTR loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 POWER UP During a hot or a warm start with PU LAST set to YES the block will retain the last count and continue at BLOCK DIAGRAM the last input output states If set to during a warm cold start the output and count will be initialized to 0 March 2003 3 45 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 39 DOD Digital Output lev Discrete DOD function blocks transmit up to 16 on off signals received from controller block interconnection to remote nodes the LonWorks network maximum of 6 DOD blocks can be used up to the limit of nodes allowed on the Lon network or the memory limit of the controller Each use of the block will be assigned unique station wide ID e g 01 Each input transmitted is of type SNVT lev disc and can be bound to network variables in a single or multiple remote nodes that can receive network variables of this type These blocks will be available when the Lon Works option board is installed in 352P 353 or 354N controller The 0 parameter enables the number that the station has assigned to input 0 to be viewed All subsequent network variables are assigned consecutively Eac
76. AD P EIE Scaling gt O1 g YES C1 C2 XTR Al_c Quality Tet QS BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 18 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 10 AINU Analog Inputs Universal AINU_ function blocks are available on the optional I O Expander Board These function blocks convert sensor inputs such as T C thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector millivolt ohm and slidewire sources into block outputs Current inputs i e 4 20 mA are accommodated by using the WMV type and connecting 3 750 resistor across the input An output bias can be used to nullify any known offset in the sensor circuit and a digital filter time constant is included to dampen process noise Output QS indicates the quality status of the output signal O1 and will go high 1 when the output is of bad quality Bad quality indicates an A D conversion failure or an open circuit or an out of range process variable The scaling function is used to establish an output range in engineering units for the selected sensor range e g 0 10 mv or 50 0 150 0 amperes Direct Temperature Measurements 1 e T C and RTD bypass sensor and range scaling and the block output units are selected from Table 3 4 When selected the proper read only ASCII characters corresponding to the type units selected will automatically be ANALOG INPUT UNIVERSAL ANALOG INPUT ANU 4 ANU
77. Analog Indicator Loop Status Word L W1 channel n 4 parameter 1 0 Alarm Ais Active Al l Acive ALARM RT 1 Alarm A is Not N1 1 Not Acknowledged ALARM RW 2 Alarm A is Enabled 1 Enabled ALARM RW ALARM R 4 Alarm Bis Not NI I NotAcknowledged ALARM RW 5 PI AlarmB is Enabled E1 I Enabed ALARM RW prem AR Ache Al ae 7 1 2 Alarm A is Not Ack d NI l NotAcknowledged ALARM Ja aterm Ais Enabled EI RW 9 2 Active A1 l Acive ALARM R 10 P2 AlarmB is Not Ack d N1 __ 1 Not Acknowledged ALARM RW 11 P2 AlarmB is Enabled E1 I Enabed ALARM RW 12 Alarms are Out of Service OS l OutofService ALARM RW 13 PBISW Input MD PB l O writeoflpresesPB PBISW RW 14 PB2SW Input MD PB2 1 0 write of 1 presses PB2SW RW 15 PB3SW Input MD PB3 l O writeoflpresses PB PB2SW RW Analog Indicator Loop Alarm Status Word L SW2 channel n 5 parameter 1 0 P3 Alarm Active Al l Active JALARM R 1 Alarm Not NI 1 Acknowledged ALARM RW 2 P3AlarmAisEnabled E1 l Enabled ALARM RW 3 Alarm Bis Active A1 l Active ALARM R
78. BATCH SWITCH BATSW InptA A ESN 000 BATCH SWITCH High LIMIT 5 LO LOw LIMIT 5 BP Batch Pre Load s GAI GAIN 5 INPUT EIS Exec Seq No gt Output 1 m Real 100 0 J Real 0 0 Real 50 0 TER Real 32 0 INPUT loop tag block tag output null 001 to 250 LIMIT or increased LO LIMIT changing the feedback signal and therefore the controller reset signal This maintains controller output at the batch switch limit setting and eliminates reset windup If a controller has a large proportional gain setting the reset can be modified too much such that the process may under shoot the setpoint during a startup condition The BPL Batch Pre Load 15 adjusted to optimize the controller for startup conditions by limiting how much the batch switch can adjust the controller feedback signal When the controller output is within its normal operating output the batch switch has no effect on the controller This allows the controller to be tuned optimally for normal operating conditions and the batch switch to add additional compensation very similar to derivative action only during startup A t Y E Zo HI LO lg 2 gt GAIN HL gt Selector Selector 42 HI LIMIT Batch Pre Load oo LO HI BL PP GAIN 2 Selector Selector pss aj LO LIMIT J BLOCK DIAGRAM
79. Division DIV function blocks perform simple arithmetic division The output will be the quotient of the two configured inputs N D The output will be limited to the maximum real number and if the divisor is 0 0 the output will go to the maximum real number with the sign determined by the numerator If the numerator is 0 0 the output will be 0 0 Any unconfigured inputs will be set equal to 1 0 N Numerator v o 01 ND Output1 Denominator BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 38 DNC_ Divide by N Counter DNC_ function blocks provide a single output pulse for a pre selected number of input pulses The output will go high 1 with a positive transition of the input edge triggered and will return to a low 0 output on the succeeding positive transition Output 1 Divide By 3 gt gt 01 Reset 4 Output 1 Divide By 2 Pulse Input gt DIVISION DIV_ Numerator N DIVISION gt Output 1 Denominator D D INPUT INPUT N H loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT D H loop tag block tag output null EIS Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 DIVIDE BY N COUNTER EsN 000 Pulse Input DIVIDE N Output 1 Reset ID Counter N Counter Divisor N s 2
80. E Input A v v Inputc n LP can M X p o Oupa 11 GAN GS s Real 1 0 BIAS 9 0 0 B Input B INPUT A P loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT loop tag block tag output null c INPUT INPUT C loop tag block tag output null Input C ES Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 1 GAIN x B BIAS C BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 38 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 31 DID Digital Input lev Discrete DID function blocks convert 16 on off signals received from a single or multiple nodes on the LonWorks network into 16 block outputs for use by other function blocks within the controller A maximum of 6 DID blocks can be used up to the limit of nodes allowed on the Lon network or the memory limit of the controller Each use of the block will be assigned a unique station wide ID e g DID02 Input connections are established by binding each output variable of type SNVT lev disc SNVT 22 in the remote node devices to each network variable in the DID function block These blocks will be available when the LonWorks option board is installed in a 352P 353 or 354N controller The 0 NV NUM parameter enables the number that the station has assigned to input 0 All subsequent network variables are assigned consecutively Each function block output has a mode associated with it The mode can be either NORMAL or FORC
81. Internal Override Internal Status ES External Status BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 48 ESL Events Sequence Logger ESL function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher can be used on a one per loop basis to log events within the loop EVENTS SEQUENCE LOGGER Each ESL input can be assigned a user tag up to 8 ASCII characters that will be displayed when viewing the logged ESL events from the front panel Events once triggered by a nput 01 P EVENTS positive transition 071 input will remain in the logger nput 02 z n i 4 SEQUENCE until reset Reset can be initiated either by setting input R nput 03 high this input is edge sensitive and will reset the events nput 04 Event Alarm on the leading edge or by entering configuration and setting the parameter RESET to YES g 3999 9993 nput 21 nput 22 Events logged to the ESL function block can be viewed at nput 23 the operator faceplate by pressing the ACK pushbutton nput 24 when displaying the loop containing an ESL function block having logged events The alphanumeric display TES will first step through any active alarms status conditions or errors and then all the logged events that occurred since HNORTAEG the last reset The configured 8 character name will be 0 2 5 shown in alphanumeric display the order of fi Fi 3 a a occurrence ESL 1 ESL 2 will appear in
82. MOM SUS P U AS TI LAST 5 NO YES YES MD HII S T MD HI STatus message S 5 ASCII Char GREEN MD LO SIT MDLO STatus message S 5 ASCII Char RED MD ACI MD HI ACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char RED MD LO A C MD LO ACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char GREEN JIN PUT INPUT NO loop tag block tag output null LIN PUT INPUT NC loop tag block tag output null MD INPUT MD H loop tag block tag output null EISIN Exec Seq No 001 to 250 This block operates with an operator faceplate that includes green and red LEDs that are turned on using input MD A HI 1 input will turn on the Green LED and a LO the Red LED The default connection will be the PS output of the block but should be changed as required to display the correct status The message parameters do not apply to the current product PB3 Switch Operator Display Interface BOD LEDS UOD MSG MD HI ST MD HI AC A G kkkkk PB3 2 MDLOST MDLOAC lt MD R deekdek MD Input NC 1 PS PB Switch NO Output Momentary Action Sustained Action 0312850 Basic Operator Display MD Message Display UOD Universal Operator Display BLOCK DIAGRAM POWER UP When the switch is configured for momentary action it will a
83. Output node r nv x SNVT lev percent RanGe PoinTeR NV NUM X03130S0 BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 17 AOUT Analog Outputs AOUT_ function blocks convert function block interconnection signals connected to input S to a block output having a range of 4 20 mAdc Input D can be used to disconnect the output from the load when asserted high 1 This feature is useful when two or more controllers are connected to a common load When controller 18 connected to the load others are disconnected using the disconnect feature The function block includes scaling to range the 4 20 mA output with the block input signal The range pointer parameter input R tells the block where to obtain scaling information If this parameter is not configured the block will use a range of 0 00 to 100 00 Two analog output function blocks are available on the Controller Board and one additional on the ANALOG OUTPUT _ m AOUT Range F Signal ANALOG D ACER AOUT m C Disconnect AOUT 2 Quality Status lt RG RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag null LN P U T INPUT S loop tag block tag output null INPUT D loop tag block tag output null CIA L ZE RO ZERO output 4 0 mA C AL FUL FULL scale output c 20 0 ICA LI IV II EW view output verify cal
84. PN15545 110 Equivalent kits are available from both mail order and local electronic supply companies e Electronic assemblies must be stored in anti static protective bags when not installed in equipment March 2003 Contents UM353 1 xii March 2003 UM353 1 Introduction 1 0 INTRODUCTION This User s Manual contains configuration installation and service information for the Moore 353 Process Automation Controller It is divided into fifteen sections Section 1 Introduction has general information about the organization of this manual the controller product support and the contents of a typical shipment Section 2 Configuration Overview contains a list of the functions blocks available for use in configuring the controller and a procedure for configuration Function block availability depends on controller model and MPU Controller board firmware version Section 3 Function Blocks contains a detailed description of each function block Section 4 Factory Configured Options provides a graphical presentation of the function blocks used in FCOs anda listing of changes made to default function block parameters Section 5 LonWorks Communications provides an overview of LonWorks communication Section 6 Network Communications furnishes overviews of Modbus LIL and Ethernet communication data Section 7 Data Mapping contains network data details for Modbus Local Instrument Link LIL and Ethe
85. When lighted the green LED indicates an operating Modbus board The red LED will normally be off When an error exists the red LED will flash one second on one second off with a 5 second pause Count the number of flashes between two pauses 1 flash Data bus test failure 2 flashes Address bus test failure 3 flashes Data read write test failure 4 flashes Register 40001 test failure 5 flashes Register 40070 40077 test failure 6 flashes Flash CRC test failure The board is not user serviceable The Ethernet board s LED power up sequence is listed below It is assumed that an Ethernet connection exists The ST and Modbus LEDs will flash in the following sequence 1 Both Modbus LEDs and the ST LED light 2 The red Modbus LED remains lighted while the other two extinguish The flashing red LED during a normal startup is not an error indication The ACT LED will light 3 The red Modbus and ACT LEDs extinguishes and the green Modbus and ST LEDs light 4 The green Modbus LED remains lighted and the ST LED extinguishes 5 The Act LED begins to flash the F H and 100 LEDs go to the link values and the green Modbus LED remains lighted 18 An Ethernet board illustration was not available at the time this manual was printed March 2003 11 5 UM353 1 1000 W2 LIL Modbus Network Jumper Rear Terminals 3 amp 4 1 1 N C69
86. Y Range Pointer 01 5 01 INPUT P Input P Process Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint Loop01 SPLIM O1 INPUT V Input V Valve 01 1 INPUT X Input X X Variable Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT Input Y Variable Loop01 DIV01 01 LOOP Loop 01 DIV01 Division Function Block INPUT Input Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT D Input D Loop01 AIN1 01 ESN Exec Seq No 45 SCL01 Scaler Function Block MINSCALE Output MIN 0 50 MAXSCALE Output MAX 1 50 ENGUNITS ENGineering UNITS CF WF ESN Exec Seq No 50 01 OR Function Block INPUT A Input Loop01 A M NA INPUT B Input B Loop01 E LIS ESN Exec Seq No 55 OR02 OR Function Block INPUT A Input A Loop01 A M NA INPUT B Input B Loop01 E I ES ESN Exec Seq No 60 March 2003 4 9 Factory Configured Options UM353 1 4 6 FCO106 Single Loop Controller wl Operator Setpoint Limits Factory Configured Option FCO106 provides a single loop controller configured in Loop01 This is similar to FCO101 but with a SPLIM block added to the output of the SETPT block A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the confi
87. and press store 16 Press STEP UP 17 Turn the pulser knob or the use arrow button to display DPP 18 Press STEP DOWN Notice 0 00 or 2 decimal places is the default Turn the pulser knob to set the number of decimal places to 0 0 or to show 1 decimal place on the display and press STORE button 19 Press STEP UP and turn the pulser knob or use the arrow button to display ENGUNITS 20 Press STEP DOWN Notice that the default units are PRCT 21 Use the arrow buttons to move the flashing cursor to the space before the P Now turn the pulser knob to display D Use the arrow button to move to the next position and turn the pulser knob to select Repeat until display reads DEG F and press the STORE button 22 Press ENTER EXIT COMF to return to normal operation Try displaying the process and setpoint Notice that these are now displayed in engineering units scaled 100 to 500 DEG F or 300 at 50 Press the UNITS button to display the engineering units configured above March 2003 10 3 Controller and System Test UM353 1 10 1 6 Alarms Upon power up FCO101 has 4 alarms enabled e Hialarm at 110 on AIN1 e Lo alarm at 10 on AINI e Deviation alarm of 110 between AIN1 and SETPT e Noalarm 1 Press ALARM STEP DOWN button to step through the Alarm limits and Enable Disable Status Notice all the alarms are enabled and the alarm limits are displayed in engineering units on the numeric display and as
88. 0 Manual 1 0 00324 48 1 n 1 1 12 L DDS R W Discrete D Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00325 48 1 n 1 1 13 L DES R W Discrete E Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00326 48 1 n 1 1 14 L DFS R W Discrete F Status 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00327 48 1 1 1 15 L D0O R W Discrete 0 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00328 48 1 n 2 1 0 L D1O R W Discrete 1 Output 1 0 OFF 1 0 00329 48 1 n 2 1 1 L D2O R W Discrete 2 Output 1 0 1 0 00330 48 1 n 2 1 2 L D3O R W Discrete 3 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00331 48 1 n 2 1 3 L D4O R W Discrete 4 Output 1 0 OFF 1 0 00332 48 1 2 1 4 L D5O R W Discrete 5 Output 1 0 OFF 1 0 00333 48 1 n 2 1 5 L D6O R W Discrete 6 Output 1 0 OFF 1 0 00334 48 1 n 2 1 6 L D7O R W Discrete 7 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00335 48 1 n 2 1 7 L D8O R W Discrete 8 Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00336 48 1 n 2 1 8 L D9O R W Discrete 9 Output 1 0 OFF 1 0 00337 48 1 2 1 9 L DAO R W Discrete A Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00338 48 1 n 2 1 10 L DBO R W Discrete B Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00339 48 1 2 1 11 L DCO R W Discrete C Output 1 ON 0 OFF 1 0 00340 48 1 n 2 1 12 L DDO R W Discrete D Output 1 0 OFF 1 0 00341 48 1 n 2 1 13 L DEO R W Discrete E Output 1 0 OFF 1 0 00342 48 1 n 2 1 14 L DFO R W Discrete F Output 1 0 OFF 1 0 00343 48 1 n 2 1 15 1 PB1SW Input MD 1 0 08701 16 1 n 3 1 0 L PB2 R W PB2SW Input MD 1 0 08702 16 1 n 3 1
89. 00FF 40069 7 37 V2 2 IPA1 R IP Address 2 1 0 255 2 0 255 40070 n a V2 4 IPA2 R IP Address 2 3 0 255 4 0 255 40071 n a V2 4 R IP Gateway Address 4 1 0 255 2 0 255 40072 n a V2 4 IPG2 R IP Gateway Address 4 3 0 255 4 0 255 40073 n a V2 4 R IP Mask 3 1 0 255 2 0 255 40074 n a V2 4 IPM2 R IP Mask 3 3 0 255 4 0 255 40075 n a V2 4 EBS R Ethernet Board Speed 0 1 10M 2 100M 40076 n a V2 4 EBD R Ethernet Board Duplex 0 auto 1 half duplex 2 full duplex 40077 n a V2 4 PPR R Ethernet Board Peer to Peer Rate 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 10 sec 40078 n a V2 4 Spares 40079 40100 CS R Control Loop Starting Chan LIL 8 250 0008 00FA n a 5 2 5 26 SS R Seq Loop Starting Chan LIL 8 250 0008 00FA n a 6 2 6 26 AS R Analog Indicator Starting Chan LIL 8 250 0008 00FA n a 5 38 5 62 V2 2 DS R Discrete Indication Starting Chan LIL 8 250 0008 00 n a 6 38 6 62 V2 2 PS R PB Indication Starting Chan LIL 8 250 0008 00FA n a 7 38 7 62 V2 2 SCR R Starting Configuration Record 0 0000 2 3 NCR R Number of Configuration Records 0 0000 2 14 LxZ R Loop x Param Z Staring Channel 8 250 0008 00FA n a 7 16 7 36 6 36 Software Revisions Development Release MSB 128 to 255 80 SFF Major Rev MSB 1 to 127 00 7F 5 Minor Rev LSB 0 to 255 00 FF Hardware Type and Revisions Type MSBI to 15 01 0F 5 Rev LSB 1 to 15 01 0 1 The controller time sh
90. 1 n 79 81 L G6SAT R Group 6 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 41210 30 1 n 82 84 L G6SMT R Group 6 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 41213 30 1 1 82 84 L G6F1T R Group 6 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41216 30 1 1 73 75 L G6F0T R Group 6 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41219 30 1 1 76 78 41222 41230 Note These Modbus groupings normally used for Static Loop Integer Data with displays other than ODP L G7Tag R Group 7 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42451 60 1 n 85 87 L G7P1T R Group 7 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42454 60 1 n 88 90 L G7P2T R Group 7 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42457 60 1 n 91 93 L G7SAT R Group 7 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 42460 60 1 n 94 96 L G7SMT R Group 7 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 42463 60 1 1 94 96 R Group 7 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42466 60 1 n 1 85 87 L G7FOT R Group 7 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42469 60 1 n 1 88 90 L G8Tag R Group 8 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42472 60 1 n 97 99 L G8P1T R Group 8 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42475 60 1 n 100 102 L G8P2T R Group 8 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42478 60 1 n 103 105 L G8SAT R Group 8 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 42481 60 1 n 106 108 L G8SMT R Group 8 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 42484 60 1 n 1 106 108 L G8F1T R Group 8 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42487 60 1 n 1 97 99 LHG8FOT R Group 8 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 42490 60 1 n 1 100 102 Note These Modbus groupings normally used for Variable Loop Floating Point Data
91. 1 10 with Factory Calibration 4 Channel High Level DC Input Module 27005 7 Acromag 550L3 504 4V2 10 NCR 10 100 Volts 4 Channel High Level DC Input Module 27005 8 Acromag 550L3 504 4V2 10 NCR 10 100 Volts with Factory Calibration 2 Channel 4 20 mA Output Module 27005 9 Acromag 570L3 701 C1 10 NCR 3 Channel Isolated DC Discrete Input 27005 10 Acromag 540L3 401 3DC 10 NCR Module 3 Channel Isolated AC Discrete Input 27005 11 Acromag 540L3 401 3AC 10 NCR Module 8 Channel DC Discrete Input Module 27005 12 Acromag 540L3 410 8D1 10 NCR 3 Channel Mechanical Relay Output 27005 13 Acromag 560L3 601 3MR 10 NCR Module 3 Channel Solid State Relay Output 27005 14 Acromag 560L3 601 3SS 10 NCR Module Power Supply Input 115 230 Vac Output 27005 24 idec PS5R D24 24 Vdc 2 1 14 3 SERVICE PARTS KITS Exploded view drawings of the Moore 353 appear in Section 1 Introduction and Section 11 Maintenance SERVICE PART DESCRIPTION FIRMWARE UPDATEKITS 2 O E uu x cuc Lh 4 4 L ELECTRONICASSEMBLIESANDRELATEDTARTS Display Assembly Bezel Replacement Kit 16353 163 Contains gray bezel keypad pulsar knob and Instruction Does not contain black Display Board or Display Assembly mounting screws MPU Controller Board Kit for 120 240 Vac Power Input for 16353 68 Model 353A MPU Controller Board Kit for 24 Vdc Power Input for 16353 67 Model 353D
92. 10 write of 1 presses PB opp W 6 Group 6 Auto Man Switch 1 0 Manul R W 7 Group 6 Feedback Status 1 True O False IR 1 8 Group7 PressPB1 1 write of I presses W 1 9 Group7 PressPB2 10 write of 1 presses PB opp W 10 Group 7 Auto Man Switch 1 0 Manual R W 11 Group 7 Feedback Status 1 True O False IR 1 12 Group8 PressPB1 1 0 write of I presses W 1 13 Group8 PressPB2 10 write of 1 presses PB opp 7 14 Group 8 Auto Man Switch 1 0 Manual ODP RW 15 Group 8 Feedback Status 1 True O False ODP mask on command will toggle the position of the Auto Man switch 7 30 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 3 9 PCOM Block Status Included in MPU Controller board firmware version 1 30 and higher Controller Sequencer Code R W Description Range Coil MB C P LIL L INIT_OK R W 1 INIT OK 1 0 09101 32 1 7 1 0 L DFAIL R W I DFAIL 1 0 09102 32 1 7 1 1 L RESET W 1 1 0 09103 32 1 7 1 2 L START w 1 START 1 0 09104 32 1 7 1 3 L RESTART W I RESTART 1 0 09105 32 1 7 1 4 L HOLD W 1 HOLD 1 0 09106 32 1 7 1 5 L PCOMP W 1 1 0 09107 32 1 z 1 6 L ABORT w 1 1 0 09108 32 1 7 1 7 L READY R I READY 1 0 09109 32 1 7 1 8 L RUN R 1 1 0 09110 32 1 7 1 9 L HELD R
93. 1024 D58 pp pp j O j 7 pas P s 1 PP Pu LonWorks Remote Function Blocks I O States N Normal M Mode F Forced see Section 7 for details 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 4 RITIM RTTID IRTHHRIRTTIMNIRTTISCJRITIDA p 2 RIT2Y RTT2M RTT2D RTT2HR RTT2MN RTT2SC RTT2DA r Po f 3 RTT3M RTT3D JRTI3HRJRTTSMNJRTTISCJRTT2DA To 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 4 DIDIN DIDIM DIDIF DODIN DODTF DISIN DISIM DISTF DOSTN DOS1M DOSTF 2 DID2N DID2M DID2F DOD2N DOD2M DOD2F DIS2N DIS2M DIS2F DOS2N DOS2M DOS2F 3 DID3N DID3M DOD3N DOD3M DOD3F DIS3N DIS3M DIS3F DOS3N DOS3M DOS5F 4 DIDAN DID4F DODAN DODAM DODAF DISAN DIS4M DIS4F DOS4N DOS4M DOSAF 5 DIDSN DIDSF DOD5N DOD5M DODSF DISSN DISSM DISSF DOSEN DOS5M DOS5F DIDeN DID6M DID6F DOD6N DOD6M DOD6F Disen Disem DIS6F DOSEN DOS6M DOSGF Em 43 6 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Network Communications 6 2 2 Control Loop Data Control loop data occupies five LIL channels The starting channel is entered during configuration of the ODC operator display function block for each loop as LIL CHAN n The first channel for each loop can be viewed in
94. Digital Input 1 DIN1 DINU2 Digital Input Universal 2 Digital Input 2 DIN2 XMTR Transmitter Power 26Vde Digital Input 2 DIN2 COM Transmitter Station Common Digital Input 3 DIN3 AIN4 Analog Input 4 Digital Input 3 DIN3 AINC Analog Input Common Analog Output 1 AOUTI DIN4 Digital Input 4 Analog Output 1 2 Common AOUTC DIN4 Digital Input 4 Analog Output 2 AOUT2 AINU1a Analog Input Universal Analog Input 1 AINUIb Analog Input Universal 1 b Analog Input 1 2 Common AINC AINUIc Analog Input Universal 1 Analog Input 2 AINU1d Analog Input Universal 1 d Analog Input 3 AINU2a Analog Input Universal 2 a Analog Input 3 Common AINU2b Analog Input Universal 2 b I O Bus A JAd Analog Input Universal 2 d Notes 1 Use this table for both direct entry green or gray connectors and side entry black connectors terminal styles 2 Terminal letters and numbers are printed on individual connectors Model 353 1 has 2 connectors Model 353 2 1 has 4 connectors and an I O Expander board Underscore is a placeholder wildcard ellipsis indicates that subsequent characters do not affect selection Safety Case Ground Wire to green screw at top center of rear terminal area 4 NCA and NCB Connect LIL Twinaxial Cable or twisted pair wiring Refer to Section 8 5 for additional information IOA and IOB LonWorks bus connections Twisted pair wiring 1s ty
95. GS go to step GW global word LIL H hold HART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer HI high HLD Hold FB HYS hysteresis Hz Hertz ICI Independent Computer Interface Model 320 ID ID Controller FB identity in inch INIT initial input output IO internal override kilo prefix 10 Kelvin March 2003 15 1 Abbreviations Acronyms UM353 1 Ib pound s LED Light Emitting Diode LIB library LIL Local Instrument Link LL Lead Lag FB LMT Limit FB LN Natural Logarithm LO low lockout LOG Logarithm Base 10 FB m milli prefix 10 meter M mega prefix 10 MA moving average MAX maximum MB Modbus MD Message Display MIN minimum MR manual reset MSG Message MTH Math FB MUL Multiplication FB multiply multiplication N number numerator NC normally closed NND NAND Logic FB NO normally open NOR NOR Logic FB NOT NOT Logic FB NUM number NV network variable NVRAM non volatile random access memory ODC Operator Display for Controllers FB ODS Operator Display for Sequencer FB ON OFF On Off Controller FB OP operation OR OR Logic FB override ORSL Override Select FB OST One Shot Timer FB P process PAC Process Automation Controller PARM parameter PB Pushbutton PB SW Pushbutton Switch FB PC pe
96. General Warnings and Cautions y arne This equipment contains hazardous voltages and it has been certified for use in the hazardous locations specified on the product nameplate and in the Model Designation and Specifications section Death serious personal injury or property damage can result if safety instructions are not followed Only qualified personnel should work on or around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warning safety notices and maintenance procedures contained herein The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent upon proper handling installation operation and maintenance The perfect and safe operation of the equipment is conditional upon proper transport proper storage installation and assembly as well as on careful operation and commissioning The equipment may be used only for the purposes specified in this publication gt March 2003 UM3 53 1 Contents CAUTION circuits and transistors The symbol at right may appear on a circuit board or other electronic assembly Electrostatic discharge can damage or cause the failure of semiconductor devices such as integrated 4 to indicate that special handling precautions needed e properly grounded conductive wrist strap must be worn whenever an electronics module or circuit board is handled or touched A service kit with a wrist strap and static dissipative mat is available from Siemens
97. Mounting Clip easet to IRI IE i c EO 8 7 8 7 Rear Terminal Layout and Terminal Assignments Direct Entry Connectors 8 10 8 8 Rear Terminal Layout and Terminal Assignments Side Entry Connectors 8 11 8 9 Analog Input AINI 2 Wire eren nre 8 13 8 10 Analog Inputs 2 and 3 4 Wire Transmitters 2 8 14 8 11 Universal Analog Input eei certae ree Re 8 14 8 12 Analog Output AOUTI Current Output ener nenne nennen 8 15 8 13 Analog Output AOUTI Voltage Output ec sse eene nennen 8 15 8 14 Digital Inputs DIN and DINU 8 16 8 15 Digital Output DOUTI Resistive and Inductive Loads essere 8 17 8 16 Universal Analog Input AINUI Thermocouple Input essen 8 18 8 17 Reference Junction Lead EOrms a asan ananman Ghi amas Pau aaa a 8 18 8 18 Universal Analog Input AINUI 2 3 and 4 Wire RTD 8 19 8 19 Universal Analog Input AINU1 Ohms Input 8 20 8 20 Universal Analog Input AINUI Slidewire 8 20 8 21 Universal Relay Outputs ROUTI and 2 Resistive Load n n 8 20 8 22 LIE Network u u ua RRR 8 21 8 23 LonWorks Network Wiring
98. Output O9 Forced State I high O low DIDxx IR 1 09 DIDxx Output OB Forced State I highO low DIDxx IR OB 13 DIDxx Output OD Forced State high O low _ DIDxx IR Discrete Output Remote xx Normal StateWord of Function Block Inputs DODxxN 0 DODxx Input 0 Normal State I highO low DODxx IR 1 0 1 DODxx Input I Normal State I highO low DODxx IR 1 2 DODxx Input 2 Normal State I highO low DODxx IR 2 3 DODxx Input 3 Normal State I highO low DODxx IR 3 4 DODxx Input 4 Normal State I highO low DODxx IR 4 5 DODxx Input 5 Normal State I highO low DODxx IR 1 5 6 DODxx Input 6 Normal State I highO low DODxx IR 6 8 DODxx Input 8 Normal State I highO low DODxx IR 8 9 DODxx Input 9 Normal State I highO low DODxx IR 1 DODxx Input B Normal State I highO low DODxx 13 DODxx InputD Normal State I highO low DODxx IR D 7 38 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Discrete Output Remote xx Mode Word of Function Block Inputs DODxxM Description ODxx Mode of Input 0 ODxx Mode of Input 1 ODxx Mode of Input 2 ODxx Mode of Input 3 ODxx Mode of Input 4 ODxx Mode of Input 5 ODxx Mode of Input 6 ODxx Mode of Input 7 ODxx Mode of Input 8 g g ODxx Mode of Input 9 ODxx Mod
99. Part Number install door Serial Number Flexible Board Retainer Mounting Screw Foam 2 Places Ad 3 Flip Down 9 Door 2 Rear View 3 INSTALLATION 1 Place an anti static wrist strap on your wrist and connect the ground lead 2 Get the replacement bezel or get the replacement circuit board and remove it from the anti static bag 3 Ifthe bezel is being replaced start threading each Faceplate mounting screw into the bezel Use a screwdriver to complete screw installation Install the flip down door see the figure 4 Turn the bezel over 5 Install the circuit board in the bezel by slightly inserting the top edge of board under the Fixed Retainer The top edge is nearest the Numeric and Alphanumeric Displays 6 Continue to ease the board under the Fixed Retainer while lowering the bottom edge of the board into the bezel Be sure that the keypad connector mates with the connector on the keypad The board is fully inserted when it snaps under the Flexible Retainer 7 Install the Display Assembly on the case as described above 11 5 3 MPU Controller Board This board has a lithium battery refer to Section 11 2 4 Board Handling Precautions When replacing an MPU Controller board configuration parameters must be re entered Refer to Sections 2 and 3 and to Section 12 Calibration as needed Factory repaired controllers must also be configured To replace the MPU Controller board or the station fuse use the following procedu
100. Proc 1 Alarm B DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Proc 2 Alarm A DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Proc 2 Alarm DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Proc 3 Alarm DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Proc 3 Alarm B DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 Proc 4 Alarm A DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 Proc 4 Alarm B DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Process 1 Alarm A RING BaCK NOYES No Process 1 Alarm RinG BaCK s NOIYES Process 2 Alarm A RinG BaCK s NO YES Process 2 Alarm RinG BaCK s NO YES NO Process 3 Alarm RinG BaCK 5 NO YES NO Process 3 Alarm RinG BaCK s NOIYES o Process 4 Alarm RinG BaCK NO YES No Process 4 Alarm RinG BaCK NO YES No 12131415 348 47 Press UNITS button to display the units of the point Press the Loop tag to return to displaying the loop tag Alarm Types HI compares the process input with the limit setting and trips the alarm status high 1 when the process is equal to or higher than the limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 when the process is less than the limit setting minus the deadband compares process input with the limit setting trips alar
101. Ratio Set Control FCO105 and Cascade Control FCO121 To download another FCO follow the steps in Section 2 7 Changes to an FCO may be made either by adding and deleting function blocks or by changing the default parameter values A Configuration Road Map is shown in Section 2 Note that an X represents pressing the STEP DOWN or STEP UP button and a lt gt represents turning the pulser knob For example to add a function block you would do the following steps 1 Press ENTER EXIT CONF Press STEP DOWN until VIEW is displayed Turn the pulser knob until ADD FB is displayed Press STEP DOWN for the function block menu pe dew Turn the pulser knob to scroll through the available function blocks and press STORE to add the function block to the configuration 10 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Controller and System Test To make changes to a function block parameter turn the Pulser Knob to EDIT FB Press STEP DOWN for the function Block menu Turn the pulser knob to the desired Function Block and Press STEP DOWN The first function block parameter will be displayed For example RG PTR for the A M Transfer Block or MINSCALE for the Analog Input Block Press STEP DOWN to display current parameter value or use the pulser knob to select a different parameter Press STORE to save any changes O 10 Press to return to normal operation mode Notice that the SETPT ALARM PID and ODC function blocks in FCO101 all refer
102. Real 420013 4 150 151 S004AEP R W Step 4 Analog End Point Real 420015 4 152 153 S246TIM R W Step 246 Time Period min Real 420981 246 150 151 S246AEP R W Step 246 Analog End Point Real 420983 246 152 153 S247TIM R W Step 247 Time Period min Real 420985 247 150 151 S247AEP R W Step 247 Analog End Point Real 420987 247 152 153 5248 Step 248 Time Period min Real 420989 248 150 151 S2488AEP R W Step24 8 Analog End Point Real 420991 248 152 153 S249TIM R W Step 249 Time Period min Real 420993 249 150 151 S249AEP R W Step 249 Analog End Point Real 420995 249 152 153 S250TIM R W Step 250 Time Period min Real 420997 250 150 151 S250AEP R W Step 250 Analog End Point Real 420999 250 152 153 Timer Function Block Configurations Code R W Description Range Register C P LIL DYTOIT R W Delay Timer 01 Time min Real 421001 1 190 1 191 OSTOIT R W One Shot Timer 01 Time min Real 421003 1 192 1 193 RCTOINT R W Rept Cy Timer 01 ON Time min Real 421005 1 194 1 195 RCTOIFT R W Rept Cy Timer 01 OFFTime min Real 421007 1 196 1 197 ROTOIT R W Retentive On Timer 01 Time min Real 421009 1 198 1 199 DYT21T R W Delay Timer 21 Time min Real 421201 1 190 1 191 OST21T R W One Shot Timer 21 Time min Real 421203 1 192 1 193 RCT21NT R W Rept Cy Timer 21 ON Time min Real 421205 1 194 1 195 RCT21FT R W Rept Cy Timer 21 OFFTime min Real 421207 1 196 1 197 ROT21T R W Retentive On Timer 21 Time min Real 421209 1 198 1 199 Ma
103. and PU SETPT values can be set using the QUICKSET feature if the QUICKSET parameter is set to YES SETPOINT ESN 000 hl Range R Track Variable TV SETPOINT Track Command fe Start Ramp LU Limit Pulser Down gt Output 1 Limit Pulser Up P TIR RanGe PoinTeR s loop tag block tag null Ramp RATE units min s Real 10 0 Ramp TIME min 0103840 0 TARGET TARGET setpoint s 0 0 USE RIAIT E USE ramp RATE 5 NO YES NO Q U I CIK S E T QUICK SET setpoint NO YES YES PU S E T P T Power Up SETPOINT s Real 0 0 LAS T Power up LAST 5 NO YES YES INPUT T V input Tv loop tag block tag output null T C input TC loop tag block tag output null I NIPIUIT S R INPUT SR H loop tag block tag output null INPUT LU loop tag block tag output nulh L D INPUT LD loop tag block tag output null E S N Exec Seq No 001 to 250 The RG PTR range pointer parameter determines the normal operating range of the function block If the pointer is not configured the block will use 0 00 to 100 00 range of the setpoint block will be limited to 10 to 110 of the range parame
104. code will remain at its last value Table 11 2 lists on line error and status codes For most error codes replace the involved circuit board to repair the controller For most status codes acknowledge or otherwise respond to the situation March 2003 11 9 UM353 1 TABLE 11 2 On Line Error and Status Codes DISPLAYED LINKIMODBUS DESCRIPTION CODE CODE Hex Dec MPU A D MPU Controller board A D Error AINULAD 0000 6 Expander Board Universal Analog Input 1 A D Error T O Expander Board Universal Analog Input 1 T C Burnout AINUIRJ 80008 s Expander Board Universal Analog Input 1 Reference Junction Error AINU2 AD ___ 0009 9 10 Expander Board Universal Analog Input 2 A D Error Expander Board Universal Analog Input 2 T C Burnout T O Expander Board Universal Analog Input 1 Reference Junction Error I O Expander Board Universal Digital Input 1 Underflow Error T O Expander Board Universal Digital Input 2 Underflow Error Cycle Time Overrun see STATN block add Cycle Time bias Alarm A2 Overrange Alarm A4 High Deviation i I p a NNI E Alarm A2 Low Deviation o indi p gest p Lr zl 11 10 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Maintenance DISPLAYED LINK MODBUS DESCRIPTION CODE Hex Dec A4DEV No BIHI No BILO No Alarm 4 Lo
105. cur step State of Input 0 1 0 01512 n 14 0 SGOSIF R Seq Group 0 cur step State of Input F 1 0 01527 n 14 15 90500 R Seq Group 0 cur step State of Output 0 1 0 01528 n 15 0 SG0SOF R Seq Group 0 cur step State of Output F 1 0 01543 n 15 15 SGFKI0 R Seq Group F cur step masK for Input 0 1 0 02216 n 3 22 0 SGFKIF R Seq Group F cur step masK for Input F 1 0 02231 n 3 22 15 SGFSI0 R Seq Group F cur step State of Input 0 1 0 02232 3 23 0 SGFSIF R Seq Group F cur step State of Input F 1 0 02247 n 3 23 15 SGFSOO R Seq Group F cur step State of Output 0 1 0 02248 3 24 0 SGFSOF R Seq Group F cur step State of Output F 1 0 02263 n 3 24 15 Sequencer Group n current step Mask Word for Inputs SGnKI 0 Group n Input 0 Mask Config R O Group n Input 1 Mask Config PRSEQ Jr I ai 2 Groupn Input 2 Mask Config 1 high0 don tcare PRSEQ IR 1 m Group n Input 3 Mask Config Group n Input 4 Mask Config Group n Input 5 Mask Config 6 Group n Input 6 Mask Config Group Input 7 Mask Config 8 Group n Input 8 Mask Config 9 Group Input 9 Mask Config March 2003 7 33 Data Mapping UM353 1 Sequencer Group current step State Word of Inputs SGnSI Group Input 0 State high Oow PRSEQ 6 Group n puro Se me 7 Groupn Input7 State l
106. external devices such as pneumatic controllers and shutoff Range R DAT s TN switches to eliminate the windup that can occur with other Process 2 3 P Output controller types Derivative action 1 provided when the Setpoint S 5 CONTROLLER parameter TD is non zero The controller includes an Feedback F gt Absolute Error autotune feature that can be initiated from the operator ED Pere faceplate using QUICK access feature initaize MER When input 15 high 1 the controller operates the RIG P T R RanGe Pointer o loop tag block tag null normal auto mode and when low 0 causes reset R to track D I R Direct ACTING NO YES NO Proportional Gain 5 0 001 to 100 0 1 000 F GE This will force the controller output to track the TLI Time Integral 0 001 to 4000 mir 100 0 feedback within the controller limits and allow the Time Derivative S 0 00 to 100 00 min 0 00 s DIG Derivative Gain 5 1 00 to 30 00 10 00 controller to switch back to auto without bumping the IM IINS CA L E minimum SCALE 6 Real 00 output MAXIS CIA LI IE MAXimum SCALE H Real 100 0 D P P Decimal Point Position preferred 5 0 0 I T S ENGineering UNITS 5 6 ASCII Char PRCT The process range pointer parameter points to another AUTOTUNE
107. operator pushbutton to be locked in the AUTO position but EMEG MAN and STANDBY will function normally MANual allows the operator to adjust the manual value unless STANDBY 1 active The manual value tracks the block output when in AUTO or STANDBY The manual value can be adjusted when in MAN provided the displayed variable is the process or the valve e g TC2053 P or TC2053 V When a loop is switched to MANual the display will automatically show the valve e g TC2053 V The range pointer input Range lets the A M function block know the range of the auto input signal and enables the A M block to properly process A M TRANSFER ESN 000 gt Output 1 Range R Auto Input AIM Track Variable TV TRANSFER Track Command Emerg Man Auto Status Not A uto status Manual Switch EM Switch Standby Switch P TIR RanGe Poin TeR Gs null Power Up MAN ual s 0 0 A ONLY Auto ONLY NO Power uP position s A IL AISIT Power Up LAST 5 YES CW ClockWise MANua s YES A C CIL manual ACCeLeration s Slow Med Fast 5 EM PRI I OR Emerg Manual PRIOR ity s 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 Emerg Man switches to MAN NO YES NO Lock MAN in Emerg Man NO YES NO PIR StandBy PRIOR ity s 0 1
108. pressing the TUNE button will scroll through the controller tuning parameters and allow activating the AUTOTUNE algorithm FCO101 is configured for PID control with the AUTOTUNE feature enabled Press the TUNE button and note that the default values for Proportional Gain PG Time Integral TD Time Derivative TD and the Derivative Gain DG will be displayed In addition the AUTOTUNE parameters Deviation Hysteresis and Autotune YES NO will be displayed It is difficult to simulate the autotune feature without simulating a process signal but increasing the digital filter parameter on the will help make the process seem more realistic To change the digital filter to a value around 10 follow the Configuration Road Map in Section 2 or do the following steps 1 Press ENTER EXIT CONF Press STEP DOWN twice to display VIEW Use the right arrow button or the pulser knob to display EDIT FB Press STEP DOWN for Function Block menu Use the right arrow button or the pulser knob to display AIN1 Press STEP DOWN for parameter menu Use the right arrow button or the pulser knob to display DIG FILT and Press STEP DOWN Rotate the pulser knob to set the digital filter to 10 and press STORE Press ENTER EXIT to return to normal operation 9 NDA SON Before initiating AUTOTUNE bring the process to steady state This can be done by placing the instrument in manual mode and bringing the valve to approximately mid scal
109. 1 spares 08703 08716 16 1 L DnS writing a 1 toggles the switch Reading 1 indicates Auto Status reading 0 indicate Man status L PB1 amp L PB2 writing a 1 to the controller will have the same affect as pushing the button the faceplate of the controller If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle Reading the bits indicates the status of the switch MD input 7 26 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Digital Indicator Loop Status Word L DISW channel n parameter I Value 0 Discrete 0 Input Value 1 Discrete I Input Value 2 Discrete 2 Input Value 3 Discrete 3 Input Value 4 Discrete 4 Input Value 5 Diserete 5 Input Value 6 Discrete 6 Input Value bi i i i i i 1 Block Read Write 2 1 2 3 4 5 Z Z Z Z Z 2 Discrete C Input Value 3 Discrete D Input Value 4 Discrete E Input Value 15 Discrete F Input Value 1 2 FI 2 FI ES T 0 1 2 Hj 2 2 g gig eS igig eie 9S ggg9 z g 2 2 eoOojolojojojojo jojojojojo o jojo 1 1 nj Ko Digital Indicator Loop Status Word LHDSSW channel n 1 parameter I 1 0 MANUAL ODD _ R W 1 AUTO 0
110. 1 Analog Input See note 2 e g Model 340 or 1 5 20 SITRANS P DSIII AIN1 4 A7 _ Analog Input 2 Wire Transmitter 250 j 4 para an 2 e g Model 340 or 4 20 mA Output 1 Station d og SITRANS DSIII Common Sene A8 2 Wire Transmitter 4 20 mA Output X03109S3 Power Supply Common Ground Bus Earth Notes Ground 1 See UM353 1 0 354 1 or UM354N 1 Table 8 1 for AIN2 3 and 4 terminals 2 Recorder inputs are isolated 1 5 Vdc Refer to UM363 1 for other Recorder analog inputs 3 Refer to UM363 1 for power requirements and detailed wiring and grounding information FIGURE 8 25 Moore 353 To Model 363 VIEWPAC Analog Input Wiring 8 4 14 Power Wiring Basic connections for AC and DC power input are shown in Figure 8 26 Wiring guidelines are given in Section 8 4 2 Model 353A Model 353D Rear Terminals Rear Terminals gt gt External Hot H H ACToDC MA DCToDC 120 240 Vac Neutral N Power Supply N Power Supply 5 25W on 24 47 63 H MPU Board 25W MPU Board 7997 Earth Ground G 8 Earth Ground G 8 0310650 H Terminal on rear of case Green screw at top center of rear terminal area FIGURE 8 26 Controller Power Wirin
111. 1 L G6SMT 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 9 94 95 96 L G7TAG L G7P1T L G7P2T L G7SAT L G7F1T L G7FOT L G7SMT 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 n L G8TAG L G8P1T L G8P2T L G8SAT 2003 6 11 Network Communications UM353 1 6 12 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 0 DATA MAPPING This section provides loop and station data mapping for Modbus Local Instrument Link and Ethernet Modbus is standard LIL and Ethernet option boards are available and the correct board must be installed to enable either communication protocol With the Ethernet option data is accessed using Modbus commands embedded within the TCP protocol This is becoming known within the industry as the Open Modbus TCP Protocol The controller has an RS232 port that always communicates via Modbus It is located on the underside of the operator faceplate Each controller also has a multi drop network connection that is either Modbus LIL when the optional LIL board is installed or Ethernet when the optional Ethernet board is installed The Ethernet connection is made using the standard RJ45 connector The network can interconnect e Procidia 1 Moore 352 Moore 353 and Moore 354N Controllers and a computer running i ware PC ProcessSuite MYCROADVANTAGE or other operator interface software that includes the communication driver e
112. 1 Not Ack d Status V1 3 1 0 00340 48 1 4 10 12 L XAT W 1 Transfer Autotune Parameters V1 3 1 0 00341 48 1 4 10 13 PB1SW Input MD V1 3 1 0 00342 48 1 4 10 14 L PB2CR W PB2SW Input MD V1 3 1 0 00343 48 1 4 10 15 These bits indicate status of the switch input write of a 1 will have same effect pressing and releasing button on the faceplate If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle March 2003 7 19 Data Mapping UM353 1 Control Loop Status Word L CLS channel n 3 parameter 1 0 Auto Manual A 1 O Manual RW 2 Standby SS I Standy IR 6 Ramping Setpoint RS 1 Ramping Setpoint SETPT RS Emergency Manual EM I EmergncyManal 9 Configuration Hold CH I Configuation Hold 12 Alarms are of Service OS 1 Out of Service ALARM RW 13 UI Status Active UIS I Ul Active IR 14 U2 Status Active U28 st U2 Active IR 1 Autotune is active AT 1 Autotune RW Control Loop Alarm Status Word L ASW channel n 4 parameter I 0 Alarm Lis Active Al l Active ALARM R 1 Alarm I is Not Acknowledged 1 I Not Acknowledge
113. 2 2 2 E 4 gt pa uan 2 PN address is set to 1 In some cases other Modbus devices may use a different address or when going through a Modbus TCP IP gateway a Modbus network may have multiple devices each having a unique address The START CL parameter identifies the location of the first Coil Subsequent Coils up to 16 can be obtained by setting the NO OF CL parameter to a value greater than 1 The DATA parameter enables reading of Coils Modbus Function Code 01 or Inputs Modbus Function Code 02 Both are treated the same but the Coil type is the most common usage The UD RATE parameter configures the rate at which the block will request data The P2P setting will update the data at the rate set by the 2 RATE parameter in the ETHERNET block The Ct setting will update the data at the cycle time of the controller Output QS indicates the quality of the received data and will go high 1 when the data is bad This is normally associated with failure to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the source Requires Ethernet communications board firmware version 2 0 or later March 2003 3 35 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 26 Characterizer CHR_ function blocks provide 10 segments that can be used to characterize the X input signal Individual segments are configured by entering the Xn Yn and Xn 1 1 points for each segment Xn 1 points m
114. 2 3 45 4 TIN P U T INPUTA loop tag block tag output INPUT INPUTTV i loop tag block tag output null INPUTTC loop tag block tag output null INPUT E M INPUT EM H loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 Available with Firmware version 1 30 or later pulser changes from the operator faceplate The range pointer also defines the range of the manual function as 10 to 110 This can be useful to prevent inadvertent changes from an operator workstation that might set the manual value well beyond the local operator s changeable range In most cases the Range input range pointer will connect to the controller function block An unconfigured range pointer will default the range to 0 00 100 00 M 2 Output TV Track Variable gt gt 01 TC Auto Status AS EM Emergency Manual Not Auto Status _ gt NA a MS 2 ES X03129S0 3 gt SS BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks EMERgency MANual will be asserted when input EM is high 1 This causes the output to hold at the last position and permits the operator to adjust the manual value under the conditions listed for MANual It will also assert an EM MAN status at the configured priority to the operator display STANDBY will be asserted wh
115. 2 Analog End Point Real 43957 60 1 2 152 153 L S003TIM R W Step 3 Time Period min Real 43959 60 1 3 150 151 L S003AEP R W Step 3 Analog End Point Real 43961 60 1 3 152 153 L S004TIM R W Step 4 Time Period min Real 43963 60 1 4 150 151 L S004AEP R W Step 4 Analog End Point Real 43965 60 1 4 152 153 L S005TIM R W Step 5 Time Period min Real 43967 60 1 5 150 151 L S005AEP R W Step 5 Analog End Point Real 43969 60 1 5 152 153 L S006TIM R W Step 6 Time Period min Real 43971 60 1 6 150 151 L S006AEP R W Step 6 Analog End Point Real 43973 60 1 6 152 153 L S007TIM R W Step 7 Time Period min Real 43975 60 1 7 150 151 L S007AEP R W Step 7 Analog End Point Real 43977 60 1 7 152 153 L S008TIM R W Step 8 Time Period min Real 43979 60 1 8 150 151 LHS008AEP R W Step 8 Analog End Point Real 43981 60 1 8 152 153 L S009TIM R W Step 9 Time Period min Real 43983 60 1 9 150 151 5009 R W Step 9 Analog End Point Real 43985 60 1 9 152 153 L S010TIM R W Step 10 Time Period min Real 43987 60 1 10 150 151 L S010AEP R W Step 10 Analog End Point Real 43989 60 1 10 152 153 spares 4499 1 44009 60 1 7 14 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Controller ODA V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L QIMNF R W Quickset 1 MIN SCALE Real 43951 60 1 n 1 31 32 L QIMXF R W Quickset 1 MAX SCALE Real 43953 60 1 n 1 33 34 L Q2MNF R W Quickset 2 MIN S
116. 48586 n a Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A3D1 through A3D170 to 0 A4RMN R ATD04 MIN SCALE Real 48601 n a A4RMX R ATD04 MAX SCALE Real 48603 n a A4DPP R ATD04 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48605 n a A4EU R ATD04 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48606 n a A4YR R ATD04 Year V2 0 5 1997 48609 n a A4MT R ATD04 Month V2 0 5 1 12 48610 n a A4DY R ATD04 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48611 n a A4HR R ATD04 Hour V2 0 5 0 23 48612 n a A4MN R ATD04 Minute V2 0 5 0 59 48613 n a A4SC R ATD04 Second V2 0 5 0 59 48614 n a A4ST R W ATD04 Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48615 n a A4STC R ATD04 Sample Time Complete 0 1000 x 1 48616 n a A4D1 R ATD04 Data latest 0 100 128 3968 48617 n a A4D2 R ATD04 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48618 n a A4D3 R ATD04 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48619 n a A4D168 R ATD04 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48784 n a A4D169 R ATD04 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48785 n a A4D170 R ATD04 Data 170 0 100 128 3968 48786 n a Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A4D1 through A4D170 to 0 7 44 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL ASRMN R ATD05 MIN SCALE Real 48801 n a ASRMX R ATD05 MAX SCALE Real 48803 n a ASDPP R ATD05 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48805 n a ASEU R ATD05 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48806 n a ASYR R ATD05 Year V2 0 5 1997 48809 n a ASMT R ATD05 Month V2 0 5 1 12 48810 n a ASDY R ATD05 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48811 n a ASHR R ATD05 Hour V2
117. 5 INB INI INputB GAIN s INC GA 1 INputC GAIN OUT BIAS 5 INA 5 inputa BIAS 9 INput BIAS 5 INput BIAS 5 OPeration 5 gt Output 1 1 0 Real 1 0 aie Real 1 0 age Real 1 0 e Real 0 0 Real 0 0 Real 0 0 Real 0 0 Add Sub Mul Div Add Sub Mul Div Add INPUT A loop tag block tag output null the numerator If the numerator is 0 the output will be 0 keen tum INPUT loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq 001 to 250 MATH INput A 3 A Input A SAN INput BIAS INput B B pap san E se Be INput B BIAS INput OPeration B OUTput C gt GAIN PL gt Add Sub Mul Div GAIN rr P 01 Input C Output 1 INput OUTput 7 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 60 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 60 MUL Multiplication MUL function blocks perform arithmetic multiplication on the three input signals Any unused input will be set to 1 0 and will therefore have no affect on the output Input A v Input B Output 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 61 NND NAND Logic NND function blocks perform logical NAND on
118. 6 C Conformity lt 0 06 Software Output Analog configurable C F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 10 C C Type T Thermocouple Range Limits sess 240 C to 370 C 400 to 698 F Performance Range 100 to 370 ACOUTACY iod ERI 0 5 Conformity sssrini lt 0 06 Software Output Analog configurable F Ambient Temperature Effect 0 07 C C Thermocouple Range Limits 1 2222 185 C to 1000 C 300 F to 1830 F Performance Range 0 to 1000 C athe 0 5 C Conformity essen lt 0 06 Software Output Analog configurable F K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 07 C C Thermocouple Range Limits Performance Range 18 C to 1650 C 0 F to 3000 F 200 to 1650 C Accuracy 0 7 C Conformity lt 0 06 Software Output Type Analog configurable C F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 14 C C R Thermocouple Range Limits
119. A P 200 P 1P Jaod PE TL 1 amp i Analog Input DIRect ACTing Display T TOTalizer_UNITs 3 211 Stop 5 Reset R INITital VALUE PRESET 1 Trip 1 700 PD T1 Trip 1 External Setting Alarm 1 T1 A gt 1 2 ds M fa gt T2 2 External Setting Alarm 2 gt T2 gt A2 PULse SCALing PuLse gt 00001 99999 gt PL Required Available i 0 5 Max Pulse Rate A maximum Max Pulse Time Base sec PUL SCAL Cycle Time BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 32 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 23 BATSW Batch Switch BATSW function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis Each is used with a PID function block to eliminate overshoot during startup conditions When placed in the feedback path of the controller it causes the reset component of the controller to be reduced if controller action 15 Rev Without the use of a batch switch during startup the controller output 1 GE R will equal full output since the reset will wind up This requires the process to overshoot the setpoint in order to bring the controller output back down With a batch switch in the feedback path a lower reset value will be present when crossover occurs thus reducing or eliminating overshoot As input A equals or exceeds the HI or LO LIMIT setting the output of the batch switch will be either decreased HI
120. I e eS ae 10 7 10 2 SYSTEM CHECKOUT e TR E Ie AIR E EC ere ges 10 7 11 0 11 1 11 1 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT 11 1 14 2PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 11 2 11 2 1 Environmental Considerations eesssssssessessesee eee enne enne nennen nee ener nes 11 2 11 22 Visual Inspection ru r tee dime gie tei Pep RR e RES 11 2 123 Cleaning une EGRE RR RU IO 11 2 11 24 Circuit Board Handling eee RW ete RR ee Ree 11 3 11 3 TROUBEESHOOTING va iv iet ertt te EE E disk eH e ERU e 11 3 11 4 ERROR CODES terere ERE NATRE asken 11 7 11 5 ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT deett eiie retenti etie eie re ami Rede dedit 11 12 HERE EE er OE aer n a 11 12 1 52 1 1 5 tam ate aem fs 11 12 11 5 2 1 To Replace a Display nennen ener enne 11 12 11 5 2 2 To Replace Bezel or Circuit eren 11 13 11 5 3 MPU Controller Board 2 edet e eI D E ERE ER HALE Ye 11 14 11 54 VO Expander Board eene t 11 15 11 5 5 Accessoty Boards o5 obiecto etan 11 16 11 5 6 Ethernet Cable etae nk SURE WIRE URINE ee ieee 11 20 12 0 CALIBRATION Por DIE 12 1 12 J ANAEOG INPUT AIN 14 nesen tenne atte sekkene 12 2 12 2 ANALOG OUTPUT AOQUTI Pa e AE ee
121. L S006GII R W Step 6 Group 1 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41203 30 1 6 155 LHS006G10 Step 6 Group 1 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41204 30 1 6 171 L S006G2I Step 6 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41205 30 1 6 156 L S006G2O R W_ Step 6 Group 2 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41206 30 1 6 172 L S007G0I Step 7 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41207 30 1 7 154 L S007G0O R W Step 7 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41208 30 1 7 170 LHS009G2I Step 9 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41223 30 1 9 156 L S009G2O Step 9 Group 2 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41224 30 1 9 172 L S010GOI Step 10 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41225 30 1 10 154 LHS010G00 Step 10 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41226 30 1 10 170 L S010G1I Step 10 Group 1 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41227 30 1 10 155 LHS010G10 Step 10 Group 1 Output Mask 0000 41228 30 1 10 171 L S010G2I Step 10 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 41229 30 1 10 156 L S010G2O R W Step 10 Group 2 Output Mask 0000 41230 30 1 10 172 Analog Discrete amp Pushbutton Indicators ODA ODD ODP V2 1 Code Description Register LIL NOTE Registers 40451 40480 reserved for Tags when display has been selected in configuration March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 3 4 Dynami
122. MLTP Modbus Loop Trend Pointer included in version 1 30 firmware parameter AASEL Active Acknowledged Station Error Log included in version 1 30 firmware parameter e other items as noted below 7 2 1 Integer Data 16 bit Integer Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL GDS R Global Data Size LIL 7 256 0007 0100 n a 1 1 ST R Station Type 6 0006 40001 2 1 SSW R W Station Status Word see Station Status Word see coils 3 1 SE R W Station Error 0 32767 00000 7FFF 40002 4 1 NCL R No of Control Loops of ODC 0 255 0000 00FF 40003 5 1 NSL R No of Seq Loops of ODS 0 255 0000 00FF 40004 6 1 RAM R RAM Size size in K bytes 0 65535 0000 FFFF 40005 1 2 CBT R Controller Board Type see below 40006 1 3 CBSR R Controller Board Software Rev see below 40007 1 4 EBT R Board Type see below 40008 1 5 EBSR R Exp I O Board Software Rev see below 40009 1 6 RBT R Remote I O Board Type A 1 see below 40010 1 7 RBSR R Remote I O A 1 Software Rev see below 40011 1 8 NBT R Network Board Type B 1 see below 40012 1 9 NBSR Network B 1 Software Rev see below 40013 1 10 OAT R Option Board A Type A 2 see below 40014 1 11 OASR R Option 2 Software Rev see below 40015 1 12 Option Board 2 see below 40016 1 13 OBSR R Option B B 2 Rev see below 40017 1 14 OFT R Operator Faceplate Type see below 40018 1 15 DRN R Model
123. Message g V1 3 16 ASCII Char 45515 100 1 n 3 49 56 L CMSGh Conditional Message h V1 3 16 ASCII Char 45523 100 1 4 49 56 L CMSGi R Conditional Message i V1 3 16 ASCII Char 45531 100 1 5 49 56 L RMSG R Recipe Message V2 2 12 ASCII Char 45539 100 1 n 25 30 spares 0000 45545 45550 100 1 Conditional messages are stacked in the order of occurrence The 9 most recent active conditional messages can be viewed over LIL or Modbus Version 1 3 included the Recipe Message at 45451 Version 2 2 moved the Recipe Message to a new location and placed the Loop Tag in place of the Recipe Message 7 16 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Analog Indicator ODA V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L TAG R Loop Tag 12 ASCII Char 45451 100 1 4 2 7 1 1 R Process 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45457 100 1 n 4 6 L P1U R W Process 1 Units 6 ASCII Char 45460 100 1 n 7 9 L P2T R Process 2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45463 100 1 1 4 6 L P2U R W Process 2 Units 6 ASCII Char 45466 100 1 n 1 7 9 L P3T R Process 3 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45469 100 1 2 4 6 L P3U R W Process 3 Units 6 ASCII Char 45472 100 1 n 2 7 9 L P4T R Process 4 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45475 100 1 nt3 4 6 L P4U R W Process 4 Units 6 ASCII Char 45478 100 1 n 3 7 9 L QIN R Quickset Hold 1 Name 8 ASCII Char 45481 100 1 n 1 25 28 L Q1U R W Quickset Hold 1 Units 6 ASCII Char 45485 100 1 n 1 22 24 L Q2N R Quickset Hold 2
124. Name 8 ASCII Char 45488 100 1 n 2 25 28 L Q2U R W Quickset Hold 2 Units 6 ASCII Char 45492 100 1 2 22 24 L Q3N R Quickset Hold 3 Name 8 ASCII Char 45495 100 1 nt3 25 28 L Q3U R W Quickset Hold 3 Units 6 ASCII Char 45499 100 1 n 3 22 24 L Q4N R Quickset Hold 4 Name 8 ASCII Char 45502 100 1 n 4 25 28 L Q4U R W Quickset Hold 4 Units 6 ASCII Char 45506 100 1 n 4 22 24 spares 0000 45509 45550 100 1 Discrete Indicator ODD V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL LZTAG R Loop Tag 12 ASCII Char 45451 100 1 3 2 7 LHIOT R Input 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45457 100 1 n 2 4 L NT R Input 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45460 100 1 nt1 2 4 LZI2T R Input 2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45463 100 1 2 2 4 LZI3T R Input 3 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45466 100 1 n 5 7 L I4T R Input 4Tag 6 ASCII Char 45469 100 1 nt1 5 7 L IST R Input 5 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45472 100 1 2 5 7 L I6T R Input 6 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45475 100 1 n 8 10 L I7T R Input 7 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45478 100 1 1 8 10 L I8T R Input 8 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45481 100 1 n 2 8 10 L I9T R Input 9 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45484 100 1 n 11 13 L IAT R Input A Tag 6 ASCII Char 45487 100 1 n 1 11 13 L IBT R Input B Tag 6 ASCII Char 45490 100 1 n 2 11 13 L ICT R Input C Tag 6 ASCII Char 45493 100 1 n 14 16 L IDT R Input D Tag 6 ASCII Char 45496 100 1 n 1 14 16 R Input E Tag 6 ASCII Char 45499 100 1 2 14 16 L IFT R Input F Tag 6 ASCII Char 45502 100
125. Power Wiring or Fuse T Black G G G LS 522 Wg LE gt o No er ANH 120 240 Vac ANNI UNL UNIT AN or 24 Green Earth Ground Terminal on rear of case Green ground screw at top First Case Rear center of rear terminal area a 353 Terminals Medel 353 n The Row o In The Row H Hot or 3 Neutral or 8 FIGURE 8 28 Daisy Chained Power Wiring 1 Strip ground wire s 3 8 10 mm to 1 2 13 mm Clamp the ground wire s under the green square pressure plate and ground screw case safety ground at top center of each rear terminal area Tighten the ground screw to 20 in 165 2 Remove 1 4 6 mm to 5 16 8 mm from each Hot and Neutral wire to be inserted in a terminal or crimp on connector 3 Crimp On Connector only Insert the wires into the crimp on connector until the wires are visible at the pin end of the connector Use a standard electrical connector crimp tool to crimp the connection Be certain that both power input wires are fully inserted in the connector before crimping 4 Loosen the terminal screw using a straight blade screwdriver with a 1 8 3 mm blade width 5 Insert the striped wire or crimp on connector pin into the termina
126. R W 20501 Forced state F 1 0 03496 1 213 15 DIS6NO R 01506 Normal state of LON Input 0 1 0 03881 6 208 0 DIS6NF R 01506 Normal state of LON Input 1 0 03896 6 208 15 DIS6MO R W DIS06 Mode of FB Output 0 1 0 03897 6 209 0 DIS6MF R W DIS06 Mode of FB Output F 1 0 03912 6 209 15 DIS6FO R W DIS06 Forced state 0 1 0 03913 6 210 0 DIS6FF R W 01506 Forced state F 1 0 03928 6 210 15 DOS6N0 R 20506 Normal state of FB Input 0 1 0 03929 6 211 0 DOS6NF R DOS06 Normal state of FB Input F 1 0 03944 6 211 15 DOS6M0 R W 20506 Mode of LON Output 0 1 0 03945 6 212 0 DOS6MF R W 20506 Mode of LON Output F 1 0 03960 6 212 15 DOS6F0 R W 20506 Forced state 0 1 0 03961 6 213 0 DOS6FF R W 20506 Forced state F 1 0 03976 6 213 15 7 36 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Discrete Input Remote xx Normal State Word of Function Block Outputs DIDxxN 0 DIDxx Output O0 Normal State I highO low DIDxx IR 00 6 DIDxx Output O6 Normal State I highO low DIDxx IR 1 8 DIDxx Output O8 Normal State 1 0 DIDxx IR 08 9 DIDxx Output O9 Normal State l high0 lov DIDxx IR 1 09 DIDxx Output OB Normal State I highO low _ DIDxx IR OB 13 DIDxx Output OD Normal State I highO low _ DIDxx IR 1 Discrete Input Remote xx Mode Word of Function Block outputs DIDxxM Description Read Write DIDxx Mode of Output O0 1 forced 0 normal
127. SCH R 1 Station Configuration Hold 1 0 00007 3 1 6 SRB R W 1 Station Run Bit 1 0 00008 3 1 7 OOS R W 1 Station Alarms Out of Service 1 0 00009 3 1 8 V2 0 spares 0 00010 00014 3 1 9 10 Config Change Bit 1 1 0 n a 3 1 11 CC2 R W Config Change Bit 2 1 0 n a 3 1 12 CC3 R W Config Change Bit 3 1 0 n a 3 1 13 SEB R 1 Station Error Bit 1 0 00015 3 1 14 spare 0 00016 3 1 15 spares 0 0000 00017 00071 7 2 4 Station Status Word SSW channel 3 parameter 1 0 Active Station Event ASE 1 Active Evet R 1 Station Event Not Ack d SEN 1 Not Acknowledged RW 2 Flashing Bargraph FSB 1 Flashing Bargraph_ RUT 3 Database Valid SDV __ I Valid IR 4 ConfigChange Counter LSB 11 R 5 Config Change Counter MSB 10 7 6 Configuration Hold SCH L Hod Station Run Bit SRB 1 Ru 1 not used ntused do EN EE O March 2003 7 5 Data Mapping UM353 1 7 3 LOOP DATA Loop data is grouped into several categories The groupings are not as significant when using the LIL option as all LIL data has been mapped consistent with previous LIL products using Global and Non Global data However when using Modbus the groupings enable single data requests up to 60 Words Registers or 48 Coils to obtain similar data with a single command The loop will have
128. STEP DOWN LOOPO1 will appear on the display with the 1 digit flashing Use the pulser knob to change the value of the flashing character and press store to save the change Use the arrow buttons to move to another character Try changing the TAG to TC101 5 Press ENTER EXIT CONF to return to normal operation mode 6 Press TAG to view tag names longer than 6 characters 10 1 8 QUICK When in normal operation mode the QUICK button can be used to step through the QUICK SET parameters of any function block which has this feature enabled In FCO101 the SETPT function block has the QUICK SET feature enabled as a default Press the QUICK button and note that you can scroll through the following Setpoint features RAMP ON OFF Ramp RATE TARGET setpoint and POWER UP SETPOINT The ramp feature can either use a ramp TIME or a ramp RATE USE RATE is set to YES as the default see SETPT function block details in Section 3 2 To see how the Ramp rate works make sure the controller is in AUTO mode and do the following steps 1 Press QUICK to display RRATE 2 Rotate the pulser knob to set the ramp RATE to 300 and press STORE Since the SETPT range pointer is configured for AIN1 scaled 100 to 500 DEG 300 will represent a ramp rate of 300 DEG F min 3 Press QUICK to display TARGET Set the target to 250 and press STORE 4 Press QUICK to display R ON OFF Turn the pulser knob to change the setting to ON and press STORE 5 Press ENTER EXIT to d
129. State V1 3 AOP01 25 Analog Output lev Percent DOD 6 Digital Output lev Discrete 16 Channels DID 6 Digital Input lev Discrete 16 Channels DOS1 6 Digital Output State V1 3 2 7 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE Each controller must be configured to perform the desired control strategy The arrangement of functions and the numerical data required for a particular control circuit are referred to as the controller configuration Local and remote configurations are accommodated Local configuration involves the configuration pushbuttons and the pulser knob on the Display Assembly s faceplate Section 9 2 Configuration Mode shows the faceplate and provides brief descriptions of control functions Remote configuration requires a personal computer running the ijconfig Graphical Configuration Utility and either a configuration cable or a Modbus LIL or Ethernet network connection The configuration can be created at and downloaded from the personal computer A network connection is made at the controller s terminals The configuration cable plugs into the configuration port in the underside of a 352Plus or 353 Display Assembly or into 354N DB9 connector The other end of this cable connects to a personal computer s serial port or to a modem A WARNING Explosion hazard Explosion can cause death or serious injury In a potentially explosive atmosphere remove power from the equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal or o
130. TAG 5 Input 3 TAG 5 Input 4 TAG 5 Input 5 TAG 5 Input 6 TAG 5 8 5 Input 8 TAG 5 6 6 Input 7 TAG 5 6 Input 9 TAG 5 Input A TAG 5 Input B TAG 5 Input C TAG 5 Input D TAG 5 Input E TAG 5 Input F TAG 5 O gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt INPUT 0 H INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 H INPUT 4 INPUT 5 H INPUT 6 INPUT 7 H INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C INPUT D INPUT E H TDM D O e SN gt 0 UZ 0 BOO DO O O BB BO O O OO aaa aaa to O Tqmmeg om gt pos o zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz rr INPUT LIL starting n VIEW Operator Display loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output
131. TENG TRESTEG SES A gt O1 ON 01 0 DLY TIME ET BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 52 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 47 External Internal Transfer Switch function blocks can be used on one per loop basis to select an analog signal connected to input E External or input I Internal as a setpoint for the loop controller The position of the switch can be changed on each positive transition of input ST and will normally be connected to the PS output of pushbutton block PB2SW configured for momentary action The SE output will normally be connected to the MD input of pushbutton block PB2SW E I switch position will be shown on the operator faceplate by a lighted LED green for E red for I The E I switch position can also be changed by command over the Modbus or LIL network When PU LAST is set to YES the E I switch will power up in the last position during a hot or a warm start During a cold start it will power up in the TRANSFER SWITCH EN ESN 000 Switch Transfer External Input E TRANSFER SWITCH Internal Input I Internal Override F Power LAST 5 INPUT ST INPUT E z Zzvuo wZzencs m MHeccHrzm m gt POWER position 5 INPUT 1
132. The flexible software supports reusable function blocks beneficial in solving a vast array of control strategies such as single loop cascade and dual loop The Controller Board assembly contains both analog and digital circuits The analog circuitry operates in real time while the microprocessor based digital circuitry operates at high speed under program control The MPU microprocessor unit contains CPU32 core System Integration Module SIM a queued SPI module QSPI timer module and two general purpose 8 bit ports The MPU 15 capable of arithmetic logical and support circuit control functions and interacts with surrounding on board and off board circuitry to control the internal operation of the 353 The MPU Board also contains 16 bit RAM 16 bit ROM a 2 wire RS485 connection and an RS232 connection The CPU32 communicates with the RAM ROM and external communications boards via the SIM AII communication between the MPU and the I O display and expander board 15 done via the QSPI The QSPI is a full duplex synchronous serial interface with a queue for receive and transmit data Communication consists of timing control data and sequencing information The Controller Board has three analog inputs 3 digital inputs 2 analog outputs and 2 digital outputs The configuration in use determines the active inputs and outputs For example Factory Configured Option FCO101 is configured to accept one analog input for the process signal and on
133. The mole percentage of the gas TS components and the base temperature and pressure are entered in the configuration and the flowing temperature and pressure are provided as block inputs Parameter base Pressure psia MOL SUM provides a read only value that is the total T b base Temperature deg F Real 60 0 fall th ds that h b d Th ME THAN METHANE composition Real 96 5222 ora gas compoun 5 ave been entered NITROGEN NITROGEN composition 2595 AGAS computation is time consuming and is calculated E DI Carbon DIOXiDe composition 5956 composition 1 8186 total of 100 scan cycles so as not to have any PIRIOIPIAINIE PROPANE composite significant effect the controller cycle time WAT ER WATER composition 0 0 HY SUL HYdrogen SULFiDe composition Real 0 0 vis 5 HYDROGEN HYDROGEN composition Real 0 0 Zs compressibility at standard conditions is calculated carbon MONOXiDe composition 0 0 OXY GEN OXYGEN composition 0 0 after a power up or after a configuration change is made i BUTANE i BUTANE aaa Zp and Zf are calculated a periodic basis with the n n BUTANE composition Real 1007 i PNT
134. Y 1s 0 0 and X is negative the output will be set to the maximum number i e 1 17 38 Input X Output 1 Input Y BLOCK DIAGRAM NATURAL EXPONENTIATION 1 loop tag block tag output Exec Seq NO 000to 250 000 Output 1 null EXPONENTIATION Input X x SYA gt Output 1 InputY Y X INPUTX loop tag block tag output INPUT Y loop tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq 000to250 000 March 2003 3 55 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 51 FTG_ Falling Edge Trigger FTG_ function blocks provide a high 1 output for one scan cycle each time input P transitions from a high 1 input to a low 0 input Output 4 o1 Pulse Input BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 52 GB Gain amp Bias GB function blocks provide action gain and bias adjustments to input signal A Although this block can provide signal scaling it should not be used 1f needed as a reference for a range pointer The SCL function block should be used when scaling is required for this purpose FALLING EDGE TRIGGER FTG EsN 000 P
135. YES INPUT block tag output null INPUT E loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No 000 250 000 Buren loop tag block null Several inputs can control the operation of the function block Input enable be used to enable the trend function when high 1 or unconfigured Trend action can be disabled by setting E low 0 Each time the function block is enabled new trend packet will be created The block also includes parameter OVER WRIT that when set to YES will cause the block to overwrite old data 1 circular file When the parameter is set to NO the block will stop trending when full and retain the data until reset When the full state is reached output TF Trend Full will go high 1 This function can be used to enable second ATD block 3 28 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 20 ARCTANGENT function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher output a signal in radians of which the input is the tangent X X gt 01 Input X Output1 BLOCK DIAGRAM ARCTANGENT EsN 000 Input X xD O1 X O1 Output 1 I NIPIU T X INPUTX loop tag block tag output N Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 March 2003 3 29
136. and raceways are commonly used for routing panel wiring Wiring not installed in conduit or raceway should be clamped or supported approximately every 12 inches 300 mm March 2003 8 9 Installation Terminal Function ID and Number Network Communications A 3 Case Safety Ground N Network Communications B NCB 4 BA lt Transmitter Power 26 Vdc XMTR 5 Transmitter Station Common 6 DN NGOS 2 2 wo N DS Transmitter Power 26 Vdc XMTR 7 Digital Output 1 DOUT1 8 Digital Outputs 1 2 Common DOUTC 9 Digital Output 2 DOUT2 10 Digital Input 1 DIN1 11 Digital Input 1 DIN 12 Digital Input 2 DIN2 13 Digital Input 2 DIN2 14 Digital Input 3 DIN3 15 Digital Input 3 DIN3 16 Analog Output 1 AOUT1 17 Analog Output 1 2 Common AOUTC 18 Analog Output 2 AOUT2 19 S Analog Input 1 AIN1 20 7 N Power Input AC Hot or DC H N AC Neutral or DC N HiBIpBEBBBBHES QQSSPSJSN JPNSQ pssSsoepdeposepsos
137. applicable approval agency requirements and are considered sound practice Neither Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc nor these agencies are responsible for repairs made by the user March 2003 viii UM353 1 Contents PREFACE Conventions and Symbols The following symbols may appear in this manual and may be applied to the equipment The reader should become familiar with the symbols and their meaning Symbols are provided to quickly alert the user to safety related situations issues and text Symbol Meaning Indicates an immediate hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death DANGER or serious injury Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death vare or serious injury Indicates potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor A CAUTION or moderate injury Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in CAUTION property damage Indicates a potential situation which if not avoided may result in an undesirable NOTICE result or state Important Identifies an action that should be taken to avoid an undesirable result or state Note Identifies additional information that should be read Electrical shock hazard The included Warning text states that the danger of electrical shock is present A Electrical shock hazard Indica
138. are available when the optional LIL communication board is installed They enable the station ANALOG OUTPUT LIL to provide a LIL global output received as an interconnection from another function block AOL block numbers are assigned in sequence with each use station wide The configuration requires the entry of a LIL Channel number to which the data is to be assigned The mus s range pointer parameter input R enables the block to scale the LIL global output GO in the standard 80 80 Range re ANALOG OUTPUT LIL range for the range of input S Ifthe pointer is not LILLI CHI LIL CHANnel H aaa 006 to 255 null RIG RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag null configured the value will be scaled as 0 00 to 100 00 I NIPIUIT men 7 8 9 10 11 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 n GO MINSCALE MAXSCALE ENG UNITS Input S March 2003 3 25 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 16 AOP Analog Output lev Percent AOP function blocks convert a function block interconnection signal input S to a output which is bound to a network variable in a node on the LonWorks network having a SNVT Standard Network Variable Type of lev percent A maximum of 25 AOP blocks can be used up to the limit of nodes allowed on the Lon network or the memory limit of the controller Each use of the block will be assigned a unique station wide ID e g AOP13 These blocks will be available wh
139. b ANU c gt A MIN DIG FILT OUT BIAS MINSCALE MAXSCALE DP P DTMUNI TS ENGUNI TS CAL TYPE CAL ZERO CAL FULL CAL VIL EW Output Range UNIVERSAL Output 1 T C RTD MV OHMS SLIDEWIRE Quality Status Rev 3 SENsor Cal Input Values Table 15 MINimum Sen Min Max Table 15 SENsor MAXimum Sen Min Max Table 75 DIGital FILTer s 0 to 180 sec 0 sec OUTput BIAS s Real 0 0 MINimum SCALE Sen Min Max Table 185 MAXimum SCALE Sen Min Max Table 1100 Decimal Pt Position preferred S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 Dir Temp Meas UNITS S input Types Table 1 ENGineering UNITS Input Types Table 1 CAL Sen Min Max Table _ FLD FAC ZERO field calibration c Cal Input Values Table FULL scale field cal Cal Input Values Table VIEW input verify cal c placed in the ENG UNITS parameter When OHMs or are selected the ENG UNITS parameter can be configured to correspond to the process engineering units The default SEN MIN and MIN SCALE are set to the minimum operating value and the SEN MAX amp MAX SCALE are set to the maximum operating value SEN MIN amp SEN MAX always indicate the sensor range limits in degrees C However it is important to enter the actual intended operating range in the MINS
140. block is in a limit condition HI SELECTOR LO SELECTOR od a gt O1 utput 1 High limit Status gt HS Low limit Status LS LO LIMIT HI LIMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM LIMIT LMT ESN 000 gt Output 1 Input LAD LIMIT High Status Low Status HI High LIMIT 5 Real 100 00 LO LOW LIMIT S Real 0 00 INPUT INPUT A loop tag block tag output null EIS Exec Seq No 001 to 250 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 57 NATURAL LOGARITHM LN_ function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher will output the natural logarithm of input X When the input is lt 0 0 the input will be treated as the smallest number greater than 0 0 i e 1 17 e 38 and the LN will be computed accordingly TN gt 01 Input X Output1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 58 LOG LOGARITHM BASE 10 NATURAL LOGARITHM EsN 000 j Input X X O LNe X gt Output 1 INPUT X loop tag block tag output null 5 Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 LOG function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher will output the logarithm to the base 10 of input X When the input is lt 0 0 the input will be treated
141. by the POWER UP parameter When the POWER UP parameter is used and the block powers up in MAN the manual value can be set using the PU MAN parameter Clock Wise MANual configured as YES the default position will cause the manual value to increase with clockwise rotation of the knob This feature is useful when clockwise rotation is desired to always open a value whether the valve is direct or reverse acting EMergency MANual in firmware 1 30 and higher allows the position of the A M block Manual Switch switch 1 in the block diagram and the associated light to be configured When the EM input goes high 1 the Emergency Manual Switch switch 2 switches to manual If EM MAN is configured as YES the Manual Switch switch 1 and the indicator light will switch to the manual position assuming that switch 1 is in Auto and will remain in the manual position until the operator presses the A M button or a command is received from an HMI to switch to Auto The EM Switch switch 2 will remain in the manual position until the EM status clears regardless of the position of the Manual Switch switch 1 If the EM MAN parameter is configured as NO the Manual Switch switch 1 and associated indicator light will not change position when the EM input goes high 1 LOCK MAN in V2 4 can be set to YES to lock the loop in manual when Emergency Manual has been activated The operator can switch the loop to Auto only when the EM condition has cleared This feat
142. can be entered manually using Hold function blocks computed and then downloaded from a host device or calculated in the controller using the AG8 AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas function block The following are analog outputs of the AGA 3 function block Qp volume flow rate at base conditions SCFH Standard Cubic Feet per Hour C composite orifice flow factor SCFH Y psia in H20 Pr dw Tr AGA 3 Gr 215 0 p gt Qb Application Diagram 3 12 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 5 AG7 AGA 7 Measurement of Gas by Turbine Meters AG7 function blocks which can be used on a one per loop basis are available in firmware 1 30 and higher This block uses the AGA 7 American Gas Association Report 7 calculation to accurately measure the volume flow of gas at base conditions using a turbine meter The basic equations calculated by this block in accordance with AGA Turbine Meter Report No 7 1985 AGA Catalog No XQ0585 are Qh 27 2 where Block output Qb is updated continuously and is the volume flow rate at conditions in the same units as input volume flow at standard conditions volume flow rate at base conditions flowing pressure psia flowing temperature compressibility at flowing conditions base pressure psia base temperature F compressibility at base conditions
143. define the major functions of a loop The operator display function block e g ODC Operator Display for Controllers defines the loop type the function of the local faceplate as well as the processing of commands coming from a LPL x Setpoint sp PID remote workstation A single controller function block can be selected from FT CONTROLLER one of five available choices ID ON OFF PD PIDAG amp PID within each ED loop When used within a loop the unique block name becomes wu EB lt loop gt lt block gt e g TC2053 PID for the PID controller used in loop TC2053 D Output gt Absolute Error AT Warning Arithmetic Function Blocks are also designated as LOOP function blocks can be used as many times as needed in each loop Each use of a block is ESN 000 automatically assigned a unique name i e MATHO1 MATHO2 within each loop so that the unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g BP Gp SALEN disi 2053 01 CP Logic Function Blocks are also designated as LOOP function blocks and _ used many times needed in each loop Each use of a block is automatically assigned a unique name i e ANDOL AND02 within each AND Budd loop so that the unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g ED TC2053 AND01 input General Purpose Functio
144. different data if assigned as a controller type i e using the ODC block a sequencer type i e using the ODS block an Analog Indicator Display i e using the ODA block or a Discrete Indicator Display i e using the ODD block or Pushbutton Switch Operation i e using the ODP block a Dynamic data may change value on each controller scan and or is not identified as being changed by the data base change bit coil This category of data usually needs to be updated by a workstation every few seconds Variable data changes periodically It is usually associated with on line operation at a workstation but may only need to be updated on a lower periodic basis or when a data base change is indicated b wm Static data is similar to variable data but has a lower update requirement The data may only need updating when a change is indicated or to verify a previous change made to a parameter x d String data contains tag names units and messages 7 6 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 3 1 Dynamic Loop Integer Data Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL LHPI R Process 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40201 10 1 n l LHSI R W Setpoint 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40202 1
145. eee E SUS 12 3 13 0 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION eren eee reet 13 1 13 VERVIEW AR 13 1 132 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD RI e ere ET arken 13 2 13 3 VO EXPANDER BOARD u a e erento t eere ie ertet er deni eere reri 13 2 13 4 LonWOrkS BOARD ee rotto ripe terrere e 13 3 13 5 LOCAL INSTRUMENT LINK LIL NETWORK BOARD z eerte enne 13 3 13 6 ETHERNET BOARD 5 gn pole a Pt PERO De testi ee ni tue n eot tue er 13 3 14 0 MODEL DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATION S 14 1 14 1 MODEL DESIGNATION 14 1 14 2 ACCESSORIES idet ir Hach RE en AEE 14 3 14 3 SERVICE PARTS KITS recen detiene ete eee it etie ie Ieri Eee treni p 14 4 14 4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS rennen rennen nnne 14 6 14 5 POWER INPUT ne ennt eren 14 6 14 6 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS essere 14 7 14 7 EXPANDER BOARD 14 7 14 8 COMMUNICATION BOARDS 14 10 14 8 1 LonWorks Board iei ette eget ide hee e Pe e RC RE ERR T Ee Ee dE ORA 14 10 14 8 2 LIL Network Board Local Instrument 14 10 14 83 Ethernet Board 53 eene oe tee t NAG 14 10 14 9 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS entere enn na
146. loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT AU H loop tag block tag output null A D INPUT AD H loop tag block tag output null E SN Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 A Analog Input Output 1 UPRATE DOWNRATE I Switch shown in the enabled position with Input E not connected E Enable AU Adaptive Rate Up AD Adaptive Rate Down RL Rising Limit gt gt FL Falling Limit s Revd BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 92 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 85 ROT_ Retentive On Timer ROT_ function blocks perform an on delay timing function with output states determined by inputs ON and EN When input EN is low 0 outputs D and ND are low and when input EN is high 1 the outputs will be determined by the ON input and the elapsed time When ON goes high the elapsed time will start Output D will go high after ET elapsed time equals or exceeds the DLY TIME Output RT remaining time equals DLY TIME ET If ON goes low the elapsed time will stop at the current value and will continue when ON returns to a high state The elapsed time returns to 0 0 when input EN goes low Output ND will be high 1 if input EN is high RETENTIVE ON TIMER ESN 000 gt Elapsed Time ON Input RETENTIVE RT Remaining Time ENable Input Outp
147. mode If an unacknowledged event is not within the active loop press the LOOP button to page through the loops e D Pushbutton changes the variable currently displayed Pressing this pushbutton steps the display one position in the sequence S V X and from any starting point within the display select group e UNITS Pushbutton displays the units of the variable shown in the alphanumeric display When the button is pressed the units that apply to the displayed variable will appear in the alphanumeric e g TC2053 P deg F 2053 PRCT After 3 seconds the alphanumeric display will return to the variable tag S Bargraph this vertical bargraph displays the scaled range of the controller setpoint in the Active Loop Bargraph height shows the setpoint as the 96 of range value The setpoint in engineering units can be viewed by pressing the D button to display the dot S parameter e g TC2053 S P Bargraph this vertical bargraph displays the scaled range of the controller process the Active Loop Bargraph height shows the process as the of range value The process in engineering units can be viewed by pressing the D button to display the dot P parameter e g TC2053 P e Pulser Knob rotate the Pulser to change the value in the numeric display e g Setpoint Valve or other variable configured for normal operator display changes such as Ratio Bias The Pulser knob is also used in configurat
148. o mA Expander Board Function block names and terminal identifications are listed below The output is factory calibrated for 4 20 mAdc and should not require field calibration However field calibration can be performed if desired The output is calibrated by adjusting the pulser until the desired output i e 4 0 mA for zero is obtained and then pressing the store button A verify mode is available during calibration that will show the mA value in the numeric display as the pulser adjusts the output over the full range Output QS is the Quality Status output It will go high if the output driver detects a high impedance or an open circuit The alphanumeric will flash AOUT_ OC when an open circuit condition is detected The QS output could also be used to switch to a second output circuit in a redundancy application r p Scaling DIA gt Output RanGe PoinTeR BLOCK DIAGRAM AOUT_c March 2003 3 27 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 18 ASN ARCSINE ASN function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher accept an input between 1 0 and 1 0 and provide an output signal in radians of which the input is the sine m gt o Output 1 ASIN X Input X BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 19 ATD_ Analog Trend Display ATD_ blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher can be used as needed in loops up to a maximum of 5 per loop to trend an analog var
149. of Service 1 Configuration has Changed 1 Unacknowledged Loop Event 1 Active Loop Event Range 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Coil MB 00296 48 1 00297 48 1 00298 48 1 00299 48 4 1 00300 48 1 00301 48 1 00302 48 1 00303 48 1 00304 48 1 00305 48 1 00306 48 1 00307 48 1 00308 48 1 00309 48 4 1 00310 48 4 1 00311 48 1 00312 48 1 00313 48 1 00314 48 1 00315 48 1 00316 48 1 00317 48 1 00318 48 1 00319 48 1 00320 48 1 00321 48 1 00322 48 1 00323 48 1 00324 48 1 00325 48 1 00326 48 1 00327 48 1 C P LIL n 4 1 0 4 1 1 410 n 4 1 3 n 4 1 4 n 4 1 5 n 4 1 6 n 4 1 7 4 1 8 n 4 1 9 n 4 1 10 n 4 1 11 n 4 1 12 n 4 1 13 n 4 14 n 4 1 15 n 5 1 0 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 1 1 6 5 1 7 5 1 8 5 1 9 5 1 10 5 1 11 5 1 12 n 5 1 13 n 5 1 14 n 5 1 15 These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD A write of a 1 will have the same effect as pressing and releasing the button on the faceplate Ifthe action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle 7 24 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping
150. or Green Direct Entry Case 15353 206 Mounted Connectors Case Option 4 Model 353_4 includes Flange and Case Assembly qty 1 Expanded Connector Socket Assembly with Ethernet Connector and 52 Gray or Green Case Mounted Connectors and plug mating connectors Connector Cover Case Mounting Clip and 8 32 x 1 Fillister Hd Screw qty 2 each Ground Screw Green qty 1 Upgrade Kit to Convert Mounting Case option 1 or 2 to option 4 e g Item 136 to 16353 230 Item 206 includes Assembled Connector Socket Assembly qty 1 Gray or Green Plug In Connectors for 52 Terminals Connector Cover Kit Installation Instruction Replacement Ethernet Cable Kit for an Option 4 case 15720 368 Notes to Kits e Referto User s Manual UM353 1 for accessory part numbers and for servicing a controller drawing s on previous page for disassembly and item reference numbers e dentifies a recommended on hand spare part for the indicated model Include nameplate information when ordering e Sample model number 353 A4FINNLTNNAW e NS Not Shown 14 4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Panel Cutout Dimensions See Figure 8 3 Controller Dimensions See Figures 8 4 and 8 5 14 5 POWER INPUT REQUIREMENTS Voltage Input Model 353A tie DER ak E 85 264 Vac 47 63 Hz AC power ride through time 25 msec minimum Model 353D 4 cen ct
151. or arrow buttons to scroll through the function block outputs Note that analog outputs are in engineering units and discrete status outputs represented by the black shaded arrows in the Function Block diagrams are either low 0 or high 1 5 Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode 10 2 SYSTEM CHECKOUT 1 Check that the correct circuit boards are installed and fully seated in the case as follows The controller model number on the P amp I drawing should match the model number on the controller s case Compare the model number to the Model Designation table in Section 14 to be sure the proper boards are installed NOTE When power is applied to the controller an installed hardware list can be viewed in the STATN function block Refer to Section 3 1 2 for board description and ID 2 Check all wiring between the controller and external equipment e g transmitters recorders power supplies Check for correct and secure connections correct wire gauge and insulation adequate support ties raceways conduit and protection from damage sharp edges moving equipment chemicals abrasion 3 Test all equipment connected to the controller for proper operation Refer to the equipment manufacturer s literature as necessary 4 Apply power to the controller and note the faceplate displays during power up See Section 10 1 1 for a description of the faceplate displays during power up 5 Based on the controller hardware present
152. plug in assemblies and to external process transmitters connected to the rear terminals The I O Expander board provides additional I O Networking options include Modbus Local Instrument Link and Ethernet Power gt gt MPU Controller Board Display Input Assembly with RS232 Fieldbus LonWorks MPU OBerator MMJ 11 LonWorks lt Board gt VP Protocol Faceplate 26 Vdc to Transmitters Supply Real Time Clock Configuration Y gt Backup Board or Removable Ethernet LIL or gt Configuration Board Network _ Ethernet RJ 45 Network Modbus or gt PM RO LIL Network Ara NCA NGB e Ethernet 4 20 mA Analog s i 7 Jumper gt Analog Inputs gt gt Outputs 1 3 1 amp 2 Digital Digital Inputs gt gt gt gt Outputs 1 3 1 amp 2 Rear Rear Universal Connectors Connectors Analog 26 Vdc to Inputs gt gt IO Expander Board gt gt Transmitters 1 amp 2 4 20 Input 4 gt gt gt gt Analog Output 3 Universal Digital Relay Inputs gt gt Outputs 1 amp 2 1 amp 2 Digital 9 Input 4 gt x FIGURE 13 1 Moore 353 Block Diagram March 2003 13 1 Circuit Description UM353 1 13 2 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD The heart of the 353 is the powerful microprocessor based MPU Controller Board
153. renamed from DWNLD LO in earlier versions and PARAM LO Parameter Write Lockout parameter provide a method for locking out configuration transfers and parameter read writes from a PC over a Modbus or LIL network The parameter lockout does not affect the global updates on the on the LIL The 8 digit SERIAL of the station is stored in memory and can be viewed when this parameter is displayed If only seven digits are seen assume a leading zero BAUD rate parameters set the Modbus port characteristics see Table 3 2 The network Modbus port at terminals NCA and NCB the rear port is RS485 and uses the assigned station address The configuration port the front port March 2003 3 5 Function Blocks UM353 1 at a Moore 352Plus or Moore 353 Display Assembly s MMJ 11 connector or a Moore 354 or 354N Controllers DB9 display configuration port is RS232 and uses an address of 1 The Cycle Time of the station can be viewed as a parameter within the STATN block In addition a bias can be added to increase the total cycle time of the station This may be necessary when significant communications activities are taking place causing communication overrun errors Adding bias will allow the processor more time during each scan cycle for completing the communication chores The station can be configured to time out of the configuration mode after 1 minute of no faceplate operations by setting the CONFG TO parameter to YES default This par
154. security level 1 highest 5 lowest level that SECURITY remains at the default 000000 combination will have no security for the involved function s regardless of the security assigned to the other levels For example 1 Level 1 combination s 000000 999999 000000 224 E v 2 CO N Level 2 combination s 000000 999999 000000 assume that level 1 is assigned a security combination E V 3 Level combination 000000 999999 000000 but level 4 remains at 000000 If a controller E V 4 CIOIM Level 4 combination s 000000 999999 000000 5 LEVel 5 combination 000000 999999 000000 calibration is performed the station will not prompt the user for the security combination and anyone will be able to store new calibration values If security is desired it is recommended that all 5 levels of security be set with either the same value or different values when different individuals are granted access to only certain functions March 2003 3 3 Function Blocks UM353 1 The functions that can be accessed at the various security levels are listed in Table 3 1 The security combination will be required when the user attempts to store a parameter or attempts to view a security combination The faceplate alphanumeric will display ENTR COM and allow the user to enter and store the combination A combination is entered by se
155. setpoint tracking If a fixed setpoint is desired the TC input to the SETPT function block can be set to UNCONFIG If the loop tag LOOPO1 is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag External Setpoint 0 00 100 00 PRCT O1 AN2 PB2SW Process 0 00 100 00 PRCT D SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT TC Input TC 01 01 01 ESN Exec Seq No 10 PB2SW PB2 Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD 01 1 5 ESN Exec Seq No 5 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT D Input D LoopOI E I O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S 01 1 INPUT F Input F Loop01 A M O1 INPUT Input Loop01 A M AS INPUT I Input I 01 1 5 ESN Seq 25 5 OR01 LOOP01 Ext Int Transfer Switch Function Block INPUT ST Input ST Loop01 PB2SW PS INPUT E Input E Loop01 AIN
156. station data starting at channel 5 parameter 2 for control loops and channel 6 parameter 2 for a sequencer loops The station configuration entry both local and graphical PC based will indicate the next available open space of five contiguous channels Another starting channel can be entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total number of channels Channel locations n through n 4 in the table below identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each control loop All parameter data e g P process is global and is transmitted every 0 5 second All other data is sent out on command C P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 n m re m TD DG MR R B PF HF nd s Rn Hu i CN sr L LD 1 n2 Vi im Tu Tim Tam ve per cs T RM RH ber 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 n er P nk PF mei J j j T m ne vane eur j n 4 YMNF YMXF YDPPI BGF C P 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 n ax AH As APG ni om ma ar omr omr du 2 pf ry n 4 2 A4TI A1PI A2PI A4PI C P 256 n 4 March 2003 6 5 Network Communications UM353 1 6 2 3 Sequence Loop Data Sequence Loop data occupies six LIL channels The starting channel is entered during conf
157. steps performed before the problem occurred Any status message error messages or LED indications displayed Installation environment Set the Real Time Clock Jumper W7 or W8 on the MPU Controller board Refer to Section 9 Maintenance for details 1 6 March 2003 UM353 1 Introduction The Siemens public Internet site has current revisions of technical literature in Portable Document Format for downloading TABLE 1 1 Contact Information Telephone 1 215 646 7400 extension 4993 Fax 1215 283 6358 E mail MandCTechSupp sea siemens com Monday Friday except holidays Public Internet Site Repair Service Telephone 011 65 299 6051 Fax 011 65 299 6053 E mail TICGroupAP Qsea siemens com Monday Friday except holidays Public Internet Site Repair Service Telephone Fax EUROPE E mail Monday Friday except holidays Public Internet Site Repair Service 1 4 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY AND HANDLING 1 4 1 Factory Shipment Prior to shipment a controller is fully tested and inspected to ensure proper operation It is then packaged for shipment Most accessories are shipped separately 1 4 2 Receipt of Shipment Inspect each carton at the time of delivery for possible external damage Any visible damage should be immediately recorded on the carrier s copy of the delivery slip Carefully unpack each carton and check the contents against the enclosed packing list Inspect each item f
158. the NC position X03126S0 BOD Basic Operator Display MD Message Display BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 76 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 74 PB2SW PB2 Switch PB2SW is one of three general purpose switches available in each loop It can be utilized for switching Boolean signals in such applications as toggling the EITS External Internal setpoint Transfer Switch function block Start Stop controlling the position of TSW Transfer Switch function block for switching analog signals or other operator initiated actions The switch can be configured for momentary or sustained operation As momentary the switch will transfer to the NO position when the button is pressed and will return when released Momentary action 1 used in toggle applications such as changing the function of the EITS function block In the sustained mode the switch will alternate positions each time the button is pressed An unconfigured NC input defaults to 0 and an unconfigured NO input to 1 With firmware 1 30 and higher the button can be remotely activated through command over Modbus or LIL PB2 SWITCH NC Input m NO Input Message Display F ACT HON PU LAST MD HIIS T MD LO ST MD HI MD LO AC INPUT INC GUN PUT NO GUN PUT MD I 1 1 JEISIN PB Switch Output PB2 Switch P Switch ACTION 5 MOM SUS MOM Power Up LAST 5
159. the current configuration in the controller and the external equipment exercise the system in a systematic manner to ensure proper operation March 2003 10 7 Controller and System Test UM353 1 10 8 March 2003 UM353 1 Maintenance 11 0 MAINTENANCE Controller maintenance requirements are minimal Activities such as cleaning and visual inspections should be performed at regular intervals The severity of the controller s operating environment will determine the frequency of maintenance Additional topics including troubleshooting assembly replacement and software compatibility are also covered Figure 11 1 has an exploded view of the controller Before servicing or calibration the equipment note the following statements e Maintenance should be performed only by qualified personnel Failure to properly maintain the equipment can result in death serious injury or product failure This manual should be carefully reviewed understood and followed The steps in the Preventive Maintenance section should be performed regularly The procedures in this section do not represent an exhaustive survey of maintenance steps necessary to ensure safe operation of the equipment Particular applications may require further procedures Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser s purposes the matter should be referred to the local Siemens sales office
160. the library and STORED This loads a complete controller configuration as defined by the FCO PaE documentation and erases any previously stored configuration Station parameters and Calibration are J retained when a new FCO is loaded This enables a user to quickly configure the controller with an FCO without FCO LIBRARY having to re calibrate or re enter the Station parameter values Upon stepping down to the FCO parameter the last FCO Factory configured Option 0 999999 00 that was loaded in the controller will be displayed Turning the pulser knob will then display other FCOs that are available in the FCO library The configuration installed at the factory will be either FCO 101 or a custom configuration that was ordered and defined by the user 101 is basic single loop PID controller An FCO can be loaded at any time in the field and used as is or modified edited to meet individual requirements The FCO library file is not modified when the FCO selected for controller configuration is edited 3 1 2 SECUR Security The SECUR function block enables a user to lock out portions or all of the faceplate configuration functions SECURITY Five levels of security are available see Table 3 1 Each level is factory set to 000000 no security and can be changed by the user in the field to any number up to 999999 N 4 hc security combination should assigned to each
161. the use of a tool only A part is accessible when either a the IEC articulate accessibility probe applied in every possible position to the exterior or exposed surfaces including the bottom or b the IEC rigid accessibility probe applied with a maximum force of 30 Newtons 6 75 lbs force in every possible position to the exterior or exposed surface including the bottom touches the part Protection from Fire If the enclosure is non metallic it shall have the proper flammability rating Grounding A metallic enclosure must have a protective grounding terminal and be marked as such All accessible non current conductive parts must be bonded to the protective grounding terminal General Construction The equipment enclosure or parts of the enclosure required to be in place to comply with the requirements for protection from electric shock personal injury protection of internal parts and wiring and external cord and cable assembly strain relief shall comply with the following tests for mechanical strength e Impact Tests The equipment shall be held firmly against a rigid support and shall be subjected to sets of three blows with 6 6 Joules 4 9 pound force inch from a spring operated impact hammer The hammer shall be applied to any external part that when broken is likely to expose live parts A window of an indicating device shall withstand an impact of 0 085 Newton meter 0 753 pound force inch from a hollow steel impact sphere 50 8
162. to 32 Moore 353s can be connected since RS485 is a multi drop network Shown below the jumper locations and identifiers for the Entrelec Isolated Converter shown in Figure 8 24 For access to jumpers carefully remove the side Rt INT1 1200 of the module that has the R INT2 RS485 link on jumper label E 1 one pair AG00336a Entrelec ILPH 084 233 11 Isolated Converter 8 4 12 Ethernet Wiring sample architecture and brief description are Moore 353 Industrial Ethernet presented in the Introduction section of this manual An with Ethernet 5 RJ 45 Ethernet connector is located on the back of the Moore 353 Hub or y z case and the optional Ethernet board is mounted on the with Ethernet Switch lt MPU Controller board Ethernet cables external to the Moore 353 siemens Industrial controller must be rated Category 5 or better Shielded with Ethernet Ethernet Fast Connect cable is highly recommended outside the panelor Panel or Cabinet PN 66K1901 1FC00 0AA0 cabinet as shown at right 8 22 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Installation To APACS ACM RS485 to RS232 Serial Port Isolated Converter Model 353 Bek Cable Label Entrelec ILPH 084 233 11 or 354 M 2
163. to 4 rotate the pulser knob until 4 appears on the numeric display 10 Press STORE to save the configuration change 11 Press ENTER EXIT CONF to return to normal operation Try adjusting the process above and below 50 300 DEG F Notice that the alarm will clear without pressing the ACK button if the process drops below the alarm limit deadband Use the ALARM QUICK button to return the Alarm Limit A1 to the default 110 540 DEG and press STORE to save Other alarm parameters referenced in the ALARM function block description may be changed in similar manner 10 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Controller and System Test 10 1 7 TAG Press the TAG button Note that Loop01 P S V X or Y will scroll across the screen To change the tag refer to the Configuration Road Map in Section 2 or the following instructions Note that although 12 characters are available for the tag it is suggested that loop names be limited to 6 characters so that the complete tag name will be displayed during normal operation The additional 6 characters can be displayed by scrolling the tag The last two digits of the alphanumeric displayed during normal operation will be used to identify the variable currently being displayed P S V X or Y Press ENTER EXIT CONF LOOP will be displayed 2 Press STEP DOWN twice until VIEW appears on display 3 Press the right arrow button or the turn pulser knob until EDIT TAG appears on the display 4 Press
164. to that input Station LON option board LON node r1 usa nodeu LON network Fo 8 Eg ee 3pm nv_ binding 5 node r1 nv 21 E E gt x Fr gt QS BLOCK DIAGRAM DIGITAL OUTPUT _ STATE DOSnn Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 22 Input 3 ED Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 DP Input 7 8 9 Input Input B E Input gt Input D FPP Input E Input F gt Quality Status A DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 INPUT view Network Variable NUMber 1 2000 loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output null 3 48 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 43 DOUT Digital Outputs DOUT_ function blocks are used to turn on remote devices powered from an external source The negative DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal of the external power source must be connected to station common The transistor switch will turn on when the block input is high 1 and will turn off when low saml 0 Two digital output function blocks are available the DIGITAL OUTPUT Controller Board switch open conector RELAY Transistor Switch q DOUT c AN DOUT_ UT INPUT S P loop tag block ta
165. with AS E I lt Common Ground Bus Controller Terminals Suppression Diode U See Note Earth g 114 5 0 5 8 a B Voltage Output Non Isolated 8 Dia D Digital Output 24 Vdc 9 9 Notes lt 1 Inductive load must be shunted with a transient Ground Bus suppression diode 1N4005 or equiv to prevent Earth damage to station output circuit Ground 2 See Table 8 1 for DOUT2 terminal numbers C Current Output Isolated Figure 8 15 Digital Output DOUT1 Resistive and Inductive Loads March 2003 8 17 Installation UM353 1 8 4 5 Thermocouple Input Wiring Function blocks AINU1 and AINU2 be configured for thermocouple or RTD input Thermocouple input wiring is shown in Figure 8 16 Shown is a typical grounded tip thermocouple If an ungrounded thermocouple is used the thermocouple wire shield can be grounded at the Moore 353 Thermocouple wire often has a solid conductor Make connections as outlined in Section 8 4 2 Be sure that the solid conductor is satisfactorily clamped by the terminal screw and pressure plate Two reference junctions RJ are supplied in the I O Expander board installation kit Install as outlined below Model 353 Rear Terminals gt Isolated Thermocouple Wire 45 SUR Power gt TC A N ka 8 A 7746 Universal Converter 5 N Isolated 7 5 7 7 47 E RJ Isolated
166. with displays other than ODP spares 42493 42509 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 3 8 Coil Loop Data 1 bit Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Coil MB C P LIL 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 0 00296 48 1 n 3 1 0 LHL R W 1 Local 1 0 00297 48 1 3 1 1 LZSS 1 block in STANDBY 1 0 00298 48 1 3 1 2 1 R W 1 External Set 1 0 00299 48 1 3 1 3 LZCN RW 1 Console 1 0 00300 48 1 3 1 4 L CM RW 1 Computer 1 0 00301 48 1 3 1 5 LARS 1 Ramping Setpoint 1 0 00302 48 1 n 3 1 6 LZOR 1 Override 1 0 00303 48 1 3 1 7 L EM 1 Emergency Manual 1 0 00304 48 1 3 1 8 L CH R 1 Configuration Hold 1 0 00305 48 1 n 3 1 9 L HL R 1 HI Setpoint Limit 1 0 00306 48 1 n 3 1 10 L LL R 1 LO Setpoint Limit 1 0 00307 48 1 n 3 1 11 L OS 1 Alarms Out of Service 1 0 00308 48 1 n 3 1 12 L UIS R 1 U1 Status Active 1 0 00309 48 1 3 1 13 025 R 1 02 Status Active 1 0 00310 48 1 3 1 14 L AT R W 1 Autotune 1 0 003 11 48 1 3 1 15 1 Alarm 1 is Active 1 0 00312 48 1 n 4 1 0 LZNI R W 1 Alarm 1 is Not Acknowledged 1 0 003 13 48 1 nt 4 1 1 1 R W 1 Alarm 1 is Enabled 1 0 003 14 48 1 4 1 2 1 2 1 Alarm 2 is Active 1 0 003 15 48 1 4 1 3 LZN2 R W 1 Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged 1 0 00316 48 1 4 1 4 LHE2 1 Alarm 2 is Enabled 1 0 00317 48 1 n 4 1 5 L A3 R 1 A
167. with the case rear terminal numbers Power for 2 wire transmitters is available at the rear terminals A digital filter time constant is available to dampen process noise A square root extractor is also available to linearize a flow signal from a AP transmitter allowing the block output to be configured for flow units Output QS indicates the quality of the analog output signal O1 and will be high 1 when output O1 is bad and low 0 when good Bad quality signifies an A D conversion failure or a 1 5Vdc input signal that falls below 0 6 Vdc indicating an open circuit or failure of a 2 wire transmitter A verify mode is available during calibration to view the analog input in volts over the full calibrated range The input is factory calibrated for 1 5 Vdc and should not require field calibration However field calibration can be performed if another range is required or to match the exact transmitter calibration Current inputs are accommodated using precision dropping resistors connected across the input terminals 250Q resistors are supplied with the controller for conversion of 4 20mA inputs Power Up During a hot a warm or a cold start the function block will temporarily by pass the digital filter to enable the output to initialize at the actual hardware input signal xmtr Current Limit 24 Vdc NEA ENG UNITS R1 R2 SUE TN igital Al
168. x0001 x0100 Station String Data ASCILD n nas x0101 x0200 Loop Dynamic Data 16 bit x0201 x0450 Loop Variable Data 16 bit integer x0451 x1200 Loop Static Data 16 bit integer sss x1201 x1950 Loop Dynamic Data 32 bit floating point x1951 x2450 Loop Variable Data 32 bit floating point x2451 x3950 Loop Static Data 32 bit floating point x3951 x5450 Loop String Data 5451 x7950 Ubus Module Types Procidia sese 7951 x8000 Loop Trend Data ref x8001 x9000 Spares 9001 9999 2003 6 1 Network Communications UM353 1 EXTENDED MODBUS REGISTERS The traditional addressing of Modbus Holding Registers has been limited to 9999 However since the actual address is contained in a 16 bit word addresses above 9999 are available Many Modbus Masters support this extended addressing Configuration data for a Sequencer amp Timers contained in a single sequencer loop can be accessed in this space The actual loop that can be accessed is contained in the Modbus parameter MSLCP Modbus Sequencer amp Timers Configuration Pointer located in
169. zzzzz oNNHvOHTU Output Qb base Pressure psia Real 14 73 base Temperature deg F Real loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output INPUT Zb loop tag block tag output Exec Seq No 000 to 250 Qf Tp and Tf are converted within the block from F to R adds 459 67 to the F input value for the actual calculation Compressibility factors Zr Zp can be entered manually using HLD Hold function blocks computed and downloaded from a host device or calculated in the controller using the AG8 AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas function block Pr ar c AGA 7 Ztb Application Diagram March 2003 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 6 AG8 AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas 8 function blocks which can be used on per loop basis are available in firmware 1 30 and higher This AGA8 block calculates the compressibility factors of natural gas in accordance with AGA 8 Report No 8 July 1994 AGA ESN 000 Catalog No XQ9212 It computes various Input Pf 00 gt Output Gr compressibility factors and the specific gravity relative gt Output Zs density using the detailed characterization method Output Zf described in the report
170. 0 nv x2 SNVT nv 0 SNVT_ gt Q gt i No gt or nv x2 binding FF O node u Channel F F gt QF X03133S0 Quality Test gt QS BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 39 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 32 DIE Digital Input Ethernet V3 0 DIE_ function blocks are available when the optional Ethernet communication board is installed in the controller It enables the controller to read digital data from other stations over the Ethernet network DIGITAL INPUTS 16 CHAN ETHERNET DIE_ 00 Output DO DF DF DIGITAL INPUTS Up to 32 DIE_ blocks are available Blocks are 16 assigned in sequence controller wide with each Ethemet Network use Digital data is On Off data packed into a 16 bit Output as word This data is fanned out to block outputs DO DF The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP D R E PADdRESs nnn nnn nnn nn 192 168 0 0 IP address of the source device The MB ADRES MBA DRE S MBADIRESS e k MIB MB REG ster 0000 65535 nul parameter allows Modbus address to be UID upost RATE os configured When connecting to other Siemens R E G __ T Y P E REGister TYPE InPut Holding Input MOORE controllers the Modbus address is set to 1 In some cases other devices may use a differ
171. 0 Each alarm can be enabled or disabled when in the quickset ALARM mode The configuration allows an alarm to be enabled or disabled on a cold start When an alarm is disabled it will not operate but will retain settings for return to the enabled mode Complete operator faceplate functions relating to alarms are described in the sections describing the specific faceplate design All alarms have the following features Deadband requires that the signal either drop below or exceed the limit setting by the amount of the deadband before the alarm clears goes low The alarm deadband is set as a fixed of the range pointer scale Delay In Time requires that the input remain above or below the limit setting for the delay time before the alarm trips goes high This can help prevent nuisance alarms that may be tripping due to process noise Delay Out Time requires that the input remain below or above the limit setting plus deadband for the delay time before the alarm will clear goes low This can help prevent inadvertent clearing of alarms due to process noise Ringback causes a previously acknowledged alarm to require acknowledgment priorities 1 4 when the alarm clears An Disp 1 39 4 gt 2 4 2 3 4 5 lt process 1 digital value gt TI 2435 process 1 tag name gt A Process UNITS P3 1536 100 00 t P
172. 0 1 n 1 1 L VI R W Valve 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40203 10 1 n 2 1 L XI R X Variable 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40204 10 1 n 3 24 L YI R Y Variable 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40205 10 1 n 4 24 L RI R W Ratio 0 00 to 38 40 80 0F80 40206 10 1 n 7 L BI R W Bias 100 0 100 80 0F80 40207 10 1 n 8 L TImI R Totalizer 3 ms whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40208 10 1 2 2 L TIII R Totalizer 3 15 whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40209 10 1 n 2 3 CLS R W Control Loop Status see CLS see coils n 3 1 ASW R W Alarm Status Word see ASW see coils 4 1 L PCSW PCOM Block Status Word V1 3 1 7 0001 0007 40210 10 1 z 2 1 Sequencer ODS Code Description Register LIL L SSNI Sequencer Step No 0 250 0000 00FA 40201 10 1 n l L SNSI R Sequencer Number of Steps 0 250 0000 00FA 40202 10 1 n 4 L SNGI R Sequencer Number of Groups 0 16 0000 0010 40203 10 1 n 5 L SLS R W Sequencer Loop Status see SLS see coils n 5 1 L SNRI R Sequencer Number of Recipes 0 9 0000 0009 40204 10 1 0 11 L CRNI R W Current Recipe Number 0 9 0000 0009 40205 10 1 n 3 1 L PCSW R PCOM Block Status Word 1 3 1 7 0001 0007 40206 10 1 z 2 1 L TACM R Total Active Conditional Msgs 0 64 0000 0040 40207 10 1 n 43 V1 3 spare 0 0000 40208 10 1 spare 0 0000 40210 10 1 Analog Indicator V2 2 Code Desc
173. 0 5 0 23 48812 n a ASMN R ATD05 Minute V2 0 5 0 59 48813 n a ASSC R ATD05 Second V2 0 5 0 59 48814 n a ASST R W ATD05 Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48815 n a ASSTC R ATDOS Sample Time Complete 0 1000 x 1 48816 n a ASDI R ATDOS Data 1 latest 0 100 128 3968 48817 n a ASD2 R ATD05 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48818 n a ASD3 R ATD05 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48819 n a ASD168 R ATD05 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48984 n a ASD169 R ATD05 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48985 n a A5D170 R ATD05 Data 170 0 100 128 3968 48986 n a Writing to the sample time will reset all data points ASD1 through A5D170 to 0 Notes 1 read of any Time Stamp Data i e Year Month Day Hour Minute Second or Sample Time will update all Loop data registers Additional data reads of Trend data within the same block should only request data so as to obtain complete set of time synchronized data 2 Trend data are obtained from the loop referenced by the parameter register 40058 This parameter also be written to change the loop 3 Parameter NTTB will indicate the number of Analog Trend Display blocks that are available in the loop specified by the MLTP 4 Undefined data e g unconfigured inputs period station was in HOLD or powered down are represented by value of 0 5 Real time clock data requires the optional RTC CB Real Time Clock Configuration Backup board shipped after July 1999 and Version 2 0 or higher MPU Contro
174. 0 4 11 Voltage Dip Short Interruption 14 10 AGENCY APPROVALS The Moore 353 has been designed to meet various agency approvals Contact the factory or your local Siemens Process Industries Division representative for current approvals Labels on each Moore 353 list the agency approvals that apply to that particular instrument FM CSA Class I Division 2 Groups A B C and D CE see Section 14 10 2 ABS TYPE Approval March 2003 14 11 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1 14 10 1 CSA Hazardous Locations Precautions This section provides CSA hazardous location precautions that should be observed by the user when installing or servicing the equipment described in this Instruction These statements supplement those given in the preceding section A WARNING Explosion Hazard Explosion can cause death or serious injury In a potentially explosive atmosphere remove power from the equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other wiring All pertinent regulations regarding installation in a hazardous area must be observed Precautions English For Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2 hazardous locations Use only factory authorized replacement parts Substitution of components can impair the suitability of this equipment for hazardous locations For Division 2 hazardous locations When the equipment described in this Instruction in installed without safet
175. 0 or higher 16357 34 Spare Parts Kit includes 16353 131 Power Input and Range Resistor Kit includes 250 Ohm 0 1 3W WW resistor and insulating sleeving qty 3 each Crimp on connector qty 6 Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit includes 250 Ohm 0 1 3W WW resistor qty 1 3 75 Ohm 1 3W WW resistor qty 2 Insulating sleeving qty 5 Crimp on connector qty 6 100 Ohm reference junction for TC inputs qty 2 Crimp on Connector qty 18 O Ring Display Assembly qty 1 Fuses 0 5A for 120 240 Vac MPU Controller board and 2A for 24 Vdc MPU Controller board 250V SloBlo qty 1 each Case Mounting Clip and 8 32 x 1 Fillister Hd Screw qty 2 each Case Ground Screw Green qty 1 CASE AND CASE MOUNTED CONNECTORS Black Side Entry Connectors Terminals H N 3 13 and 14 26 qty 2 each Discontinued Black Side Entry Connectors Terminals 27 39 and 40 52 qty 2 each Discontinued March 2003 14 5 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1 SERVICE PART DESCRIPTION PART NO Standard Case with Black Side Entry Connectors Case Option 2 Model 353_2 Discontinued includes Flange and Case Assembly qty 1 Expanded Connector Socket Assembly e g 52 terminal capacity qty 1 Plug in terminals for H N and 3 26 Case Mounting Clip and 8 32 x 1 Fillister Hd Screw qty 2 each Ground Screw Green qty 1 Order 16353 133 for plug in terminals 27 52 Standard Case with Ethernet Connector and Gray
176. 03 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 28 COS COSINE COS_ function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher accept radian inputs and output the cosine of that angle COSINE InputX X O1 COS X gt Output 1 cos X 01 Input X Output 1 INPUT X INPUTX loop tag block tag output E S N Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 DIAGRAM 3 2 29 CWE Coil Write Ethernet V3 0 CWE function blocks are available when the optional Ethernet communication board is COIL WRITE ETHERNET installed in the controller It enables the controller to write Coil data to other stations over the cwe Ethernet network Input 0 rn COIL WRITE y Up to 32 CWE blocks are available Blocks are Input F FJ ETHERNET i assigned in sequence controller wide with each InputT D i use Up to 16 ON OFF block inputs IO to IF can Qua lt write to 16 consecutive coil locations a destination Modbus device INPUT 0 iNPUT 0 H loop tag block tag output null The IP ADRES parameter 15 used to configure the INPUT 1 Input 10 looptag blocktag output B I NPUT 2 INPUT 2 H loop tag block tag output null IP address of the destination Modbus device INPUT 31 INPUT 30 looptag block ag ouput nu The MB ADRES parameter allows a Modbus INPUT 4 INPUT 409 loop tag block tag output
177. 0452 30 1 n 1 4 L LLI Setpoint Low Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40453 30 1 1 5 L RTI R W Setpoint Ramp Time min 0 3840 0080 0F80 40454 30 1 n 1 3 L RRI R W Setpoint Ramp Rate min 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40455 30 1 n 1 6 L AILI Alarm I Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40456 30 1 n 4 2 L A2LI R W Alarm 2 Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40457 30 1 n 4 3 L A3LI R W Alarm 3 Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40458 30 1 4 4 L A4LI R W Alarm 4 Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40459 30 1 n 4 5 L TimI R W Tot Preset 1 3 ms whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40460 30 1 2 4 1 R W Tot Preset 1 3 18 whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40461 30 1 2 5 L T2mI R W Tot Preset 2 3 ms whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 404621 30 1 2 6 L T2II R W Tot Preset 2 3 18 whole digits 0 999 0000 03E7 40463 30 1 2 7 LZAITW R W Alarm 1 Type Word bit mapped see ATW n a n 4 6 L A2TW R W Alarm 2 Type Word bit mapped see ATW n a n 4 7 L A3TW R W Alarm 3 Type Word bit mapped see ATW n a n 4 8 L A4TW R W Alarm 4 Type Word bit mapped see ATW n a n 4 9 L AITI Alarm I Type 0 6 0000 0006 40464 30 1 n 4 37 LHA2TI R W Alarm 2 Type 0 6 0000 0006 40465 30 1 4 38 L A3TI R W Alarm 3 Type 0 6 0000 0006 40466 30 1 n 4 39 L A4TI R W Alarm 4 Type 0 6 0000 0006 40467 30 1 n 4 40 LHA1PI R W Alarm 1 Priority 1 5 0001 0005 4
178. 0468 30 1 4 41 L A2PI R W Alarm 2 Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40469 30 1 n 4 42 L A3PI R W Alarm 3 Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40470 30 1 n 4 43 L A4PI R W Alarm 4 Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40471 30 1 n 4 44 L CAI R W Controller Action 1 DIR 0 40472 30 1 1 7 0 80000 40473 30 1 0 80000 40480 30 1 Sequencer ODS MASK Configurations Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L S001G0I R W Step 1 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 72045153304 1 1154 L S001G00 R W Step 1 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 40452 30 1 1 170 14500101 Step 1 Group 1 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 40453430G 1 1155 L S001G10 R W Step 1 Group 1 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 40454 30 1 1 171 145001021 Step 1 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 40455 30 1 1 156 L S001G2O R W Step 1 Group 2 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 40456 30 1 1 172 L S002G0I R W Step 2 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 40457 30 1 2 154 145002000 R W Step 2 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 40458 30 1 2 170 LHS005G00 R W Step 5 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 40476 30 1 5 170 L S005G1I R W Step 5 Group 1 Input Mask 0000 40477 30 1 5 155 L S005G1O R W Step 5 Group 1 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 40478 30 1 5 171 145005621 Step 5 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 40479 30 1 5 156 L S005G20 R W Step 5 Group 2 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 40480 30 1 5 172 7 8 March 2003
179. 1 3 14 16 80000 45505 45550 100 1 Discrete Indicator ODP V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L TAG R Loop Tag 12 ASCII Char 45451 100 1 n 2 7 L G1Tag R Group 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45457 100 1 n 13 15 LZGIPIT R Group 1 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45460 100 1 n 16 18 L G1P2T R Group PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45463 100 1 n 19 21 L GISAT R Group 1 Switch Position Tag 6 ASCII Char 45466 100 1 n 22 24 L GISMT R Group 1 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 45469 100 1 n 1 22 24 LZGIFIT R Group 1 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45472 100 1 n 1 13 15 L G1FOT R Group 1 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45475 100 1 n 1 16 18 L G2Tag R Group 2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45478 100 1 n 25 27 L G2P1T R Group 2 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45481 100 1 n 28 30 L G2P2T R Group 2 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45484 100 1 n 31 33 L G2SAT R Group 2 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 45487 100 1 n 34 36 L G2SMT R Group 2 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 45490 100 1 1 34 36 L G2F1T R Group 2 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45493 100 1 n 1 25 27 L G2F0T R Group 2 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45496 100 1 n 1 28 30 March 2003 Data Mapping UM353 1 L G3Tag R Group 3 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45499 100 1 n 37 39 L G3P1T R Group 3 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45502 100 1 n 40 42 L G3P2T R Group 3 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45505 100 1 n 43 45 L G3SAT R Group 3 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 45508 100
180. 1 n 46 48 L G3SMT R Group 3 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 45511 100 1 1 46 48 1 1 R Group 3 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45514 100 1 n 1 37 39 LHG3FOT R Group 3 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45517 100 1 n 1 40 42 L G4Tag R Group 4 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45520 100 1 n 49 51 L G4P1T R Group 4 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45523 100 1 n 52 54 L G4P2T R Group 4 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45526 100 1 n 55 57 L G4SAT R Group 4 Switch Position A Tag 6 ASCII Char 45529 100 1 n 58 60 L G4SMT R Group 4 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 45532 100 1 n 1 58 60 LHG4F1T R Group 4 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45535 100 1 n 1 49 51 L G4FOT R Group 4 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 45538 100 1 n 1 52 54 L G5Tag R Group 5 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40451 30 1 n 61 63 L GSP1T R Group 5 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40454 30 1 n 64 66 LHG5P2T R Group 5 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40457 30 1 n 67 69 L G5SAT R Group 5 Switch Position Tag 6 ASCII Char 40460 30 1 n 70 72 L G5SMT R Group 5 Switch Position M Tag 6 ASCII Char 40463 30 1 1 70 72 LZGSFIT R Group 5 Feedback 1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40466 30 1 n 1 61 63 LZGSFOT R Group 5 Feedback 0 Tag 6 ASCII Char 40469 30 1 n 1 64 66 Spares 40472 40480 Note These Modbus groupings normally used for Variable Loop Integer Data with displays other than ODP L G6Tag R Group 6 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41201 30 1 n 73 75 L G6P1T R Group 6 PB1 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41204 30 1 n 76 78 L G6P2T R Group 6 PB2 Tag 6 ASCII Char 41207 30
181. 1 HELD 1 0 09111 32 1 z 1 10 L4DONE R 1 DONE 1 0 09112 32 1 7 1 11 L ABORTED R 1 ABORTED 1 0 09113 32 1 7 1 12 spare R 1 0 09114 32 1 7 1 13 spare R 1 0 09115 32 1 z 1 14 spare R 1 0 09116 32 1 z 1 15 Code R W Description Range Coil MB C P LIL L EMERG EO R 1 Emerg Override 1 0 09117 32 1 z 1 1 0 L NotAck dEO R W 1 Not 1 0 09118 32 1 z 1 1 1 L INTRLK IK R 1 INTRLK 1 0 09119 32 1 z 1 1 2 L NotAck d IK R W 1 1 Not 1 0 09120 32 1 z 1 1 3 L FAILED FD R 1 FAILED 1 0 09121 32 1 z 1 1 4 L NotAck dFD R W 1 FD Not Ack d 1 0 09122 32 1 z 1 1 5 spare R 1 0 09123 32 1 z 1 1 6 spare R 1 0 09124 32 1 z 1 1 7 spare R 1 0 09125 32 1 z 1 1 8 spare R 1 0 09126 32 1 z 1 1 9 spare R 1 0 09127 32 1 z 1 1 10 spare R 1 0 09128 32 1 z 1 1 11 spare R 1 0 09129 32 1 z 1 1 12 spare R 1 0 09130 32 1 z 1 1 13 L NotAck dPCOM R W 1 Event Not 1 0 09131 32 1 z 1 1 14 L ACTIVEPCOM R 1 PCOM Event is Active 1 0 09132 32 1 z 1 1 15 z LIL CHAN configured in the PCOM function block configuration March 2003 7 31 Data Mapping UM353 1 PCOM Function Block Status Word LZPSWI channel zparameter I HINIT OK PCOM RW 1 PCOM RW 2 RESET 1 RESET PCOM w 3 START 4 RESTART ILRESTART PCOM j w 5 H
182. 122 F eed NP A No 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Climatic Conditions 654 1 Class B3 Corrosive Conditions 654 4 Class 2 14 9 2 Enclosure Mounting Mounting Typical Location Out of doors or other area without environmental controls Enclosure onte ene eet User supplied Model 353 C se etes Installed inside enclosure Model 353 Display Exposed through enclosure to external environment Installation Requirements Refer to Section 8 Installation Temperature Limits Enclosure Internal Operating 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Enclosure External Operating 40 to 50 C 40 to 122 F Controller Storage 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Climatic Conditions 654 1 Class B3 Corrosive Conditions essen 654 4 Class 2 14 9 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility EN61326 1 1998 EN61000 4 3 EM Field EN50081 2 Radiated Emissions EN61000 4 4 EFT Burst EN55011 Conducted Emissions EN61000 4 5 Surge EN61000 3 2 Flicker EN61000 4 6 Conducted RF EN61000 3 3 Current Harmonics EN61000 4 8 Magnetic Immunity EN61000 4 2 ESD EN6100
183. 2 0 DID6NF R DID06 Normal state of LON Input F 1 0 02896 6 202 15 DID6MO R W DID06 Mode of FB Output 0 1 0 02897 6 203 0 DID6MF R W DID06 Mode of FB Output 1 0 02912 6 203 15 DID6FOO R W DID06 Forced state 0 1 0 02913 6 204 0 DID6FF R W DID06 Forced state F 1 0 02928 6 204 15 DOD6NO R DOD06 Normal state of FB Input 0 1 0 02929 6 205 0 DOD6NF R DOD06 Normal state of FB Input 1 0 02944 65 205 15 DOD6M0 R W DOD06 Mode of LON Output 0 1 0 02945 6 206 0 DOD6MF R W DOD06 Mode of LON Output 1 0 02960 6 206 15 DOD6F0 R W DOD06 Forced state 0 1 0 02961 6 207 0 DOD6FF R W DOD06 Forced state F 1 0 02976 6 207 15 March 2003 7 35 Data Mapping UM353 1 The following DIS and DOS function blocks are included in MPU Controller board firmware versions 1 30 and higher DISINO R DISO1 Normal state of LON Input 0 1 0 03401 1 208 0 DISINF R DISO1 Normal state of LON Input F 1 0 03416 1 208 15 DIS1MO R W DISO1 Mode of FB Output 0 1 0 03417 1 209 0 DISIMF R W DISO1 Mode of FB Output 1 0 03432 1 209 15 DIS1FO R W 01501 Forced state 0 1 0 03433 1 210 0 DISIFF R W DIS01 Forced state F 1 0 03448 1 210 15 DOSINO R 20501 Normal state of FB Input 0 1 0 03449 1 211 0 DOSINF R 20501 Normal state of FB Input F 1 0 03464 1 211 15 DOS1M0 R W 20501 Mode of LON Output 0 1 0 03465 1 212 0 DOSIMF R W DOS01 Mode of LON Output F 1 0 03480 1 212 15 DOS1F0 R W 20501 Forced state 0 1 0 03481 1 213 0 DOSIFF
184. 2 Ifsecurity is enabled a level 1 or level 4 security combination will be needed to store the results of a calibration Refer to SECUR Security in Section 3 for additional information Apply power to the station Press the ENTER CONF button to enter the configuration mode at the MENU level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select STATION on the alphanumeric lower display Qv UY cdm 9 Press the STEP DOWN button to choose options at the station level and rotate the Pulser Knob to select on the alphanumeric display 7 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the FUNCTION BLOCK level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired output e g AOUTI 8 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the PARAMETER level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired parameter CAL ZERO shown on the alphanumeric display 9 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level CAL appears on display 10 Rotate the Pulser Knob to set the zero output to 4 00 mA on the digital multimeter or electronic calibrator 11 Press the STORE button to lock in the desired value If ENTER COM appears in the alphanumeric display go to Section 12 1 step 13 for entering a level 1 or level 4 security combination 12 Press the STEP UP button Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the FULL parameter 13 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level CAL appears on display 14 Rotate the Pulser Knob to set the full scale
185. 2 0 5 0 59 48214 n a A2ST R W ATD02 Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48215 n a A2STC R ATD02 Sample Time Complete 0 1000 x 1 48216 n a A2DI R ATD02 Data 1 latest 0 100 128 3968 48217 n a A2D2 R ATD02 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48218 n a A2D3 R ATD02 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48219 n a A2D168 R ATD02 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48384 n a A2D169 R ATD02 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48385 n a A2D170 R ATD02 Data 170 0 100 128 3968 48386 n a Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A2D1 through A2D170 to 0 March 2003 7 43 Data Mapping UM353 1 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL A3RMN R ATD03 MIN SCALE Real 48401 n a A3RMX R ATD03 MAX SCALE Real 48403 n a A3DPP R ATD03 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48405 n a A3EU R ATD03 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48406 n a A3YR R ATD03 Year V2 0 5 1997 48409 n a A3MT R ATD03 Month V2 0 5 1 12 48410 n a A3DY R ATD03 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48411 n a A3HR R ATD03 Hour V2 0 5 0 23 48412 n a A3MN R ATD03 Minute V2 0 5 0 59 48413 n a A3SC R ATD03 Second V2 0 5 0 59 48414 n a A3ST R W ATDO03 Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48415 n a A3STC R ATD03 Sample Time Complete 0 1000 x 1 48416 n a A3D1 R ATD03 Data I latest 0 100 128 3968 48417 n a A3D2 R ATD03 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48418 n a A3D3 R ATD03 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48419 n a A3D168 R ATD03 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48584 n a A3D169 R ATD03 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48585 n a A3D170 R ATD03 Data 170 0 100 128 3968
186. 2 18 L P4ATI R W Process 4 Alarm 0 3 0000 0003 40465 30 1 2 19 L P4BTI R W Process 4 Alarm 0 3 0000 0003 40466 30 1 n 2 20 L P1API Process 1 Alarm A Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40467 30 1 3 13 Process 1 Alarm Priority 1 5 50001 80005 40468 30 1 n 3 14 L P2API R W Process 2 Alarm A Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40469 30 1 n 3 15 L P2BPI R W Process 2 Alarm B Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40470 30 1 n 3 16 L P3API R W Process 3 Alarm A Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40471 30 1 n 3 17 L P3BPI R W Process 3 Alarm B Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40472 30 1 n 3 18 L P4API R W Process 4 Alarm A Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40473 30 1 n 3 19 L P4BPI R W Process 4 Alarm B Priority 1 5 0001 0005 40474 30 1 n 3 20 spare 0 0000 40480 30 1 Discrete Indicator ODD V2 2 Code Description Register LIL Discrete Indicator ODP V2 2 Code Description Register C P LIL NOTE Registers 40451 40480 are reserved for ASCII Tags when the ODP display has been selected in configuration March 2003 7 9 Data Mapping UM353 1 7 3 3 Static Loop Integer Data Contro
187. 2 I O Expander Board Kit The Expander Board is factory installed when a Moore 353 with Expansion Board option 1 is ordered e When adding an I O Expander board to a Standard Case case Option 2 with black Side Entry Connectors order connector kit PN 16353 133 to obtain terminals 27 52 e When adding an I O Expander board to a Standard Case with Ethernet connector case Option 4 with gray or green Direct Entry Connectors no additional connectors need be ordered e For field installation of this kit see the supplied Kit Installation Instruction 15900 390 DESCRIPTION QUANTITY Expander Board Do not remove Board from static shielding 1 bag until it is to be installed Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit see below 16353 49 Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit This kit is supplied with the above I O Expander Board Kit and with a factory shipped Moore 353 with Expansion Board option 1 March 2003 UM353 1 Introduction 4 20 mA to 1 5 Range Resistor 2500 0 1 3W WW 4 20 mA to 15 75 mV Range Resistor 3 750 0 1 3W WW Crimp On Connector TC Reference Junction 100Q Kit Installation Instruction 5 UM353 1 Moore 353 User s Manual this manual qty 1 6 Additional items as required by your order Refer to the packing list accompanying a shipment March 2003 1 9 Introduction UM353 1 1 10 March 2003 UM353 1 Configuration Overview 2 0 CONFIGURATION OV
188. 2 O1 INPUT I Input I Loop01 SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 15 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT A Input A Loop01 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 30 OR01 OR Function Block INPUT A Input A Loop01 E I ES INPUT B Input B Loop01 A M MS ESN Exec Seq No 35 Analog Output 1 Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT S Input S Loop01 A M 01 4 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Factory Configured Options ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR X RG PTR X Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P Process Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint 01 1 INPUT Input Valve 01 1 INPUT X Input X X Variable Loop01 AIN2 O1 LOOP Loop 01 DOUTI Digital Output 1 Function Block INPUT Input Loop01 ALARM A1 DOUT2 Digital Output 2 Function Block INPUT S Input S Loop01 ALARM A2 March 2003 4 5 Factory Configured Options UM353 1 4 4 FCO104 External Set Controller with Non Tracking Local Setpoint Factory Configured Option FCO104 provides a single loop control
189. 21 Expansion Satellite 1 used to add an upper link with addresses 33 through 64 In the Moore 353 the Station address is entered as the ADDRESS parameter in the STATN function block Specific instructions for 8 20 March 2003 UM353 1 Installation setting a link address in other models are available in the Installation And Service Instructions for that particular model Refer to SD15492 for complete installation wiring and service instructions for the Local Instrument Link Figure 8 22 shows typical wiring for stations connected to the LIL Link cabling and wiring involves twinaxial cable and twisted pair wiring Twinaxial cable is a twisted pair shielded cable that is used for runs of 2 feet 0 6m or more Unshielded twisted pair wiring is used mainly for interconnecting row mounted stations Twisted pair wiring can also be used for runs up to 2 feet in length for example between rows of stations Two types of twinaxial cables are recommended Belden 9182 for links up to 1500 feet 457 meters and Belden 9860 for links up to 4000 feet 1220 meters Either type of cable may be used on a single link To prevent noise interference electrically distribute stations as follows e more than 8 stations may be connected within any 10 foot 3m section of lower or upper link e than 16 stations may be connected within any 100 foot 30m section of lower or upper link e insert 100 feet of coiled twinaxial cable between cluster
190. 2499 42509 60 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 1 60 1 60 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 1 r60 1 r60 1 r60 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 4 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 4 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 8 1 60 1 60 1 r60 1 r60 1 r60 1 r60 1 C P LIL n 1 13 14 n 1 17 18 n 1 19 20 n 1 15 16 n 1 21 22 n 4 13 14 n 4 15 16 n 4 17 18 n 4 19 20 n 3 15 16 n 3 17 18 n 1 41 42 n 2 41 42 n 1 35 36 n 2 35 36 n 3 35 36 n 4 35 36 LIL n 61 62 n 63 64 n 1 61 62 n 1 63 64 n 2 61 62 n 2 63 64 n 3 61 62 n 3 63 64 n 65 66 n 67 68 n 1 65 66 n 1 67 68 n 2 65 66 n 2 67 68 n 3 65 66 n 3 67 68 n 69 70 n 71 72 n 1 69 70 n 1 71 72 n 2 69 70 n 2 71 72 n 3 69 70 n 3 71 72 In addition to the timers listed here the LIL will map 1 through 21 see LIL overview for exact locations March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Analog Indicator ODA V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L P1ALF R W Process 1 Alarm A Limit Real 42451 60 1 n 13 14 L P1BLF R W Process 1 Alarm Limit Real 42453 60 1 n 15 16 L P2ALF R W Process 2 Alarm A Limit Real 42455 60 1 n 17 18 L P2BLF R W Process 2 Alarm B Limit Real 42457 60 1 n 19 20 L P3ALF R W Process 3 Alarm A Limit Real 42459 60 1 n 21 22 L P3BLF
191. 3 TABLE 2 Integer Default Values Selection Parameter Default Value Uint MIN INT 0 Uint MAX INT 65535 Sint MIN INT 32768 Sint MAXINT 32767 TABLE 3 FB Numbers vs Modbus Registers FB MB FB MB FB MB FB MB Number Register Number Register Number Register Number Register AOE01 30961 AOE09 30977 AOE17 30993 AOE25 31009 AOE02 30963 AOE10 30979 AOE18 30995 AOE26 31011 AOE03 30965 AOE11 30981 AOE19 30997 AOE27 31013 AOE04 30967 AOE12 30983 AOE20 30999 AOE28 31015 AOE05 30969 AOE13 30985 AOE21 31001 AOE29 31017 AOE06 30971 AOE14 30987 AOE22 31003 AOE30 31019 AOE07 30973 AOE15 30989 AOE23 31005 AOE31 31021 AOE08 30975 AOE16 30991 AOE24 31007 AOE32 31023 3 16 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 8 Analog Input LIL function blocks are available when the optional LIL communication board is installed They allow the controller to obtain global data from other stations on the LIL AIL block numbers are assigned in sequence with each use station wide The data 15 received in the LIL format having a standard range of 80 to F80 The block output is a real number and is scaled in engineering units using the MIN and MAX SCALE parameters The Output Range 15 special data type that includes the MIN and SCALE the DPP and the ENGUNITS that can be connected to other blocks having a Range RG PTR Input Output QS indicates the quality of the received data and will go high 1 when the data is bad This i
192. 31045 DOE29 31053 DOE06 31030 DOE14 31038 DOE22 31046 DOE30 31054 DOE07 31031 DOE15 31039 DOE23 31047 DOE31 31055 DOE08 31032 DOE16 31040 DOE24 31048 DOE32 31056 10 Requires Ethernet communications board firmware version 2 0 or later 3 40 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 33 DIL Discrete Input LIL DIL function blocks are available when the optional LIL communication board is installed DIL block numbers are assigned in sequence with each use station wide The block allows the station to obtain global word GW from another station on the LIL The function block has 16 outputs DO through DF which represent the values of bits 0 F in the global word Output QS indicates the quality of the received data and will go high 1 when the data is bad This is normally associated with failure to receive global data due to a LIL failure or a misconfiguration of the source DISCRETE WORD INPUT LIL BE Output 00 DISCRETE WORD DU P m p GLOBAL INPUT LIL DF Output DF Qs Output QS SIRICIE AID D SouRCE ADDress 00 to 64 null ICIHIN SouRCE CHaNnel 000 to 255 null LIL CHANnel 9 008 to 255 The received global word will also be re transmitted this station as parameter 1 value in the configured channel n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 n ow sase 95 Mar
193. 353 Database Rev No 0 32767 0000 7FFF 40019 2 8 CWT R Computer Watchdog Timer sec 0 1000 0000 03F8 40020 3 2 March 2003 7 3 Data Mapping UM353 1 KSR R Kernel Software Rev see below 40021 1 16 CT R Cycle Time msec 0 32767 00000 7FFF 40022 3 4 LxT R Loop Type 0000 0005 40023 40047 n a 0 none 1 controller 2 sequencer 3 analog ind V2 2 4 discrete ind V2 2 5 pushbuttons V2 2 MSLCP R W Modbus Seq Loop Config Pt 0 25 0000 0019 40048 n a LSLCP R W LIL Seq Loop Config Pointer 0 25 0000 0019 n a 7 1 R W Station Address 0 250 0000 00FA 40049 3 3 RTS R W Front Port Display Assembly RTS 1 3 0001 0003 40050 3 5 reserved 40051 40057 1 17 23 MLTP R W Modbus Loop Trend Pointer V1 3 0 25 0000 0019 40058 n a NLTB R Number of Loop Trend Blocks V1 3 0 5 0000 0005 40059 n a AASEL R W Active Ack d Station Error Log V1 3 0 33767 0000 7FFF 40060 4 6 STY R W 1 Standard Time in Years 1997 40061 3 6 V2 0 STM R W 1 Standard Time in Months 1 12 40062 3 7 V2 0 STD R W 1 Standard Time in Days 1 31 40063 3 8 V2 0 STH R W 1 Standard Time in Hours 0 23 40064 3 9 V2 0 STMN R W 1 Standard Time in Minutes 0 59 40065 3 10 V2 0 STSC R W 1 Standard Time in Seconds 0 59 40066 3 11 V2 0 NAL R No of Analog Ind Loops ODA 0 255 0000 00FF 40067 5 37 V2 2 NDL R No of Discrete Ind Loops ODD 0 255 0000 00FF 40068 6 37 V2 2 NDP R No of Pushbutton Loops ODP 0 255 0000
194. 4 2003 UM353 1 Factory Configured Options 4 9 FCO122 Cascade Control w Operator Setpoint Limits Factory Configured Option FCO122 provides two loops configured for Cascade control The block diagram of the configuration of the two loops is shown below along with the changes made to the default parameter values of the configured blocks The process range of the Primary loop can be changed in Analog Input 1 and the range of the Secondary loop in Analog Input 2 Also the output range of the primary PID controller must be changed to match any new range in the secondary loop If the loop tag PRIM or SEC is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag Primary Process i PRIM Primary OR01 ORO2 Secondary Process AN2 2 Valve Rev 2 Secondary Primary Loop SETPT Setpoint Function Block SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block RG Range Pointer PRIM AIN1 OR RG PTR Range Pointer PRIM AINI OR INPUT TV Input TV PRIM AINI OI INPUT A Input A PRIM SETPT O1 INPUT TC Input TC PRIM A M NA ESN Exec Seq No 10 INPUT LU Input LU PRIM SPLIM HS INPUT LD Input LD PRIM SPLIM LS ESN Exec Seq No 5 March 2003 4 15 Factory Configured Options UM353 1 Primary Loop cont Ext Int Transfer
195. 4 13 Wiring to a Model 363 VIEWPAC Recorder ssssesssee eee 8 24 8414 Power Wiring ose rn iei eat oti ie i aed 8 24 S STACTORY CALIBRATION eerte dn tip ero tr ee e w ee 8 26 9 0 LOCAL FACEPLATE OPERATION 9 1 9 NORMALE OPERATION MODE Lunnan iie E ei Geh ce 9 1 9 2 CONFIGURATION MODE eese ttt 9 3 93 AUTOTUNE PROCEDURE 2 5 ttt Saa eerte 9 4 9 4 REMOVABLE CONFIGURATION BOARD eret enne etre enne teen rennen 9 7 9 5 REAL TIME CLOCK CONFIGURATION BACKUP BOARD eere 9 7 10 0 CONTROLLER AND SYSTEM TEST 10 1 10 1 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION AND asnasan ener enne 10 1 10 1 Connections nd niente ahd d Ren bt mee Ree he eere 10 1 10 12 Configuratio KNEET 10 2 10 13 etii fee e tee cete Ee 10 2 10 1 4 Auto M nual S eR es 10 2 10 1 5 am FOO tees e eet rre 10 2 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Contents ee EE ENER 10 4 10 5 10 1 8 QUICK 10 5 I0 E93TUNE SSS 10 6 10 1 10 View mode ccc eae ae SER EISE Pe EU
196. 43 44 L ATIF R Autotune Integral Time 0 001 4000 0 min 43967 60 1 n 45 46 L ATDF R Autotune Derivative Time 0 00 100 00 min 3969 60 1 n 47 48 L HDF R W On Off Controller HI Deviation Real 43971 60 1 n 11 12 L LDF R W On Off Controller LO Deviation Real 43973 60 1 n 1 11 12 L DBF R W On Off Controller DEADBAND Real 43975 60 1 n 2 11 12 L PMNF R W Process MIN SCALE Real 43977 60 1 n 27 28 L PMXF R W Process MAX SCALE Real 43979 60 1 n 29 30 L VMNF R W Valve MIN SCALE Real 43981 60 1 2 27 28 L VMXF R W ValveMAX SCALE Real 43983 60 1 n 2 29 30 L XMNF R W X Variable MIN SCALE Real 43985 60 1 n 3 27 28 L XMXF R W X Variable MAX SCALE Real 43987 60 1 nt3 29 30 L YMNF R W Y Variable MIN SCALE Real 43989 60 1 n 4 27 28 L YMXF R W Y Variable MAX SCALE Real 43991 60 1 n 4 29 30 L QIMNF R W Quickset I MIN SCALE Real 43993 60 1 1 43 44 L QIMXF R W Quickset 1 MAX SCALE Real 43995 60 1 1 45 46 L Q2MNF R W Quickset 2 MIN SCALE Real 43997 60 1 n 2 43 44 L Q2MXF R W Quickset 2 MAX SCALE Real 44009 60 1 n 2 45 46 L DGF R W Derivative Gain 1 00 30 00 44001 60 1 n 19 20 spares 00000000 44003 44009 60 1 Sequencer ODS Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L S001TIM R W Step 1 Time Period min Real 43951 60 1 1 150 151 L S001AEP R W Step 1 Analog End Point Real 43953 60 1 1 152 153 L S002TIM R W Step 2 Time Period min Real 43955 60 1 2 150 151 L S002AEP R W Step
197. 48 1 1 1 3 L G6P1 w Group 6 Press PB1 1 00316 48 1 n 1 1 4 L G6P2 w Group 6 Press PB2 1 00317 48 1 1 1 5 0653 R W Group 6 Auto Man Switch 1 0 00318 48 1 n 1 1 6 L G6FS R Group 6 Feedback Status 1 0 00319 48 1 n 1 1 7 L G7P1 W Group 7 Press PB1 1 00320 48 1 1 1 8 L G7P2 w Group 7 Press PB2 1 00321 48 1 n 1 1 9 0753 R W Group 7 Auto Man Switch 1 0 00322 48 1 n 1 1 10 L G7FS R Group 7 Feedback Status 1 0 00323 48 1 n 11 11 L G8P1 w Group 8 Press PB1 1 00324 48 1 n 1 1 12 LHG8P2 w Group 8 Press PB2 1 00325 48 1 1 1 13 0853 Group 8 Auto Man Switch 1 0 00326 48 1 n 1 1 14 L G8FS R Group 8 Feedback Status 1 0 00327 48 1 n 1 1 15 L GnS3 reading a 1 indicates switch position of Auto and reading 0 indicates Man Writing a 1 to the controller will toggle the state of the Auto Man switch L GnP1 amp L GnP2 writing a 1 to the controller will have the same affect as pushing the button on the faceplate of the controller If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle March 2003 7 29 Data Mapping UM353 1 Digital Indicator Loop Status Word L SW1 channel n parameter I BIT Description Block Read Write Output 0 Groupl PressPBI 1 0 write of 1 presse
198. 49 Analog Input Universal 2 a AINU2a 50 Analog Input Universal 2 b AINU2b 51 Analog Input Universal 2 c AINU2c 52 Analog Input Universal 2 d AINU2d 1 Terminal numbers are shown on each connector The plug in portions of the connectors are packed with a case The connectors are keyed 9 RON Case Safety Ground Connect to green screw at top center of rear terminal area NCA and NCB Connect LIL Twinaxial Cable or twisted pair wiring Refer to Section 8 4 9 for additional details IOA and IOB LonWorks bus connections Twisted pair wiring is typical Ground Bus An external user supplied ground bus can ease connection of multiple grounds particularly when twinaxial cable shields are to be grounded FIGURE 8 7 Rear Terminal Layout and Terminal Assignments Direct Entry Connectors March 2003 UM353 1 Installation Power AC Hot DC Power AC Neutral DC Network Communication Network Communication B Transmitter Power 26Vdc Transmitter Station Common Transmitter Power 26Vdc Digital Output 1 Digital Ouputs 1 2 Common Digital Output 2 Digital Input 1 Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2 Digital Input 2 Digital Input 3 Digital Input 3 Analog Output 1 Analog Output 1 2 Common Analog Output 2 Analog Input 1 Analog Input 1 2 Common Analog Input 2 Analog Input 3 Analog Input 3 Common Bus Bus B X03105S0 Notes O Q WwW gt gt
199. 5 L CMSGi 6 6 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Network Communications Timers Elapsed amp Remaining Times C P 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 n DYTOIET DYTO1RT DYTO2ET DYTO2RT DYTO3ET DYTO3RT 5 OSTO1RT OSTO2ET OSTO2RT OSTO3ET OSTO3RT PP PP PP PP PP n 5 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 m DYTO4ET DYTO4RT DYTO5ET DYTOSRT DYTOGET DYTO6RT OSTO4ET OSTO4RT OSTOSET OSTOSRT OSTOGET OSTO6RT RCTO4ET RCTO4RT RCTOSET RCTOSRT RCTOGET RCTO6RT ROTO4ET ROTO4RT ROTOSRT ROTOGET ROTO6RT EN 5 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 92 94 95 96 n Dvrorer Dvom DYTOSET DYTOSRT DYTOSET DYTOSRT EM r 1 4 sj 5 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 104 106 107 108 n omor omor owner Dvrizer omar gs T 5 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 n omer owman DYT4ET DYTMRT DYTiSET PDYTR mm T T T T n 5 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 n bvrtmr DVTMRT PDYTfRT MM i 5 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 n owe DYTSRT DYTZORT DYTMET DYTZIRT March 2003 6 7 Network Communications UM353 1 Sequencer and Timer Configuration Parameters SxxxTIM Step x Time Period
200. 5 amperes to power up six process transmitters 13 3 EXPANDER BOARD The I O Expander Board communicates with the Controller Board and contains hardware that increases station capability Additional direct connected I O includes two isolated universal analog inputs with thermocouple RTD resistance slidewire mA and voltage conversions two additional digital inputs that can be used as discrete or frequency inputs an additional analog output and two relay outputs calibration data for the Expander Board is stored in the board s nonvolatile EEPROM making recalibration unnecessary when interchanging Expander and Controller Boards Expander circuitry operates under the control of the MPU based Controller Board and like the Controller Board it contains both analog and digital circuitry The analog circuitry operates in real time while the digital circuitry operates at high speed under program control 13 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Circuit Description Relay 1 and Relay 2 are triggered by the off board MPU to provide relay contact type outputs Each SPDT relay output can be connected in a normally open or normally closed contact state 13 4 LonWorks BOARD The LonWorks Board provides additional I O when needed for multiple loop applications advanced control or batch sequencing This board uses the popular LonWorks LON stands for Local Operating Network protocol for high connectivity via a high speed digital fieldbus to a large sel
201. 67 72 4 67 8 bi y Mounting Clip ad lt 1 18 90 Case Dimensions in inches millimeters Plange s SIDE VIEW Ar 5 67 137 7 160 Y 0 32 0 8 Mes X03101S2 FIGURE 8 5 Moore 353 Dimensions Side Entry Connectors 8 6 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Installation 8 3 3 Station Mounting A straight slot screwdriver with at least a 10 254 mm shank is needed to tighten the two mounting clip screws 1 Locate the supplied Mounting Clip Kit It contains two mounting clips and two 8 32 x 1 fillister head screws Thread the mounting screws into the mounting clips See Figure 8 6 From in front of the panel insert the controller case into the panel cutout Slightly rotate the top mounting clip to fit it into the case cutout Then straighten the clip and partially tighten the mounting screw Insert straighten and partially tighten the bottom clip Square the controller with the panel Alternately tighten top and bottom mounting clip screws until the controller is secured to the panel Do not over tighten and distort the case Side View Insert clip as shown and straighten Bottom View X03103S0 FIGURE 8 6 Case Mounting Clip March 2003 8 7 Installation UM353 1 8 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION These sections contain electrical connection details for wiring a Moore 353 Each case rear connector and terminal Is identified Connector styles are discus
202. 6G0IM S246GFIM S246G0OM S244GFOM 247 524711 S247AEP S24760M S247GFIM S247G00M S244GFOM 248 5248 S248AEP S248G0IM S248GFIM S248G0OM Sz44GFOM 249 249 S249AEP S249G0IM S249GFIM S249G00M S244GFOM 250 250 5250 _ S2s0GolM S250GFIM S250G00M Sz44GFOM 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 1 T 2 onm RCTONT 3 oos osmos RCTO3NT Rcrsr 4 Osm4r Rcm4r I s Dos OSTOT Rector Romer Dyoer oOsror Rcrerr Romer 7 ostort ROTT 8 OSTOT RCTONT RCTOBRT 9 OSTOT RCTONT ROTOT 10 Dymor osmor ROTIONT Retort ROTOT RCTHNT RCTHMFT 12 OSTI2T RCTIZTT 6 8 2003 UM353 1 Network Communications 6 2 4 Analog Indicator Loop Data Analog Indicator loop data occupies six LIL channels The starting channel is entered during configuration of the ODA operator display function block for each loop LIL CHAN
203. 8 STOREd at which time the MPU configuration will be transferred to the Board Install MPU firmware compatible with the Board configuration Press ENTER to ACK error Controller will go on line using configuration in MPU memory The configuration will remain intact until a parameter is STOREd at which time the MPU configuration will be transferred to the Board Install a Board or new Board Press ENTER to ACK error Controller will go on line using configuration in MPU memory Power down and install the LonWorks board from the same controller that the Board came from Press ENTER to ACK error Controller will go on line Any existing LonWorks network data will be used if it is valid otherwise it will be set to default values In either case the LonWorks network manager will be required to re establish the network bindings ON LINE ERROR CODES AND STATUS CODES These codes can be produced while the controller is running function block and may be actively controlling a process Depending on the message and its priority level user intervention may be required or the message may simply be informational in nature LIL parameter SE located at channel 4 parameter I Modbus register 40002 will reflect unacknowledged error or status messages present in the controller Messages are displayed according to priority until all active messages have been acknowledged If no link code has been assigned to the active message the SE
204. 8 1 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS eccescssessescsseseescseesceecaseaesecaeeseeecnseaeeecneaceecaeeseecneeseeeeneeaeeeeneenees 8 1 8 2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS i e 8 1 8 3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION punere 8 3 8 3 1 Removable Connectors and Covers 8 3 8 3 2 Panel and Rack Mounting Guidelines sese 8 5 8 3 3 Station Mounting o cte Re ERU fe ad I ee du RE RR Fee ee ets 8 7 8 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION poneis ieii o tiber tain eterne dre 8 8 8 4 1 Wiring Guidelines SN TER S S T N 8 8 8 4 2 Analog Signal Input Wiring 4 20 mA 1 5 Vdc and mV sss 8 13 8 4 3 Analog Output Wiring 4 20 mA 1 5 Vdc n n 8 15 8 4 4 Digital Inputiand Output UL U 8 16 8 4 5 Thermocouple Input 8 18 8 4 6 RTD Input Wiring eene ee RR 8 19 8 4 7 Ohms and Slidewire Input Wiring 8 20 8 4 8 Relay Output Wiring edes re RN EO eee en 8 20 8 4 9 Local Instrument iR Aet SecA sh tei RR a 8 20 8 4 10 EonWOtks Waning en see ee n S RU A AE TEES 8 22 8 4 11 Modbus Wiring eee eee 8 22 8 4 12 Bthernet Wiring o kg ede qase teda tac o ues tits 8 22 8
205. ASCII Char 45462 100 1 2 31 33 L XU R W X Variable Units 6 ASCII Char 45465 100 1 3 31 33 L YU R W Y Variable Units 6 ASCII Char 45468 100 1 4 31 33 L TLU R W Totalizer Units 6 ASCII Char 45471 100 1 3 19 21 L QIN R Quickset Hold 1 Name 8 ASCII Char 45474 100 4 n 1 37 40 L Q1U R W Quickset Hold 1 Units 6 ASCII Char 45478 100 1 n 3 37 39 L Q2N R Quickset Hold 2 Name 8 ASCII Char 45481 100 1 n 2 37 40 L Q2U R W Quickset Hold 2 Units 6 ASCII Char 45485 100 1 n 3 40 42 L LHM R W Left Horizontal Bar Message 5 ASCII Char 45488 100 1 2 13 15 L RHM R W Right Horizontal Bar Message 5 ASCII Char 45491 100 1 n 2 16 18 80000 45492 45550 100 1 Sequencer ODS Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L TAG R Loop Tag V2 2 12 ASCII Char 45451 100 1 n 37 42 L PMSG R Primary Message V1 3 8 ASCII Char 45457 100 1 n 1 37 41 L SMSG R Secondary Message V1 3 12 ASCII Char 45461 100 1 2 37 42 L CMSGa R Conditional Message a V1 3 16 ASCII Char 45467 100 1 n 3 37 44 LZCMSGb R Conditional Message b V1 3 16 ASCII Char 45475 100 1 n 4 37 44 L CMSGc R Conditional Message c V1 3 16 ASCII Char 45483 100 1 n 5 37 44 LZCMSGd R Conditional Message d V1 3 16 ASCH Char 45491 100 1 n 49 56 LZCMSGe Conditional Message e V1 3 16 ASCII Char 45499 100 1 n 1 49 56 L CMSGf Conditional Message f V1 3 16 ASCII Char 45507 100 1 n 2 49 56 L CMSGg Conditional
206. ATION parameter is identified with each C notation in a function block parameter listing in Section 3 The calibration mode can be entered from the individual block or from the CAL mode at the station level March 2003 2 5 Configuration Overview UM353 1 X 000000 4 176 STORE TOAST 2 325 80 dee bn 01 Re STORE Key Nr Bove 8m CONFIRM i TC2053 Alphanumeric Display STORE I tee 325 80 Numeric Display STORE Configuration Pushbutton Display with changeable value turn Pulser knob lt gt Turn Pulser to select new parameter or value move horizontally across map 5 lt gt Turn Pulser to select additional menu items 8 x Use Step Up or Step Down pushbutton move vertically across map FIGURE 2 1 Configuration Road Map March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 0 FUNCTION BLOCKS This section contains a detailed description of each function block FB available for configuration Each function block description is supplemented by 1 a drawing of the block showing data inputs and outputs and control lines 2 a block parameter table Most blocks are further described by a block diagram that shows the block s circuitry in a simplified or equivalent circuit form NOTES This User s Manual includes the additional functionality provided by MPU Controller Board firmwa
207. AUTO is configured the autotuner will set the DEV to 4 times the HYS This is the minimum value needed to provide good autotuning results The HYS parameter is the amount that the process must deviate from setpoint before switching the output in the opposite direction This value must be at least equal to or slightly greater than any process noise band If the noise band cannot be determined the autotuner will compute it at the start of an autotuning exercise when the HYS parameter has been configured as AUTO The STEP parameter is the amount that the valve will change on the first on off cycle After the first cycle the autotuner will adjust the step to keep the process within the value of the DEV parameter On subsequent autotune exercises the step will use the value computed from the previous exercise unless the AT RESET parameter is set to YES or the controller has been power cycled The dynamic response recommended by the autotuner can be configured as Fast Medium or Slow The Medium setting will normally provide a response that has no or little overshoot to a setpoint step response When the POST AT parameter is set to YES the control loop will be returned to Auto using the recommended tuning values unless a warning occurred during the test More details on autotuning can be found in the Operation section 3 84 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 79 PIDAG PIDAG Controller PIDAG is an adaptive gain propo
208. B2SW PB 2 transfer 0 100 SWitch function block when the block has been configured for use cose OPEN within the Active Loop See the function block details for more information on PB2SW Pushbutton controls the operation of an Auto Manual function block when the block has been configured for use within the M 0 0 3 5 3 Active Loop See the function block details for more information A M When the A M is switched to Auto the numeric display will show the Setpoint value as indicated by S in the alphanumeric display and x0314152 when switched to Manual the Valve value and V will be shown LOOP Pushbutton One or more loops be configured When more than one loop has been configured the LOOP button will advance the operator display to the next Active Loop All operator controls now affect the Active Loop that is currently shown in the alphanumeric display e g FC2367 When a loop is first displayed the loop tag will appear in the alphanumeric and the displayed variable will be the same as when the loop was last viewed Pushbutton this button is used together with the L and S status LEDs to manage events e g alarm status and error conditions within the controller Events have user assigned priorities 1 5 with 1 the highest and will be organized within the controller first by priority and then by order of occurrence e Status LED Indicates that event is active
209. CALE MAXSCALE and DPP parameters so that other function blocks such as the controller operator faceplate and workstation interface can point to this block for range and display informationBlock names IDs Input terminations terminal numbers are listed in Section 8 4 input types are factory calibrated and do not require field calibration However for those cases where outputs must be adjusted to meet local standard a field calibration feature is available to override the factory calibration for the input type selected The factory calibration is retained so that the input can be returned to the factory calibration at any time by storing FAC in the calibration selection Table 3 5 provides the input values that are used to perform a field calibration A verify mode is available during calibration to view the sensor input over the full range The signal that is viewed in the calibration verify mode 15 in the basic units of measure e g for temperature mv for millivolts and is not affected by the temperature units conversion digital filter scaling or the output bias adjustment The full block output with these parameters applied can be viewed in the VIEW mode within loop configuration During a hot a warm or a cold start the function block will temporarily by pass the digital filter to enable the output to initialize at the actual hardware input signal Note that the field calibration is erased when the SENsor TYPE is
210. CALE Real 43955 60 1 n 2 31 32 L Q2MXF R W Quickset 2 MAX SCALE Real 43957 60 1 n 2 33 34 L Q3MNF R W Quickset 3 MIN SCALE Real 43959 60 1 n 3 31 32 L Q3MXF R W Quickset 3 MAX SCALE Real 43961 60 1 3 33 34 L Q4MNF R W Quickset 4 MIN SCALE Real 43963 60 1 n 4 31 32 L Q4MXF R W Quickset 4 MAX SCALE Real 43965 60 1 n 4 33 34 L P1MNF R Process 1 MIN SCALE Real 43967 60 1 n 4 13 14 R Process 1 MAX SCALE Real 43969 60 1 n 5 13 14 L P2MNF R Process 2 MIN SCALE Real 43971 60 1 n 4 15 16 L P2MXF R Process 2 MAX SCALE Real 43973 60 1 n 5 15 16 L P3MNF R Process 3 MIN SCALE Real 43975 60 1 n 4 17 18 L P3MXF R Process 3 MAX SCALE Real 43977 60 1 n 5 17 18 L P4MNF R Process 4 MIN SCALE Real 43979 60 1 n 4 19 20 R Process 4 MAX SCALE Real 43981 60 1 n 5 19 20 spares 00000000 43983 44009 60 1 Discrete Indicator ODD V2 2 Code R W Description Range n a Pushbutton Switch Indicator ODP V2 2 Register MB C P LIL Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL n a March 2003 7 15 Data Mapping UM353 1 7 3 7 String Loop Data 8 bit ASCII Char 2 Word Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L TAG R Loop Tag 12 ASCII Char 45451 100 1 1 3 2 7 L PUR R W Process Units Reduced 4 ASCII Char 45457 100 1 3 8 9 L PU R W Process Units 6 ASCII Char 45459 100 1 n 31 33 L VU R W Valve Units 6
211. CTANGENTE tile hti tei a e ied ib nie a ids nie iiie eiiis 3 29 March 2003 i Contents UM353 1 3 2 21 Analog Write Ethernet 3 0 3 30 3222 BA TOT Batch Totalizet eire re te d Ce ehe Tende ua hU ee lero e 3 31 3 223 BATSW Batch Switches 3 33 2312 24 BTA Sol Sha u ab uu St n 3 34 3 225 CIE Coil Inputs Ethernet VI Danse teet e ERI 3 35 3 2 26 CHR CHAfactertzet dt e ka esti ti de 3 36 3 227 CMP s Comparator ee deeem tuber 3 36 3 228 COS COSINE ei eA RNA ea aa ne deg ee idein E 3 37 3 2 29 Coil Write Ethernet V3 0 esses T u S a tnter enne 3 37 3 2 30 DAM Deviation Ampliftier eee nnne nennen ener en en nennen 3 38 3 2 31 DID Digital Input lev_Discrete n eren en nennen 3 39 3 2 32 DIE s Digital Ethernet cette reete et desee ree eR Yeh 3 40 3 2 33 DIL Discrete Input LI eicit tie ee e ERE E FU eR 3 41 3 2 34 DIN Digital Inputs FE 3 42 3 2 35 DINU Digital Inputs Universal eene nnne nnne nre 3 43 3 22 36 DIS Digital Input State cse ac ade er RR ERI RR D a Ee tu ee tdi 3 44 3 2 37 DIV DIVISION SERERE eene IR vH ELM Ie S vr ee ERI Vitres 3 45 3 2 38 DNC Divide b
212. Coordinate Y5 5 Output Coordinate Y8 S Output Coordinate Y9 s P lt lt KK KKK KR REKE gt P lt gt x gt P lt pe P lt b lt P lt P lt ZxppbpNbukbbkepppkpbkbkbbb Output Coordinate Y1 Output Coordinate Y2 Output Coordinate Y6 Output Coordinate Y7 0 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 70 0 80 0 90 0 100 0 0 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 70 0 80 0 90 0 Y Output Coordinate Y10 s Real 100 0 NPUT INPUT X loop tag block tag output null EIS Exec Seq H 001 to 250 COMPARATOR _ 000 Analog Input COMPARATOR Output 1 External Limit EL Comparator LIMIT 5 Real 0 0 Dead BAND 5 0 5 DiRect ACTing 5 NO YES YES INPUT loop tag block tag output null INPUT EL loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 DEAD BAND the output will return from a high 1 output to a low 0 output when input 15 less than the limit Dead BAND setting for direct action or greater than the limit Dead BAND for reverse action EXTERNAL LIMIT When input EL is configured the LIMIT setting will be ignored and the value of input EL will be used as the limit value March 20
213. D Temp Code 4 See UM353 1 APPROVED 14 1 MODEL DESIGNATION WARNING Do not connect or disconnect configuration port cable while in a hazardous location Do not remove the rear terminal housing 353A4FINNLNNNAX 16353 222 Serial 01559621 Typical Input and Output Capacity Xmtr Pwr Sply Out 25V 120 mA Anlg inp V 0 to 5 Vde 300A Anlg out cur 4 to 20 mA 800 Ohms Dgtl inp V 0 to 30 Vdc 5 mAdc Dgtl out cur 100 mA 30 Vdc Rly out 5A 120V 2 5A 240 Vac Max Ambient Temp 50 Table 14 1 shows the controller s model number sequence The model designation is shown on a nameplate on the top of the case The nameplate and other labels carry important information about the controller such as Model Number Bill of Material number P N No Serial Number and Certifications IMPORTANT Confirm a controller s model number and hazardous area certifications before installing applying power or servicing When circuit boards are added to a controller in the field nameplate information will not reflect the current physical configuration March 2003 14 1 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1 TABLE 14 1 Moore 353 Model Designation 353 PROCESS AUTOMATION CONTROLLER MPU Controller Board 120 240 Vac 85 264 Vac 47 63 Hz D 24 Vdc 20 15 Mounting Case 1 Case with 26 Terminals not expandable to 52 terminals Discon
214. DIDxx Mode of Output O1 1 forced 0 normal Ol Mode of Output O2 1 forced 0 normal 02 IDxx Mode of Output 03 1 forced 0 normal 03 IDxx Mode of Output 04 1 forced 0 normal 04 IDxx Mode of Output 05 1 forced 0 normal 05 07 A C E OF Z gt of Output 7 1 forced 0 normal IDxx Mode of Output O8 1 forced 0 normal Dxx Mode of Output OA Dxx Mode of Output OB IDxx Mode of Output OC IDxx Mode of Output OD IDxx Mode of Output OE 1 forcedO normal DIDxx RW IDxx Mode of Output OF I forced Q normal DIDxx IDxx Mode of Output O9 1 forced 0 normal 00 02 109 3 04 05 IDxx of Output I forced Q normal DIDxx 06 08 209 OA OB OC OD O 1 Writes made using parameter data send command CMD 9 to entire word March 2003 7 37 Data Mapping UM353 1 Discrete Input Remote xx Forced State Word of Function Block Outputs DIDxxF DIDxx Output O0 Forced State I highO low DIDxx IR 1 00 5 DIDxx Output O5 Forced State I high O low DIDxx IR 1 05 6 DiDxx Output Forced State T high 0 low DiDx R o6 7 DIDxx Output O7 Forced State I highO low _ DIDxx IR 1 07 8 DiDxx Output O8 Forced State Thigh O low Dip R og 9 DIDxx
215. Data can also be acquired from remote servers for the purpose of archiving and or data mining The Ethernet Modbus Bridge in Figure 1 2 accepts an Ethernet data command from the controller and outputs an equivalent Modbus command to a Modbus device at address 1 The returning Modbus data is embedded by the bridge in an Ethernet packet to be sent to the requesting controller Regardless of the selected communication option the RS232 port on the underside of the Display Assembly will communicate using Modbus Controller hardware architecture is designed to accommodate other emerging fieldbus technologies This includes field communications that require lower power for intrinsic safety and higher speed for interplant networking For small retrofit applications the Moore 353 with operator faceplate is a replacement for a simple stand alone single loop controller It is easily upgraded with additional I O and communication options for advanced control strategies and plant networking March 2003 1 3 Introduction UM353 1 Ethernet 102053 P m me Moore 353 Moore 353 m m emm Multiple Moore 353 and Procidia Nodes each with an Ethernet Network Board Modbus Ethernet Modbus Foreign Device with Bridge Modbus Communications Local Client Internal Web Server Intranet MG00388a
216. E STATUS or OFF LINE ERROR message will be displayed See the Maintenance section for messages 9 5 REAL TIME CLOCK CONFIGURATION BACKUP BOARD The controller is available with an optional real time clock and configuration backup board The configuration backup performs the same functions as the RCB described above In addition the board includes a real time clock The time can be set using the built in CLOCK function block in the STATN parameters It can also be set over the Modbus LIL or Ethernet network m 16 RCB requires MPU Controller board firmware version 1 31 or higher 7 RTC CB requires MPU Controller board firmware version 2 0 or higher March 2003 9 7 UM353 1 9 8 March 2003 UM353 1 Controller and System Test 10 0 CONTROLLER AND SYSTEM TEST This section presents a series of steps to verify controller operation and to help a user become familiar with the functionality of the controller A new controller is shipped factory configured with either Factory Configured Option FCO101 Single Loop Controller or a user specified custom configuration The following procedure is for FCO101 with factory set parameter values If a custom configuration was installed or if you have configured the controller it may be necessary to modify the procedure to test all function blocks in that configuration To determine the current configuration of a controller either e refer to your configuration documentati
217. ED When using a PC capable of sending LIL or Modbus commands the mode can be changed and the forced state can be assigned a high 1 or low 0 value The values accessible over the network are the two switch inputs N and F and the position of the SPDT switch illustrated in the block diagram A mode of 0 is Normal and 1 is Forced Each function block output also has a quality status associated DIGITAL INPUT LEV_DISCRETE LonWorks Remote I O Bus DD DIGITAL INPUT LEV DISCRETE 16 channel Channel 0 felt Output 0 Q0 Quality 0 Output F Channel F Quality F Qs Quality Status with it This status will go high 1 when the block ol determines it has lost communication with the Lon node If any of the individual quality outputs are high the Quality Status block output will also be high LonWorks Remote Devices Station node r1 gt nv x1 SNVT P LonWorks 0 Network Variable NUMber nv 110 2000 9 nv x1 binding option board node r2 meee Remote Weu t 1 SNVT gt yh NO Bus b 2 SNVT_ gt i gt 2 Lr nv 0 SNVT So B nv x1 binding nv X2 binding Foo node ndeun gt 0
218. EEC Low Voltage Directive 77 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC Manufactured in Spring House PA U S A 9 ET William T Wright Manager R amp D Process Instrumentation European Community Representative Date M 04 04 jer Benno Grosser Siemens AG Automation and Drives Declaration for Controllers with Case Option 4 14 14 March 2003 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1 UOISTALG pue 1u tu inse jA JO OURIYOS 4 19194 9 gt q lt V S N vd poinjoegnuepq 89 66 pue 248 16 26 99 9 16 se 33 95 68 s noeq OWA 9331 89 56 se 288 62 6 IANA FLOA MOT 221130 SuorstAo1d ay 8 JUSWUOIIAUD peursnpug prepuejs Ajpqueduroo oreuzeuionoor 7 78005 juaumuo1tAuo 1431 pue erjuoprsew 5 oueuor Aypqneduioo 2 1 2800 lt erjsnpu uorssrtu 2 JUAN 7 1800 lt NA asn pue poguos juouidinbo sjusuannbay LS z pue sjusurpuoure 41 01019 NI M0 3Q p lst SJUSWNJOP JOJO JO sprepuejs SUIMOTJOJ oq UHA ur SI 5
219. ERVIEW Configuration enables a user to select function blocks stored in the controller from an available list and enter appropriate block parameters to implement a specific control strategy Although configuration affects the entire station the controller partitions related control implementations into LOOPS A maximum of 99 loops can be configured and 25 can have operator displays that are mapped to network communications Each LOOP can contain the function blocks listed in the following paragraphs Signals can be connected between function blocks within the LOOP as well as between loops Also there are several STATION function blocks that are fixed and available in the STATION menu for setting station related values Section 3 fully describes all available function blocks For tuning guidelines refer to Section 9 2 Autotune Procedure or request AM 35 Digital Controller Tuning NOTE This User s Manual includes the functionality provided by MPU Controller Board firmware Versions 1 3 and 2 0 through 2 40 These enhancements appear mainly in Sections 2 and 3 They are identified by the phrase in version 1 3 and higher or simply V1 3 or V2 4 in text 2 1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS Function blocks that are permanent and accessible at the STATION menu level FCO LIB Factory Configured Options Library Station Parameters SECUR Security CLOCK real time CLOCK re
220. Figure 11 1 This is the controller s power input fuse A replacement fuse can be obtained from a local electronics supplier or can be ordered from the factory See the Parts List for fuse part number and description To replace the fuse 1 Refer to section 11 5 2 and remove the Display Assembly Refer to Section 11 5 3 and remove the MPU Controller board While the controller is apart visually inspect the assemblies for overheated or otherwise damaged components Remove the failed fuse and install a replacement Reassemble the controller Refer to the above referenced sections as necessary DSD Apply power to the controller Operate the controller off line for several minutes to be sure that condition does not exist that will cause the replacement fuse to fail 11 5 2 Display Assembly To replace Display Assembly see Section 11 5 2 1 To replace the bezel or the circuit board perform the procedures in Sections 11 5 2 1 and 11 5 2 2 11 5 2 1 To Replace Display Assembly REMOVAL 1 Ina hazardous area remove power from the Controller 2 Protect the station s electronic components from electrostatic discharge Fasten a conductive wrist strap around your wrist and ground the strap to the ground screw on the Controller s case an unpainted area on the panel or a grounded static dissipative workmat 11 12 March 2003 UM353 1 Maintenance 3 Loosen the Display Assembly s two faceplate screws One is above the n
221. I high dow PRSEQ RWO 8 Groupn Input 8 State lI high0dow PRSEQ m8 Sequencer Group current step StateWord of Outputs SGnSO isen n dd _ 6 Output 6 State ihigh0low PRSEQ n6 7 Output 7 State 1 highO low PRSEQ n7 8 Groupn Output 8 State 0 7 PRSEQ RW n Group n Output Su high Oow LRQ 1 Writes are made using a parameter data send command CMD 9 to the entire word 7 34 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 3 11 LonWorks Remote Models 352P 353 354N DID1N 0 R DIDO1 Normal state of LON Input 0 1 0 02401 1 202 0 DIDIN F R DIDO1 Normal state of LON Input F 1 0 02416 1 202 15 DID1M 0 R W DIDO1 Mode of FB Output 0 1 0 02417 1 203 0 DID1M F R W 01001 Mode of FB Output 1 0 02432 1 203 15 DID1F 0 R W DIDO Forced state 0 1 0 02433 1 204 0 DIDO1F F R W DIDO1 Forced state F 1 0 02448 1 204 15 DODOINO R DODO1 Normal state of FB Input 0 1 0 02449 1 205 0 DODINF R DODO Normal state of FB Input 1 0 02464 1 205 15 DODIMO R W DOD01 Mode of LON Output 0 1 0 02465 1 206 0 DODIMF R W 20101 Mode of LON Output 1 0 02480 1 206 15 DODIFO R W DODO1 Forced state 0 1 0 02481 1 207 0 DODIFF R W DODO Forced state F 1 0 02496 1 207 15 DID6NO R DID06 Normal state of LON Input 0 1 0 02881 6 20
222. ID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer 01 Analog Output 1 Function Block INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT D Input D Loop01 SETPT O1 INPUT S Input Loop01 A M 01 ESN Exec Seq No 10 ODC Operator Display for Controllers PID PID Controller Function Block P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR RG PTR Range Pointer 01 V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT P Input P Process Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT Input Loop01 SETPT O1 INPUT S Input S Setpoint Loop01 SETPT O1 INPUT F Input F Loop01 A M 01 INPUT V Input V Valve Loop01 A M OI INPUT A Input A Loop01 A M AS LOOP Loop 01 ESN Exec Seq No 15 March 2003 4 3 Factory Configured Options UM353 1 4 3 FCO103 External Set Controller with Tracking Local Setpoint Factory Configured Option FCO103 provides a single loop controller with external setpoint configured in Loop01 A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks This configuration provides
223. INPUT 4 o loop tag block tag output Modbus Eth t bilit I NPUT 5 inputs loop tag block tag output odbus ernet capability I 6 iNPUT6 loop tag block tag output nul I NPUT 7 INPUT7 loop tag block tag output 8 inputs loop tag block tag output INPUT 9 INPUT9 tag block tag output null INPUTA loop tag block tag output null B INPUTB loop tag block tag output I C INPUTC loop tag block tag output null I D INPUTD loop tag block tag output I E INPUTE loop tag block tag output null I INPUTF loop tag block tag output null Rev 2 3 2 41 DOL Discrete Output LIL DISCRETE WORD OUTPUT LIL DOL function blocks are available when the optional LIL communication board is installed They allow the station to E S s DOL output a global word GW with bits 0 representing the state 1 or 0 of each of the Boolean inputs D0 DF Unconfigured Input DO FD DISCRETE WORD SLEAN inputs are set to 0 DOL block numbers are assigned in DATA sequence with each use station wide IL LL CHAN LIL CHANnel 00810255 null LIN PIU T D 0 INPUT DO 65 loop tag block tag output null INPUT DF null
224. If the noise band can not be determined the autotuner will compute it at the start of an autotuning exercise when the HYS parameter has been configured as AUTO The STEP parameter is the amount that the valve will change on the first 1 5 on off cycles After the first cycles the autotuner will adjust the step to keep the process within the value of the DEV parameter On subsequent autotune exercises the step will use the value computed from the previous exercise unless the AT RESET parameter is set to YES or the controller has been power cycled The dynamic response recommended by the autotuner can be configured as Fast Medium or Slow The Medium setting will normally provide a response that has no or little overshoot to a setpoint step response When the POST AT parameter is set to YES the control loop will be returned to Auto using the recommended tuning values unless a warning occurred during the test More details on autotuning can be found in the Operation section of this manual 3 82 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 78 PID PID Controller PID isaproportional integral controller and one of five controller types that can be used on a one per loop basis It PID CONTROLLER uses external feedback to provide integral action The block allows interaction with other function blocks lt EsN 000
225. Input B B SELECTOR InputC C ISIEIL SELector TYPE 5 LO HI LO Input A SIGNAL i INPUT INPUT A H loop tag blocktag output INPUT INPUT B loop tag block tag output null SELECTOR Output O1 LILNIPUT INPUT C H loop tag block tag output null Input HI LO ES Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 C Input BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 95 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 92 SETPT Setpoint SETPT function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis to permit operator adjustment of the controller setpoint within the loop The on line setpoint is adjustable using the pulser knob while loop tag gt S is the displayed variable unless the track command TC is high 1 at which time the setpoint will track the TV input A setpoint ramping feature allows the setpoint to ramp to a TARGET value The start of a ramp can be initiated using a communication command asserting input SR high the ramp starts on a positive transition of the SR input or using the RAMP ON OFF function in the QUICKSET mode Both ramp RATE and ramp TIME can be set in configuration Firmware 1 30 and higher sets the USE RATE default to NO earlier versions are set at YES Setting configuration parameter USE RATE to YES will cause the setpoint to change at the rate setting and ignore a configured ramp time The RTIME or RRATE TARGET
226. Installation And Service Instruction SD15492 for details FIGURE 8 22 LIL Network Wiring March 2003 8 21 Installation UM353 1 8 4 10 LonWorks Wiring Figure 8 23 shows typical LonWorks network wiring to the Moore 353 The network termination resistor 15 supplied in the installation kit Connections to remote devices are described in each device User s Manual supplied with the devices See Section 8 4 2 for wiring guidelines Controller Terminals i Remote Devices P gt 25 gt 3 LonWorks tede 5 IOB E 9 26 Y VA p 8 G Ex mmmmm f a Y 22 Gauge AWG Twisted Pair Wire node n us I 4 P 52 3 Network Z Termination Resistor X03143S2 FIGURE 8 23 LonWorks Network Wiring 8 4 11 Modbus Wiring This section describes the wiring needed to connect a host device to a Moore 353 s Modbus network interface When connected the host can read data from and write data to a Moore 353 in a command response format Most host devices communicate using RS232 while the Modbus network interface is RS485 As shown in Figure 8 24 a 2 wire RS485 to RS232 converter is installed to perform the protocol conversion and adapt the connection hardware A shielded RS232 cable with either DB9 or DB25 connectors is installed between the host device and the converter An RS485 shielded twisted pair cable connects the converter to a Moore 353 Up
227. LD RUN HED 272 HELD 37 PCOMP rn F gt TON Je DONE ren R 3 wo SL 8 OR 38 OR ANS DN READY ABORTED gt BONE gt 16 DONE B unconfigured 0 gt DONE lt 74 RT HELD AND ABORTED ABORT mn 21 gt 3 x9 OR AND 25 DONE gt 50 ES AND EO ABORTED READY 49 READY y 5 1 m 9 ABORTED lt 76 ABORTED si Figure 3 1 3 80 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 77 PD PD Controller PD is a proportional only controller with manual reset It is one of five controller types that can be used on a one per loop basis Manual reset allows the output of the controller to be set for a normal operating value i e the desired output when the process equals setpoint under a given load condition Derivative action is provided when the parameter TD is non zero The controller includes an autotune feature that can be initiated from the operator faceplate using the quick TUNE feature PD CONTROLLER PD ESN 000 Range Output Range Process PD D Output Setpoint S CONTROLLER Feedback F Absolute Error Auto 7 Initialize 77
228. LD Track Command Output 1 L INITial VALUE 5 Real 0 0 INPUT TV loop tag block tag output null C INPUT TC loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 zzz U nHH gt lt ESN 000 Input B Input R r9 Output 1 TOT 91 INPUT S loop tag block tag output null INPUT R loop tag block tag output null ozz mo EDGE TRIGGER 0 NO 1 YES 1 mA 44 2020 Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 March 2003 3 101 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 101 TSW Transfer Switch TSW function blocks select one of two analog input signals as the output signal Input becomes the output when input SC is low 0 and input B will be the output when input SC goes high 1 Unconfigured inputs will default to SC low 0 A 0 0 B 100 0 A Input A mula Outpu Input B o1 pPp 5 Switch Command X03135S0 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 102 XOR_ Exclusive OR Logic XOR_ function blocks perform a logical exclusive OR function on all three inputs An unused input will cause the block to function as a two input XOR The XOR output will be low 0 when all configured inputs are low 0 or when all configured inputs are high 1
229. LI di 7 2 2 Pull cover out from rear panel 121 r 8 lt Ethernet cable cutout FIGURE 8 1 Direct Entry Connectors Cover Installation and Removal Installation 1 Align the removable portion of the connector with the fixed portion 2 Press the removable portion onto the fixed portion 3 Tighten the two captive screws Do not over tighten Check that wires and components remain connected securely 4 Install the cover as shown in the above figure COVER AND CONNECTOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION SIDE ENTRY Removal 1 Remove the connector cover by slightly compressing the cover s U shaped extrusion to free the cover s tabs The cover may be secured by two screws as described below The cover is shown in Figure 8 5 2 necessary disconnect unclamp or unbundle wires connected to the connector to be removed Be sure there is sufficient slack in the wiring for connector removal 3 Grasp the connector tab and pull straight out from the case A slight bias on the pull toward the center of the Connector Socket will often ease removal See Figure 8 3 Be careful not to stress or damage connected wires and components 8 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Installation Installation 1 Using straight blade screwdriver with a 1 8 blade width turn each unused terminal screw clockwise until it is just tight do not over tighten Read the letters numbers on the connector to be insert
230. LIL board is installed Loop data detailed in the next section can be associated with a Controller Control Loop or a Sequencer Sequencer Loop as defined by the selection of the operator display ODC Operator Display for Controller or ODS Operator Display for Sequencer Much of the analog data is available is two formats The first is 16 bit values scaled consistent with previous LIL products enabling integration into existing LIL systems This data type also provides Modbus masters unable to handle 32 bit floating point a method for obtaining data from the station The second is the standard 32 bit IEEE floating point format consistent with the actual data in the station This data type is contained in two consecutive registers or parameters e When using Modbus the LSW is first and the MSW second e When using LIL the first parameter contains the MSW and the second parameter the LSW e Boolean values are packed into 16 bit words for LIL use and are available in coils when using Modbus e String data formatted as 2 ASCII characters per word with the left most character in the most significant byte containing tag units and message information is available with Modbus and LIL Most Station data is Read Only except for e SE Station Error parameter that allows a write of 0000 to reset the current error as an acknowledgment e SSW Station Status Word parameter which allows writes to certain bits coils
231. MANUAL ODD Rw 1 AUTO 0 MANUAL ODD RW aGIAIG Discrete 3 Status 1 AUTO 0 MANUAL ODD RW Discrete 4 Status TO 0 MANUAL ODD RW Discrete 5 Status TO 0 MANUAL ODD RW CIE 1 1 AUTO 0 MANUAL ODD RW TO 0 MANUAL ODD RW TO 0 MANUAL ODD RW AUTO 0 MANUAL 00 RW I AUTO 0 MANUAL ODD I AUTO 0 MANUAL ODD I AUTO 0 MANUAL ODD R W gt c3 z 1 1 gt 2 Discrete 7 Status Discrete 8 Status Discrete 9 Status gt Z 1 1 gt Z gt gt gt ci Z Z c ccc gt C z Discrete D Status 1 AUTO 0 MANUAL ODD RW Diserete E Status 1 AUTO 0 MANUAL ODD RW i Discrete F Status 1 AUTO 0 MANUAL ODD e mask on command will toggle the position of the Auto Man switch EE 212 CIGIS March 2003 7 27 Data Mapping UM353 1 Digital Indicator Loop Status Word LHDOSW channel n 2 parameter I 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 13 14 5 ig BIT PBISW Input MD PB2SW Input MD PB2 Value 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF Block 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N Value 1 0 write o
232. MDLO ACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char GREEN loop tag block tag output null LUN PULT INPUT NC looptag blocktag output MD INPUT MD loop tag block tag output null E SIN Exec Seq H 001 to 250 This block operates with an operator faceplate that includes green and red LEDs that are turned on using input MD A HI 1 input will turn on the Green LED and a LO the Red LED The default connection will be the PS output of the block but should be changed as required to display the correct status The message parameters do not apply to the current product PB1 Switch Operator Display Interface BOD LEDS MSG _ MDHIST MDHIAC G kkkkk kkkkk PB1 MDLOST MDLOAC lt MD R kkkkk kkkkk MD Input NC gt 1 PS PB Switch NO m Output Momentary Action Lo Sustained Action POWER UP When the switch is configured for momentary action it will always power up in the NC position For sustained action with the POWER UP parameter set to YES the switch will power up in the last position during a hot or warm start and during a cold start will power up in the NC position When the POWER UP parameter is set to NO the switch will power up in the last position during a hot start During a warm or cold start it will power up in
233. MPU Controller Board uses sealed lithium battery that has a life of up to 40 years The battery powers a portion of memory that stores operating data when external power is removed from the controller When external power is next applied the controller will read this data and return to the stored operating conditions Should the battery fail the station will power up in Cold start using the controller configuration stored in permanent FLASH memory Battery condition has no effect on normal operation while external power is applied The SERV PIN is used when LonWorks board Is installed to identify this controller to the LonWorks network manager RTC CB or RCB With the Real Time Clock jumper properly set as described in Section 9 up to 40 years for an on line controller or for a stored MPU Controller Board or controller Up to 4 years for a stored MPU Controller Board or controller with the Real Time Clock jumper improperly set i e clock enabled Environmental conditions can affect battery life 3 6 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 1 4 CLOCK Real Time Clock V2 0 2 2 The CLOCK function block is available when the RTC CB Real Time Clock Configuration Backup option board is installed in the controller and the controller includes firmware version V2 0 or higher This function block enables the current time and date to be viewed when using the local faceplate When the Step REAL TIME CLOCK Down But
234. MPU Controller board firmware is V2 4 or later Connector locations are shown in Figures 8 5 and 8 6 Individual terminals functions are also identified in Table 8 1 Connectors Power terminals are identified by a letter Hot and Neutral The ground connection is made to a green case safety ground screw located between connectors Signal I O terminals are identified by a number 3 through 52 connector terminal will accept the following wire s 14 22 AWG 2 1 0 38 mm two 16 AWG 1 3 mm three 18 AWG 0 96 mm Wire Size Recommendations e signal wiring 18 AWG 0 96 mm power wiring 18 AWG 0 96 mm Wire Stripping Recommendations e connector terminal wiring 1 4 6 mm to 5 16 8 mm e green ground screw wiring 1 8 10 mm to 1 2 13 mm Be careful not to nick the conductor or cut away strands 8 8 March 2003 UM353 1 Installation Wire Selection Stranded wire is recommended for most connections however solid wire is typically used for thermocouple extension wire Carefully select wire size conductor material and insulation Some selection considerations are current and voltage to be carried total length of each wire run whether wire will be bundled or run singly indoor or outdoor installation temperature extremes Use supply wires suitable for 5 C 10 F above ambient temperature exposure to sunlight vibration types of contaminates Station Common Terminal 6
235. Modbus devices over the Ethernet network e CWE Function Block The CWE Coil Write Ethernet block allows the controller to write coil data to other Modbus devices over the Ethernet network e DWE Function Block The DWE Digital Write Ethernet block allows the controller to write digital data to other Modbus devices over the Ethernet network e V2 00 Ethernet Communication board firmware included in this release V3 00 firmware enhances the AIE CIE and DIE function blocks through the inclusion of additional parameters for data type selection listed controllers The RLM block now accepts an adaptive rate input OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS e After downloading a configuration to a station that has an RTC CB board installed an RTC MEM message may appear following a power interruption Respond to the message by storing a configuration parameter at the controller faceplate UPGRADE CONSIDERATIONS AND MATERIALS 1 Check the current MPU Controller Board firmware version before upgrading To display the firmware version refer to the STA TN Station Parameters section in the Function Blocks chapter of the controller s User s Manual SR353 10 2 A personal computer running Microsoft Windows 95 98 or NT is needed 3 Upgrading requires the following items 1 Communications Cable P N 16353 61 2 Communications Cable Adapter select one to mate with your computer s COM port DB25 to MMJ11 P N 16353 62 DB9 t
236. N PARAMETERS When the station is networked using Modbus or the LIL option board the address is used by higher level devices K 11 to obtain information from the station LIL addresses ATS range from 1 32 or 1 64 when a Model 321 Expansion Mecum Satellite is used Modbus can range from 1 250 but normally 1 32 is used to correspond to the total number of devices that can be installed on a single network STATION TIMERS PC WRITE LOCKOUT STATION PARAMETERS Once the address has been assigned and higher level devices have been configured to access information from d Station TAG 8 353 the station changing the address can require ADDRESS station ADDRESS 0 reconfiguration of the higher level device There WARM T WARM Timer sec 6 10 4 COL D T IM COLD Timer s s 100 also be higher level devices that will query and assign G WATCHDOG timer sec o 0 1000 0 addressing information based on the station tag name In C ON FG coNFiGuration Lock Out 5 0 1 2 8 0 h ill al P ARAM L O parameter Lock Out s 0 1 2 3 0 1 this case tag name change will also require I AL SERIAL 8 aa 0 to 99999999 reconfiguration of higher level devices Therefore it is IEEE IEEE Floating Point RE
237. NSCALE and MAXSCALE parameters allowing the output signal to be scaled for engineering ranges other than the default of 0 100 PRCT This may be necessary when the controller output is the setpoint to another controller The Autotune feature is accessible using the TUNE pushbutton when AUTOTUNE is set to YES and can be initiated while the loop is in Auto or Manual The autotuner when initiated replaces the PIDAG with an on off control function places the A M block in Auto if in Man and cycles the control loop through six on off cycles while learning the process dynamics which it uses to provide tuning recommendations for the PIDAG controller The DEV parameter is the maximum amount in that the process should deviate from the setpoint during the on off cycles This parameter can be set manually or can be configured as AUTO When AUTO is configured the autotuner will set the DEV to 4 times the HYS This is the minimum value needed to provide good autotuning results The HYS parameter is the amount that the process must deviate from setpoint before switching the output in the opposite direction This value must be at least equal to or slightly greater than any process noise band If the noise band cannot be determined the autotuner will compute it at the start of an autotuning exercise when the HYS parameter has been configured as AUTO The STEP parameter is the amount that the valve will change on the first on off cycle After the fi
238. OI INPUT S Input S PRIM SETPT O1 INPUT F Input F SEC AIN2 01 INPUT A Input A PRIM A M AS ESN Exec Seq No 15 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer PRIM PID OR INPUT A Input PRIM PID O1 INPUT TV Input TV SEC AIN2 01 INPUT TC Input TC SEC ORO1 01 ESN Exec Seq No 20 ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer PRIM AIN1 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer PRIM PID OR INPUT Input Process PRIM AIN1 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint PRIM SETPT O1 INPUT V Input V Valve 1 Loop 01 Secondary Loop SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT Input SEC AIN2 O1 INPUT TC Input TC SEC OR02 O1 ESN Exec Seq 5 ALARM Alarm Function Block Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P SEC AIN2 O1 INPUT D Input D 1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 PB2SW 2 Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD SEC E LSE Seq No 15 SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block RG Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT Input PRIM A M O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 E I Ext Int Transfer Switch Function Bl
239. OLD FHODD W J e reom irom w 7 ABOT LABOT 0 8 READY fI READY PCOM IR J 9 RUN FRUN 1Pcom IR J 10 HELD FLHED IR DONE 0 0 IR 12 ABORTED 1ABORED PCOM IR 13 spare em 14 sae COM is sae PCO X PCOM Function Block Status Word L PSW2 channel z 1 parameter I 0 EMERG EO fl EOisaetive PCOM IR 1 EO Not Acknowledged lI EOisnotacknowledgeed PCOM 2 Kis Active PCOM 3 Not Acknowledged l IKisnotacknowledged PCOM RW 4 FAILED FD fi FDisactive IR ED Not Acknowledged LFDisnotacknowledged IPCOM _ spare spare spare spare 12 spare 13 14 PCOM NotAcknowledged I PCOMisnotackd RW 15 ACTIVE PCOM Event 1 PCOM eventis active PCOM R z LIL CHAN configured in the PCOM function block configuration 7 32 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 3 10 Sequencer Loop I O Coil Data 1 bit Sequencer Code R W Description Range Coil MB C P LIL SGOKIO R Seq Group 0 cur step masK for Input 0 1 0 01496 n 13 0 SGOKIF R Seq Group 0 cur step masK for Input F 1 0 01511 n 13 15 SGOSIO R Seq Group 0
240. ON or a Mask OFF using LIL commands All unconfigured inputs will be treated as low 0 except OK RD RN and HE which will be treated as high 1 Three of the output states EO EMERG INTRLK and FD FAILED can be configured for priorities 0 5 This will affect the flashing etc as previously described for other controller status conditions These states also have unacknowledged bits as detailed in status word 2 Conditions that require acknowledging can be acknowledged by either using the local faceplate ACK button or by writing to the individual not acknowledged bit or the Not Ack d PCOM bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14113 112111110 9876543210 gt olo g E egre a ss x E gt lt E AS fay Se FG z gali 255 SII Sz 1 R R R R W W W W RIW RIW 1 R IR R 0 R R R R R RI IR R RW RW 0 R RW RW R R W R RIW R Status Word 1 Status Word 2 March 2003 3 79 Function Blocks UM353 1 EO unconfigured 0 EO 53
241. QHD will power up in the last position during a Cold start at the 10 range value March 2003 3 89 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 82 RATIO Ratio RATIO function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis They provide a means of setting a ratio in RATIO an external setpoint application for example p controlling a captive flow while maintaining the ratio RATIO ESN 000 between a wild flow and the captive flow at the WA R koupi desired value Inputs A and E external ratio and the InputE EL RATIO operator set ratio R value are multiplied and become Track Command file gt Tracked Output the function block output Track Variable TV Track Command input TC asserted high 1 causes the ratio block to track the input variable TV The RATIO 40 ES n gh Ratio 5 Rea ratio value to be recalculated m then LO IL IMI T Low Ratio LIMIT 6 Real 0 00 E The value of R will be limited at the HI or LO QS auickset Dec Pt Pos s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 1 i INPUT INPUTA loop tag block tag output null LIE rangs sC nes The factory settings d INPUT loop tag block tag output null the ratio limits are 0 00 30 00 INPUT T C INPUT TC loop tag block tag output INPUT TLV INPUT TV 9
242. R W Process 3 Alarm B Limit Real 42461 60 1 n 23 24 L P4ALF R W Process 4 Alarm A Limit Real 42463 60 1 n 25 26 L P4BLF R W Process 4 Alarm B Limit Real 42465 60 1 n 27 28 LZQIF R W Quickset Hold 1 Real 42467 60 1 n 1 29 30 L Q2F R W Quickset Hold 2 Real 42469 60 1 n 2 29 30 L Q3F R W Quickset Hold 3 Real 42471 60 1 n 3 29 30 LHQ4F R W Quickset Hold 4 Real 42473 60 1 n 4 29 30 spares 00000000 42475 42509 60 1 Discrete Indicator ODD V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL n a Pushbutton Switch Indicator ODP V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL n a kkk NOTE Registers 40451 40480 are reserved for ASCII Tags when the ODP display has been selected in configuration March 2003 7 13 Data Mapping UM353 1 7 3 6 Static Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit IEEE Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L PGF R W Proportional Gain 0 001 100 0 43951 60 1 n 13 14 1 TIF R W Integral Time 0 001 4000 0 min 43953 60 1 n 15 16 L TDF R W Derivative Time 0 00 100 00 min 43955 60 1 n 17 18 L MRF R W Manual Reset 0 00 100 00 43957 60 1 n 21 22 L ADF R W Autotune Deviation auto 0 2 5 25 43959 60 1 n 37 38 L AHF R W Autotune Hysteresis auto 0 0 5 10 0 43961 60 1 n 39 40 L ASF R W Autotune Step initial 5 40 43963 60 1 n 41 42 L APGF R Autotune Proportional Gain 0 001 1000 0 43965 60 1 n
243. SEC AIN2 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint SEC SPLIM O1 INPUT D Input D SEC SPLIM O1 INPUT V Input V Valve 1 ESN Exec Seq No 10 LOOP Loop 02 PB2SW PB2 Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD SEC E LSE ESN Exec Seq No 15 4 16 March 2003 UM353 1 LonWorks Communications 5 0 LONWORKS COMMUNICATIONS Option board A 1 is added to a controller to expand the I O capacity The board uses the LonWorks communication protocol to communicate with remote LonWorks devices over a single twisted pair network The diagram shows the option board added to an MPU Controller board and remote mounted LonWorks nodes A LonWorks Remote I O board uses a Free Topology transceiver communicating at 78 1 Kbps Up to fifteen 15 physical nodes can be connected to a controller Option Board A 1 V V AL Twisted Wire Network LONWorks Communications D AA node MPU Controller Board node 1 i d de 15 Model 352 353 or 354 Controller REE Install LonWorks network by first wiring all the nodes to the network Next temporarily connect PC based Network Manager to the network using a SLTA Serial Link Talk Adapter manufactured by Echelon Corp The Network Manager MetaVision 3 0 and the SLTA are included in the LonWorks Startup Kit Each individual node is then insta
244. Section 8 4 2 for wiring guidelines Model 353 Rear Terminals Station Common 6 E 8 o Model 760 E 147 4 20 mA Valve Positioner E Model 773 S E Transducer 8 18 2 Other 4 20 Device MG000661 Common Ground Bus Earth Note See Table 8 1 for AOUT2 terminals Ground FIGURE 8 12 Analog Output AOUT 1 Current Output Model 353 Rear Terminals Station Common 6 E g s 1 5 Vd 5 gt 17 DIV Model 363 Recorder 5 or Other 1 5 18 Device c 250 MG000661 Common Ground Bus Earth Note See Table 8 1 for AOUT2 terminals Ground FIGURE 8 13 Analog Output AOUT1 Voltage Output March 2003 8 15 Installation UM353 1 8 4 4 Digital Input and Output Wiring Connections to Digital Input and Digital Input Universal function blocks are shown in Figure 8 14 Wiring for internal and external power sources is shown Semiconductor devices can replace the mechanical switches shown Wiring guidelines are found in Section 8 4 2 Digital input commons e g DINI are isolated from station common and from case safety ground Model 353 Rear Terminals Model 353 Rear Terminals Transmitter
245. Switch Function Block ALARM Alarm Function Block INPUT ST Input ST SEC PB2SW PS Range Pointer PRIM AINI OR INPUT E Input E PRIM A M OI INPUT P Input P PRIM AINI OI INPUT I Input I SEC SETPT O1 INPUT D Input D PRIM SPLIM O1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 ESN Exec Seq No 20 SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR Range Pointer PRIM AIN1 OR INPUT Input 1 INPUT P Input P PRIM AIN1 O1 ESN Exec Seq No 25 INPUT S Input PRIM SPLIM O1 INPUT F Input F SEC AINO2 01 PID PID Controller Function Block INPUT A Input A PRIM A M AS RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR ESN Exec Seq No 30 INPUT P Input P SEC AIN2 01 INPUT Input SEC SPLIM O1 A M Auto Manual Function Block INPUT F Input F SEC A M OI Range Pointer PRIM PID OR INPUT A Input A SEC A M AS INPUT A Input A PRIM PID O1 INPUT I Input I SEC E I ES INPUT TV Input TV SEC AIN2 01 ESN Exec Seq No 30 INPUT TC Input TC SEC ORO1 01 ESN Exec Seq No 60 A M Auto Manu
246. T Mone input R This parameter must point to a function block that DIBA Alarm 1 DeadBAND S 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 B Alarm 2 DeadBAND 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 includes MINSCALE and MAXSCALE configuration DBA Alarm 3 DeadBAND 5 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 Alarm 4 DeadBAND 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 parameters e g Analog Input for proper scaling If not Alami Paver ea NONES WES configured 0 0 100 0 will be used as a default range P Alarm 2 Power Up ENabled NO YES YES P Alarm 3 Power Up ENabled s NO YES YES P P P P P then in order of occurrence Priority 1 causes the station bargraphs and condition e g A1 HI to flash and requires acknowledgment to stop flashing Priority 2 also flashes the Alarm 4 PRIORity 5 1 2 3 4 5 A1 5 none HI LO HdEV LdEV dEV or 2 5 none HI LO HdEV LdEV dEV or 5 none HI LO HdEV LdEV dEV or TYPE 5 none HI LO HdEV LdEV dEV or 3 Hl LO dEV none o oojlrcccc vvvoooommmmzzzz 4 z elwzizaanm mWimIzzizizimmimimzixix zizizizieieoonA5AAAx PT ESOS A e e A 2 o i 2 e rr o ojo oH S2Aa2Sxsaxaaxc cc ciwwww Y Y Y
247. TCP IP gateway a Modbus network may have multiple devices each having a unique address The MB REG parameter identifies the location of the register in the Modbus device There are three write update options that can be configured by the UD TYPE parameter 1 oncE will write once to the START CL Modbus Starting Coil The controller will write when any block input value changes state DIGITAL WRITE ETHERNET DWE Input 0 InputF F DIGITAL WRITE E Input T rj i Quality Status 3l INPUT 0 INPUT 0 loop tag block tag output null INPUT 1 INPUT 1 loop tag block tag output null INPUT 2 INPUT 2 loop tag block tag output null INPUT 3 INPUT loop tag block tag output null INPUT 4 INPUT 44 loop tag block tag output null INPUT 5 INPUT 5 loop tag block tag output INPUT 6 INPUT 6 loop tag block tag output null INPUT T INPUT 7 loop tag block tag output INPUT 8 INPUT 8 loop tag block tag output INPUT 9 INPUT 9 H loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT A h loop tag block tag output I NPUT B INPUT loop tag block tag output null I NPUT INPUT loop tag block tag output null I NPUT D INPUT looptag blocktag output INPUT INPUT loop tag block tag output null INPUT F INPUT F r loop tag block tag output nul
248. TROLLER PIDAG ESN 000 Range Process Output Range _PIDAG Setpoint S CONTROLLER Output Feedback F P Absolute Error Auto Initialize AT Warning TTA Adaptive Gain RIG RanGe PoinTeR 5 loop tag block tag null D IR AGC DiRect ACTing H NO YES NO P G Proportional Gain 0 001 to 100 0 1 000 1 Time Integral S 0 001 to 4000 m r 100 0 TID Time Derivative 5 0 00 to 100 00 min 0 00 D G Derivative Gain 5 1 00 to 30 00 10 00 CIA IL IE MINimum SCALE Real 0 0 MIMAX SI CIA L E MAXimum SCALE V Real 100 0 Decimal Point Position preferred S 0 0 IEINIGUINII TS ENGineering UNITS 5 PRCT AUTOTUNE 5 YES ID E V DEViation during Autotune 5 AUTO 2 5 to 25 0 AUTO 9 H Y HYSteresis during Autotune S AUTO 0 5 to 10 0 AUTO 9 output STEP on first Autotune S 5 to 40 10 AIT DY NAM AT DYNAMic settings S Fast Medium Slow AIT RIEISIEI T AT RESET 5 is YES POST A T POST Autotune Transfer 5 NO YES INPUT P INPUTP loop tag block tag output null 1 6 INPUTS loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT F loop tag bloc
249. TV track variable PU Power Up V valve volt s PUL pulse VAL value 15 2 March 2003 Abbreviations And 5 UM353 1 W watts ZDO zero drop out WD watchdog B XMTR transmitter XOR Exclusive OR Logic FB 15 3 March 2003 Abbreviations And UM353 1 15 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Warranty WARRANTY a Seller warrants that on the date of shipment the goods are of the kind and quality described herein and are free of non conformities in workmanship and material This warranty does not apply to goods delivered by Seller but manufactured by others b Buyer s exclusive remedy for a nonconformity in any item of the goods shall be the repair or the replacement at Seller s option of the item and any affected part of the goods Seller s obligation to repair or replace shall be in effect for a period of one 1 year from initial operation of the goods but not more than eighteen 18 months from Seller s shipment of the goods provided Buyer has sent written notice within that period of time to Seller that the goods do not conform to the above warranty Repaired and replacement parts shall be warranted for the remainder of the original period of notification set forth above but in no event less than 12 months from repair or replacement At its expense Buyer shall remove and ship to Seller any such nonconforming items and shall reinstall the repaired or replaced parts Buyer shall
250. Verse s NO YES YES h h id i i ith Rear Port BAUD rate 5 Table 3 2 5 important not to change the station identification without IDEELL A Y Rear Port DELAY 6 0 1000 msec 0 being aware of system consequences Front Port BAUD rate 5 Table 3 2 6 RT RTS CTS handshaking S Table 3 2 1 E DIE L A Y rrontPort DELAY 6 0 1000msec 0 There are two timers used during power up initialization H w R HardWare PRESent R Table 3 3 Cycle Time BASE msec 20 to 2000 WARM TIM and COLD TIM The station takes B I A S cycle Time BIAS msec H 0t01000 0 approximately 8 seconds to perform power up I L constant AVAILable byes R varies w sofware rev iti li ti b fi th T tim 1 al at d A IL volitle mem AVAILable bytes R varies w software rev mi lalization the power up e 15 evaluated BATtery OK lt NO YES timer should be set to a value greater than 8 seconds to S EIRVV P I N service PIN press STORE to activate CIJOIN F G T O CONFiGuration Time Out NO YES YES 2 be effective A timer setting of 0 will be considered as infinite e g to always power up hot set the warm timer to 0 When the station powers up after a loss of
251. Within the Moore 353 station common is connected to e the two wire power supply common COM terminal 6 digital output common DOUTC terminal 9 e all analog input and analog output commons e g AINIC terminal 21 Station common is isolated from case safety ground It should be connected to the user s instrument bus common at only one point Digital input commons are isolated from the station common and case safety ground Connector Terminal and Ground Screw Torque Specifications e connector terminals 5 in lbs 0 56 m e green case safety ground screw 20 in lbs 2 26 N m Crimp On solderless Connectors A pin style crimp on connector can be used when two or more wires or a combination of wires and component leads are to be inserted into a connector terminal at the rear of the case Wires and leads are crimped in the connector and the connector pin inserted in the Crimp On selected connector terminal The connector can provide a more secure Signal Input Wire Connector connection when multiple leads are involved An example of its use is shown at 5 right Several crimp on connectors provided in various Moore 353 TEN 8 installation kits they available from most electrical supply sources Range Resistor g Wire Routing and Conduit DC wiring should be separated from AC wiring and away from AC powered pushbuttons alarms annunciators motors solenoids and similar devices Conduit
252. Y Oe L A1 DeLay 5 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 bargraphs condition but stops flashing when alarm L A2 DeLay IN 9 0 4 1 215 15 30 60 Sec 0 clears i e Self Clearing Priority 3 causes the event LEDs L L A3 DeLay IN 5 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 HR L 4 DeLay IN 5 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 and S and condition to flash Flashing stops only when the D L O A1 DeLay OUT 5 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 Je D L O A2 DeLay OUT 5 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Sec 0 alarm is acknowledged Priority 4 also causes the event LEDs D Llo DeLay OUT 5 0 4 4 215 15180 80 Sec 0 and condition to flash but stops when the alarm clears DIE A4 DeLay OUT 0 4 1 2 5 15130 50 Sec 0 R GIB Alarm 1 RinGBaCK s NO YES NO Priority 5 displays the alarm but does not require that it Alarm 2 RinGBaCK s NO Alarm 3 RinGBaCK 5 acknowledged R G B Alarm 4 RinGBaCK 5 INPUT 22 E E E INPUT D loop tag block tag output Alarm limits are in engineering units quickset ALARM E S N Exec Seq No feature 15 also available allowing alarm limits to set quickly during operation The settings are in engineering units but will also be displayed in of range on the bargraph Alarms are displayed as defined by the range pointer parameter Alarms can be
253. a percentage of range by a flashing LED on the S bargraph If security clearance is satisfied the alarm limits can be changed by rotating the pulser knob Try changing the alarm limit Al to 50 300 DEG F and press STORE to save the new value 2 Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode 3 Enter manual mode to display Loop01 V 4 Turn the pulser knob until both the valve output and process input are greater than 50 Note that the alphanumeric display will flash and the L and S LEDs will flash Press the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm Alarms have a default priority of 3 see Alarm block in Section 3 2 meaning that the alarms must be acknowledged to clear the flashing Alarms may also be configured as self clearing Try changing the alarm priority to 4 using the Configuration Road Map in Section 2 or the following steps 1 Press ENTER EXIT CONF LOOP should be displayed Press STEP DOWN twice until VIEW appears on the display Press the right arrow button 3 times or turn the pulser knob until EDIT FB appears on the display Press STEP DOWN A M will be displayed Press the right arrow button 3 times or the turn pulser knob until ALARM appears on the display Press STEP DOWN to display RG PTR Press the right arrow button or turn the pulser knob until Al PRIOR appears on the display Press STEP DOWN to display 3 on the numeric display 0 000 SL CON 209 i HD To change the priority of alarm 1 from 3
254. a QU LICIKIS QUICK SET bias NO YES YES SIN Exec Seq No p 001 to 250 maximum setting of 150 of the range pointer value The default range is 0 00 to 100 00 if the pointer is not configured If for example the BIAS block is used to bias a flow setpoint with a range pointer input R of 0 6 00 GPM the maximum bias adjustments would be 9 00 If limit adjustments of 50 of this range are desired then the BIAS block LO LIMIT should be set at 3 00 and the HI LIMIT at 3 00 If a range change is made the current LIMIT settings and the current BIAS value will be changed to be the same value within the new range The BIAS can be adjusted using the QUICKSET feature if the parameter QUICKSET is set to YES The BIAS value will continuously change as the knob 15 adjusted but the STORE button must be pressed when the final value is reached to insure that the new BIAS setting will be retained on a Cold power up condition Any unused inputs to the block will be set equal to 0 The TO Tracked Output is normally used in applications where an external device is being used to set a bias in place of the BIAS parameter B 1 then set to 0 0 When it 15 desired to have the output of the BIAS block track the TV variable the external device is forced to track TO Input E will then equal TV A 0 0 and therefore the BIAS block output O1 will equal TV N 2 Pot Output 1
255. about a function block Most operator controls are shown on the faceplate below Several additional pushbuttons are located behind the flip down door at the bottom of the faceplate These will be discussed in the configuration mode portion of this section 9 1 NORMAL OPERATION MODE e 6 Digit Numeric Display displays the numeric value of the variable identified by the 8 character alphanumeric display Numbers can be AN displayed from 0 00000 to 999999 or 0 0000 to 99999 Any input SIEMENS exceeding these limits will be shown as the maximum or minimum value and cause the display to flash 2 4 2 3 4 5 e 8 Character Alphanumeric Display normally displays the loop tag with the dot suffix of the variable currently showing in the 6 digit numeric T C 2 0 5 3 P display e g TC2053 P is the Process variable for loop TC2053 A loop m B tag that is displayed 1 called the Active Loop and all operator controls L e g PB1 PB2 A M ACK D UNITS ALARM TUNE TAG QUICK 8 s ASK will affect the function blocks within the Active Loop 60 e Pushbutton controls the operation of the PBISW PB 1 transfer 40 SWitch function block when the block has been configured for use within Active Loop See the function block details Section 3 for more information on PB1SW 2 Pushbutton controls the operation of the P
256. acknowledged alarm to require acknowledgment priorities 1 4 when the alarm clears 3 22 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks Alarm Types HI compares the process input with the limit setting and it will trip the alarm status high 1 when the gt process is equal to or higher than the limit setting The gt HI m gt alarm status will clear 0 when the process is less gt than the limit setting minus the deadband on Alarm Statu LO compares the process input with the limit setting LO TUS and it will trip the alarm status high 1 when the process is equal to or less than the limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 when the process is greater than the limit setting plus the deadband HI mee AMT P gt pe DEV ub DP lt HI DEV compares the difference between the process input and the deviation input P D with the limit setting and it will trip the alarm status high 1 when LO LIMIT gt Gist P D is equal to or greater than the limit setting The DEV gt alarm status will clear 0 when P D is less than the umm _ limit setting minus the deadband LO DEV compares the difference between the input __ _LIMIT gt RS deviation input and the process input D P with the DEV 2 L ABS
257. al Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC PID OR ODC Operator Display for Controllers INPUT A Input A SEC PID O1 P RG PTR P Range Pointer PRIM AINI OR ESN Exec Seq No 35 V RG PTR V Range Pointer PRIM PID OR INPUT P Input P Process PRIM AINI OI OR01 OR Function Block INPUT S Input S Setpoint PRIM SPLIM OI INPUT A Input SEC A M NA INPUT V Input V Valve PRIM A M OI INPUT B Input B SEC E LIS LOOP ft Loop 01 Seq 40 OR02 Function Block Secondary Loop INPUT A Input SEC A M NA INPUT Input B SEC E LES SETPT Setpoint Function Block ESN Exec Seq No 45 RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT TV Input TV SEC AIN2 01 AOUT Analog Output 1 Function Block INPUT TC Input TC SEC OR02 01 PTR Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT LU Input LU SEC SPLIM HS INPUT S Input SEC A M O1 INPUT LD Input LD SEC SPLIM LS ESN Exec Seq No 5 ODC Operator Display for Controllers ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR P RG P Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT P Input P Process SEC AIN2 01 INPUT P Input P
258. ameter is in firmware versions 1 30 and higher TABLE 3 2 Modbus Port Baud Rate Parameters PARAMETERS SETTINGS 8 bits parity and 1 stop bit Baud Rate Selections Handshaking Selections No handshaking is used The station port will turn on the RTS line when it s ready to send data but will not wait for a responding CTS from the receiving device The station port will turn on the RTS line when it s ready to send data and will wait for a responding CTS from the receiving device before transmitting A list of the installed controller hardware and software can be viewed within the STATN block using the HW PRES read only parameter As shown in Table 3 3 each board has an ID and a hardware revision and most also have a software revision The controller s operating Kernel and operating code reside on the MPU Controller board and there is an entry in the table for each The table lists the hardware and software revisions For example in Table 3 3 the MPU Controller board would be shown in the numeric display as 11 1 00 TABLE 3 3 Board Description and ID with Example Hardware and Software Revisions BOARD DESCRIPTION BOARD ID HARDWARE SOFTWARE REVISION REVISION 1 00 1 MPU Controller Models 352P 353 and 354N 1 Display Assembly Faceplate Display PTE VO Expander Ethernet Network 6 Local Instrument Link HE JR Check the NVRAM battery condition by reading the BAT OK parameter The NVRAM on the
259. anges to the valve position the controller will control the process at the current setpoint while it learns about the process dynamics The controller then uses this knowledge to derive recommended P I and D settings Press the TUNE button to step through the following parameters and if desired initiate autotune Proportional setting view change TI Integral Time setting PID PIDAG controllers only view or change Manual Reset setting only view change TD unes Derivative Time setting view or change peak peak process deviation that autotuner will maintain during test HYS The process change needed before the valve output will switch AUTOTUNE Set to YES and STORE to start autotune Press EXIT CONF to return to normal operator faceplate operation AT Proportional Gain setting recommended by the autotuner ATTI Integral Time setting recommended by the autotuner ATTD Derivative Time setting recommended by the autotuner STOREAT Pressing STORE transfers autotuner recommended settings to controller While autotuning the controller will continue normal operation Pressing the A M button to switch the controller to Manual will terminate autotune While in autotune the alphanumeric display will alternate between AUTOTUNE and th
260. aphs The bargraphs on the Display Assembly are not used during the calibration procedure Ignore any bargraph indications during calibration March 2003 12 1 Calibration UM353 1 Calibration and calibration verification are described in the following procedures A WARNING A Electrical shock hazard Hazardous voltage can cause death or serious injury Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on this equipment 12 1 ANALOG INPUT AIN1 4 Analog input function blocks have been factory calibrated for 1 to 5 Vdc inputs Recalibration should not be required unless calibration parameters are to be changed Periodic recalibration should not be necessary To calibrate an analog input use the following procedure 1 At the controller s rear terminals connect an electronic calibrator or precision reference source capable of supplying a voltage between 0 000 and 5 000 Vdc to the selected analog input terminals e g AIN1 or AIN2 Refer to Section 8 Installation for terminal numbers and wiring guidelines Ensure that terminal screws are tight 2 If security is enabled a level 1 or level 4 security combination will be needed to store the results of a calibration Refer to SECUR Security in Section 3 for additional information 3 Apply power to the station 4 Press the ENTER CONF button to enter the configuration mode at the MENU level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select STATION on the alpha
261. arameter points to another function block that has range scaling such as the analog input that is providing the process variable This enables the controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the range of the process input If this parameter is not configured the controller will use a range scaling of 0 0 100 0 POWER UP During a warm start outputs and comparator functions will be initialized at the state prior to power down and all dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan During a cold start all outputs and comparator states will be set to zero to be activated by the block functions All dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan Process ON_OFF Controller Engineering INput units T t DS t HI Comparator 5 1 b IF A gt B THEN H 100 H Y DG IF A B DB AND A B THEN H H AND gt IF A B DB THEN H 0 Lead HO af High Engineering Engi n 9 P INput units B ngineering Dead gt N j DEViation INput units 4 OR gt E 3 scaling Band gt AND gt Engineering INput units 01 i scaling LO Comparator L i IF lt THEN L 100 q Setpoint Low gt pisi IF A lt B DB AND A gt B THEN L L1 AND gt i DEViation sealing IF A gt B DB THEN L 0 Enable RanG
262. aration of Conformance with the standards or other normative documents stated on the certificate Environmental Conditions Per IEC 664 Installation Category II Pollution Degree 2 A representative unit was tested in accordance with EN50082 2 Test results are available upon request March 2003 14 13 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1 e CSA electrical classification approval as non incendive for Division 2 service applies to installations in North America and where recognized Check local approval requirements DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to EN 45014 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 1201 Sumneytown Pike Spring House PA 19477 Declare under our sole responsibility that the products Model 353 Universal Loop Controller when labeled with the CE mark to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standards or other normative documents EN 50081 1 1992 Electromagnetic compatibility Generic emission standard Part 1 Residential commercial and light industry EN 61000 6 2 1999 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 6 2 Generic standards Immunity for industrial environments EN 61010 1 1993 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Part 1 General requirements EN 61010 1 1993 A2 1995 Amendment 2 to EN 61010 1 1993 following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and amended by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC and 93 68
263. as the smallest number greater than 0 0 i e 1 17 e 38 and the LOG will be computed accordingly X gt LOG X 01 Input X Output 1 LOGARITHM BASE 10 LINI PUIT X INPUTX N gt Output 1 loop tag block tag output Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 59 _ Math MTH_ function blocks provide universal arithmetic MATH capability As shown in the block diagram each input has p gain and bias scaling The resulting signals are then applied to configurable math operations DIV MUL ADD and Inputa AD SUB Operation A will be performed first on inputs A and MATH B Operation B will be performed next on the resultant and input Unused inputs to a MUL or DIV operation will be set to 1 0 and those to an ADD or SUB operation will be set equal to 0 0 The operation of those inputs will function normally so it is important to insure that the bias and gain settings are set properly INB BIASI INC BIAS In a DIV operation when a divisor is 0 0 the output will go OP A to the maximum Real number with the sign determined by _ OP B OPeration B INPUT INPUT INPUT LI ESN ADD SUB MUL DIV Input c LC p OUT IN GAIN 5 INA IN INputA
264. ase with Flange A Future T ork Use onWorks X Mounting Kit Accessory Boards MPU Controller Board O Ring Display Assembly Display Assembly With Operator Faceplate Communication Port On Underside X0548863 Flip Down Door Controller with Case Option 2 Black Side Entry Connectors FIGURE 11 1 Moore 353 Exploded View 11 4 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Maintenance MPU CONTROLLER BOARD JUMPERS There are two Controller board versions Figure 11 2 shows an MPU Controller board with jumpers W2 W4 and W8 Figure 11 3 shows an MPU Controller board with jumpers W2 W4 and W7 These jumpers are factory set but may need to be changed in the field W2 and W4 are discussed in Section 11 5 5 Accessory Boards W7 and WS settings are described in the figures and in Section 11 5 3 MPU Controller Board ETHERNET BOARD LED s The board has 5 green LEDs and one red LED Green LEDs announce status and the red LED flashes to indicate an error code LEDs are visible after freeing the Display Assembly and holding it slightly to one side of the case The LEDs are e ACT Flashes when there is Ethernet activity It glows steadily when there is an Ethernet connection but no activity and extinguishes when there 1s no Ethernet connection F H Lighted for Full duplex and off for Half duplex e 100 Lighted for 100 MB network and off for 10 MB network e ST Lighted during Self Test and off in normal operation Modbus
265. ating and servicing the controller March 2003 1 1 Introduction UM353 1 1 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Moore 353 offers the control system designer the ultimate in flexibility and capability for the implementation of continuous solutions and batch solutions An exploded view of the controller appears in Figure 1 1 At the heart of the Moore 353 is a powerful MPU Controller board that uses the latest in microprocessor technology It includes on board and reusable function blocks and it is capable of solving vast array of control implementations including single loop cascade and dual loop Available MPU board I O is listed in the table below Connector Cover Ground Screw Voltage Input Approvals and Warning Label Warning and I O Mounting Clip Capacity Label 5 Top and Bottom Nameplate or Ethernet Network Board x Expander RTC CBor Board gt zm RCB Board gt Removable i s Portions of Accessory or Connectors Option Boards es 2 Connector Socket Assembly al RJ 45 Ethernet Connector 5 Case with Flange Future LonWorks Mounting Kit Accessory Boards a Use Board MPU Controller Board 8 Ethernet O Ring Display Assembly Cable Display Assembly with Operator Faceplate Warning Label 2 Communication Port on Underside Case Assembly Flip Down Door with Loop ID Card FIGURE 1 1 M
266. ation wide ID e g 01502 Input connections Output 2 established by binding the output variable of type SNVT state SNVT 83 in the remote node to the network variable in the DIS function block These blocks will available when the outputs LonWorks option board is installed in a 352P 353 or 354N controller Output 8 The 0 NUM parameter enables viewing the number that the Outputs station has assigned to input 0 Output Output B Each function block output has a mode associated with it The Output mode can be either NORMAL or FORCED When using a PC oven capable of sending LIL or Modbus commands the mode can be OnE changed and the forced state can be assigned a high 1 or low 0 value values accessible over the network the two switch ony Sidus inputs N and F and the position of the SPDT switch illustrated in the block diagram A mode of 0 is Normal and 17 is Forced view Network Variable NUMber 1102000 The function block also has a quality status output associated with it This status will go high 1 when the block determines it has lost communication with the Lon node M Station LON option board nodeu LON node r1 LON network omi SNVT_ L L3 xi binding 00 node nv 0 Quality Test as BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 44 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 37 DIV
267. bars in the outside page margins Some of these changes are listed below SECTION CHANGE Cover Changed to Rev 11 March 2003 1 Introduction Table 1 1 Contact Information updated 2 Configuration Overview Ethernet function block list in Section 2 5 updated 3 Function Blocks AIE CIE DIE ODA ODC ODD ODP ODS and RLM blocks updated AWE CWE and DWE blocks added 11 Maintenance Jumper illustration in Section 11 5 5 updated Warranty Updated SR353 10 Replaces SR353 8 Note At Rev 9 the User s Manual was reorganized to move the FCO and Network Communications appendices into the body of the manual as in the Procidia i pac User s Manual The Function Block section is now followed by the FCO section and the Network Communications section is now followed by the Data Mapping section previously Appendix A Network Communications March 2003 vii Contents UM353 1 Procidia i pac i config i station ilware APACS 353 352Plus VIEWPAC and XTC are trademarks of Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc assumes no liability for errors or omissions in this document or for the application and use of information included in this document The information herein is subject to change without notice Procedures in this document have been reviewed for compliance with
268. be returned to one of the following addresses Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 1201 Sumneytown Pike P O Box 900 Spring House PA 19477 0900 USA Tel 1 215 646 7400 Fax 1 215 283 6340 Warranty will be null and void if repair is attempted without authorization by a member of the Service Department or Product Support Group Process Industries Division Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc March 2003 W 1 Warranty UM353 1 March 2003 Siemens Software Release Energy amp Automation SR353 10 Rev 1 May 2003 Controller Models 352P 353 354 and 354N MPU Controller Board Firmware Version 3 00 PRODUCTS INVOLVED A Model 352P 353 354 or 354N Controller with MPU Controller Board V3 00 firmware INTRODUCTION This Software Release memo discusses the enhancements and operational considerations for firmware version 3 00 MPU Controller board software firmware ENHANCEMENTS Model 353 controllers V3 00 firmware adds Ethernet communication function blocks and V2 00 Ethernet Communication board firmware to the features provided by earlier firmware versions An Ethernet Communication option board with V2 00 firmware must be installed in a Model 353 controller for the added blocks to be available Note Ethernet communications is not available in a Model 352P 354 or 354N e AWE Function Block The AWE Analog Write Ethernet block allows the controller to write analog data to other
269. bility that the panel face will bow Raceways conduit and wiring should not interfere with the removal or accessibility of the instruments control devices alarms and related equipment 5 44 0 06 0 138 2 1 5 0 lt gt Dimensions Inches Millimeters X03100S0 Panel Cutout Dimensions Tolerances 0 06 0 1 5 0 Where A Number of 353 and 372 Stations Height 5 44 138 2 Width 2 84 X A 5 67 X B 0 16 inches 72 0 X A 144 X B 4 1 mm B Number of 363 Recorders Alternate DIN Standard Cutout For Individually Mounted 363 Recorders Only 5 44 138 2 High X 5 44 138 2 Wide Note Alternate cutout does not allow for possible future substitution of 2 Model 353 or 372 stations due to width limitations FIGURE 8 3 Panel Cutout Dimensions March 2003 Installation UM353 1 MG00391a 11 25 285 8 VIEW 2 84 2 72 67 8 Y Mounting Cli lt 1 18 ey 30 Case Dimensions in inches millimeters SIDE VIEW An 5 42 6 3 144 137 7 160 TET Y 0 32 gt 0 8 FIGURE 8 4 Moore 353 Dimensions Direct Entry Connectors 11 02 280 VIEW 2 84 2
270. bration is not affected As new loops and function blocks are added parameters will appear at default values March 2003 4 1 Factory Configured Options UM353 1 4 1 FCO101 Single Loop Controller w Tracking Setpoint Factory Configured Option FCO101 provides a single loop controller configured in Loop01 A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks This configuration provides setpoint tracking which will cause the setpoint to track the process when the loop is not in Auto NA If the loop tag Loop01 is changed all configured references within the station will automatically be changed to the new tag Process e LOOPO1 Setpoint Function Block A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT A Input A Loop01 PID O1 INPUT TC Input TC Loop01 A M NA ESN Exec Seq No 20 ESN Exec Seq No 5 Analog Output 1 Function Block ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT S Input S Loop01 A M 01 INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT D Input D
271. btr ction saus sa sa LAL Re ka so statin cra ut a aee cdd 3 100 3 208 TAN STANGENT ient eie t fusi ie dir 3 100 3 2 99 THs Track Se HONG 3 101 3 2 100 TOT y Totalizet 2 3 101 3 2 101 TSW Transfer SWitch siste tese edited ere e ee RR e deeds 3 102 3 2 102 XOR Exclusive OR Logic kun 3 102 4 0 FACTORY CONFIGURED OPTIONS 4 1 4 1 FCO101 Single Loop Controller w Tracking 4 2 4 2 FCO102 Single Loop Controller w Fixed 4 3 4 3 FCO103 External Set Controller with Tracking Local Setpoint sse 4 4 4 4 104 External Set Controller with Non Tracking Local Setpoint 4 6 4 5 FCO105 Ratio Set Control w Operator Setpoint Limits 4 8 4 6 FCO106 Single Loop Controller w Operator Setpoint n nn 4 10 4 7 FCO107 Dual Loop Controller 4 11 4S FCOM 1s Cascade Control a Sa Sha ma ene 4 13 4 9 FCO122 Cascade Control w Operator Setpoint Limits eese 4 15 5 0 LONWORKS COMMUNICATION S 5 1 6 0 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS 5 stensecsessoa
272. c Loop Floating Point Data 32 bit IEEE Controller ODC Code Description Range Register MB C P LIL L PF R Process Real 41951 20 1 n 9 10 L SF R W Setpoint Real 41953 20 1 n 1 9 10 L VF R W Valve Real 41955 20 1 2 9 10 L XF R X Variable Real 41957 20 1 n 3 25 26 L YF R Y Variable Real 41959 20 1 n 4 25 26 L RF R W Ratio Real 41961 20 1 n 23 24 L BF R W Bias Real 41963 20 1 n 25 26 L TLF R Totalizer Real 41965 20 1 n 3 13 14 spare 00000000 41967 20 1 00000000 41969 20 1 Sequencer ODS Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL LHSSNF R W Sequencer Step No Real 41951 20 1 n 2 3 L SAOF R Sequencer Analog Output Real 41953 20 1 n 1 2 3 L SAOmF R Step Analog Out most sig word Real n a 1 1 L SAOIF R Step Analog Out least sig word Real n a n 2 1 L SAEPF R Step Analog End Point Real 41955 20 1 n 1 4 5 L SRTF R W Step Remaining Time Real 41957 20 1 n 3 2 3 L SSTF R Sequencer Step Time Real 41959 20 1 n 3 4 5 L SNSF R Sequencer Number of Steps Real 41961 20 1 n 6 7 L SNGF R Sequencer Number of Groups Real 41963 20 1 n 8 9 L SNRF R Sequencer Number of Recipes Real 41965 20 1 n 1 7 8 L CRNF Current Recipe Number Real 41967 20 1 n 1 9 10 R W spare 0 00000000 41969 20 1 Analog Indicator ODA V2 2
273. c beue ay Ban 24 Vdc 20 15 Power vase 25 Watts 40 VA maximum Wire Size Recommended 18 AWG 0 96 mm Rear Terminals eee tea ned H Hot N Neutral G Ground Green Screw Over current Protection 1 20 maximum fuse or circuit breaker 14 6 March 2003 UM353 1 Model Designation and Specifications 14 6 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS Analog Inputs 3 Input Range eei 0 5 Vdc standard calibration 1 5 Vdc teste ed ha s 0 1 Vdc Shri hive 4 5 Vdc Type E Single ended uc ween 0 10 Resolution nene ern 0 024 Software Output Analog configurable default 0 0 100 0 Normal Mode Rejection gt 504 60Hz Input Impedance gt megohm Maximum Continuous Input Without Crosstalk 7 30 Vdc Without Damage 30 Vdc Analog Outputs 2 Standard Calibration 4 20 mAdc Zeta IM 4 mAdc trim SPAM est 16 mAdc trim Current 2 4 mA to 21 6 mA huic P 0 1 Resolution esent 0 003 Software Input Type Analog configurable default 0 0 100 0 Signal Reference Neg output tied to station common Output
274. cations A thin bead of silicon sealant is often applied between the controller s Display Assembly and the mounting panel to prevent air or liquid leakage at this joint Do not mount the controller where direct sunlight can strike the faceplate or case Direct sunlight can make the displays difficult to read and will interfere with heat dissipation Mount the controller either horizontally or with a backward tilt i e the front of the case higher than the rear If the controller is to be mounted with some electronic recorders or with pneumatic recorders or stations tilt back restrictions for these units can have a bearing on panel design and layout Route electrical power to the controller through a clearly labeled circuit breaker fuse or on off switch that is located near the controller and is accessible by the operator The breaker or switch should be located in a non explosive atmosphere unless suitable for use in an explosive atmosphere Thermocouple inputs are accommodated with an I O Expander board and a Reference Junction temperature sensor At the factory two Reference Junctions are included in a Range Resistor and Reference Installation Kit Jumpers on the MPU Controller board are discussed in Sections 11 3 Troubleshooting and 11 5 Assembly Replacement Refer to this material when installing or storing a controller or an MPU Controller board 8 2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS Operate a controller within its environmental specifica
275. cess variable can be displayed on the local faceplate using the D button When first stepping into loop using the Loop button the loop tag will be displayed e g AnDisp1 However if there is point within the loop that has an unacknowledged alarm that point will be displayed alternating between the point tag and the alarm Process 1 Alarm PRIORity 5 1 2 3 415 condition e g PI693 3B LO Press the D button to scroll through en AR the analog points displaying the point tag e g TI712 in the Process 3 Alam APRIORIY o 10046 0 alphanumeric and the value of the point in the digital display e g oe Process 4 Alarm PRIORity 5 Process 1 Alarm TYPE 5 Process 1 Alarm TYPE 5 Process 2 Alarm TYPE 5 Process 2 Alarm TYPE Process 3 Alarm TYPE 5 Process 3 Alarm B TYPE s Process 4 Alarm TYPE 5 jone HI LO or Process 4 Alarm B TYPE s none HI LO or Proc 1 Alarm A DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 Proc 1 Alarm B DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 Proc 2 Alarm A DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 Proc 2 Alarm B DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 Proc 3 Alarm A DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 Proc 3 Alarm B DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 0 Proc 4 Alarm DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Proc 4 Alarm DeLay IN s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60 Proc 1 Alarm A DeLay OUT s 0 4 1 2 5 15 30 60
276. ch 2003 3 41 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 34 DIN Digital Inputs DIN function blocks can be used to sense a discrete signal from an external source and provide a block output representing the state of this signal Blocks are available on the Controller Board and on the Expander Board Function block names IDs and terminal designators are listed in Section 8 4 The block output is high 1 when the input is on and low 0 when off Output QS indicates the quality status of the output signal O1 and will be high 1 when the output is of bad quality Bad quality indicates any hardware failure of the input converter DIN DIN_ Typical External Circuit Quality Test a as BLOCK DIAGRAM DIGITAL INPUT _ DIN DIGITAL INPUT piN Output 1 Quality Status 24 Vdc wv AID gt 01 3 42 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 35 DINU Digital Inputs Universal DINU_ blocks have multi function capability DIGITAL INPUT UNIVERSAL e sensing a discrete input and providing a high 1 or low 0 output representing the state of the input e totalizing and scaling the count of input pulses Reset ED Direction EP DIGITAL INPUT gt Count Total e converting the rate of input pulses to a scaled analog Track Variable Typ UNIVERSAL gt scaled Freq frequency o
277. changed SLIDE WIRE OHM MV RID b ON ENG UNITS a z mi T SS gt Daa Range 1 ed Lp 5 __ Converter 2 7 KZ ME Sal MI 12 Em 4 i 4 4 iL 1 Y Bias Models 353 Models 353 Quality Test gt QS and 354 only and 354 only BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 19 Function Blocks UM353 1 TABLE 3 4 Input Types ENGineering UNITS AVAILABLE ON INPUT TYPES Deg C degrees Celsius ET C ST C RT C BT C NT C DRTD URTD JRTD Deg F degrees Fahrenheit JT C KT C TT C ET C ST C RT C BT C NT C DRTD URTD JRTD Deg R degrees Rankine JT C KT C TT C ET C ST C RT C BT C NT C DRTD URTD JRTD 4 K Kelvin JT C ET C ST C RT C BT C NT C DRTD URTD JRTD TABLE 3 5 Calibration Input Values TYPE DESCRIPTION OPERATING FIELD CAL FLD POINTS JT C Type J Thermocouple 185 to 1100 C 300 F to 2010 F 0 C amp 800 C RIC Tek aCe m NT C Type N Thermocouple 185 C to 1300 300 to 2370 F 0 C amp 1000 C DRTD DIN 43760 751 185 C to 622 C 300 F to 1152 1000 0 C amp alpha 0 003850 2850 512 380 10 URTD US NBS 126 185 C to 613 C 300 F to 1135 1000 0 C amp alpha 0 003902 2850 504 84 11 JRTD JIS 1604
278. cks UM353 1 3 2 73 PB1SW PB1 Switch PBISW is one of three general purpose switches available in each loop It can be utilized for switching Boolean signals in such applications as toggling Console Local operation of the ODC or ODS function blocks Start Stop controlling the position of a TSW Transfer Switch function block for switching analog signals or other operator initiated actions PB1SW can be configured for momentary or sustained operation As momentary the switch will transfer to the NO position when the button is pressed and will return when released Momentary action is used in toggle applications such as changing the function of the ODC or ODS function blocks In the sustained mode the switch will alternate positions each time the button is pressed An unconfigured NC input defaults to 0 and an unconfigured NO input to 1 With firmware 1 30 and higher the button can be remotely activated through a command over Modbus or LIL PB1 SWITCH PB1SW NC Input m NO Input m PB1 Switch Message Display m ESN 000 PB Switch Output LOIN Switch ACTION 5 MOM SUS MOM Iplul LAST Power Up LAST 5 NO YES YES MD HI S T MDHI STatus message 5 5 ASCII Char GREEN MD LO S T MD LO STatus message s 5 ASCII Char RED MD MDHIACtion message 5 5 ASCII Char RED I LO A C
279. cycle time is 0 1 sec the maximum required pulse rate is 0 1 sec The condition is satisfied since the maximum March 2003 3 31 Function Blocks UM353 1 output requirement is less than the maximum pulse rate of 5 sec available with a 0 1 sec cycle time The requirement would also be satisfied if a PUL SCAL of 1 was selected which would have required a maximum pulse rate of 1 POWER UP During a warm start if the configuration parameter PU LAST was set to YES the integrator function will initialize with the last value prior to power down and all outputs will be initialized to the last value prior to power down If set to NO or during a cold start the integrator and all outputs will initialize to 0 Input EC allows the batch totalizer block to be used with another function block such as the DINU that provides a count signal When input A is not configured it will be set to 0 0 The EC input is summed with the initial value for use as the total This value will now be displayed as the total on the operator faceplate and the presets will act on this value to provide outputs Al and A2 BATCH TOTALIZER External Count Input EC Integrator Zero Drop Out j n TotaL
280. d Modbus Ethernet Analog Outputs Dynamic Data x30961 x31024 Refer to the AIE function block in the Function Blocks section for details 6 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Network Communications 6 2 LIL DATA MAPPING LIL data is assigned to one of two data types The first is global data which occupies parameter 1 of each channel and is transmitted by the LIL interface every 0 5 seconds The remaining data is non global which occupies parameters 2 through 256 and is transmitted in response to a LIL READ command or can be changed by a LIL WRITE command Each parameter is 16 bit word IEEE floating point number Real 15 assigned to 2 consecutive parameters with the first containing the most significant and the second the least significant portion of the floating point number String data can occupy one or more consecutive parameters The following tables provide an overview listing of available data with descriptions located in Section 7 The acronym in the table identifies the data in Section 7 Data can be accessed using the Model 320 Independent Computer Interface Refer to AD320 10 Model 320 ICI User Manual and AD320 20 Guidelines for Writing Application Software Using the Model 320 ICI Guidelines All individual parameters words can be read using the random parameter data request CMD 7 Parameters that span multiple words such as floating point ASCII tags etc can also be read using the multiple byte parameter data r
281. d ALARM RW 2 Alarm I is Enabled I Enabed ALARM RW 3 Alarm 2 is Active A2 l Acive fALARM R 4 Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged N2 I Not Acknowledged _ ALARM RW 5 Alarm 2 is Enabled E2 1 Enabled ALARM RW 6 Alarm3 is Active l Acive fALARM IR 7 Alarm3 is Not Acknowledged N3 I Not Acknowledged ALARM RW Bess 9 10 ll 212 1 13 Alarm 3 is Enabled E3 I Enabed ALARM RW Alarm 4 is Active A4 ALARM R Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged N4 1 Not Acknowledged ALARM RW Alarm 4 is Enabled Enabled ALARM RW Alarms are Out of Service OS 1 Outof Service ALARM RW Configuration has Changed CC I Loop Configured R fJ 14 Unacknowledged Loop Event NA l Unacknowledged Event IRW 15 ActiveLoopEvent AE l Ac veloopEvnt IR 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 20 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Extended Control Loop Status Word LHECLS channel n 4 parameter 10 A M A M S N 3 N 1 N 1 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 10 Not Autotune Warning n 12 13 14 15 Ra ss 9 10 EE 12 s 315 3 These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD A write of a 1
282. d P is still high OFF Delay When input P is high 1 the output is high If P goes low 0 the elapsed timer starts and sets O1 low upon reaching the TIME provided is still low In firmware 1 30 and higher the DLY TIME is DELAY TIMER DYT_ ESN 000 Pulse Input gt Elapsed Time DELAY TIMER P Remaining Time Output 1 DeLay TIME minutes 3 Real 0 0 Timer TYPE 5 8 Power Up LAST NO YES YES LNPUT P INPUTP n loop tag block tag output null E Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 adjustable over the full range of the display which is 0 00000 to 999999 In earlier versions the minimum time setting is 0 1 If the delay time is set to less than the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the scan time Output ET elapsed time will ramp from 0 0 to the value of DLY TIME and remain there until P resets the output Output RT remaining time equals DLY TIME ET POWER UP During a warm or a hot start with PU LAST set to YES the block will initialize with the input output states and elapsed time in effect at the instant power down occurred A cold start with PU LAST set to NO will initialize the input output states and elapsed time to 0 OFF 4 gt RT TIME 1
283. de g F lt process 1 units gt 80 00 LVL 0 00 pr OC p scalin T UNITS RY P2 1A gt D Process 1 Alarms 1B 2 gt 2224 2A gt U Process 2 Alarms 2B i F T Process DPP 5 r Process 3 Alarms 3B P4 E r RA Process 4 Alarms 4B Nu gt LE Station amp Loop Error Handling se PB1 PB2 gt PC Faceplate Display 000 t L L L LL L L L L LL LL LLL BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 64 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 65 ODC Operator Display for Controllers ODC blocks are one of five operator displays that are used on a one per loop basis to configure the local operator display functions and network parameters from a remote operator workstation associated with the loop See the i ware PC faceplate on the next page The following features are in firmware 1 30 and higher 1 Anew parameter VIEW OD when set to YES the default setting enables the operator display to be viewed and accessed locally using the LOOP button In some cases it may be desired to view only display or operation parameters with a network workstation and not allow operation or viewing of the control loop from the local display Here the parameter should be set to NO 2 Output LE is high 1 when a loop event is active Output SE is high when a station error is active 3 The LOOP this parameter was MB INDEX in
284. e The quality status output QS indicates the quality of the block outputs and is high 1 when outputs CT IS or SF are of bad quality Bad quality indicates a failure in the K Count Total CT hardware conversion circuit Count Track TC Current Limit lt 7 mA ENG UNITS POWER UP With PU LAST set to YES the PIA Converter Distr pl scaig Se SF CT output will power up at the last value DIU during hot warm start If set to during a warm or a cold start it will be set to 0 0 The digital filter will be temporarily by passed during a hot a warm or a cold start Quality Test gt QS BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 43 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 36 DIS Digital Input _ State DIS function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher convert 16 bit word received from single node on the LonWorks network lt STATE into 16 block outputs for interconnection to other function blocks within the controller A maximum of 6 DIS blocks can be used up Tm Dism to the limit of nodes allowed on the Lon network or the memory Mmo DIGITAL INPUT Output 0 limit of the controller Each use of the block will be assigned a uve gt STATE unique st
285. e ER ER bs 3 59 3 2 59 MTH iere tio RC ee AL e ire ee d E Hea 3 60 3 2 60 MUL Multiplication sc iuret tee ee ete ee He e red e 3 61 3 2 61 NND INAND LO err Gerne eter epe tee 3 61 32 62 NOR 3 62 3 2 03 NOT NO TO G10 bed ua 3 62 3 2 64 ODA Operator Display for Analog indication amp alarming V2 2 see 3 63 3 2 65 ODC Operator Display for Controllers sess 3 65 3 2 66 ODD Operator Display for Discrete indication amp control V2 2 sese 3 67 3 2 67 ODP Operator Display for PushButtons 2 2 4 12 00200 0000000 00 000000000 3 69 3 2 68 ODS Operator Display for Sequencer rrrrnrrrnrrrrrrrnnrrnrrrnnrrnernrrrnvernvrrnrrrnernrrsnrrnsrrsnrrnnrsserrsrrnnesnne 3 71 3 2 69 ON OEE 3 73 3 2 7008 SOR Loge eorr gene te ne eet eo eee e p oH Heic re 3 74 3 2771 ORSL Overtide Selector eee nn Pet ee ec o aia rice e aaa 3 74 3 2 72 OST One Shot E E rne 3 75 3 27713 PBISW S PBI aeta oe eie obediens abeat doti 3 76 3 22 74 PB2SW PB2 S WC u gei gie etie npe e roa es 3 77 3 2 75 PB3SW PB3 SWICD s iecit ere tenen C 3 78 32 76 PCOM Phase COMmnu nicati n creo rite reete repe Ie 3 79 3 2 PD PD Cont
286. e Installation section Table 8 1 for rear terminal assignments March 2003 11 3 UM353 1 Connector Cover Ground Screw l Voltage Input Approvals and Warning Label N Warning and EG Mounting Clip Capacity Label AE Top and Bottom LIL or Ethernet Network Board Nameplate I O Expander RTC CBor Board gt MAT RCB Board Removable Portions of Accessory Connectors A Option Boards i Connector Socket Assembly 4 Y 5 RJ 45 Ethernet Connector Case with Flange Future LonWorks vit Mounting Kit Accessory Boards amp Use Board MPU Controller Board 3 Ethernet O Ring Display Assembly Cable t Display Assembly with Operator Faceplate Warning Label Communication Port on Underside Case Assembly Flip Down Door with Loop ID Card Controller with Case Option 4 Gray or Green Direct Entry Connectors Controller Power Input Fuse 5 Connector 2 Terminals over 7 3 13 A1 N F1 EN Connector P1 Terminals N 27 39 ETG TVS1 Ground Screw Connector Socket Assembly MPU Board Component Side Upper Left Corner Controller Nameplate LIL Network Board 8 32 x 1 Fillister Head Mounting Clip Removable N Configuration I O Expander Board Board Connector Connector N Accessory Boards Terminals Terminals 2 40 52 14 26 C
287. e ODP operator display function block for each loop as LIL CHAN n The first channel for each loop can be viewed in station data starting at channel 7 parameter 38 The station configuration entry both local and graphical PC based will indicate the next available open space of six contiguous channels Another starting channel be entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total number of channels Channel locations n through n 1 in the table below identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each analog indicator loop All parameter data e g discrete input states is global and is transmitted every 0 5 second All other data is sent out on command 1 3 4 5 10 11 12 L sw 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 L G1TAG L G1P1T L G1P2T L G1SAT L G1F1T L G1FOT zc pepe L G1SMT 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 L G2TAG L G2P1T L G2P2T L G2SAT L G2F1T L G2FOT L L G2SMT 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 n L G3TAG L G3P1T L G3P2T L G3SAT L G3F1T L G3FOT L L G3SMT 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 L G4TAG L G4P1T L G4P2T L G4SAT L G4F1T L G4FOT HEN GEN EE L G4SMT 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 n L G5TAG L G5P1T L G5P2T L G5SAT L G5F1T L G5FOT L G5SMT 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 n 6 L G6P1T L G6P2T L G6SAT L G6F1T L G6FOT L
288. e PoinTeR E Absolute Value Abolute Error Y BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 73 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 70 OR Logic OR function blocks perform a logical OR on the three OR inputs Any unused input will be set low 0 hr OR ESN 000 K PENNE inputa FD 2 gt OR pit Fp OR Output 1 gt OR TRUTH TABLE Output 4 0 ja j gt gt jo w BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 71 ORSL Override Selector ORSL function blocks are used on one per loop basis and they enable primary input signal such as the output from controller to be overridden by other signals For selector configured as LO the function block outputs the lower of the primary or override inputs For selector configured as HI the function block will output the higher of the primary or override inputs Override signals can be hard limits coming from HOLD blocks or signals coming from other controllers Block override inputs 1 and 2 can be used as HI or LO selector functions Additional override inputs can be accommodated by connecting these inputs to signal selector SEL blocks When the output of the ORSL block is not the primary input the output OS will be high 1 In addition the block can cause the operator faceplate to display Input INPUT A loop ta
289. e Siemens 16 channel discrete input or output modules available with firmware 1 30 or higher There is a 15 node per network limit When large I O counts are needed for a controller application use physical nodes with higher I O counts to minimize the number of physical nodes required For example Siemens provides 16 channel discrete input and output modules Up to six of each can be used within a controller configuration A 4 channel analog input module and a 2 channel analog output module are also available Model 352P only the Option 3 I O Jumper must also be used to select LonWorks March 2003 5 1 LonWorks Communications UM353 1 SERVICING CONSIDERATIONS The functioning of a LonWorks network can be affected by e Upgrading the MPU Controller board firmware Replacing a controller s MPU Controller board with a board having a different firmware version e Moving a LonWorks board to a controller with a different MPU Controller board firmware version Background A LonWorks option board contains a Program ID for the controller node A Controller MPU board will store a Program ID in the EEPROM on the LonWorks board when the combination is first powered up When the Network Manager software installs a controller node as part of a network it reads the Program ID when a controller is installed for the first time The Program ID of the controller as with all other installed nodes is then retained by the Network Manager The
290. e UD TYPE parameter Requires Ethernet communications board firmware version 2 0 or later March 2003 3 37 Function Blocks UM353 1 1 oncE will write once to the START CL Modbus Starting Coil The controller will write when any block input value changes state 2 P2P will update at the controller peer to peer rate set in the ETHERNET block 3 Ctwill update at the cycle time of the controller The Ct option is normally only used when writing time critical changes Input T can be used to trigger a write This would be used in cases where the oncE option has been selected input values do not change and there may be a concern that the receiving device has lost the values Output QS indicates the quality of the write operation and will go high 1 when the write is not completed successfully This 1s normally associated with failure of the destination device to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the device 3 2 30 DAM Deviation Amplifier DAM function blocks compute the difference between inputs A and B amplify the difference signal and sum the DEVIATION AMPLIFIER resultant with an internal BIAS and an external signal at input C Unused inputs are set to 0 0 E EMT ES QD S ch sch SS Sy qoa St Se dee ee ach Ea ey opa InptA A DEVIATION BIAS Bj AMPLIFIER
291. e analog output for the valve signal The two analog outputs are 4 to 20 mA current sources with shutdown control for use in redundant control systems The two digital outputs are open collector devices with over voltage protection Two serial ports are available for bi directional asynchronous communications Terminals NCA and NCB provide an RS485 connection for LIL or Modbus network communications An 11 connector on the underside of the Display Assembly provides an RS232 connection for creating and editing configurations using the optional PC Based Graphical Configuration Utility Since both ports are independent UARTS communications with one serial port will not interfere with communications to the other Parameters in the STATN function block allow setting of the Modbus baud rate and transmission characteristic for the Display Assembly MMJ 11 configuration port and LIL Modbus terminals NCA NCB See STATN Station Parameters in Section 3 Additional information on Modbus network communications and data mapping can be found in Section 6 and Section 7 The RS 232 connection uses a DEC MMJ connector with the following six connections RTS Handshaking output from MPU TXD Data output from MPU Common Common RXD Data input to MPU CTS Handshaking input to MPU The on board Power Supply circuit provides the power sources necessary for system power internal analog output power and transmitter power Transmitter power is 26 Vdc at 0 12
292. e board and W8 is the Real Time Clock jumper see Figure 11 2 The Ethernet board plugs into connector J3 and jumper W2 on the MPU Controller board Jumper W2 may need to be set as described below Removal and installation of the Ethernet Cable is discussed and illustrated in Section 11 5 6 LonWorks board Figure 11 8 This board plugs into connector J6 and jumper W4 on the MPU Controller board Jumper W4 may need to be set as described below RCB or RTC CB board Figure 11 9 This board plugs into a LIL Network or Ethernet board When a Network board is not installed plug the RCB or RTC CB board into J3 on the MPU Controller board See the RTC CB procedure below Carefully align connectors before applying force to seat them 11 16 March 2003 UM353 1 Maintenance Jumpers W2 and W4 W2 LIL Ethernet Modbus Network Jumper located on the MPU Controller board 2 W4 LonWorks I O Bus Jumper located on the MPU Controller board 8 e Install shunt s when LonWorks Board is NOT installed e Remove and save the shunt s when a LonWorks Board is installed If a 353 is receiving one of these boards for the first time ERR 232 may be displayed when Shunts Removed power is applied This should not be a concern and can be cleared by pressing the Install shunt s when network connections at rear terminals 3 and 4 are wired for L Modbus Remove and save the shunt s when either a LIL Network board is installed and network c
293. e loop tag name and will stop alternating when the autotune program has been completed Once completed the controller will return to the mode prior to autotune initiation When the POST AT in the controller block is set to auto transfer the recommended tuning parameters will automatically be transferred to the controller and it will return to automatic control To review the AT parameters before initiating autotune press TUNE and then press STORE at the STORE AT prompt to transfer the recommended settings Chart 1 0 100 range illustrates a typical autotune exercise Variable is the Valve and 2 the Process In this example the process has noise with a standard deviation of less than 0 5 The HYS hysteresis band is set to 0 75 and the DEV deviation from setpoint which should be set to at least 4 times the HYS value is set to 3 The autotuner will use the initial valve step size set as STEP in the controller function block during the first 1 1 2 cycles to learn the approximate gain of the process It will then adjust the valve step size during the remainder of the autotuning exercise to maintain the DEV setting When this test concludes the recommended settings are transferred to the controller and a 20 setpoint change is made to illustrate the controller tuning When the autotuner is started for the next autotune exercise it will use the process gain learned during the previous exercise to determine the valve step size u
294. e minimum allowed value of 8 and register writes to 2 7 1 4 PC Modbus OPC Server The i ware PC Operator Interface software includes a Modbus OPC server that when connected to the controller can auto populate its database with the number and type of loops configured in the station All tag names used in the database will be the same as listed in this manual LIL OPC Server The i ware PC Operator Interface software includes an LIL OPC server that when connected to the controller can auto populate its database with the number and type of loops configured in the station All tag names used in the LIL OPC database will be the same as listed in this manual Ethernet OPC Server The i ware PC Operator Interface software is an OPC Client and can be connected to an OPC server An Ethernet OPC server using the Open Modbus TCP Protocol is available to obtain data from single or multiple controllers and server the data to OPC clients Modbus Application Note Refer to application document AD353 108 for information on using Modbus communications with controller products 7 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 2 STATION DATA A station contains some data that pertains to the entire station and some to individual loops Station data available over the network is part of the station function block STATN configuration and is mapped to fixed locations in Modbus registers or coils and fixed channel parameters when the optional
295. e of Input ODxx Mode of Input B ODxx Mode of Input C ODxx Mode of Input D ODxx Mode of Input E ODxx Mode of Input F g g 15 g 0 EA 54 Discrete Output Remote xx Forced State Word of Function Block Inputs DODxxF Block DoD rwo 9 DODxx 5 tege 5 DODxx F 1 Writes are made using a parameter data send command CMD 9 to the entire word March 2003 7 39 Data Mapping UM353 1 Discrete Input Remote xx Normal State Word of Function Block Outputs DISxxN 0 DISxx Output O0 Normal State I highO low DISxx 6 DISxx Output O6 Normal State I highQ low DISxx 1 06 8 DISxx Output 08 Normal State I highO low DISxx R O8 9 DISxx Output O9 Normal State 1 high0 ow DISxx R 1 09 11 DISxx Output OB Normal State I high Q low DiSxx 13 DISxx Output OD Normal State I high Q low R OD Discrete Input Remote xx Mode Word of Function Block outputs DISxxM Description Read Write ISxx Mode of Output 0 1 forced 0 normal R W 1 ISxx Mode of Output O1 1 forced 0 normal R W 1 Ol ISxx Mode of Output O2 1 forced 0 normal R W 1 02 ISxx Mode of Output 03 1 forced 0 normal R W 1 03 ISxx Mode of Output 04 1 forced 0 normal R W 1 04 Mode of Output O5 1 forced 0 normal R W 1 O5 07 A C E OF J Mode of Output O7 1 fo
296. e time of the controller The Ct option is normally only used when writing to I O outputs in a PID control loop Input T can be used to trigger a write This would be used in cases where the oncE option has been selected Input S does not change so as to trigger a write based on the trigger dead band and there may be a concern that the receiving device has lost the value Output QS indicates the quality of the write operation and will go high 1 when the write is not completed successfully This is normally associated with failure of the destination device to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the device 7 Requires Ethernet communications board firmware version 2 0 or later 3 30 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 22 BATOT Batch Totalizer BATOT function blocks can be used on a one per loop BATCH TOTALIZER basis and integrate an analog input Each provides an output signal representing a total integrated value over the BATOT ESN 000 TN TotaL time base selected For example if the time base is Ext Count minutes input 15 5 0 for 60 minutes output Analog A would equal 300 0 The total can be displayed the D mp2 operator faceplate as lt loop tag gt T if the configuration reset PuLse paramete
297. e using the pulser knob Display the process and wait a minute or two for the process to stabilize To activate the AUTOTUNE feature 1 Press the TUNE Quick Button to display AUTOTUNE 2 Set this parameter to YES press STORE then press EXIT The controller is now set to AUTO and AUTOTUNE will flash until the AUTOTUNE is finished Tuning warnings may occur refer to Section 9 3 Since this is only a simulation press ACK to clear any warnings 3 Press the TUNE button to display the default controller parameters and the resulting AUTOTUNE ATUNE parameters After viewing the parameters STORE AT will be displayed Press the STORE button to change the controller parameters to the new values or press the ENTER EXIT CONF button to keep the defaults To cancel the AUTOTUNE before the tuning operation is complete press the A M button to enter MANUAL mode Refer to Section 9 3 for more details on the AUTOTUNE feature 10 6 March 2003 UM353 1 Controller and System Test 10 1 10 View mode When troubleshooting a configuration it is often helpful to be able to view the intermediate outputs of function blocks that are not configured as display variables during normal operation This can be accomplished via the VIEW mode To enter VIEW mode 1 Press ENTER EXIT to display LOOP 2 Press STEP DOWN to display VIEW 3 Press STEP DOWN to display the first output of the first configured function block 4 Use the pulser knob
298. ection of standard I O products LonWorks remote products include many analog input and output options as well as digital inputs and outputs using relay or solid state technology This board plugs into the Controller Board via two connectors An 80 pin pass through connector is also available for stacking additional option boards The LonWorks Board has an integrated circuit containing three processors two timers RAM EEPROM parallel and serial ports and a network communication port The board communicates with the Controller Board via a parallel MIP interface The MIP interface uses a token passing scheme so only the token holder can initiate a data transfer The board also connects directly to a remote network using a free topology transceiver that operates at a rate of 78 kbps and connects up to 64 nodes over a twisted pair see Section 5 0 The network wiring may be ina bus configuration or wired in any combination of bus star or loop topologies 13 5 LOCAL INSTRUMENT LINK LIL NETWORK BOARD An optional Local Instrument Link LIL Network Board is available in place of the Modbus communication network to provide higher speed networking and peer to peer communication between controllers The hardware architecture is designed to accommodate other emerging fieldbus technologies This includes both field communications that may require lower power for intrinsic safety and also higher speed for interplant networking The LIL Board plugs into t
299. ed and refer to the adjacent figure for the connector location Each connector is keyed for the appropriate plug in location Visually check that all 12 pins in the Connector Socket are straight If a pin is only slightly bent very gentle straightening can be tried Excessive straightening may cause the pin to break requiring replacement of the Connector Socket Align the connector with the pins in the Connector Socket and push the connector straight in See the adjacent figure Two pairs of rectangular tabs extend from the cover Install the cover by fitting one pair of tabs extending from one side of the cover into two of the rectangular slots in a pair of terminals Now compress the U shaped extrusion slightly and fit the other pair of cover tabs into the slots in the remaining pair of terminals The cover can be secured with two screws Holes in the cover align with holes in the connector socket assembly Use 3 48 x long or M2 5 x 6 long screws to secure the cover 8 3 2 Panel and Rack Mounting Guidelines Connector Socket Case Safety 227 Ground gt Terminals 2 27 39 A 4 gt Sy Terminals H N A and 3 13 Grasp here and pull straight out Terminals S 14 26 4 Terminals N 40 52 Cover Mounting Slots 4 Places 5 Q FIGURE 8 2 Side Entry Connectors Removing a Connector The panel face should provide a flat and rigid mounting surface Reinforce the back of the panel if there is a possi
300. emote panel mounting of a Display Assembly Includes Mounting Kit Flange Assembly Mounting Clips and Screws Display Ribbon Cable 48 inches 1219 mm long Installation Instruction Does not include the Display Assembly Communications Cable 16353 61 Connects MMJ11 on adapter connected to a personal MMJ11 to MMJ11 computer s serial port to MMJ11 on a Display Assembly Select one of the following adapters Adapter DB25 to 11 16353 62 Adapts personal computer serial port to above Communications Cable Adapter DB9 to MMJ11 16353 63 LONWORKS ACCESSORY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION LonWorks Protocol Startup Kit 16353 65 LonWorks Startup Kit includes 27005 1 Adapter see description below 15939 70Vn nn Driver see description below 16353 66 Cable see description below Echelon 73000 1 600 6 SLTA 2 27005 1 Serial PC Interface Adapter Echelon SLTA 2 Device Driver 15939 70Vn nn PC software latest version will be supplied SLTA 2 to LonWorks Network Cable 16260 27 Cable assembly to connect DB9 on PC serial port to DB9 on SLTA Adapter Configuration Software 27005 2 Acromag 50SW CFS M03 1 44MB March 2003 14 3 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1 LONWORKS ACCESSORY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 1 Channel RTD Input Module 27005 4 Acromag 550L3 502 TEMPR 10 NCR Quad V mAdc Input Module 1 Volt 27005 5 Acromag 550L3 503 4V1 10 NCR Quad V mAdc Input Module 1 Volt 27005 6 Acromag 5501 3 503 4
301. en input TC is high 1 This causes the A M block output to track input TV thus placing the loop in a standby condition This feature can be used to enable one loop to track another for either redundancy applications or optional control schemes It will also asserta STANDBY status at the configured priority to the operator display STATUS OUTPUTS Output AS Auto Status goes high 1 when output O1 is the Auto input output NA will go high when output 01 is not the Auto input output MS goes high when the A M switch is in the manual position output ES goes high when the Emergency Manual switch is in the manual position and SS goes high when the standby switch is in the Track Variable position Two LEDs on the display identify the position of the A M switch POWER UP The A M function block can be configured to power up under various conditions during a warm or cold start If PU LAST has been configured as YES during a warm start all outputs are initialized at previous values and the block will power up in the same condition i e same A M switch position When powering up in auto the A M block will execute in the manual mode for the first two scan cycles allowing a controller block to track the last value When PU LAST is set to NO the A M block does not power up in last position during a warm start and will power up as configured by the POWER UP parameter either AUTO or MAN During a cold start the A M block will always power up as configured
302. en the LonWorks option board is installed in a 352P 353 or 354N controller The range pointer parameter input R tells the function block where to obtain the signal s range ANALOG OUTPUT LEV PERCENT AOP Range ANALOG OUTPUT Input1 1 Quality Status LEV PERCENT RanGe PoinTeR S INPUT 1 H V 2 9 LonWorks Remote Bus 3 VV sNVT lev percent gt E loop tag blocktag loop tag block tag output Network Variable NUMber nv 1to 2000 scaling information An unconfigured range pointer will use a default range of 0 00 to 100 00 The signal will be scaled and transmitted on the network as a SNVT lev percent SNVT 81 data type The NV NUM parameter enables viewing the output variable number This may be needed when using a remote PC network manager to bind this output with the network variable in a remote node The block output QS indicates the quality status of the Lon output and will go high when the output is of bad quality Bad quality usually indicates a loss of communications within the LonWorks network lt gt Station LonWorks Remote LonWorks Device option board node u Remote node r x VOBus S 1 gt Scaling gt nv SNVT Le ae SNVT binding
303. ent address or when going through a Modbus TCP IP gateway a Modbus network may have multiple devices each having a unique address The MB REG parameter identifies the location of the digital data in the source device The REG TYP parameter enables reading of Holding Registers Modbus Function Code 03 or Input Registers Modbus Function Code 04 Both are treated the same in most Modbus devices but the Input type is the most common usage The use of DOE blocks in other Siemens MOORE controllers as the input source is defined by using the Modbus Registers from the table below The UD RATE parameter configures the rate at which the block will request data The P2P setting will update the data at the rate set by the P2P RATE parameter in the ETHERNET block The Ct setting will update the data at the cycle time of the controller Output QS indicates the quality of the received data and will go high 1 when the data is bad This is normally associated with failure to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the source FB MB FB MB FB MB FB MB Number Register Number Register Number Register Number Register DOE01 31025 DOE09 31033 DOE17 31041 DOE25 31049 DOE02 31026 DOE10 31034 DOE 18 31042 DOE26 31050 DOE03 31027 DOE11 31035 DOE19 31043 DOE27 31051 DOE04 31028 DOE12 31036 DOE20 31044 DOE28 31052 DOE05 31029 DOE13 31037 DOE21
304. equest CMD 23 but only one variable can be requested at a time Writes are made using the parameter data send CMD 9 In some cases such as loop and alarm status words the MASK ON OFF type codes are used to identify individual bits Not all bit mapped words support this option See Section 7 for specific information 6 2 1 Station Data Station data is fixed and occupies the first seven channels 4 ons FAM GBSR EBT EBSR RET RBSR NeT NESR OAT GASK mE 5 STAG 3 ssw owr SA cr RTS Sv STIM STD STH STMN STSC O gt Ts 5 cis cas cas css ces crs ces cos 6105 Ciis sis 525 535 545 955 ses 575 ses sos 5105 516 pe I c Lo Xe Yi CFN 5 cizs cis cms Giss ces cis cies Giss C208 5218 C228 C23S 5125 5135 5445 5158 5165 5175 stes 5195 5205 5215 S228 S235 Ubus Address xx Discrete I O States amp Forcing N Normal M Mode F Forced see Section 7 for details 25 31 33 36 tuo uaoan ans UA048 UA05N 2 UA02M UA03M UA04M UA05M UA06M Ps praia uao UA05F UA06E 4 UA2MT UAOSMT UA04T UAOSMT UAOGMT E EM co I j j e sss 1 0 NN 2003 6 3 Network C
305. erformed March 2003 11 15 UM353 1 K2 m 16305 1 Serial 036 Firmware 018 038 EPROMs id U37 2 3 5 U33 I FIGURE 11 4 I O Expander Board 11 5 5 Accessory Boards The Accessory Boards are the LIL Network board Ethernet board LonWorks board RCB board and RTC CB board Each of these boards mechanically fastens to and electrically connects to the MPU Controller board as shown in Figures 11 1 and 11 5 The following steps outline the board replacement procedure 1 2 Remove the MPU Controller board from the case as described above Remove the hardware fastening the selected Accessory Board s to the MPU Controller board Save the hardware Carefully unplug the Accessory Board s from the MPU Controller board Before installing the replacement board read the installation statements below for the particular board type Then plug a new or replacement Accessory Board into the mating board and refasten the board s with the hardware saved in step 2 LIL Network board Figure 11 6 This board plugs into connector J3 and jumper W2 the MPU Controller board Jumper W2 may need to be set as described below Ethernet Network board Figure 11 7 This board must be installed on a compatible MPU Controller board This Controller board has the lithium battery that lies flat on th
306. ergy amp Automation Process Instrumentation for the latest model designation information availability of some options and current electrical approvals Always refer to the labels on the controller case for approvals and certifications 14 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Model Designation and Specifications 14 2 ACCESSORIES The following two tables list the accessories currently available ACCESSORY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION ijconfig Graphical iCONFIG Vn nn Windows 95 98 and NT compatible software for PC based Configuration Utility controller configuration and creation of a function block diagram Transfer configuration to and from controller via Modbus LIL or Ethernet Vn nn the latest software version will be supplied Includes 16353 61 Cable see description below 16353 63 Adapter see description below Transmitter Power Supply 15124 1 Acopian Model B24G210M 24 Vdc 2 0A Adapter Bezel 15738 123 A panel cutout adapter for mounting a controller in a 3 x 6 panel cutout Blank Filler Panel 15738 168 Enhances control room appearance by covering a panel cutout intended for future mounting of a controller Loop Identification Card Custom printed loop identification for flip down access door Specify up to 5 lines with 24 characters per line Permanent Instrument Tag Stainless steel tag permanently attached to the controller case One line with up to 24 characters can be specified Display Assembly Remote 16353 54 For r
307. ernet Optional Rear Panel RJ 45 requires case option 4 Ethernet Communications Modbus communication is standard An optional Local Instrument Link LIL network board is available in place of the Modbus communication to provide higher speed networking and peer to peer communication between controllers This provides connectivity with an array of network enabled products including those listed below Current Controller Models Previous Controller Models Procidia 1 Internet Control System Model 352 Single Loop Digital Controller Moore 352P Single Loop Digital Controller Model 351 Triple Loop Digital Controller Moore 354 354N Universal Controllers Model 382 Logic and Sequence Controller An optional Ethernet board 15 available in place of Modbus and LIL communication This option enables peer to peer communication between Moore 353 controllers Procidia 1 controllers and many other devices that feature Ethernet embedded Modbus RTU protocol Ethernet communications requires an Ethernet board and controller firmware V2 4 or higher The Ethernet board supports uploading and downloading of controller configurations over the Ethernet LAN For example if i config Graphical Configuration Utility software is loaded on the local client shown in Figure 1 2 controller configurations can be developed on the client or uploaded from the controller for editing and then downloaded to the controller
308. error Section 11 4 provides a quick reference to the identification of these codes and discusses each code with respect to the type of test or error check controller response problem confirmation and corrective action In the event a malfunction within the controller is suspected troubleshooting by assembly substitution is recommended to get the controller back on line in the shortest possible time The plug in design of controller assemblies permits rapid removal and replacement to isolate a defect Figure 11 1 shows controller assemblies If a problem appears upon initial installation of the controller check the installation wiring and the controller s configuration parameters Also check the wiring of associated external process devices e g process transmitter LonWorks modules Field servicing experience indicates that most initial service incidents are of this nature Additional troubleshooting avenues are also possible For example a series of test configurations may be created and implemented to exercise different function blocks within the controller Section 3 describes each function block This type of troubleshooting analysis is intended to be implemented in an off line test bench situation On line checks of the controller input and output signals i e analog and digital can be performed without affecting station operation However this type of signal tracing is usually carried out behind an instrument panel Refer to th
309. ers a well integrated solution for small batch operations Several function blocks are available at the station level for configuration of STATION level parameters such as the station address and station tag name Function blocks include the CLOCK block when the RTC CB option board has been included and the ETHERNET block when the Ethernet board has been installed and the controller contains firmware V2 4 or higher to configure parameters such as the IP address All other function blocks are used for configuration within an individual LOOP Control implementations are configured in the Moore 353 by first creating a loop then entering a unique loop tag name and selecting function blocks for use within that loop A number of loops can be configured in the Moore 353 and a number of function block types are available as described in the sections that follow 1 2 1 LOOP Function Block Types Local I O Function Blocks are provided on both the MPU Controller Board m and the I O Expander Board These blocks can be used in any LOOP but fixed resources are expendable When used within a loop the unique block Nc 1 name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g TC2053 AIN1 for Analog Input 1 used in loop TC2053 ANALOG INPUT 01 Output 4 EXTRACTOR Quality Status 1 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Introduction Fixed Loop Function Blocks can be selected for use within each configured LOOP and include those blocks which
310. ers are factory set for the J3 circuit boards installed at time of Assembly shipment 16 Available jumpers vary with J5 board version 2 gt Kernel Jumper Pads on top and bottom W4 LonWorks I O Bus Rear Terminals 25 amp 26 X0315283 of board W7 Real Time Clock 2 d 4 f MPU Board Storage Hot Warm Start and Cold Start Enabled FIGURE 11 3 MPU Controller Board with RTC Jumper W7 11 4 ERROR CODES This section describes off line error codes on line error codes and on line status codes Typically a code will point to a failed internal assembly or a failed peripheral device Note that a configuration error can also cause an error code or multiple error codes to be produced OFF LINE ERROR CODES Off line error messages are displayed while the 353 is powered but not running function block code and therefore not actively controlling a process Depending on the message user intervention will most likely be required Corrective action can be initiated via the LIL or Modbus ports if appropriate LIL parameter SE located at channel 4 parameter 1 Modbus register 40002 will contain the hexadecimal form of the error number currently displayed e g ERR 213 would be sent as 00D5 An Error message can be acknowledged over the network by writing a 0 to the Modbus register or LIL parameter Messages are displayed one at a time in order of occurrence and a message cannot be cleared until
311. esede cued Spe vo o an 2 1 2 1 STATION FUNCTION 3 2 1 2 2 STATION HARDWARE I O 2 1 2 32 LOOP FUNCTION BEOQCKS Waka soos o Iu oi ot he ore 2 1 2 4 LIL GLOBAL DATA FUNCTION BLOCKS eese 2 2 2 5 ETHERNET DATA FUNCTION BLOCKS nennen 2 3 2 6 LonWorks REMOTE FUNCTION 8 1 1 22 022 06000000000000000000000040000000000000000004000080020 2 3 2 7 CONFIGURATION a S 2 3 2 8 OPERATION DURING LOCAL ON LINE ener 2 5 3 0 FUNCTION BLOCKS suoriin PL M 3 1 3 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS usann a a Mt 3 3 3 1 1 FCO LIB Factory Configuration Library eese eren ener 3 3 3 2 SECUR Security rene tete eR etie iid e iere e D ebd de dd 3 3 3 9 ST ATN Station Parameters A debes 3 5 3 1 4 CLOCK Real Time Clock 2 0 2 2 Sw ennt nnne nnne 3 7 3 1 5 ETHERNET Ethernet Communication Network V2 4 3 7 IZVO AND LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS tente eee Sa ws eR 3 8 32 1 A M Transfer code ri e o adn doen o er o e te bo HE oe n rer he e
312. eter is not configured the controller will use a range scaling of 0 00 100 00 During a warm or cold power up the output will be initialized to MINSCALE and all dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan The controller output has MINSCALE and MAXSCALE parameters allowing the output signal to be scaled for engineering ranges other than the default of 0 100 PRCT This may be necessary when the controller output is the setpoint to another controller The Autotune feature is accessible using the TUNE pushbutton when AUTOTUNE is set to YES It can be initiated while the loop is in Auto or Manual The autotuner when initiated replaces the PD controller with an on off control function places the A M block in Auto if in Man and cycles the control loop through six on off cycles while learning the process dynamics which it uses to provide tuning recommendations for the PD controller The DEV parameter is the maximum amount in that the process should deviate from the setpoint during the on off cycles This parameter can be set manually or can be configured as AUTO When AUTO is configured the autotuner will set the DEV to 4 times the HYS This is the minimum value needed to provide good autotuning results The HYS parameter is the amount that the process must deviate from setpoint before switching the output in the opposite direction This value must be equal to or slightly greater than any process noise band
313. f 1 presses PB 1 0 write of 1 presses PB Block BISW B2SW 5 5 amp ic Read Write Read Write 7 28 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Pushbutton Switch Indicator ODP V2 2 Code R W Description Range Coil MB C P LIL L G1P1 w Group 1 Press PB1 1 00296 48 1 n 1 0 L G1P2 w Group 1 Press PB2 1 00297 48 1 n 1 1 L G1S3 R W Group 1 Auto Man Switch 1 0 00298 48 1 n 1 2 L GIFS R Group 1 Feedback Status 1 0 00299 48 1 n 1 3 L G2P1 w Group 2 Press PB1 1 00300 48 1 n 1 4 L G2P2 w Group 2 Press PB2 1 00301 48 1 n 1 5 09253 Group 2 Auto Man Switch 1 0 00302 48 1 n 1 6 L G2FS R Group 2 Feedback Status 1 0 00303 48 1 n 1 7 L G3P1 w Group 3 Press PB1 1 00304 48 1 n 1 8 L G3P2 w Group 3 Press PB2 1 00305 48 1 n 1 9 49353 Group 3 Auto Man Switch 1 0 00306 48 1 n 1 10 L G3FS R Group 3 Feedback Status 1 0 00307 48 1 n 1 11 L G4P1 w Group 4 Press PB1 1 00308 48 7 1 n 1 12 L G4P2 w Group 4 Press PB2 1 00309 48 1 n 1 13 L G4S3 R W Group 4 Auto Man Switch 1 0 00310 48 1 1 1 14 L G4FS R Group 4 Feedback Status 1 0 00311 48 1 n 1 15 L G5P1 w Group 5 Press PB1 1 00312 48 1 n 1 1 0 L G5P2 w Group 5 Press PB2 1 00313 48 1 n 1 1 1 09553 Group 5 Switch 1 0 00314 48 4 1 n 1 1Q L G5FS R Group 5 Feedback Status 1 0 00315
314. f input P goes low 0 the output will remain high until the time expires If input P goes high during the on time the elapsed timer will be re triggered if RETRIG is set to YES With firmware1 30 and higher the ON TIME is adjustable over the full range of the display which is 0 00000 to 999999 earlier versions the minimum time setting was 0 1 Ifthe delay time 15 set to less than the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the scan time ONE SHOT TIMER OST_ ESN 000 Elapsed Time Pulse Input rp ONE SHOT TIMER RemainingTime Output 1 T IME ON TIME minutes 5 0 0 PU LAST Power Up LAST 6 YES LG RETRIGger on new pulse 5 NOI YES YES P INPUT P H loop tag block tag output null SIN Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 Output ET elapsed time will ramp from 0 0 to the value of ON TIME and remain there until P goes low 0 Output RT remaining time equals ON TIME ET POWER UP During a warm start when PU LAST is set to YES the block will initialize at the input output states and elapsed time in effect at the instant power down occurred A cold start will initialize the input output states and elapsed time to 0 m xs i L RETRIG YES BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 75 Function Blo
315. factor flowing temperature factor Fyr real gas relative density factor supercompressibility factor Output is updated every scan cycle Output C is updated continuously for temperature effects and periodically for other effects The following conditions are considered in the calculations e Standard Conditions are P 14 73 psia 60 F Zsair 0 999590 e Nominal pipe size is 2 or larger Beta is 0 1 0 75 and Re Reynolds Number is 4000 or larger e Y expansion factor and absolute flowing pressure Pr are referenced to upstream tap i e Y amp e hy is in inches H20 and Pris in psia 0 lt h 27 707 P lt 0 2 The following parameters are configuration entries d orifice plate bore diameter in inches at a reference temperature of 68 F D meter tube internal diameter in inches at a reference temperature of 68 F Py base pressure psia Tp base temperature F The following are analog inputs to the AGA 3 function block hw orifice differential pressure in H20 flowing pressure at upstream tap psia Tr flowing temperature F March 2003 3 11 Function Blocks UM353 1 real gas relative density specific gravity Zs compressibility at standard conditions Ze compressibility at flowing conditions at upstream tap Zr Zo compressibility at base conditions The specific gravity factor G and the compressibility factors Zs Zf Zp
316. for LO Output WD will go high 1 when the controller fails to receive a Modbus network command within the watchdog time The watchdog time is set in the STATN Station Parameters function block Input A can be used to acknowledge all the alarms in all of the loops in a controller Output PN Pulse oN will go high for 0 5 seconds or one scan cycle whichever is longer whenever the bargraph flashes Bargraph flashing is controlled by the priority setting of alarms or events Output PF Pulse ofF will go high for 0 5 sec when the flashing bargraph is stopped e g pressing the ACK button 2423 45 TC5 1 0 7 Process Process UNITS T C 2 0 5 3 P UNITS 5 t Process DPP Process DPP i P P Process Process P Engineering Engineering INput units INput units scaling scaling Val Process N RanGe PoinTeR UNITS Valve DPP M Valve Panel y cos gt INput units scaling CLOSE OPEN HBARLD HBARRD Valve U 1 RanGe PoinTeR User 1 STATUS lt _ X User 2 STATUS lt Input X _ DPP X Input X Input X RanGe PoinTeR gt UNITS i LE Loop Event Handling i gt Input Y _ DPP 25 Station Error Handling gt Input Y Input Y PoinTeR UNITS
317. g 8 24 March 2003 UM353 1 Installation Power input to a Moore 353 should be routed through a 7 ircui Model 353 clearly labeled circuit breaker fuse or on off switch that 1 N Breaker di located near the controller and is accessible by the CIE Black G operator The protective device should be located in a External Power H non explosive atmosphere unless suitable for use in an 120 240 Vac explosive atmosphere This type of wiring is shown in or 24 Vdc Green Figure 8 27 It will permit removal of controller power Earth Ground without affecting the on line status of adjacent controllers Terminal of case Where separate wiring is not required power input wiring Green ground screw at top center Case Rear can daisy chain together a series of controllers Here each of rear terminal area Terminals controller except for the last controller on the daisy chain E H Hot 8 will have two wires 18 AWG recommended inserted in Neutral or 8 terminal H and in terminal N If a larger gauge is to be Ground used the two wires can be inserted in a crimp on connector and the connector inserted in the terminal for a more secure installation Daisy chained wiring is shown in Figure 8 28 Perform the following steps at H N and G terminals at each involved controller Circuit Breaker FIGURE 8 27 Suggested
318. g ADD are reusable within a LOOP and can be used up to the maximum number indicated Each time a reusable block is selected within a LOOP a new instance number will automatically be assigned i e ADD01 ADD02 Each LOOP can have one operator display block i e ODC or ODS The display block defines how the loop will be displayed 2 Subject to available memory in the controller Model 352Plus only Although these blocks can be selected in configuration some may not have physical connections to the rear terminals depending upon the positioning of the Option 3 I O Jumper March 2003 2 1 Configuration Overview UM353 1 on the local faceplate when that loop is selected and also how loop data will be mapped on the Modbus or LIL network interface Each LOOP can have one controller function block i e ID ONOFF PD PID or PIDAG Auto Manual ACS01 99 ARCCosine V1 3 01 99 Addition AGS she AGA3 V1 3 AGT AGAT V1 3 8 AGAS V1 3 ALARM Alarm ANDO 99 AND Logic 99 Arcsine V1 3 ATNOI 99 Arctangent V1 3 ATDOI 99 Analog Trend Display V1 3 BATOT Batch Totalizer BATSWv Batch Switch BIAS Bias CMP01 99 Comparator COS01 99 Cosine V1 3 99 Deviation Amplifier DIV01 99 D
319. g Modbus LIL 320 or OPC Ethernet in the controller Procidia i pac Moore 352P us Moore 353 and Moore 354N Controllers and an APACS Model 39ACM Advanced Control Module via Modbus or LIL The network permits data to be uploaded from the station to the computer or workstation This data is typically used for process and alarm monitoring additional processing of the data for inventory management and accounting and process and equipment troubleshooting Data can be downloaded to the station to change setpoint or valve value change control mode and acknowledge alarms Proprietary data transfers associated with configuration upload download or on line monitoring associated with the ijconfig Graphical Configuration Utility are not described MPU Controller firmware versions are identified as explained in earlier sections 7 1 CONNECTING TO APACS 39ACM MYCROADVANTAGE ProcessSuite i ware PC 7 1 1 APACS A Model 39ACM Advanced Control Module supports both Modbus and LIL connections Use the standard Modbus Master Function Block Library to communicate with a station When requesting Modbus data do not exceed 48 coils or 60 registers per request A LIL function block library P N 15939 625V4 00 ACM Serial Communication FB Library LIL that provides a method for connecting the ACM to standard LIL stations is available The library includes a Moore 352P 353 354 Loop block The current release of the library maps the 352P 353 354 as having 3 l
320. g block tag output null INPUT INPUT B loop tag block tag output INPUT loop tag block tag output ES Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 OVERRIDE SELECTOR ORSL ESN 000 Primary Input Override Input 1 1 Override Input 2 2 OVERRIDE dii 1 SELECTOR Override Status 1 SELECTor 1 5 LO HI LO 2 SELECTor 2 5 LO HI HI INPUT P INPUT P H loop tag block tag output null IN 1 INPUT 1 H loop tag block tag output INPUT 2 INPUT2 loop tag block tag output null OR IPIR L OR Override PRIORity 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 E IN Exec Seq No H 001to 250 OVERRIDE status when a priority level higher than 0 the default has been selected If an override input is not configured the individual selector will output the other input When no inputs are configured the block will output 0 0 and the OS status will be set low 0 1 2 D SELECTOR SELECTOR O1 Output 1 HI LO HI LO 1 Override Input 1 gt OS P Override Status 2 Override Input 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 74 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 72 OST One Shot Timer OST function blocks provide high 1 output for a predetermined time set by ON TIME when input P goes high 1 I
321. g of Natural Gas Part 3 August 1992 AGA res M Catalog No XQ9210 are InputGr InputZs 25 Qb 4 Prhy Input Zf ZN InputZb Zb EsN 000 Output gt Output C C Fa Fo Fs Y1FpoF grFpv d r diameter ref torplate inches Real 0 0 Diameter ref for tube inches Real 0 0 where Qk volume flow rate at base conditions base Pressure psia Red ek T b base Temperature deg F Real 60 0 m composite orifice flow factor k Specific Heat Ratio Real 1 30 I mu Viscosity x 10 6 Ibm ft sec mu Real 6 90 Pg absolute flowing pressure upstream tap PLATE Material ss oMorentcs2 SS 2 3 3 INPUT hw loop tag block tag output hv orifice differential pressure LIN P U T P f loop tag block tag output null INPUT Tif loop tag block tag output null F numeric conversion factor IINPUT Gir loop tag block tag output x 5 Zis loop tag block tag output null orifice calculation factor Z f loop tag block tag output nul INPUT Zb Input Zb loop tag block tag output null Fy orifice slope factor 5 000 to 250 000 Y expansion factor upstream tap base pressure factor Fip base temperature
322. g output null 24 V dc X DOUT c Typical External 402222 I Relay Circuit DOUTI BLOCK DIAGRAM DOUT2 Terminal Connections DOUTI 8 DOUT Ic 9 DOUT2 10 DOUT2c 9 March 2003 3 49 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 44 DTM Dead Time Table DTM_ function blocks provide shift registers to hold the analog input signal for a period of time and shift it from register to register to provide an overall delay between input and output as configured in parameter DEADTIME DEAD TIME DTM ESN 000 Analog Input Output 1 Input AT can be used to adapt the DEADTIME to an enable DEAD Time Moving Average external signal The actual shift register used as the block Adaptive Time output will equal the whole value of input e g 0 184 register 0 1 897 register 1 DEADTIM DEAD TIME 5 0 0 to 10000 min 0 0 INPUT loop tag block tag output null Output MA will provide the moving average of register 0 INPUT INPUT E H oop tag block tag output 4 DN INPUT A INPUT AT loop tag block tag output null to the output register divided by the number of registers E S N Exec Seq No 0 00116 250 e g output register 50 0 1 2 FR50 51 Input E asserted high 1 will enable the operation of the DTM block When th
323. grant Seller access to the goods at all reasonable times in order for Seller to determine any nonconformity in the goods Seller shall have the right of disposal of items replaced by it If Seller is unable or unwilling to repair or replace or if repair or replacement does not remedy the nonconformity Seller and Buyer shall negotiate an equitable adjustment in the contract price which may include a full refund of the contract price for the nonconforming goods c SELLER HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EXCEPT THAT OF TITLE SPECIFICALLY IT DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE d Buyer and successors of Buyer are limited to the remedies specified in this article and shall have no others for a nonconformity in the goods Buyer agrees that these remedies provide Buyer and its successors with a minimum adequate remedy and are their exclusive remedies whether Buyer s or its successors remedies are based on contract warranty tort including negligence strict liability indemnity or any other legal theory and whether arising out of warranties representations instructions installations or non conformities from any cause Note This article 1 does not apply to any software which may be furnished by Seller In such cases the attached Software License Addendum applies Warranty repair or replacement requires the equipment to
324. gured blocks This configuration provides setpoint tracking If a fixed setpoint is desired the TC input to the SETPT function block can be set to UNCONFIG If the loop tag LOOPOT is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag 01 lt gt SETPT o SPLIM B Process Valve 01 P 01 01 FREIEN F 27 w M gt ALARM E LOOP01 Setpoint Function Block Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT A Input A Loop01 PID O1 INPUT TC Input TC Loop01 A M NA ESN Exec Seq No 25 INPUT LU Input LU Loop01 SPLIM HS INPUT LD Input LD Loop01 SPLIM LS Analog Output 1 Function Block ESN Exec Seq No 5 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT S Input S Loop01 A M 01 SPLIM Setpoint Limit Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR ODC Operator Display for Controllers INPUT A Input A Loop01 SETPT O1 P RG PTR P Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR ESN Exec Seq No 10 V RG PTR V Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT Input P Process
325. h 2003 3 87 Function Blocks UM353 1 in position 1 Network communications will allow the sequencer to be moved to a new step and the remaining time of the current step to be changed to a new value When discrete groups are used and a step is desired as timed only one discrete input should be used to prevent the input mask from moving the sequencer to the next step This can be accomplished by requiring a high 1 input and then not connecting that input since unconnected inputs will be treated as 0 When discrete groups are used and a step is desired as event only the TIMe parameter for the step should be set to 0 0 The Analog Output will remain at the AEP value of the previous step or if at step 1 the Analog value will be 0 0 When the sequencer advances to the next step the Analog Output will go to the AEP value for the completed step POWER UP During a warm start if PU LAST is set to YES all outputs step number track variable and remaining step time will be initialized at the last values prior to power fail During a cold start all outputs are initialized to 0 and the PRSEQ is in a reset condition Recipe Number Load Reci oad Recipe LR Track Variable T Track C d Track Comman TC Step Forward SF Step Backward SB Goto Ste Gs SN Step Number Hold H 1 Reset R Discrete Inputs PROGRAM amp SEQUENCE CONTROLLER
326. h function block input has mode associated with it The mode can be either NORMAL or FORCED When using PC capable of sending LIL or Modbus commands the mode can be changed and the forced state can be assigned a high 1 or low 0 value The values accessible over the network are the two inputs F and N and the position of the SPDT switch illustrated in the block diagram A mode of 0 is Normal and 1 is Forced DIGITAL OUTPUT LEV_DISCRETE LonWorks Network DIGITAL OUTPUT LEV_DISCRETE 16 channel Quality Status lt gt Station LonWorks remote devices LonWorks i option board 0 0 Network Variable NUMber nv R 1102000 node u 1 LIN PIU INPUT 0 5 loop tag block tag output null opus Tir im 0 SNVT_ gt nv 21 SNVT LNPUT F INPUTF S loop tag block tag output null 0 i mennan 0 binding QN N Q0 lt node r1 21 gt 22 FC Salen Each function block input also has a quality status associated 1 gt V Z 2 with it This status will go high 1 when the block determines Q1 nv 1 binding 1 21 gt It has lost communication with
327. hat is scaled in engineering units The output is then interconnected to other function blocks within the controller AIN_ ANALOG INPUT AIN J EXTRACTOR ANALOG INPUT _ gt Output Range gt Output 1 A 6 character ASCII value can be entered to identify the Qualy sratus engineering units of the output signal The scaled output range is configurable and has a factory default of 0 0 to IM LIN SICIAIL EE SCALE Real 0 0 100 0 PRCT Ranges such as 300 0 to 500 0 representing SICIAILIE maximum SCALE H Real 100 0 engineering units 1n degrees C can also be configured D P P Decimal Pt Position preferred 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 The Output Range is a special data type that includes the ENIG UN ITS ENGineering UNITS 9 6 Char ASCII PRCT h h F I LIT piGital FILTer 8 010 180 0 MIN SCALE the DPP and t e ENGUNITS SQ R OIOT sauare ROOT extractor o NOYES NO that can be connected to other blocks with a Range RG CAL 7 ZERO input 0 s 0 to 1 0 i IF UL L FULL scale input 4 0 to 5 0 PIR mput ICIAL VIEW input verify cal c Real Analog Input blocks are available on the MPU Controller Board CB and on the I O Expander Board EB Block names IDs are listed in Section 8 4 together
328. he controller board via two connectors An 80 pin pass through connector is also available for stacking additional option boards The LIL Board communicates with the main Controller Board via a 32K 8 bit Dual Port RAM Two LED s on the LIL Board indicate serial transmit and line activity Global LIL function blocks AIL AOL DIL DOL can be configured to provide communication between 353 controllers as well as connectivity to other LIL products such as the Models 352 351 and 382 over a twisted pair network The total number of global function blocks will be limited by the number of global channels available Information on LIL network communications and Data Mapping can be found in Sections 6 and 7 13 6 ETHERNET BOARD Ethernet communications is available in place of Modbus and LIL communications This option enables peer to peer Ethernet communication using embedded Modbus RTU protocol with other Moore controllers Procidia 1 controllers and other devices having Ethernet embedded Modbus RTU protocol functionality Ethernet communications requires an optional Ethernet board and MPU Controller firmware V2 4 or higher The Ethernet board supports uploading and downloading of controller configurations over the Ethernet LAN Data can also be acquired from remote servers for the purpose of archiving and or data mining The Ethernet Modbus Bridge in Figure 1 2 accepts an Ethernet data command from the controller and outputs an equivalent M
329. he reference junction down between the connectors 8 18 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Installation 43 45 D Analog Input Universal 1 Reference Junction for AINU1 Reference Junction for AINU2 p 7 Note 8 Analog Input Universal 1 d Place Reference Junctions against the connector and as close to the Connector Socket Assembly as possible k 4 1 Input Universal 2 a 5 7 Analog Input Universal 2 d Connector Socket Assembly Y AG00325a 2 Side Entry Connector Carefully press the reference junction body into the vertical corner against the Connector Socket Assembly _ Connector Terminals 40 52 8 4 S Reference Junction for AINU1 Notes La See Notes 2 and 3 1 As shown Connector Cover removed 7 2 Place Reference Junction in the corner gt 4 CX Terminal 45 Analog Input Universal 1 a against he Connector Sickert Terminal 48 Analog Input Universal 1 d Assembly as shown 3 Sleeve Reference Junction leads 1 149 Terminal 49 Analog Input Universal 2 Terminal 52 Analog Input Universal 2 d 52 C Reference Junction for AINU2 See Notes 2 and 3 3 Check that all involved components and station wiring are fully inserted Carefully tighten the terminal screws to 5 in 165 4 Repeat the above steps if the other AINU f
330. hould be changed to meet individual system requirements Consult your eq dno 5 network IP ADdRESs 5 1 2 3 4 192 168 0 2 administrator for assistance in determining IP addresses MA SK IP mask 1 2 3 4 255 255 255 0 Also consider any network security issues that can arise P IP GATEway t mnn2 nn nmn4 nn 192 168 0 1 DIP L X ETHernet DuPLeX 5 Auto HALF FULL when networking plant areas ETHernet RATE s Auto 10 100 A P 2 P RIA T E Peer Peer RATE 5 25 5 2 5 10sec 5 Rev 2 March 2003 3 7 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 AND LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS This section provides a detailed description of each input output and loop function block Blocks are listed alphabetically 3 2 1 A M A M Transfer One A M function block can be used per loop and it is normally used on the output of controller blocks to enable auto manual operation of the loop It is separate from the controller block allowing the option of inserting other function blocks e g override feedforward between the controller and the A M Transfer If function block PB3SW has been used the A M block is not available AUTO allows the signal from the controller input A to become the output of the A M Transfer unless EMER MAN or STANDBY is active Auto ONLY forces the
331. i PeNTANE composition Real 0473 actual update time dependent on the number of gas n n PeNTANE composition Real 0324 components and the scan cycle of the controller n n HEXANE composition 0664 n n HePTANE composition Real 0 0 n OCT ANE composition Real 0 0 n n NONANE composition Real 0 0 n DECANE n DECANE composition Real 0 0 HEL I UM HELIUM composition Real 0 0 ARGON ARGON composition Real 0 0 MOL SUM MOL SUM read total composition Real 100 0 INPUT P f INPUT Pf loop tag block tag output null INPUT T f INPUT Tf loop tag block tag output null E S N Exec Seq No 000 to 250 000 3 14 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 7 Analog Input Ethernet V3 0 function blocks are available when the optional Ethernet communication board is installed in the controller It enables the controller to read ANALOG INPUT ETHERNET analog data from other stations over the Ethernet AE network gt Output Range INPUT gt Output 01 Up to 32 blocks available Blocks are Output QS assigned in sequence controller wide with each use Data can be received as a real floating point number
332. iable connected to input A The block can store up to 170 data points depending upon the use of the enable disable function see below trend can be displayed using Modbus commands Data can be retrieved and displayed by a remote operator station that can retrieve interpret and display data packets from the station PC or i station running i ware PC operator interface software display trend data on a Loop Detail screen or Analog Detail screen Parameter TRND TYP allows data to be stored in one of two formats the average over each sample time or the peak peak values of the data over each sample time All data 15 stored in a normalized form based on the value of the RG PTR range pointer input The range information will be part of the data packet when retrieved over the network communications When this input is unconfigured a range of 0 0 100 0 will be used ARCSINE ESN 000 InputX X X Output 1 INP UT X loop tag block tag output null E S N Exec Seq 000 to 250 000 ANALOG TREND DISPLAY ANALOG TREND L R lt J A W A Trend Full HKEH zzmzvm menoma mHHagaH I RanGe PoinTeR SaMPle TIME 0 01 to 480 00 0 10 TREND TYPe P P peak peak A average OVERWRITE YES NO
333. ientation Orient the cable mounted connector to mate with the board mounted Insert connector and insert the cable Ethernet mounted connector Cable It may be necessary to gently press on the clear plastic connector with a long straight blade screwdriver to seat the cable mounted connector MG00401a FIGURE 11 10 Ethernet Cable Installation 11 20 March 2003 UM353 1 Calibration 12 0 CALIBRATION A controller is factory calibrated to either the standard values listed in Section 8 5 or to values specified by the purchaser at time of order Field calibration should not be necessary For those cases where inputs or outputs must be adjusted either to meet a local standard or for a more critical application a field calibration can be performed The field calibration becomes the default calibration A CAL VIEW mode is available in calibration to view the sensor input over the full range The signal that is viewed in the calibration verify mode is 0 to 100 of span in basic units of measure e g C for temperature mv for millivolts and is not affected by the temperature units conversion digital filter scaling or the output bias adjustment The full block output in engineering units with these parameters applied can be seen in the VIEW mode within loop configuration This section describes calibration and calibration verification of the following function blocks AIN1 4 Analog Input MPU board 3 and I O Expa
334. iguration of the ODS operator display function block for each loop as LIL CHAN n The configuration entry both local and graphical PC based will indicate the next available open space of six contiguous channels Another starting channel can be entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total number of channels Channel locations n through n 5 in the table below identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each sequencer loop All parameter data e g SSN Program Sequencer Step No is global and is transmitted every 0 5 seconds All other data is sent out on command C P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 n 551 SSNF SNSI SNGI SNSF j SNR S omF sao i SE m3 CRNI SSTF TACM Jf Ew j L O j n 5 ASW Sequencer amp Remote I O State Mode amp Forcing C P 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 n SGOKI scosi 56050 SGAKI SG4SI 56450 SGSKI scssi sceso SGCKT secsi SGCSO EMM j r j E J n 5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 n 5 CIP 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 mnm ni 1 T T 1 n 5 L CMSGc C P 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 pene sk dn nd j T j J T m3 Mg pp pp PCG n
335. igurationHold IR 1 10 Steps Completed SSC 1 Steps Complete PRSEQ IR KA o 5 7 0 c qp C POA E 13 PBISWInput MD PBI 1 0 write of I presses PBISW Rw 14 PB2SWInput MD PB2 1 0 write of I presses PBSW RW 15 PB3SW Input MD PB3 1 0 write of I presses PB2sW RW Sequencer Loop Alarm Status Word LH ASW channel n 5 parameter I BIT AlarmlisActive Al l Active ALARM R Alarm I is Not Acknowledged NI 1 Not Acknowledged ALARM RW Alarm 1 is Enabled E1 l Enabld ALARM RW Alarm 2 is Active A2 l Acive CT ALARM IR Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged N2 1 Not Acknowledged ALARM RW Alarm 2 is Enabled E2 l Enabled ALARM RW Alarm 3 is Active A3 ALARM Alarm 3 is Not Acknowledged N3 1 Not Acknowledged ALARM RW Alarm 3 is Enabled E3 l Enabed ALARM RW Alarm 4 is Active A4 Acive k 10 Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged N4 1 Not Acknowledged ALARM RW 11 Alarm4is Enabled 4 I Enabed ALARM 12 Alarms are Out of Service OS 1 Out of Service ALARM 13 Configuration has Changed CC 1 Loop Configured 14 Unacknowledged Loop Event NA 1 Unacknowledged Event RW 15 Active Loop Event AE 1 Active Loop Event Ma
336. ing process 2 8 OPERATION DURING LOCAL ON LINE CONFIGURATION Changing a controller s configuration parameters while the station is on line can affect its operation and output values Configuration parameters are divided into four types HARD SOFT READ and CALIBRATION HARD When a HARD parameter is STORED the controller will suspend execution of all function blocks and will hold all outputs until the EXIT button is pressed A HARD parameter is identified with each H notation in a function block parameter listing in Section 3 When a loop or function block is added or deleted the station enters a HARD configuration mode SOFT A SOFT function block parameter can be changed while the function blocks are executing A SOFT parameter is identified with each S notation in a function block parameter listing in Section 3 All QUICKSET changes also fall into this category READ These parameters are not changeable and therefore can be read while the station function blocks are executing A READ parameter is identified with each R notation in a function block parameter listing in Section 3 The configuration VIEW mode also falls into this category CALIBRATION When entering the CONFIGURATION mode the station will suspend execution of all function blocks and will hold all outputs until the EXIT button is pressed If an output block is being calibrated its output will be adjusted during the calibration procedure A CONFIGUR
337. ion board that uses the popular LonWorks protocol can be installed This LonWorks board provides connectivity via a high speed digital fieldbus to a large selection of standard I O products analog inputs and outputs and digital inputs and outputs using relay or solid state technology Although the Moore 353 can be connected to and operated entirely from a central operator workstation such as i station a controller faceplate is included This local operator interface is for applications where loops need individual attention during startup troubleshooting maintenance or emergency conditions The convenient faceplate layout and sophisticated software allow process and configuration changes to be made quickly and easily The controller can be completely configured from the operator faceplate or as mentioned above configured remotely using ijconfig the optional PC based Graphical Configuration Utility An optional Real Time Clock Configuration Board RTC CB is available to quickly transfer a configuration from one controller to another when downloading a configuration over a network is not available The RTC CB also provides a real time clock function Network communication options are listed in the following table Protocol Select One Available Connection Option Board Needed Modbus Standard Rear Terminals NCA and NCB None Local Instrument Link Optional Rear Terminals NCA and NCB LIL Communication Eth
338. ion to change values in the alphanumeric display An accelerator is included Turning the knob faster multiplies the rate of change of the displayed parameter Large value changes then require fewer knob rotations e Bargraph this horizontal bargraph displays the scaled range of the controller output in the Active Loop output valve signal is shown as the of range value The value in engineering units can be viewed by pressing the D button to display the dot V parameter e g TC2053 V 9 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Operation 9 2 CONFIGURATION MODE Configuration pushbuttons are located behind the flip down door on the lower quarter of the faceplate Note that many of these buttons are used in both the normal operation mode and configuration mode as described below ENTER EXIT CONF press to enter configuration when the station is SIEMENS in the normal operation mode or to exit configuration when in the configuration mode ALARM STEP DOWN has a dual purpose When the normal operation mode pressing the button will scroll through the alarm configuration parameters 1f the ALARM function block has been S T A T configured in Active Loop The alarm setting is displayed B anc engineering units and the of range value will also be displayed on the 3 setpoint bargraph by flashing a single segment equal to the of range O value If security cleara
339. is input is not configured it will be set high A low 0 input will cause all registers and the outputs to equal the input A POWER UP During a warm or cold start all outputs will be initialized at 0 and all registers will be initialized to the value of the input on the first scan Enable E 1 Analog Input pl n Resistero x Y I gt net Register 1 4 Y MM gt n2 gt gt e n 48 7 M Output 1 01 gt 49 gt lt Ries Register 50 _ s AT Adaptive Time Moving Average MA BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 50 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 45 DWE Digital Write Ethernet V3 0 DWE_ function blocks are available when the optional Ethernet communication board is installed in the controller It enables the controller to write Digital data to other stations over the Ethernet network Up to 32 DWE_ blocks are available Blocks assigned in sequence controller wide with each use Digital data is On Off data packed into a 16 bit word The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP address of the destination Modbus device The MB ADRES parameter allows a Modbus address to be configured When connecting to other Siemens MOORE controllers the Modbus address is set to 1 In some cases other Modbus devices may use a different address or when going through a Modbus
340. is low HEGRE EE ATRESET ret POST POST Autotune Transfer 5 NO YES Input I when changed from low 0 to high 1 or high to LINIPIULT P INPUT P Hoop tes DR ul dr s INPUT S INPUTS loop tag block tag output null low will cause the controller to initialize i e eliminate INPUTF loop tag block tag output nul any proportional gain action during that scan cycle This INPUT A INPUTA 9 block tag nul 1 INPUT I loop tag block tag output null can be used to prevent bumping the output when changes E SIN Exec Seq No 00130250 are made to the setpoint through a switch block Controller Process scaling to s 1 x DG ENG UNITS Lead v mu PA Limit gt A p 2 p iod 3 gt scaling 01 E Engineering 1 Output DD INput units S scio Lag i Setpoint R 1 RanGe PoinTeR t MES 1 lt MR dg inverse scaling lt Feedback v Auto Absolute Value A Initialize lt Absolute Error BLOCK DIAGRAM AE March 2003 3 81 Function Blocks UM353 1 The process range pointer parameter should point to another function block that contains range scaling such as an analog input that is the source of the process variable This enables the controller to normalize tuning parameters for the process range If this param
341. isplay Assembly as described above 4 Refer to the figure below Notice that the circuit board is captured a Fixed Retainer at the top of the bezel and a Flexible Retainer at the bottom Grasp the body of the black connector at A and at the same time press the Flexible Retainer downward slightly Pull gently on the connector to lift the bottom edge of the board above the Flexible Retainer Note The board is a snug fit Do not squeeze the bezel sides and make removal more difficult Remove the board from the bezel by carefully continuing to lift board while pulling the board out from under to Fixed Retainer at the top of the assembly If the bezel is being replaced 1 Remove the two Display Assembly mounting screws Turn the Assembly face up and lift each mounting screw upward until the threaded portion contacts the bezel Turn each screw counterclockwise to unscrew it from the bezel A screwdriver may be needed once a screw is started 2 Remove the flip down door by pressing on the door near its pivot point to free the door from the bezel March 2003 11 13 UM353 1 I Fixed Board Retainer Numeric Display 2 Alphanumeric Display 2 O Ring Gasket p PENE Connecto Side ned i View Notes 1 Grasp at this point Keypad when removing board Connector 2 2 On other side of board 3 Press to remove and
342. isplay the setpoint on the numeric display The setpoint should ramp to 25 in 30 seconds To change from a Ramp RATE to a Ramp TIME do the following steps 1 Press ENTER EXIT CONF to display LOOP Press STEP DOWN twice to display VIEW Press the right arrow button or turn the pulser knob to display EDIT FB Press STEP DOWN to display A M Turn the pulser knob to display SETPT Press STEP DOWN to display RG PTR Turn the pulser knob to display USE RATE Press STEP DOWN to display YES Turn the pulser knob to change to NO and press STORE Press STEP UP NDA SSN 10 Turn pulser knob counterclockwise or use left arrow button to display R TIME March 2003 10 5 Controller and System Test UM353 1 11 Press STEP DOWN to display ramp TIME 12 Turn the pulser knob to set the desired Ramp TIME and press STORE 13 Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode Now press the QUICK button Note that the RTIME parameter will now be displayed instead of the RRATE parameter Setting R ON OFF parameter to ON will now ramp the setpoint to the TARGET setpoint in the specified time rather that at a particular rate See the SETPT description in Section 3 2 for more details on setpoint functions Quickset parameters for other function blocks such as RATIO and BIAS may be changed in a similar fashion See specific function block descriptions in Section 3 for more details 10 1 9 TUNE When in normal operation mode
343. ith the original range When the range pointer input R is not configured the function block will not re scale the input signal but will pass it directly to the output The purpose under this situation would be to provide minimum and maximum scale preferred decimal point position and units for another block e g operator display to reference i Output MIN SCALE Input MIN SCALE ENGingeering UNITS Input RanGe PoinTeR BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 91 SEL Signal Selector SEL_ function blocks can provide a high or low signal selection on the three input signals Unused inputs will be set equivalent to the lowest real value when configured as a SCALER Range R Analog Input p Output Range SCALER Output 1 RG RanGe PoinTeR 9 loop tag block tag null MINS 1 Output MINimum SCALE MAX S Output MAXimum SCALE Real 0 00 Real 100 00 D P P Decimal Pt Position preferred 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 ENGUN I T S ENGineering UNITS 5 6 ASCII Char PRCT INPUT INPUTA loop tag block tag output null LI 5 Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 SIGNAL SELECTOR SEL ESN 000 a HI selector and to the highest real value when configured as Input A LAL SENAL N Output 1 a LO selector
344. ivision DNC01 99 Divide by N Counter DTMO 99 Dead Time Table DYT01 99 Delay Timer External Internal Transfer ESL nus Events Sequence Logger V1 3 EXP01 99 Natural Exponentiation V1 3 EXT01 99 Exponentiation V1 3 FTG01 99 Falling Edge Trigger GB01 99 Gain amp Bias 001 99 Hold ID hua ID Controller LL01 99 Lead Lag LMT01 99 Limit LN 01 99 Natural Logarithm V1 3 LOG01 99 Logarithm Base 10 V1 3 99 Math 01 99 Multiplication NNDO 99 NAND Logic NOR01 99 NOR Logic 99 2 4 LIL GLOBAL DATA I O FUNCTION BLOCKS ODC Operator Display for Controllers 8 Operator Display for Sequencers ODA V2 2 Op Disp for Analog Ind amp Alarm ODD V2 2 Op Disp for Discrete Ind amp Control ODP V2 2 Operator Display for Pushbuttons OFF Controller OR01 99 OR Logic ORSL Override Selector OSTO01 99 One Shot Timer PBISW 1 Switch PB2SW PB2 Switch PB3SW PB3 Switch Phase Communication V1 3 PD Controller PIDE PID Controller PIDAG PIDAG Controller PRSEQ
345. k tag output null I NPUT A INPUT A loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT I loop tag block tag output null 1 T INPUT AG loop tag block tag output null E SIN Exec Seq No 001 to 250 Process Engineering INput units scaling tos 1 gt 3 DG Lead Engineering A A INput units 1 1 scaling Setpoint RanGe PoinTeR AG Adaptive Gain Y Absolute Value Absolute Error gt A gt x gt Eu om 2 sind gt PID Adaptive Gain Controller ENG UNITS O1 Output 1 Lag R Ew 511 e inverse scaling Feedback Auto lt Initialize lt BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 85 Function Blocks UM353 1 POWER UP During a warm or cold power up the output will be initialized to MINSCALE and all dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan Input AG is multiplied by the gain error GE In version 1 30 of the controller firmware an unconnected AG input will set to 1 0 In earlier versions it was set to 0 0 which required that the input always be connected to a source e g Hold block in order for the PIDAG block to function The controller output has MI
346. l Perform the following steps for each analog input 1 Selectan analog input terminal pair for connection of the input signal wiring Refer to Table 8 1 and the following illustrations as necessary For a 4 20 input go to step 2 For a 1 5 Vdc or millivolt input go to step 4 Model 353 External Power Supply Rear Terminals External Device 56 26 Vdc Typical 353 Analog Signal KAL Rear Terminals e g Model 340 or 3 External Device SITRANS DSIII 6 2 Analog Signal 5 2 Wire Transmitter 1 5 Vdc gt E d 20 AN 8 9 340 Station Common 4 20 mA Output B SITRANS P 6 2 Wire Transmitter 1 5 Vdc E 2 250 4 20 mA Output 20 X03107S3 Ls 18 9 Common Ground Bus M 250 L Earth Note See Table 8 1 for AIN2 Ground 3 and 4 terminals Ground Bus Earth Note See Table 8 1 for AIN2 Ground 3 and 4 terminals A Controller Powered B External Power Supply FIGURE 8 9 Analog Input AIN1 2 Wire Transmitter March 2003 8 13
347. l INPUT INPUT T loop tag block tag output ADRES IP ADGRESs nnn nnn nnn nn n 192 168 0 0 MB E S NBADdRESs 0 255 0 MB RE G ModBus REGister 0000 65535 0 D UpDate oncE P2P Ct 2 will update at the controller peer to peer rate set in the ETHERNET block 3 Ct will update at the cycle time of the controller The Ct option is normally only used when writing time critical changes Input T can be used to trigger a write This would be used in cases where the oncE option has been selected input values do not change and there may be a concern that the receiving device has lost the values Output QS indicates the quality of the write operation and will go high 1 when the write is not completed successfully This is normally associated with failure of the destination device to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the device Requires Ethernet communications board firmware version 2 0 or later March 2003 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 46 DYT Delay Timer DYT_ function blocks perform either an ON or OFF output delay as determined by the TYPE configuration parameter ON Delay When input P is low 0 output O1 is low If P goes high 1 the elapsed timer starts and sets O1 high upon reaching the DLY TIME provide
348. l and electrical installation IMPORTANT The installation must conform to the National Electrical Code and all other applicable construction and electrical codes Section 1 4 4 has a list of the items in a typical controller shipment If the Display Assembly or a circuit board s must be installed in the case go to Section 11 5 Assembly Replacement for installation information including the setting of any involved jumpers Refer to Section 14 10 Agency Approvals as necessary CSA Hazardous Location Precautions and Special Conditions for Safe Use are included in this section Use of the equipment in a manner not specified by the manufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment 8 1 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS A Moore 353 is intended for flush panel mounting in a vibration free instrument panel or rack in an indoor or sheltered location Mount a single controller in a single station panel cutout or mount several controllers in a row in a multiple station panel cutout For a watertight panel mount each controller in a single station cutout Controllers have been supplied with either direct entry connectors or side entry connectors Connector types panel cutout dimensions and overall controller dimensions are shown in Section 8 3 Mechanical Installation The controller can be mounted in a user supplied enclosure located out of doors or in a location whose environmental parameters exceed controller operating specifi
349. l and tighten the screw to 5 in lbs March 2003 8 25 Installation UM353 1 8 5 FACTORY CALIBRATION Unless a special calibration is ordered the factory calibration is as follows TABLE 8 2 Factory Calibration ANALOG INPUT OR OUTPUT FACTORY CALIBRATION FACTORY CALIBRATION UP TO V1 21 V1 30 AND ABOVE Analog input function blocks 1 to 5 Vdc 1 to 5 Vdc Analog output function blocks 4to 20 mA 4to 20 mA Thermocouple Type J Upscale Break Type J Upscale Break RTD CAL ZERO 0 C CAL ZERO 0 C CAL FULL 500 C CAL FULL 500 C CAL VIEW 3 3 to 103 3 CAL VIEW 3 3 to 103 3 Slidewire CAL ZERO 0 CAL ZERO 095 CAL FULL 100 CAL FULL 100 CAL VIEW Contact factory CAL VIEW Contact factory Ohms CAL ZERO 0 ohms CAL ZERO 0 ohms CAL FULL 5000 ohms CAL FULL 5000 ohms CAL VIEW Contact factory CAL VIEW Contact factory Millivolt CAL ZERO 0 0 mV CAL ZERO 19 0 mV DS CAL FULL 10m CAL FULL 119 0 mV CAL VIEW 0 TO 10096 CAL VIEW 0 TO 10096 Section 12 0 provides calibration procedures that may be used to check or change factory calibration 8 26 March 2003 UM353 1 Operation 9 0 LOCAL FACEPLATE OPERATION Controller operation is described in this section Each faceplate display pushbutton and knob will be discussed first in normal operation mode and then in configuration mode This section contains many references to function blocks As necessary refer to Section 3 for details
350. larm 2 Limit Alarm 3 Limit Alarm 4 Limit Totalizer Preset 1 Totalizer Preset 2 Quickset Hold 1 Quickset Hold 2 Batch Switch High Limit Batch Switch Low Limit Batch Switch Pre Load Batch Switch Gain spares Description DYTO01 Elapsed Time DYTO01 Remaining Time 08701 Elapsed Time OSTO1 Remaining Time RCTO01 Elapsed Time RCTO1 Remaining Time 01 Elapsed Time ROTO1 Remaining Time DYTO02 Elapsed Time DYT02 Remaining Time 08702 Elapsed Time OST02 Remaining Time 02 Elapsed Time 02 Remaining Time ROTO02 Elapsed Time ROTO2 Remaining Time DYTO03 Elapsed Time DYTO03 Remaining Time 08703 Elapsed Time OST03 Remaining Time 03 Elapsed Time 03 Remaining Time 03 Elapsed Time ROT03 Remaining Time spares Range Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 00000000 Range Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Register MB 424514 424534 424554 424574 424594 424614 424634 424654 424674 424694 424714 424734 424754 424774 424794 424814 424834 42485 42509 60 1 Register MB 424514 42453 42455 42457 42459 424614 424634 424654 424674 424694 424714 424734 424754 424774 424794 424814 424834 424854 424874 424894 424914 424924 424954 424974 4
351. larm 3 is Active 1 0 0318 48 1 n 4 1 6 LZN3 R W 1 Alarm 3 is Not Acknowledged 1 0 003 19 48 1 4 1 7 LHE3 1 Alarm 3 is Enabled 1 0 00320 48 1 n 4 1 8 L A4 R 1 Alarm 4 is Active 1 0 00321 48 1 n 4 1 9 L N4 R W 1 Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged 1 0 00322 48 1 n 4 1 10 LHE4 R W 1 Alarm 4 is Enabled 1 0 00323 48 1 4 1 11 052 1 Alarms Out of Service 1 0 00324 48 1 n 4 1 12 L CC R 1 Configuration has Changed 1 0 00325 48 1 4 1 13 1 Unacknowledged Loop Event 1 0 00326 48 1 n 4 1 14 LZAE 1 Active Loop Event 1 0 00327 48 1 n 4 1 15 LANSS R W 1 Not Ack d STANDBY V1 3 1 0 00328 48 1 n 4 10 0 L NOR R W 1 Not Ack d Override V1 3 1 0 00329 48 1 4 10 1 L NEM R W 1 Not Ack d Emergency Man V1 3 1 0 00330 48 1 4 10 2 L NHL R W 1 Not Ack d HI Setpoint Limit V1 3 1 0 00331 48 1 4 10 3 L NLL R W 1 Not LO Setpoint Limit V1 3 1 0 00332 48 1 4 10 4 LZNUI R W 1 Not Ack d UI Status V1 3 1 0 00333 48 1 4 10 5 L NU2 R W 1 Not Ack d U2 Status 1 3 1 0 00334 48 1 4 10 6 L NW1 R W 1 Not Ack d W1 Status V1 3 1 0 00335 48 1 4 10 7 LZNW2 R W 1 Not Ack d W2 Status V1 3 1 0 00336 48 1 4 10 8 LZNW3 R W 1 Not Ack d W3 Status V1 3 1 0 00337 48 1 n 4 1009 R W 1 Not Ack d Status V1 3 1 0 00338 48 1 4 10 10 L NE2 R W 1 Not Ack d 2 Status V1 3 1 0 00339 48 1 4 10 11 L NE3 R W
352. lay the position of the group selector switch and enable switching the group selector switch between auto and manual March 2003 3 69 Function Blocks UM353 1 PBDisp1 PE at es Group 1 Message um MS1036 Auto 11 4 EL PB1 11 Man STOP ia 12 2 LAUTO MAN 1 n O 13 Stop 1M o A 078 ox Feedback Messages s 1F 1 RUN pus 0 STOP Sta Stop M51432 KUN PB1 E Groups 2 to 7 Group 8 Message START X 51036 2 Q X Bi i STOP i PB2 x O i AUTO Feedback M t eedback Messages 07 ox BF o 1 RUN Au Note Numbers shown on input lines indicate values of unconfigured inputs Block Diagram i ware PC Faceplate Display 3 70 March 2003 UM353 1 Funct ion Blocks 3 2 68 ODS Operator Display for Sequencer ODS function blocks are one of five operator displays available on a one per loop basis to configure the local operator display functions as well as the network commands from an operator workstation associated with the loop See the PC faceplate example the following page The following six enhancements are in firmware 1 30 and higher 1 The VIEW OD parameter when set
353. lecting one digit at a time using the lt and gt keys and setting the number for that digit using the pulser When all digits have been set press STORE If incorrect the alphanumeric will display ACCESS DENIED and then return to the parameter level Once combination has been entered correctly access will be provided for all functions within that level until the user exits configuration If a combination 1 lost contact Siemens technical support to obtain a method to enter configuration and change the security codes Refer to Section 1 3 for the contact information The PC based Graphical Configuration Software may also have security options similar to the above However there is no security in the download procedure itself At the controller there are parameters in function block STA PARM that will lock out all downloads and all parameter writes from a PC TABLE 3 1 Security Level vs Accessible Operations Station Function Block Edit 17 Loop Function Block Add Delee x X Lop FuctonBlckEdt x x Security Configuration X 1 Security does not apply in firmware versions 1 30 and higher to continuously adjustable quickset parameters that include RATIO BIAS and QHLD 3 4 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Function Blocks 3 1 3 STATN Station Parameters The STATN function block enables entry of station identification and other station related information STATIO
354. led s NO YES ves Process 2 Alarm B Power Up ENabled s NO YES YES Process 3 Alarm A Power Up ENabled s NO YES YES Process 3 Alarm B Power Up ENabled s NO YES vES Process 4 Alarm A Power Up ENabled s NO YES YES Process 4 Alarm B Power Up ENabled s NO YES YEs 8 ASCII Char P1 TAG 8 ASCII Char P2 TAG 8 ASCII Char TAG 8 ASCII Char P4 TAG workstation the parameter should be set to NO VU VA AA rr ros r DD 444 70 20 7020 20 20 20 00000000 Range pointers i e for all four process inputs must configured to define the range of each variable input i e P1 to P4 If these parameters are not configured the bargraphs will be scaled using the engineering range of 0 00 to 100 00 This information also defines the scaling of the loop information provided to a remote workstation over the network i e Modbus or LIL gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 2 22 2 2 2 2 99000 U ttv 177 0 0j0 0j0o0o0o o m m mm m mmm 222 222 22 gt gt gt gt HH Ples SO ZH AAA AAA A Aaa 222 2 2 2 2 2 m m m m nm m m 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 u U u U 99949400 O 0 7 70 2 7 Each pro
355. ler with external setpoint configured in Loop01 A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks If the loop tag LOOPO1 is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag External Setpoint 0 00 100 00 PRCT 01 AIN2 TC SETPT Process 0 00 100 00 PRCT o1 D IRev 2 PB2SW 2 Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD Loop01 E I SE ESN Exec Seq No 5 ALARM Alarm Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT D Input D 01 1 ESN Exec Seq No 20 PID PID Controller Function Block Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR Valve LOOP01 E I Ext Int Transfer Switch Function Block INPUT ST Input ST Loop01 PB2SW PS INPUT E Input E Loop01 AIN2 01 INPUT I Input I Loop01 SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 15 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 PID OR INPUT A Input A Loop01 PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 30 SETPT Setpoint Function Block INPUT P Input P Loop01 AIN1 01 RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN1 OR INPUT S Input S Loop01 E LOI ESN Exec Seq No
356. lizer FB BPL batch pre load BOD Basic Operator Display C centigrade CAL calibrate calibration CHN channel CHR Characterizer FB CHAN channel CIE Coil Input Ethernet CL console local CMP Comparator FB COS Cosine FB D deviation denominator DAM Deviation Amplifier FB DC direct current DEG degrees DEV deviation DG derivative gain DIE Digital Input Ethernet FB DID Digital Input Discrete FB DIG digital DIL Discrete Input LIL FB DIN Digital Input FB DINU Digital Input Universal FB DIR direct DIS Digital Input_State DISP display DIV Division FB DLY delay DMM digital multimeter DNC Divide by N Counter FB DOD Digital Output Discrete FB DOE Digital Output Ethernet FB DOL Discrete Output LIL FB DOS Digital Output State FB DOUT Digital Output FB DPP decimal point position DTM Dead Time Table FB DWNLD download DYT Delay Timer FB External Internal Transfer Switch FB EM EMER MAN emergency manual EN enable enabled ENG engineering units ERR error ESL Events Sequence Logger FB ESN Execution Sequence Number ET elapsed time EXP Natural Exponent FB EXT Exponentiation FB F Fahrenheit FAC factory FB function block FCO Factory Configured Option FREQ frequency ft feet FTG Falling Edge Trigger FB GB Gain amp Bias FB
357. ll power up in the last position during a hot or warm start and during a cold start will power up in the NC position When the POWER UP parameter is set to NO the switch will power up in the last position during a hot start During a warm or cold start it will power up in the NC position March 2003 3 77 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 75 PB3SW PB3 Switch PB3SW is one of three general purpose switches available in each loop It can be utilized for switching Boolean signals in such applications as Start Stop controlling the position of a TSW Transfer Switch function block for switching analog signals or other operator initiated actions PB3SW can only be operated from the front panel when the A M function block has not be configured PB3SW can be configured for momentary or sustained operation As momentary the switch will transfer to the NO position when the button is pressed and it will return when released In the sustained mode the switch will alternate positions each time the button is pressed An unconfigured NC input defaults to 0 and an unconfigured NO input to 1 With firmware 1 30 and higher the button can be remotely activated through a command over Modbus or LIL PB3 SWITCH Pp3sw NC Input No Switch Message Display m PB Switch Output ION Switch ACTION 5
358. ll remain at the current step Output AO analog output will track input TV when input TC is high 1 If input TC goes low 0 AO will remain at the tracked values unless either a timed step ramps AO to the AEP analog end point for the step or an event completes the step at which time AO will go to the AEP value for the completed step The current sequencer step can be changed by any of the following six events l the Reset input R going high 1 moving it to step 1 Goto Step input GS going high 1 forcing the sequencer to the step indicated by the whole value of input SN the Step Forward input SF going high 1 moving it to the next higher step unless on the last step a step time expiring advancing to the next step 2 3 4 the Step Backward input SB going high 1 moving back to the previous step unless on the first step 5 6 all the discrete inputs nn are True 1 that match the input mask a mask value of 0 is don t care condition advancing to the next step Input H will hold the remaining time of the current step and disable advancing of the sequencer by operations 5 and 6 but will allow operations 1 2 3 and 4 to move the sequencer to the starting position of a new step When the last sequencer step is completed SC will be set high 1 The sequencer cannot be moved past the last step unless the reset input R goes high 1 forcing it to position 1 The sequencer can be moved forward only when Marc
359. llation 1 Identify contaminants and implement methods to reduce their presence 2 Install protective housing for field mounted controllers 3 When cleaning equipment and surrounding area especially the floor either vacuum away all dust and dirt or use a dampened rag or mop Sweeping or dry dusting recirculates dust and dirt 4 Clean or replace all air conditioning filters room air filters and equipment filters regularly 5 Inform all personnel with access to the equipment of the need for cleanliness 8 3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION The following subsections provide guidelines and procedures for mounting controllers in a panel or rack The installation should be structurally rigid and the controllers should be squared in the panel or rack There are two case connector styles direct entry and side entry To identify the connector style on a case refer to the following table Both styles have the same terminal functions and numbers For example Station Transmitter Common is terminal 6 on the side entry and direct entry connectors Circuit boards mate with either connector style CONNECTOR STYLE DATES SHIPPED ATRIBUTES AND ILLUSTRATIONS Direct Entry After March 2001 Green or Gray Plug in terminal portion is retained by two screws Ethernet connector included Case Nameplate Model 353 4 Cover Installation and Removal Figure 8 1 Panel Cutout Figure 8 3 Controller Dimensions Figure 8 4 Termina
360. lled by the Network Manager and saved in Project file The Project file 15 permanent record of the network installation and must be retained for any future network maintenance When node is first installed the Network Manager reads the Program ID and the Neuron ID every LonWorks device has a Neuron chip that contains a worldwide unique ID If a node with the same Program ID had not been previously installed it will read all of the self documentation from the node The Network Manager will now have a list of all the available parameters and I O variables within that node Some parameters may need to be configured but for most applications the default settings are acceptable The Network Manager is then used to BIND network variables i e connect I O variables from one node to another Network variable connections from remote nodes to the controller are used within the controller by selecting LonWorks I O function blocks within individual loop configurations These function blocks which are detailed in the Function Blocks section of this manual enable connections to network variables to be made to other block inputs within the controller There are a number of different block types available Block selection depends on the types of variables to be connected Siemens supports LonWorks Standard Network Variable Types e SNVT lev percent for analog inputs and outputs e SNVT lev disc for discrete inputs and outputs e SNVT state for use with th
361. ller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L PGI R W Proportional Gain 9 99 to 0 01 1419 17FF 41201 30 1 n 2 0 01 to 9 99 1801 1BE7 100 0 to 10 0 2418 279C 10 0 to 100 0 2864 2BE8 L TII R W Integral Time min 0 01 to 9 99 208 1 2467 41202 30 1 n 3 10 0 to 99 9 10E4 1467 100 to 3967 30E4 3FFF L TDI R W Derivative Time min 0 00 to 9 99 2080 2467 41203 30 1 n 4 10 0 to 100 0 10E4 1468 L DGI R W Derivative Gain 1 00 to 39 67 20E4 2FFF 41204 30 1 0 5 L MRI R W Manual Reset 0 0 to 100 0 0080 0 80 41205 30 1 n 6 L RHI R Range High 1 to 32768 FFFF 8000 41206 30 1 3 10 0 to 32767 0000 7FFF L RLI R Range Low 1 to 32768 FFFF 8000 41207 30 1 3 11 0 to 32767 0000 7FFF L DPPI R Decimal Point Position 0 to 5 0000 0005 41208 30 1 n 3 12 L PDPPI R Process DPP 0 to 5 0000 0005 41209 30 1 n 34 L VDPPI R Valve DPP 0 to 5 0000 0005 41210 30 1 n 2 34 L XDPPI R Variable X DPP 0 to 5 0000 0005 41211 30 1 3 34 L YDPPI R Variable DPP 0 to 5 0000 0005 41212 30 1 4 34 0 0000 41213 30 1 0 0000 41230 30 1 Sequencer ODS MASK Configurations Code R W Description Range Register MB LIL L S006GO0I R W Step 6 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 41201 30 1 6 154 L S006G0O R W Step 6 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 41202 30 1 6 170
362. ller firmware March 2003 7 45 Data Mapping UM353 1 7 3 13 Configuration Data Sequencer Loop The Modbus registers or LIL parameters on this page refer to configuration parameters of function blocks within a specific loop previously defined by Modbus parameter MSLCP 40048 or LIL parameter LSLCP 7 1 For example to read or write the Step 1 Group 0 Input Mask for the PRSEQ block that is in a loop with a Modbus Index of 3 write a 3 to 40048 then read or write to register 410001 Sequencer MASK Configurations Code RAW Description Range Register MB LIL 5001601 R W Step 1 Group 0 Input Mask 0000 SFFFF 410001 1 154 5001600 R W Step 1 Group 0 Output Mask 0000 SFFFF 410002 1 170 S001GI1I R W Step 1 Group 1 Input Mask 0000 SFFFF 410003 1 155 S001G1O R W Step 1 Group 1 Output Mask 0000 SFFFF 410004 1 171 S001G2I R W Step 1 Group 2 Input Mask 0000 SFFFF 410005 1 156 5001620 R W Step 1 Group 2 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 410006 1 172 5001631 R W Step 1 Group 3 Input Mask 0000 FFFF 410007 1 157 5001630 R W Step 1 Group 3 Output Mask 0000 FFFF 410008 1 173 S250GEI R W Step 250 Group E Input Mask 0000 FFFF 417997 250 168 S250GEO R W Step 250 Group E Output Mask 0000 SFFFF 417998 250 184 S250GFI R W Step 250 Group F Input Mask 0000 FFFF 417999 250 169 S250GFO R W Step 250 Group F Output Mask 0000 SFFFF 418000 250 185 Real TimeTrip Block Configurations Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL RTTOLY R W Yea
363. log Input 1 Input Range isse Rete 0 5 Vdc standard calibration 1 5 Vdc Vi E T 0 1 Vdc E 4 5 Vdc Single ended 0 10 Resolution 5 t og eon eee tus 0 024 Software Output Type Analog configurable default 0 0 100 0 Normal Mode RejJection gt 504 60Hz Input Impedance gt megohm Maximum Continuous Input 30 Vdc Analog Output 1 Standard Calibration 4 20 mAdc actives a e ahh toute 4 mAdc trim Spal uen eie diee 16 mAdc trim ME 0 10 Resolution haar 0 003 Software Input Type Analog configurable default 0 0 100 0 Current Range Limits 2 4 to 21 6 mA dc Signal Reference 2 Neg output tied to station common Output Load 22222 1 1 000 0000000 4 800 Ohms Overvoltage Protection 30 Vdc March 2003 14 9 Model Designation and Specifications UM353 1 Digital Input 1 Logic 1 15 30 Logic 0 Range 0 1 Vdc Ovetvoltage eet eom eed 30 Vdc Minimum Required ON Time gt Time Software Output Type
364. lop function as detailed in the truth table An unused R input will be set high 1 and an unused S input will be set low 0 SR FLIP FLOP TRUTH TABLE s R LO 01 5 Set 1 x x 1 i 01 R ge gt 0 1 x 0 Output 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 SET Input LO Last Output R RESET Input O1 Output X don t care BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 96 SRT Square Root SRT_ function blocks compute the square root of input signal A The input has a built in low limit that will limit the signal to the square root computation to 0 0 LO Limit gt 00 gt 01 Analog Input Output 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM SR FLIP FLOP Set SR FLIP FLOP Output 1 Reset PU LIAIS T Power Up LAST 5 NO YES YES INPUT S INPUTS loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUTR loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No 001 to 250 POWER UP During a warm start when PU LAST is set to YES the block will initialize at the input output states at the instant power down occurred A cold start will initialize the input output states to 0 SQUARE ROOT SRT ESN 000 Analog Input A SQUARE ROOT Output 1 LNIPUIT INPUT A H loop tag block tag output Exec Seq No H 001 to 250
365. ls See Figure 8 7 Side Entry Prior to April 2001 Black Plug in terminal portion is retained by friction Case Nameplate Model 353 2 Removing a Connector Figure 8 2 Panel Cutout Figure 8 3 Controller Dimensions Figure 8 5 Terminals See Figure 8 8 8 3 1 Removable Connectors and Covers To gain access to the case mounted connectors a cover may need to be removed Reinstall the cover when wiring is completed As discussed above each connector has a removable portion that can be separated from the case mounted portion wired and then reattached This section will describe cover removal connector separation and installation for both the direct entry and the side entry connector types COVER AND CONNECTOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION DIRECT ENTRY Removal 1 Squeeze the cover slightly about 2 5 mm down from the top and push the cover upward See the Figure 8 1 As shipped from the factory the cover is not installed on the case 2 Locate the connector to be removed As necessary disconnect unclamp or unbundle wires connected to the connector to be removed Be sure there is sufficient slack in the wiring for connector removal 3 Loosen the two captive screws securing the removable portion of the connector to the fixed portion 4 Grasp the removable portion and pull it from the fixed portion Be careful not to stress or damage connected wires and components 3 Side entry a
366. lve cycles will not be symmetrical as illustrated in the second tuning exercise in chart 2 or as a worse case situation the valve may not cycle at all If the valve is does cycle although not symmetrically adequate tuning results will still be obtained March 2003 9 5 Operation UM353 1 Chart 2 Autotuner Errors terminate the autotune exercise and returns the control loop to the point prior to the start of autotune An Error message can be cleared by pressing the ACK button TABLE 9 1 Autotune Errors RRO DESCRIPTION A zero crossing did not occur within 120 minutes Most likely caused by the control loop not being 2 in a steady state condition when the autotuner was started E Process went out of range twice lt 0 gt 100 The first time an out of range occurs the autotuner will cut the valve step size in half and restart the exercise When the autotune algorithm has been set to HYS A and it calculates a required hysteresis value greater than 10 Process filtering should be added to reduce the noise seen by the autotuner Autotuner Warnings do not terminate the autotune exercise and are normally eliminated by increasing the HYS and or the DEV settings In some cases they may have been caused by load changes that occurred during the autotune exercise The autotuner will still derive recommended tuning values but they will not automatically be transferred to the controller if that feature was reque
367. lways power up in the NC position For sustained action with the POWER UP parameter set to YES the switch will power up in the last position during a hot or warm start and during a cold start it will power up in the NC position When the POWER UP parameter is set to NO the switch will power up in the last position during a hot start During a warm or cold start will power up in the NC position 3 78 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 76 PCOM Phase COMmunication The Phase Communication PCOM function block in firmware 1 30 and higher is available on a one per loop Phase COMunication basis to enable communication with a higher level m device such as a PC running a batch management pcom software program When the controller configuration is Emerg or A OR structured such that logic operations partitioned Communication om INT OK InterlocKed small phase operations the PCOM block facilitates the Phase Fa aM interface between the logic controlling the overall phase T ReaDy IRD ReSet operations for the batch and the logic performing the RuN RN ENabled control logic for each phase The logic performed by the block is detailed in pone HEN Boolean form in Figure 3 1 Network communication can be either Modbus or LIL Local Instrument Link Details are li
368. m status high 1 when the process is equal to or less than the limit setting The alarm status will clear 0 when the process is greater than the limit setting plus the deadband 99999999 mp UV 2 gt UV gt gt gt gt gt KD gt KV 2 gt KV gt UD 3 gt KV gt UV 2 gt UV gt 032 09 gt gt gt gt KV gt UV gt KV 2 gt KV gt UV gt gt gt gt 2 09 gt UV gt gt gt UV gt UV gt gt OR compares the process input with the range limits referenced by NIN 3 3 AR 0 I AGO I amp 2 Po ty 3 3 BB oo NN SJAA Fr La La 6 b OoOmmaumUmaqmJaaacoooooooc the range pointer parameter It will trip the alarm status high 1 L LOOP jc 1 011025 IL LIL starting CHANnel 008 to 250 nul when the process is equal to or greater than the high limit or equal Vi VIEW Operator Display e YES amp S INP INPUT P1 loop tag block tag output to or less than the low limit The alarm status will clear 0 when the NPUTP200 se n INP INPUT Hj loop tag block tag output process is less than the high limit minus the deadband or greater CNP sa than the low li
369. mA at a maxscale of 5000 psig In contrast 1f AOUT input R were left unconfigured the output would equal 4 mA at a minscale of 0 psig 20 mA at a maxscale of 100 psig and over ranged for any input over 100 psig The LonWorks function blocks used in Models 352P 353 and 354 354N are described in this manual The Ubus function blocks used in Procidia UAI UDI UDO UEI UER URI USD and UTI are included in the firmware but are not described here since they will not operate in Models 352P 353 and 354 354N March 2003 3 1 Function Blocks UM353 1 Some users may prefer to use normalized 0 1 analog inputs for math calculations and scale outputs for display only in this case the Scaler function block may be used to provide an output range OR for the ODC Operator display block Note how the range pointers are used in the following Factory Configured Options FCOs FCOs are described in detail in the Factory Configured Options section FCO101 Single Loop Controller The process output range AIN1 OR is connected to the range pointer of the SETPT block the PID block the ALARM block and the process variable range of the ODC block As a result these blocks will be automatically rescaled when the minscale and the maxscale or the engineering units of the Process is changed For example if AIN1 is scaled 0 5000 the 0 100 bargraph on the display will represent 0 5000 when displaying the process The
370. minals X03113S1 FIGURE 8 19 Universal Analog Input AINU1 FIGURE 8 20 Universal Analog Input AINU1 Ohms Input Slidewire Input 8 4 8 Relay Output Wiring Function blocks and ROUT2 are located on the I O Expander board They provide two single pole double throw relay outputs as shown in Figure 8 21 Relay contact ratings are stated in Section 14 6 The load connected to a closed contact should draw a current between the minimum and maximum contact ratings A resistive load is recommended An inductive or capacitive load can cause high peak currents or contact arcing which can pit or otherwise damage contacts The arcing associated with an inductive load can be limited by connecting a voltage transient suppressor such as a 1N4005 diode across the load Model 353 Rear Terminals 27 Load al NC 28 IF ROUT 5 NO 29 External 5 Power Suppl KG 30 pply 31 ROUT2 NO 32 Load X03120S0 FIGURE 8 21 Universal Relay Outputs ROUT1 and 2 Resistive Load 8 4 9 Local Instrument Link Wiring The Local Instrument Link LIL is a high performance digital data link that carries commands and responses between user selected stations Each station must be identified by a unique link address This address permits commands and responses to be sent from one station to another specific station Lower link addresses are 1 through 32 A Model 3
371. mit plus the deadband 2003 3 63 Function Blocks UM353 1 Alarms have priorities 1 to 5 with 1 the highest Alarms are reported to the operator faceplate in order of priority first and then in order of occurrence Priority 1 causes the station bargraphs and condition e g Al to flash and requires acknowledgment to stop flashing Priority 2 also flashes the bargraphs and condition but stops flashing when the alarm clears i e Self Clearing Priority 3 causes the event LEDs L and S and condition to flash Flashing stops only when the alarm is acknowledged Priority 4 causes the event LEDs and condition to flash but flashing stops when the alarm clears Priority 5 displays the alarm but does not require that it be acknowledged Alarm limits are in engineering units A quickset ALARM feature is also available allowing alarm limits to be set quickly during operation The settings are in engineering units but will also be displayed in of range on the setpoint bargraph when viewing a point Alarms are displayed as defined by the range pointer parameter Alarms be set to any engineering value within 10 to 110 of the range defined by the pointer If a range is changed the current alarm settings will be changed to be the same within the new range For example if a HI alarm is currently set at 100 0 with a range of 0 0 to 100 0 and the range is changed to 300 0 to 400 0 the HI alarm will be moved to 400
372. mm 2 inches in diameter and an approximate mass of 113 4 grams 4 ounces e Pressure Tests A force of 90 Newtons 20 pounds shall be applied from a metal rod 12 7 mm 0 50 inch in diameter the end of which is rounded The force shall be applied for one minute to any point on the overall enclosure except the bottom The bottom shall sustain a force of 65 Newtons 15 pounds Stability Test Equipment having a weight of 11 kilograms 24 pounds or more shall not tip over when placed at the center of an inclined plane that makes an angle of 10 degrees with the horizontal and then turned to the position with all doors drawers and other openable and sliding parts in the least stable position most likely to cause tip over e Sharp Edges An accessible edge projection or corner of an enclosure opening frame guard handle or the like shall be smooth and well rounded and shall not cause a cut type injury during normal use of the equipment Use of the equipment in a manner not specified by the manufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment Route electrical power to the station through a clearly labeled circuit breaker or on off switch that is located near the station and is accessible by the operator The breaker or switch should be located in a non explosive atmosphere unless suitable for use in an explosive atmosphere Local Instrument Link twinaxial cable must be shielded The next page contains a Decl
373. n Blocks are also designated as LOOP function ENS blocks and include blocks that do not fall into the arithmetic or logic categories E These can be used as many times as needed and each use will automatically be HOLD Output 1 assigned a unique name e g HLDO1 HLD02 within each loop so that the unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g TC2053 HLD01 Remote I O Bus Function Blocks can be used as needed in each LOOP when the LonWorks option is installed to provide a method for sending and receiving both analog and discrete data to and from remote devices over the remote I O digital bus Each use will automatically be assigned unique name e g 0 AOP01 within the station so that the unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g Xu TC2053 AIP01 for Analog Input lev_Percent used in loop TC2053 The second AIP block used within the station will be assigned AIP02 even if in a different loop so that the remote 1 blocks have unique names within the station This will enable unique names for station variables on the LON network ANALOG INPUT Output 1 Quality Status LIL Global Function Blocks are used as needed within a LOOP when the LIL option board is installed to enable global data communication over the LIL They will automatically be assigned C AL a unique name e g AILOI DILOI within each loop when it is configured so that the unique bl
374. n length Recommended cable is Belden 9927 24 AWG or equivalent For an assembled cable order Siemens PN 16137 191 RS485 recommended cable is Belden 9842 24 AWG 120 or equivalent Up to 32 Moore 352Ps Moore 353 Moore 3545 and be connected A user supplied 120 ohm network termination resistor should be installed on the last device on the network In ACM s SERIAL Function Block set Flow Control to 1 Assembled cable above has DB9 plug connector Connection to computer serial port may require DB9 socket receptacle gender adapter Connection between F and J provided by Entrelec converter N FIGURE 8 24 Modbus Communications Moore 353 and 354 to APACS ACM and Personal Computer March 2003 8 23 Installation UM353 1 8 4 13 Wiring to a Model 363 VIEWPAC Recorder Figure 8 25 shows the wiring needed to connect a Model 363 analog input to a Moore 353 analog input As shown a 1 5 Vdc transmitter input to the Moore 353 is also routed the recorder s Analog Input 1 Model 353A or 354 354N Model 363 VIEWPAC Controller Terminals Recorder Terminals External Hot H H Power Recorder 120 240 Vac Neutral N qes an 25W as Kir ee note 47 63 Earth Ground G G 5 Recorder 26 5 Analog Input
375. n tighten an additional turn DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN 11 Remove the wrist strap 11 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Maintenance 11 2 4 Circuit Board Handling ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ALL ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES Semiconductor devices must be protected from electrostatic discharge properly grounded conductive wrist strap must be worn whenever a circuit board assembly is handled or touched PN 15545 110 service kit with a wrist strap and static dissipative workmat is available from Siemens Energy amp Automation Process Industries Division Equivalent kits are available from both mail order and local electronic supply companies LITHIUM BATTERY PRECAUTIONS Each MPU Controller board and Real Time Clock Configuration Backup board has a lithium battery that is not field replaceable Note the following when handling or disposing of either board e Properly dispose of an unrepairable circuit board with a lithium battery e Do not burn the battery e Do not place the circuit board on a metal surface or otherwise short circuit battery terminals e Do not attempt to charge the battery e If electrolyte is exposed wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when handling the battery e For details contact the battery manufacturer 11 3 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting the controller is primarily done by error codes Error codes are indicated on the alphanumeric display in response to a failed power up diagnostic test or to an on line controller
376. nce is satisfied the parameters can also O changed ALARM function block description for details the O parameters Press the ENTER EXIT CONFIG button to return to the on 20 line displays MJO lt When in the configuration mode this button will step down to the next configuration level See the Configuration Overview section of this o I 1 100 manual for details on typical levels of the configuration mode CLOSE e TUNE STEP UP has a dual purpose When in the normal operation mode pressing the button will scroll through the controller tuning parameters and allow activating the AUTOTUNE algorithm if cor configured for the loop controller If security clearance is satisfied the parameters can also be changed Press the ENTER EXIT CONFIG button CD to return to the on line displays X03141S2 When in the configuration mode this button will step up to the next configuration level lt has dual purpose When in the normal operation mode pressing the button will scroll the complete tag name of the Active Loop in the alphanumeric display The tag will scroll one character at a time starting on the right e g When the configuration mode this button will provide a shift left function for configurable items e g will shift the decimal point left QUICK g
377. nd direct entry refer to the entry of wires into terminals installed on a case Underscores are placeholders for alphanumeric characters describing other controller model selections March 2003 8 3 Installation UM353 1 To install or i To Install Terminal Cover remove cover 2 squeeze 1 Orient the cover as shown Note the four hooked both sides Si tabs and Ethernet cable clearance cutout 1 16 m AD i to clear M i 2 Squeeze the cover slightly at the two small cutouts alignment i the cover edges and fully insert the four hooked tabs i i cover tabs in the rear panel slots JE We 5 7 i 3 Allow cover sides to relax Pull the cover straight dig dm LZ amp f down until it into place The cutouts the 2104 1 cover edges will engage two alignment tabs on the rear panel 2 Z Where needed the Ethernet cable should exit pi through the large cutout in the cover e I m i To Remove Cover N 5 i 1 Squeeze the cover slightly at the two cutouts amie u s the cover edges about 2 down from the Su Ww we top of the cover and push cover upward
378. nd equipment and throughout the cabinet preventing hot spots from developing Forced air conditioning may be required in very high density N panels or consoles Periodically change clean air filters CONTAMINANTS The controller case is slotted to permit circulation of clean cooling air Liquids and corrosive gases must not be allowed to enter the case Whether the controller is in a control room or field mounted it must be protected from rain air conditioning condensate and plant and process related fluids and gases Extended exposure to contaminants can result in malfunctions X03102S0 Enclosed Panel Air Inlet Industrial environments often contain airborne particulate contaminants Particulate matter usually dust and dirt is abrasive and can cause intermittent dir connections A layer of dust on circuit boards can Mg interfere with component heat dissipation and can gt absorb other airborne contaminants Extended exposure to these contaminants may result in No of Fans One for each 16 stations or 3 ft of panel width malfunctions Air Inlet 30 for each fan If filters are used they must Although 353 boards have a protective coating the be changed periodically increase inlet to 50 in following steps can reduce contaminant related ne equipment malfunctions Forced Air Ventilation for Enclosed Panels 8 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Insta
379. nder board 1 AOUT1 3 Analog Output MPU board 2 and I O Expander board 1 Note AINUI 2 Analog Input Universal refer to the AINU description in Section 3 Function Blocks for calibration information When field calibrating a controller for a critical application consider the following e Ifthe input is a current signal e g 4 20 mA use a precision current source The 250 ohm precision range resistor installed across the input terminals for calibration should remain with the station connected across that set of terminals to eliminate the voltage drop variation due to resistor tolerance e Allow the Station to warm up for an hour prior to calibration The ambient temperature should be close to normal operating conditions The controller must be off line during calibration Factory calibration values are listed in Section 8 5 Refer to Table 8 1 and to the installation wiring figures in Section 8 for power input signal input and signal output terminals Security Calibration of Inputs Outputs If level 1 and level 4 security are enabled the user determined six digit security combination e g 000025 for either level 1 or level 4 must be entered before new calibration parameters can be stored Once the security combination has been entered access will be provided to all functions with that security level until the user exits configuration For additional information refer to function block SECUR Security in Section 3 Bargr
380. nect to the MPU Controller IMPORTANT Before powering the controller after installing an RTC CB board connect a local faceplate to the controller The controller will power up hold state and the faceplate 15 needed to select the controller configuration as described in the following procedure March 2003 11 17 UM353 1 Board Installation 1 2 To install board fasten grounded wrist strap your wrist The MPU Controller board may have several attached boards secured by spacers and screws Refer to Figure 11 5 for board location and fasteners Refer to the board comments above for Jumpering and other information before attaching a board to the MPU Controller board Insert the board or board stack into the case card guides and carefully guide the connector end of the board until it mates with the connector s on the case Only when the connectors are mated should additional force be applied to seat the board Install board retaining hardware Refer to Section 11 5 3 as needed Install the Display Assembly Refer to Section 11 5 2 Remove the wrist strap When power is applied an RCB gt MEM message will appear in the local faceplate s alphanumeric display This message is prompting you to select the controller s operating configuration Read the two bulleted items below and select the desired configuration e To copy the configuration stored on the RTC CB or board to the MPU C
381. ng changes are a All analog signals have been configured for an engineering range of 0 00 to 100 00 In most cases converting to other engineering units will only require changing the range at the source e g Analog Input function block All other blocks i e Controller Operator Display Alarm and Setpoint that require knowledge of the range have range pointers that point to the signal source e g Analog Input block for this information b number of function blocks have parameters that may be affected by range pointers The range pointer limits the setting of parameter values to within 10 to 110 of the range If a range is changed the current parameter values will be changed to the same within the new range For example if the range is 0 0 100 0 and the Alarm Limit setting is 90 0 and the range is changed to 400 0 500 0 the alarm setting will be changed to 490 0 All controller ID PID PD PIDAG outputs have an engineering range of 0 0 100 0 which will be satisfactory in most cases since outputs normally convert to a 4 20 mA signal to drive a valve 0 100 Open or Closed However when a controller is used in a cascade configuration the primary controller output must be configured for the same engineering range as the secondary controller process d FCOs not change Station parameters or calibration e FCO 0 deletes all loops and set all parameters in the STATN amp SECUR function blocks to default values Cali
382. ngs for both Modbus and LIL are listed in tables in the Network Communications section Input CL controls local arbitration of changes to loop data from the network When input CL is not configured the three status outputs LO in 1 21 firmware this output was named L CN and CM will be set high 1 and changes can be made from a network command or the local faceplate When CL is configured it can be toggled locally from a pushbutton switch such as PB1SW output PS and will change from local to console or from console computer to local each time the input is toggled Also when output LO goes high output CN will also go high and CM will go low indicating that the control source will change to Console whenever Local is disabled either by toggling input CL or from a network command The Computer CM state can be set high using a network command The NL output will normally be connected to the MD input of the pushbutton block PB1SW to indicate the C L switch position on the operator faceplate using the green LED for C and the red LED for LO Output WD will go high 1 when the station fails to receive a Modbus network command within the watchdog period The watchdog time is set in the STATN Station Parameters function block PC Faceplate Display 3 72 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 69 ON OFF On Off Controller ON OFF is on off controller with deviation function It
383. nless the parameter AT RESET in the controller block has been stored as YES warnings occurred during the first test or the station has been power cycled 9 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Operation Autotuning Considerations Chart 1 Process Noise could have an effect where the autotuner will not produce periodic valve cycles The autotuner will complete an exercise but results may not be satisfactory This is illustrated in the first autotuning exercise in chart 2 which is the same process as chart 1 but the HYS was set at 0 5 If these results occur when the controller HYS has been set to A auto set hysteresis the controller may be having difficulty deriving a good noise figure and manual entry of the HYS parameter should be considered The HYS value should be increased to at least twice the standard deviation value of the noise In cases where the noise amplitude is extremely large the filter on the analog input should be increased to minimize the amplitude of the noise seen by the controller The value of the DEV parameter should be set to at least four time the HYS value for best results Steady State Conditions must be established for the process and controller prior to starting an autotune exercise The autotuner can be initiated while in manual or auto Steady state is reached when the present valve signal has brought the process to its present value and the setpoint is equal to the process When not at steady state va
384. nnect wrist strap 7 Install Display Assembly as described in the previous section 11 5 4 I O Expander Board REMOVAL 1 In a hazardous area remove input power from Controller 2 Remove Display Assembly and MPU Controller board as described in previous sections 3 Refer to Figure 11 4 Grasp the edge of the I O Expander Board and pull the Board straight out of the case 4 Place the Board in a static shielding bag INSTALLATION 1 While wearing a grounded wrist strap remove the I O Expander Board from its static shielding bag 2 If one or more communication boards must be attached to the MPU Controller board refer to the Accessory Board section and then return here 3 Insert the I O Expander Board into the case and carefully guide the connector end of the board until it mates with the connector at the back of the case Only when the connectors are mated should additional force be applied to seat the board 4 Disconnect wrist strap 5 Install MPU Controller board and Display Assembly as described in previous sections IMPORTANT After replacing an I O Expander board in a controller whose configuration includes an AINU function block assemble the controller apply power ENTER configuration and STORE the SEN TYPE parameter This must be done even if the SEN TYPE displays the desired type This will ensure that the function block loads the correct calibration from the new Expander board If desired a FIELD CAL can then be p
385. nnector upward and withdraw the connector from the rear panel mounted connector A long flat blade screwdriver may be needed to press the locking tab upward and release the connector INSTALLATION 1 Remove the Controller board and I O Expander board if installed 2 Referring to Figure 11 10 perform the steps under Case Connection to install the cable in the case 3 Install the I O Expander board and then MPU Controller board with the installed Ethernet board as described in preceding sections The Ethernet cable must lie on the floor of the case between the Expander and Controller boards 4 In Figure 11 10 refer to the steps under Ethernet Board Connection to mate the free end of the Ethernet cable with connector J4 on the Ethernet board Dress the cable so that it will not interfere with the Display Assembly 5 Reassemble the controller as described in preceding sections Supplied Ethernet Cable 12 305 mm Case Connection Ethernet Board Connection Orient the connector on this end of the cable Install the MPU Controller board with as shown above to mate with the RJ 45 the attached Ethernet board in the connector inside the case on the connector controller case socket assembly Locate the RJ 45 connector J4 on the Guide the cable into the case and insert the exposed edge of the Ethernet board cable mounted connector into the case mounted connector 1 Note the connector or
386. numeric lower display 5 Press the STEP DOWN button to choose options at the station level and rotate the Pulser Knob to select CAL on the alphanumeric display 6 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the FUNCTION BLOCK level Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired input e g AIN1 or AIN2 7 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the PARAMETER level 8 Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired parameter CAL ZERO shown on the alphanumeric display 9 Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level CAL appears on upper display 10 Set the precision voltage source to the zero input value 0 000 to 1 000 Vdc 11 Press STORE to lock in the desired value If ENTER COM appears in the alphanumeric display security is enabled and steps 1 through 5 must be performed to store the calibration Otherwise go to step 14 1 The numeric display shows 000000 with the right most digit flashing Rotate the pulser knob to set the units digit to the correct number 2 Press the TAG key to select the next digit the tens digit Rotate the pulser knob to select a number for that digit 3 Move to and select the needed number for each remaining digit 4 Press ENTER If the combination entered is incorrect ACCESS DENIED will be displayed and the controller will return to the parameter level Otherwise go to step 14 14 Press the STEP UP button Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the CAL FULL parameter 15 Press
387. o during a cold start alarms will be enabled or disabled as determined by the PU ENable parameters Alarm Status Alarm status is available with Modbus communication or the Local Instrument Link option for alarm management at a remote location The alarm status is available in coils with Modbus communication or the same information is packed into a single word Alarm Status Word with LIL communication Detailed information can be found in the Network Communications section of this document March 2003 3 23 Function Blocks UM353 1 An alarm status word is shown below 1 when the alarm is active N 1 when the alarm is Not acknowledged E 1 when the alarm is enabled when the alarm is disabled the and bits are set to 0 OS 1 indicates that all alarms are identified as Out of Service which means that all alarms function normally but the OS flag indicates to a higher level device that they can be ignored OS cannot be set locally CC 1 indicates a configuration change has occurred It can be reset by a write command 1 indicates an Active Event is present within the loop It will clear when all the loop events clear NA will be set to 1 when events occur and at least one within the loop has not yet been acknowledged It can be reset to 0 which will acknowledge all events within the loop or when 0 will indicate all active events have been acknowledged IG ss
388. o MMJ11 P N 16353 63 3 Model 352P 353 354 Firmware Upgrade Utility P N15939 77V3 00 upgrades 1 to 3 00 Kit contains are e CD ROM with the multiple versions of the controller firmware e a software license disk created for the station by serial number to be upgraded e a software registration card INSTALLING VERSION 3 00 1 Follow the instructions on the label of the supplied CD ROM to install the utility 2 Readthe supplied HELP file for information about downloading firmware kernel and code to a controller 3 Complete and mail the software registration card Technical Support For technical support contact the Technical Support Group at 1 215 646 7400 ext 4993 For the address of the Siemens Energy amp Automation Process Industries Division office nearest you visit either of the following Internet sites Www sea siemens com ia www procidia com Current revisions of User s Manuals for the listed controllers can be found at the above sites The manuals are in Portable Document Format PDF Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc assumes no liability for errors or omissions in this document or for the application and use of information included in this document The information herein is subject to change without notice Procedures in this document have been reviewed for compliance with applicable approval agency requirements and are considered sound practice Neither Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc no
389. oard drawings earlier in this manual FIGURE 11 7 Ethernet Board Serial Number and Part Number Labels Mates with J6 on MPU Controller Board Ethernet Status LEDs Ethernet Connector MG00395a gt J4 F J1 Serial Number Part Number Labels Mates with W4 on MPU Controller Board Mates with J6 on MPU Controller Board MG00393b y J1 M Mates with W4 on MPU Controller Board FIGURE 11 8 LonWorks Board Components on other side of circuit board Part Number Serial Number Connector This Side FIGURE 11 9 Real Time Clock Configuration Backup Board AG00286a March 2003 11 19 UM353 1 11 5 6 Ethernet Cable Figure 11 10 shows the Ethernet cable REMOVAL 1 At the Ethernet board press the locking tab on the cable mounted RJ 45 connector toward the circuit board and withdraw the connector from the board mounted connector 2 Remove the Controller board and I O Expander board if present as described in preceding sections 3 Inside the case at the rear panel press the locking tab on the cable mounted co
390. ock INPUT ST Input ST SEC PB2SW PS INPUT E Input SEC SPLIM O1 INPUT I Input I SEC SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 25 PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR INPUT P Input P SEC AIN2 O1 INPUT S Input 1 INPUT Input F 1 INPUT Input SEC A M AS INPUT I Input I SEC E I ES ESN Exec Seq No 30 A M Auto Manual Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT P Input A SEC PID O1 ESN Exec Seq No 35 01 OR Function Block INPUT A Input A SEC A M NA INPUT B Input SEC E LIS ESN Exec Seq No 40 OR02 OR Function Block INPUT A Input SEC A M NA INPUT B Input B SEC E LES ESN Exec Seq No 45 Analog Output 1 Function Block Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT S Input S SEC A M O1 ODC Operator Display for Controllers P RG PTR P Range Pointer SEC AIN2 OR V RG PTR V Range Pointer SEC PID OR INPUT P Input P Process SEC AIN2 01 INPUT S Input S Setpoint SEC E LO1 INPUT V Input V Valve 1 LOOP Loop 02 4 1
391. ock name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g 2053 01 ANALOG INPUT LIL bo ach Input and output data blocks are available as needed and will be assigned Output QS unique names as used e g AIL01 AIL02 for Analog Input LIL blocks Ethernet Function Blocks V2 4 are used as needed within a LOOP when the Ethernet option board is installed They will automatically be assigned a unique name e g AIE01 DIE01 within each loop when it is configured so EE gt Output OR that the unique block name becomes lt loop gt lt block gt e g TC2053 AIE01 Output O1 Output QS March 2003 1 5 Introduction UM353 1 1 2 2 Power Up Initialization The Moore 353 will retain in the station calculated block values e g outputs elapsed time last input output logic states including the time since power was lost Three power up modes hot warm and cold are utilized in the Moore 353 that affect the initialization of function blocks These modes are configured by two power up timers warm and cold included in STATION parameters The station will initialize a hot start when power up occurs prior to the expiration of the warm timer cold start will occur when power up occurs after the expiration of the cold timer and a warm start will take place when the station powers up after the expiration of the warm timer but prior to the expiration of the cold timer Hot Start All function block executi
392. ocks can hold an initial value that will transfer to the block output O1 on power up and it can be used to track the TV input when input TC is high 1 In 1 30 firmware or greater the HOLD value can be changed line using the pulser when the TH O1 block output is directly connected to X or Y inputs in an ODC block The range and resolution used by the pulser making on line changes will be determined by the X Range or Y Range inputs INITial VA Lue HOLD value 9 y o4 Track Variable TV Track Command 0313450 TC BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 100 TOT_ Totalizer 2 3 function blocks accept Boolean input and they will retain a running total of the input transitions as the block output as a real value for interconnection to other blocks in the controller The running total can be reset when input R goes high 1 Input R is executed prior to reading input on each scan cycle Unconfigured inputs will be set to 0 When the EDGETRIG parameter is set to 1 the total will increment on each 0 to 1 transition on input S When the EDGETRIG parameter 15 set to 0 the total will increment on each 1 to 0 transition The total will be retained during a WARM amp HOT start and will be initialized to 0 0 on a COLD start Input Signal i Total i Totalizer 01 Reset an BLOCK DIAGRAM TRACK amp HOLD TH ESN 000 Track Variable TRACK amp HO
393. odbus command The returning Modbus data is embedded by the bridge in an Ethernet packet to be sent to the requesting controller The Ethernet board plugs into and communicates with the controller board via an RS485 serial port Board output is 10 100 Base T using an RJ45 connector Ethernet function blocks are provided in V2 40 and higher MPU Controller board firmware When an Ethernet board is installed rear terminals NCA and NCB are disabled m March 2003 13 3 Circuit Description UM353 1 13 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Model Designation and Specifications 14 0 MODEL DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATIONS This section provides model designation information lists of controller accessories and service parts detailed controller specifications and hazardous area installation information IMPORTANT Before installing or servicing a controller refer to the controller labels and the applicable specifications and hazardous area classifications in this section to ensure that the correct model with the needed certifications is at hand Every controller is identified by several labels Labels are located on the case and inside the drop down door on the Display Assembly as shown in Figure 1 1 Typical labels are shown below Input Requirements 120 240 VAC 20 W 47 63 Hz 30 VA Max Amb 50 C WARNING Substitution of components may impair the suitability for Class 1 Div 2 LR38024 CLI Div 2 GPS A amp
394. odbus devices this setting does not matter since the device will treat them as identical registers The DATA TYP parameter will enable the AIE block to acquire both floating point or integer data When floating point is selected the controller will request two consecutive registers starting with the MB REG parameter The UD RATE parameter configures the rate at which the block will request data The P2P setting will update the data at the rate set by the P2P RATE parameter in the ETHERNET block The Ct setting will update the data at the cycle time of the controller The Ct parameter should normally be used only when the analog input is the process variable in a PID control loop Output QS indicates the quality of the received data and will go high 1 when the data is bad This is normally associated with failure to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the source 6 Requires Ethernet communications board firmware version 2 0 or later March 2003 3 15 Function Blocks UM353 1 TABLE 1 Floating Point Number Formats BYTE ORD Type Description Byte Order Comments 1 Big Endian FP Format 4 3 2 1 Standard Usage 2 Big Endian FP w bytes swapped 3 4 1 2 3 Little Endian FP Format 1 2 3 4 4 Little Endian FP w bytes swapped 2 1 4
395. of all the blocks it had been running prior to the download After the download all function block parameters with the same tag name as those held will be used to initialize the downloaded function block parameters thus providing a bumpless download under these conditions Ifa loop tag name is changed the tag names of all function blocks within that loop will change and will therefore require re initialization of all of these blocks However the loop tag can be changed from the local faceplate without causing re initialization providing a bumpless tag change X03145S0 Optional PC Based Graphical Configuration Software 1 3 PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support can be obtained from a customer service center i e Technical Support Group in North America or a Technical Information Center TIC in Asia or Europe Each region has a customer service center that provides direct telephone support on technical issues related to the functionality application and integration of the product Regional contact information is provided below Your regional Technical Support Group or TIC is the first place to call when seeking product support information When calling it is helpful to have the following information ready e Product part number or model number and version e If there is a problem with product operation Whether or not the problem is intermittent The
396. ommunications UM353 1 C P 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 4 UA08N UA09N UATON UATIN UA12N UATSN UATAN UA1SN UA16N UATZN UATEN 2 UA07M UA08M UA09M UATOM UATIM UA12M UA13M UA14M UATSM UAT6M UA17M UATBM 3 UAO F UAO8F UA09F UA10F UATIF 12 UAT3F UATAF UATSF 1 UATTF UATEF a UA07MT UA08MT UA09MT UATOMT UATIMT UAT2MT UAT3MT UAT14MT UATSMT UAT6MT UAT7MT UATEMT 5 NAL Ais as ms ms Ass 65 ars ABS aos A10S bis bas pss Das pss Des Dzs Des Des Dios Diis 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 UASN UAZON UAZIN UA22N UA23N UAZAN UA25N UAZ6N UA27N UAZEN UA29N UASON 2 UMOM UA20M UA21M UA22M UA23M UA24M UA25M UA26M UA27M UA28M UA29M UAGOM 3 UAf r UA20E Uazir UA22F UA23F UA24F UA25E UA26F UA27F UA28E UA29F UA30F 4 UAT9MT UA20MT UA21MT UA22MT UA23MT UA24MT UAZ5MT UAZ6MT UA27MT UAZSMT UA29MT UASOMT 5 4125 ans 145 155 Atos 175 ates 195 205 A21S A228 A23S 6 5125 0135 Di4S Dt5S 5165 0175 0185 5496 6205 D2is D22S D23S 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 uasin T j 2 SIM 0 0 T L p j j 0 T jO j UA31M T 5 245 8 jJ T pj j O 6
397. on and turn the Pulser Knob to step through the list of configured loops From the selected loop stepping down will provide various options within the specific loop current value of all configured block outputs can be viewed current tag name of the loop and the ESN Execution Sequence Number be changed ESNs are automatically assigned by the controller in the order of creation either a loop or individual block An ESN should be changed when it is important that one loop be executed prior to another e g cascade primary executes prior to the cascade secondary e Function blocks can be added to or deleted from the loop Existing function blocks can be edited Use the step up and step down buttons to move between the function block parameter and value levels within the EDIT FB menu If no configuration entries are made for about three minutes the mode will time out and the controller will exit the configuration mode The STATN function block has a CONFG TO Configuration Timeout parameter to enable or disable timeout Loading an Earlier Firmware Version In rare instances replacing the installed MPU Controller board firmware with an earlier version may be desired Before loading the earlier firmware refer to the sections on configuration and load 0 zero as the active configuration This will install a minimum configuration and will reduce the number of error messages that appear during the firmware load
398. on continues from the last state prior to power fail Warm Start Function blocks that have a power up 1 state feature either by design or by configuration selection will power up as defined in the individual block descriptions other function blocks will initialize at cold start conditions Cold Start All function block outputs will initialize at 0 unless otherwise stated in individual block descriptions 1 2 3 Configuration The Moore 353 can be configured either locally or remotely First the local faceplate includes buttons located behind a flip down door for complete configuration including the addition deletion of loops and function blocks and the editing of function block parameters Section 2 Configuration Overview includes a road map for stepping through configuration Certain block parameters e g gains constants can be edited while on line but design changes e g block interconnections block additions will put the station in configuration hold which will hold outputs at the current value until the Exit button is pressed This will enable bumpless changes to be made while on line The second method is to use the Graphical Configuration program A configuration can be downloaded to a controller either via the port on the local faceplate or over a network either Modbus Ethernet or LIL During a I download all outputs will be held and the controller will retain all the intermediate calculations
399. on for inter station workstation APACS networking Three communication boards are designed to plug into the MPU controller board a LonWorks board and either a LIL Network board or an Ethernet board 14 8 1 LonWorks Board This board provides for additional remote from the Moore 353 The communication method allows various configurations of analog and discrete signal types both input and output for use in control and or sequencing applications within the station 14 8 2 LIL Network Board Local Instrument Link This board provides network communication mapping station variables to the standard LIL channel parameter communication map When this board is used neither Modbus nor Ethernet communication are available The local configuration port under the faceplate is still available for configuration and diagnostic applications 14 8 3 Ethernet Board This board provides Ethernet communications It function as a bi directional Modbus Ethernet converter When installed neither LIL nor Modbus communications are available The local configuration port under the faceplate is still available for configuration and diagnostic applications 14 10 March 2003 UM353 1 Model Designation and Specifications 14 9 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS 14 9 1 Standard Mounting Mounting Typical Location Control room or other protected area Temperature Limits ssp un un au RS 0 to 50 C 32 to
400. on for that controller e upload the configuration to a PC running the Graphical Configuration Software where the configuration can be viewed e enter the configuration mode and step through the configuration recording the configured function blocks and entered parameter values In the following steps press indicates a faceplate button key 10 1 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION AND TEST The purpose of this section 15 to configure and test the controller and to familiarize the user with the controller s faceplate pushbuttons pulser and displays This section also introduces several configuration topics 10 1 1 Connections and Power 1 Connect power to the controller Refer to Controller nameplate for model number and then to Section 14 of this manual for power requirements Refer to Section 8 Installation for connections A WARNING Electrical shock hazard u Explosion hazard Y G Can cause death or injury ow e Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on equipment e In potentially hazardous atmosphere remove power from equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other circuit e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation in hazardous area 2 Depending upon the configuration connect test equipment to the I O terminals FCO101 This has one 1 5 Volt analog input AIN1 and one 4 20 mA analog output AOUTI configured To verify both of these outputs and to
401. onnections at rear terminals 3 and 4 are wired for LIL or an Ethernet Network board is installed Shunts Installed ENTER EXIT configuration button Edit the configuration to activate the board and connect or network wiring as needed LIL Network Board or LIL Ethernet Modbus Ethernet Network Board Network Jumper W2 MG00195c N 4 RTC CB or i I O Expander Board Board N Accessory Boards lt AA Case MPU Board 7 A i gt P Connector J3 on other side LonWork Display Cable I 3 ELT to Display J A Connector J6 on other side Future Board Xx U Assembly S se Ethernet Cable Mounting Hardware Accessory Boards Notes 1 Moore 353 shown Installation of a Real Time Clock Configuration Backup board or Removable Configuration Board is similar in Moore 352P 2 RTC CB or RCB board mounts on the MPU Controller board when a Network board is not installed 3 Ethernet cable is installed only when an Ethernet board is installed Moore 353 only FIGURE 11 5 Accessory Board Installation and Replacement RTC CB and RCB Boards Refer to Figure 11 5 for board location and assembly hardware the RCB and RTC CB board mount in the same location and use the same hardware The board typically mounts on and electrically connects to either a LIL Network board or an Ethernet board If either of these boards is not installed the RTC CB board will mount directly on and electrically con
402. ontroller board rotate the pulser to display YES and press the STORE pushbutton This option is typically selected when a configuration is being transferred from one controller to another by moving the RTC CB or RCB board from one controller to another e To retain the configuration stored the MPU Controller board rotate the pulser to display NO and press the STORE pushbutton The configuration stored on the MPU Controller board will be the operating configuration and it will be copied to the RTC CB or RCB board when a change is made to the configuration Part number and serial MEM number labels J3 ii other side of board 025 U22 U17 T1 U16 U8 J1 8 FIGURE 11 6 LIL Network Board 11 18 March 2003 UM353 1 Maintenance 222 93 OG T1 Fix 2 je 5 d Ja 18 N U11 U12 A U14 Part number and 9 serial number labels u on other side of J1 board Install the Ethernet board on an MPU Controller board that has a lithium battery that lays against the board The Ethernet board can not be installed on a Controller board that has a battery that stands up from the board Refer to the Controller b
403. oops located at channels 8 13 and 18 Therefore it is necessary to configure ODC function blocks for these channels It is expected that later releases of the library will allow multiple loops up to maximum allowed Also data from additional loops can be obtained by using a combination of other library functions such as LIL_GBL LIL_NGBL and LIL_CMD 7 1 2 MYCROADVANTAGE Model 320 Driver MYCROADVANTAGE provides a LIL 320 driver that will communicate with stations on a Local Instrument Link LIL Standard predefined parameter tables for many LIL products e g Models 351 and 352 are within MYCROADVANTAGE to simplify configuration MYCROADVANTAGE release 3 32 does not include a Model 352P 353 354 predefined parameter table However when up to three control loops are to be configured in a Model 352P 353 or 354 use the Model 351 predefined parameter table and configure the ODC blocks in the loops to channels 8 13 and 18 This method will work since the loop data in the controller is the same as a 35 land is located at the same relative offsets as in a 351 Loops can also be configured individually Details on the configuration can be found the MYCROADVANTAGE user manual March 2003 7 1 Data Mapping UM353 1 Modbus Driver MYCROADVANTAGE provides a Modbus driver for communicating with up to 32 stations through a single COM port There are a few considerations when communicating with a Model 352P 353 or 354 using the Modbus driver
404. oore 353 Exploded View Modbus communication 15 standard and port RS485 half duplex at the rear terminals provides for network connection of up to 32 controllers e g Models 352P 353 354 354N and Procidia i pacTM to an operator workstation Human Machine Interface HMI or DCS enabling integration of controllers into a plant wide system A popular is the Procidia i station running i ware PC operator interface software A communication port RS232 on the underside of the Display Assembly is available for configuration and or debugging when using ijconfig the optional PC based Graphical Configuration Utility An optional I O Expander Board can be added to the base Moore 353 It includes direct thermocouple RTD and frequency inputs and additional I O for direct process measurement of temperature and frequency variables improving accuracy and control Available Expander board I O is listed below I O on MPU Controller Board I O on Expander Board Analog Inputs 1 2 and 3 Analog Input 4 Analog Outputs 1 and 2 Analog Output 3 Digital Inputs 1 and 2 Digital Inputs 3 and 4 Digital Outputs 1 and 2 Analog Inputs Universal 1 2 Digital Inputs Universal 1 2 Relay Outputs 1 and 2 1 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Introduction When even more I O is needed for multiple loop applications advanced control or batch sequencing a remote I O opt
405. op Controller FCO121 Cascade Loop Controller FCO122 Cascade Loop Controller with Operator Setpoint Limits Unless otherwise specified on the order FCO101 is installed at the factory Use the following procedure to change the factory configured option Refer to Figure 2 1 Configuration Road Map to move to and then through the selected FCO and to enter or edit parameter values 1 Press the ENTER EXIT CONF button LOOP will appear on the alphanumeric display Rotate the Pulser Knob until STATION appears on alphanumeric display Press the STEP DOWN button to display FCO LIB Press the STEP DOWN button to display FCO in the lower display Press the STEP DOWN button until the desired FCO number appears in numeric display Rotate the Pulser Knob to display the desired FCO number in the upper display Press the STORE button to load the new FCO oN Dw KR WN Edit the FCO as needed In addition to the material in this section refer to e Section 3 Function Blocks for details about configurable parameters e Section 4 Factory Configured Options for FCO diagrams and parameters e Sections 6 and 7 for Modbus LIL or Ethernet mapping e Section 9 Operation for operating controls and displays Where an FCO is not suitable a complete configuration can be designed to suit individual needs Section 4 can be used as a guide for documenting a user created or used edited configuration i config a PC based Graphical Configuration Utility can be used
406. or any hidden damage that may or may not have been accompanied by exterior carton damage If it is found that some items have been damaged or are missing notify the Process Instrumentation Division of Siemens Energy and Automation immediately and provide full details In addition damages must be reported to the carrier with a request for their on site inspection of the damaged item and its shipping carton 1 4 3 Storage If a controller is to be stored for a period prior to installation review the environmental specifications in Section 14 Model Designation and Specifications As shipped the MPU Controller board Real Time Clock Jumper W7 or W8 is set to maximize battery life If the jumper has been set to enable Hot Warm Start or to confirm that the jumper is properly set refer to Section 11 Maintenance and set the jumper for storage March 2003 1 7 Introduction UM353 1 1 4 4 Typical Shipment Contents The items listed below are those typically included in a shipment and are subject to change 1 2 Moore 353 Process Automation Controller model number per order qty 1 Power Input and Range Resistor Kit PN 16354 30 qty 1 DESCRIPTION QUANTITY Resistor 2500 0 1 3W WW Crimp On Connector Kit Installation Instruction Mounting Clip Kit no part number qty 1 Contents 2 Mounting Clips and 2 8 32 x 1 Screws see the Parts List at back of this manual for part numbers I O Expander Board Kits PN16353 5
407. ould be changed one parameter at a time and then verified before writing the next parameter i e for Modbus use command 06 and not command 16 and LIL use a single parameter send The change to each parameter will take approximately 1 to 2 seconds each 2 IP Address format nnn nnn nnn nnn 1 2 3 4 default 192 168 0 2 3 IP Mask format nnn nnn nnn nnn 1 2 3 4 default 255 255 255 0 4 IP Gateway format nnn nnn nnn nnn 1 2 3 4 default is 192 168 0 1 5 A major software Rev of 0 no software included and a hardware type of 0 not installed March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping 7 2 2 Station String Data 8 bit ASCII Char 2 Word Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL STAG R Station Tag 12 ASCII Char 40101 40106 2 2 7 CFNR R Configuration File Name Reduced 8 ASCII Char n a 2 9 12 CFN R Configuration File Name 20 ASCII Char 40107 40116 7 2 7 12 SN R Station Serial No 8 ASCII 0 40117 40120 4 2 4 5 99999999 Spares 0 0000 40121 40199 7 2 3 Station Coil Data 1 bit Code R W Description Range Coil MB C P LIL ASE R 1 Active Station Event 1 0 00001 3 1 0 SEN R W 1 Station Event Not 1 0 00002 3 1 1 FSB R 1 Flashing Station Bargraph 1 0 00003 3 1 2 SDV R 1 Station Database Valid 1 0 00004 3 1 3 CCL R Config Change Counter LSB bit 1 0 n a 3 1 4 R Config Change Counter MSB bit 1 0 n a 3 1 5
408. output loop tag block tag output Rev 4 Input variables and are shown in the numeric display using the engineering UNITS and the preferred DPP of the range pointer The Total from the BATOT will also be displayed when configured within the BATOT block If a value is greater than allowed by the DPP parameter the decimal point will be shifted to allow the display to show the full number until it exceeds the maximum available digits at which time it will indicate over range When input U1 or U2 goes high 1 the 8 character user status U STATUS will be displayed as configured by the status priority U_ PRIOR A priority of 0 will disable that status function setting the bits in the status word to 0 See Section 9 Operation for a description of display actions using priorities 1 to 5 The horizontal bargraph can be selected as direct or reverse acting This feature allows it to always indicate an OPEN valve when fully lit The labels on the basic faceplate are fixed but paste on labels can be used to change the indications The V NET AC parameter allows the Lx VI network parameter to be set for direct or reverse action This enables the valve bar on the HMI to operate similar to the valve bar on the faceplate The left and right bar labels should be set accordingly e g Left amp Right CLOSE An operator display must be configured to map controller loop data to network data Loop ne
409. output to 20 00 mA 15 Press STORE 16 For verification perform the following steps 1 Press STEP UP button and rotate Pulser Knob to select CAL VIEW parameter 2 Press STEP DOWN button to enter VALUE level 3 Rotate Pulser Knob to set display to 0 0 Output current should be 4 00 mA 4 Rotate Pulser Knob to set 100 0 Output current should be 20 00 mA March 2003 12 3 Calibration UM353 1 17 If all points have been calibrated and verified press EXIT button to leave calibration mode and enter operation mode If additional function blocks are to be calibrated and verified press STEP UP button to enter FUNCTION BLOCK level Perform steps 2 19 for each function block If security is enabled the exiting the configuration mode will lock out the calibration mode until the security combination is re entered 12 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Circuit Description 13 0 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This section provides a block diagram level circuit description of the Moore 353 13 1 OVERVIEW Controller hardware architecture is shown in Figure 13 1 Notice that all major plug in assemblies interact with the Controller Board The Display Assembly is used for operation and configuration The MPU based Controller Board performs many of the controller s signal processing and process control functions in addition to overseeing internal operations The Controller Board s on board power supply furnishes DC operating voltages to all
410. p tag block tag output The process range pointer parameter points to a function LINPlulT El INPUTF0 Loop tag block tag block that has range scaling such as the analog input that INPUT A loop tag block tag output Exec Seq H 001 to 250 is providing the process variable signal This enables the controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the range of the process input If this parameter is not configured the controller will use a range scaling of 0 00 100 00 POWER UP During a warm or cold start the output will be initialized to the value of the MINSCALE parameter and all dynamic states will be initialized to their current input value on the first scan cycle ID Controller Process P Engineering INput units v d scaling tps to ae DG PME ENG UNITS Y Lead Lag NE lt S 1 Limit A gt Y tis 1 P PE gt scaling put ute A 1 Output 1 01 scaling FB Setpoint i Rance pointer inverse scaling Feedback v Auto lt Absolute Value Abolute Error BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 57 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 55 LL Lead Lag LL function blocks provide bo
411. pa NOIYES VES fu ti bl k h h li h 1 DEViation during Autotune S AUTO 2 5 to 25 0 AUTO nction block that has range scaling Such as an analog 9 H Y S HYSteresis during Autotune S AUTO 0 5 to 10 0 AUTO input that is the process variable This enables the 9 T E P output STEP on first Autotune S 5 to 40 10 AT DYNAMic settings S Fast Medium Slo M controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the A MESSE AT RESET i inii BP ONES AES process range If this parameter is not configured the POS T A T POST Autotune Transfer 5 NOYES 1 P INPUT P loop tag block tag output null controller will use a range scaling of 0 00 100 00 INPUTS INPUT loop tag block tag output null LNPUT A INPUT A loop tag block tag output null Input 1 when changed from low 0 to high 1 or from INPUT INPUT I H loop tag block tag output null high to low will cause the controller to initialize i e Exec Seq No 001 to 250 eliminate any proportional gain action during that cycle This can be used to prevent bumping the output when changes are made to the setpoint using a switch block POWER UP During a warm or cold power up the output will be initialized to MINSCALE and all dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan
412. phical Configuration Software the parameter values are determined by the download which includes the entire block configuration The PRSEQ can store from to 9 recipes Each recipe will have the same number of steps and groups but all of the parameters can be configured differently Two new inputs have been added in firmware 1 30 RN Recipe Number and LR Load Recipe Input RN will accept a recipe number and input LR on a positive transition will select the recipe number which is the RN input The RN input will round the number to the nearest integer value A recipe number that is out of range will have no effect and the current recipe will remain The recipe number set by the RN and LR inputs will be retained during HOT and WARM starts During a COLD start the recipe will revert to the recipe set by the configuration parameter Recipe Input SN will accept a step number and input GS on a positive PROGRAM SEQUENCER PRSEQ ESN 000 Track Variable Analog Output Track Command fs gt Step Number zi gt i SEQUENCER Step gt Remaining Time Goto Step gt Current Recipe Step Number SN Step Pulse Hold Steps Completed Reset Recipe Number IRN Load Recipe 153 Input n0 Optional Output n0 Discrete Inputs Ouputs Input nF 16 Groups of 16 Output nF
413. pical 6 Ground Bus An external user supplied ground bus can ease connection of multiple grounds particularly when twinaxial cable shields are to be grounded 8 12 March 2003 UM353 1 Installation 8 4 2 Analog Signal Input Wiring 4 20 mA 1 5 Vdc and mV Moore 353 analog signal input terminals are connected to software function blocks AIN and AINU within the controller Table 8 1 correlates function blocks and input terminals These terminals will accept several input signal types with the appropriate wiring and components A current input signal to an AIN or AINU function block must be converted to 1 5 Vdc by a range resistor INPUT TYPE FUNCTION BLOCKS RANGE RESISTOR FIGURE 4 20 mA 2500 8 9 and 8 10 AINI AINUI and 2 3 750 8 11A 1 5 Vdc AINI 4 Not Required 8 9 and 8 10 Millivolt AINUI and 2 Not Required 8 11 Notes 1 Function blocks AIN4 AINU1 and AINU2 are available only when Expander Board 1 installed 2 Range resistors listed are supplied in Installation Kits For other current values select a range resistor that will provide a 1 5 Vdc input For example for 10 50 mA install a 1000 range resistor Crimp on connectors are provided for use when a range resistor and a signal input wire are to be inserted in the same connector terminal connector should also be used when two wires of significantly different gauges would otherwise be inserted in a single connector termina
414. power but prior to the expiration of the warm timer the station will execute a Hot Start If the station powers up after the warm timer expiration but prior to the expiration of the cold timer the station will execute a warm start In all other cases the station will execute a cold start The adjustable range of these timers is 0 18000 seconds for firmware versions prior to than 1 30 and is 0 999999 seconds for versions 1 30 and higher IMPORTANT The Real Time Clock jumper must be set for the warm and hot timers to function See the Maintenance section for details on this jumper 1 Changed function in 2 40 0 Lock 1 Read Only 2 Write Only 3 Total Lock Out 2 Available with Firmware version 1 30 or later When using Modbus Network communications the WATCHDOG timer can be set to a value other than 0 to cause a high WD output from the loop operator display function block when the station does not receive a computer command within the timer period A value of 0 disables the watchdog A Modbus communications DELAY time can entered for both the Display Assembly configuration port and LIL Modbus terminals NCA NCB front and rear ports respectively This may be necessary when the station responds too quickly for the modem Modbus masters may handle IEEE floating point numbers in a different word order The IEEE REV parameter allows matching the station to the Modbus master in use The CONFG LO Configuration Lockout parameter V2 40
415. q No 001 to 250 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 63 NOT NOT Logic NOT function blocks perform a logical NOT on input A Any unused input will be set low 0 NOT Input A Output 1 gt X gt 01 Input Output 1 j INPUT INPUT A loop tag block tag output EIS Exec Seq No 001 to 250 BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 62 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 64 ODA Operator Display for Analog indication amp alarming V2 2 ODA blocks are one of five operator displays that are used on a one per loop basis to configure the local operator display functions and Operator Display for Analog indication amp alarming network parameters See the i ware PC faceplate on the next page Comm m Alarm A P1 The block will display up to four process variables P1 to P4 in both Process Range 1 RI BAFI analog bargraph and digital form Two alarms are associated with NP eh mz Operator Display each process variable They can be configured as HI or LO alarms Process2 2 Analog Indication Alam A P3 Each alarm function has associated block outputs that are high 1 Process Range 3 RG Alarming Alarm B P3 when the alarm is active Output LE 1s high 1 when a loop event MEE is active Output SE is high when a station error is active LOOP Processa pula s Loop Event parameters are used to index reads and writes to Modbus and LIL network parame
416. quires firmware V2 2 or higher and R TC CB board ETHERNET Ethernet Communications requires firmware 2 4 and Ethernet board 2 2 STATION HARDWARE BLOCKS Function blocks that are available during configuration depend on the hardware installed in the controller These blocks can be selected within a LOOP but as fixed resources once selected are no longer available The left column shows the minimum and maximum quantities of each block and the right column shows the quantity for each circuit board AINJI 4 Analog Input MPU Controller Board 3 I O Expander Board 1 AINU 2 Analog Input Universal I O Expander Board 2 AOUTI 3 Analog Output MPU Controller Board 2 I O Expander Board 1 DIN 4 Digital Input MPU Controller Board 3 I O Expander Board 1 DINU 2 Digital Input Universal I O Expander Board 2 DOUT 2 Digital Output MPU Controller Board 2 2 Relay Output I O Expander Board 2 2 3 LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS The following blocks are available as needed within each loop in the quantities indicated the quantity is one if no number is shown Some blocks e g A M BIAS can be used only once within each LOOP Others e
417. r 1999 419001 1 100 V 2 0 RTTOIM R W Month 1 12 419002 1 101 V 2 0 RTTOID R W Day 1 31 419003 1 102 V 2 0 RTTOIHR R W Hour 0 23 419004 1 103 V 2 0 RTTOIMN R W Minute 0 59 419005 1 104 V 2 0 015 R W Second 0 59 419006 1 105 V 2 0 RTTOIDA R W Day 0000 0000 0SMT WTFS 419007 1 106 V 2 0 RTTO2Y R W Year 1999 419008 2 100 V 2 0 RTT02M R W Month 1 12 419009 2 101 V 2 0 RTT02D R W Day 1 31 419010 2 102 V 2 0 RTTO2HR R W Hour 0 23 419011 2 103 V 2 0 RTTO2MN R W Minute 0 59 419012 2 104 V 2 0 025 R W Second 0 59 419013 2 105 V 2 0 RTTO2DA R W Day 0000 0000 0SMT WTFS 419014 2 106 V 2 0 RTTO3Y R W Year 1999 419015 3 100 V 2 0 RTT03M R W Month 1 12 419016 3 101 V 2 0 RTT03D R W Day 1 31 419017 3 102 V 2 0 RTTO3HR R W Hour 0 23 419018 3 103 V 2 0 RTTO3MN R W Minute 0 59 419019 3 104 V 2 0 RTTO3SC R W Second 0 59 419020 3 105 V 2 0 0000 0000 0SMT WTFS 419021 3 106 2 0 7 46 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Sequencer Time amp Analog Configurations Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL 5001 Step 1 Time Period min Real 420001 1 150 151 5001 Step 1 Analog End Point Real 420003 1 152 153 S002TIM R W Step 2 Time Period min Real 420005 2 150 151 5002 R W Step 2 Analog End Point Real 420007 2 152 153 S003TIM R W Step 3 Time Period min Real 420009 3 150 151 S003AEP R W Step 3 Analog End Point Real 420011 3 152 153 S004TIM R W Step 4 Time Period min
418. r DISP is set to YES 6 character Trip 4 Alarm 1 maximum name e g GAL 1S entered in configuration Tie A teana Alam under TOT UNIT to identify the totalizer units Input S asserted high 1 will stop the integrator action Time Base 1 sec 2 min 3 hr 4 day 5 wk 2 Input R will cause the integrator function to reset to the i T T TOTalizer UNITS 65 6 Char nul INITial VALue 5 2 2 2 2 Real 0 0 initial value INIT VAL These inputs do not affect the AICIT acting Me MES PuLse output The integrator output is summed with the Z DO zero Drop Out 9 Real 00 P U L AS T Power Up LAST 5 NO YES YES INITial VALue entered in configuration to provide the 1 PRESET1 gre count total The INIT VAL is used as the total when the 2 PRESET2 5 Real 0 0 i PUL SCIAL SCALing 5 2 1 0 is reset pisPlay NO YES YES QUICK SET presets s NO YES YES DIR ACT set to YES will cause the integrator to increase Q S Quick Set presets Dec Pt Pos 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INPUT _ INPUT EC loop tag block tag output its output while NO will cause the integrator output to INPUT INPUTA loop tegiblock fag output decrease When INIT VAL i
419. r these agencies are responsible for repairs made by the user Copyright 2003 Siemens Energy amp Automaton Inc All rights reserved
420. rced 0 normal R W 1 Mode of Output 1 forced 0 normal R W 1 J Mode of Output 09 ISxx Mode of Output OA ISxx Mode of Output OB ISxx Mode of Output OC ISxx Mode of Output OD ISxx Mode of Output OE 1 O normal_ DISxx RWG _ ISxx Mode of Output OF forced O normal_ DISxx _ 00 02 04 021 Mode of Output 06 I forced O normal DISxx Wa 06 ME 08 me OA OB 06 OD O J 1 Writes are made using a parameter data send command CMD 9 to the entire word 7 40 March 2003 UM353 1 Data Mapping Discrete Input Remote xx Forced State Word of Function Block Outputs DISxxF 0 DISxx Output O0 Forced State I highO low DISxx 00 6 DISxx Output Forced State I high O low DISxx R 06 7 DISxx Output O7 Forced State I high O low Dix 07 8 DISxx Output O8 Forced State 1 highOdow DISxx R 08 9 DISxx Output O9 Forced State I high O low Dix R 09 11 DISxx Output OB Forced State l high0 low DISxx R 13 DISxx Output OD Forced State l high0 ow DISxx OD Discrete Output Remote Normal State Word of Function Block Inputs DOSxxN 0 DOSxx Input 0 Normal State I high 0 low DOSxx Rr TENE 4 pose puma
421. rch 2003 UM353 1 Model Designation and Specifications Type US NBS126 0 003902 Range Limits sss 185 C to 613 C 300 F to 1135 F ACCUFACy anun 0 4 Software Output Analog configurable F K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 04 C C Type JIS C 1604 0 003916 Range Limits esses 185 C to 610 C 300 F to 1130 F ACCUFaCy 0 4 C Software Output Type Analog configurable C F R K Ambient Temperature Effect 0 04 C C Slidewire Resistance Range 500 5000 Software Output Type Analog slidewire 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 Ambient Temperature Effect 0 01 C C Ohms Resistance Range 0 5000 Q Software Output Analog ohms ACCUTACY rani 0 1 Ambient Temperature Effect 0 01 C C Millivolt Narrow Range 19 0 to 19 0 mVdc ACCURACY 5 0 uV Ambient Temperature Effect 1 0 uv C Wide Range 30 0 to 77 mVdc 8 0 uV Ambient Temperature Effect 2 5 uV C Software Output Type Analog millivolts Ana
422. rch 2003 7 23 Data Mapping UM353 1 Analog Indicator ODA V2 2 Code LZPIAA LZPIAN LZPIAE LZPIBA LZPIBN LZP2AA LZP2AN LZP2AE LZP2BA L P2BN L P2BE L OS1 L PB1 L PB2 L PB3 L P3AA L P3AN L P3AE L P3BA L P3BN L P3BE L P4AA L P4AN L P4AE L P4BA L P4BN L P4BE L OS L CC LZNA R W R R W R W R R W R W R R W R W R R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Description Process 1 Alarm A is Active 1 Process 1 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 1 Alarm A is Enabled 1 Process 1 Alarm is Active 1 Process 1 Alarm is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 1 Alarm is Enabled 1 Process 2 Alarm A is Active 1 Process 2 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 2 Alarm A is Enabled 1 Process 2 Alarm B is Active 1 Process 2 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged 1 Process 2 Alarm B is Enabled 1 Alarms Out of Service PB1SW Input MD V1 3 PB2SW Input MD V1 3 PB3SW Input MD V1 3 Process 3 Alarm A is Active 1 Process 3 Alarm is Not Acknowledged Process 3 Alarm A is Enabled Process 3 Alarm B is Active Process 3 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged Process 3 Alarm B is Enabled Process 4 Alarm is Active Process 4 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged Process 4 Alarm A is Enabled Process 4 Alarm B is Active Process 4 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged Process 4 Alarm B is Enabled 1 Alarms Out
423. rch 2003 7 47 Data Mapping UM353 1 7 3 14 BITS BITS BITS BITS BIT BITS LIL Alarm Type Word ATW See O O 0 11 0 1 12 through 15 changes to these bits will be ignored OF OW See O 0 0 alarm action is required 1 HIGH Alarm 0 LOW Alarm 1 HIGH DEVIATION Alarm 0 LOW DEVIATION Alarm 1 ABSOLUTE DEVIATION Alarm 0 OUT OF RANGE Alarm I no alarm action is required 0 1 alarm deadband 0 5 alarm deadband 1 0 alarm deadband 5 0 alarm deadband 5 0 0 0 seconds delay time IN 0 4 seconds delay time IN 0 1 0 seconds delay time IN 2 0 seconds delay time IN 0 5 0 seconds delay time IN 1 15 0 seconds delay time IN 0 30 0 seconds delay time IN 1 60 0 seconds delay time IN 8 0 0 0 seconds delay time OUT 1 0 4 seconds delay time OUT 0 1 0 seconds delay time OUT 2 0 seconds delay time OUT 0 5 0 seconds delay time OUT 15 0 seconds delay time OUT 0 30 0 seconds delay time OUT 1 60 0 seconds delay time OUT ringback option 15 not required RINGBACK 7 48 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Installation 8 0 INSTALLATION This section describes installation of a Moore 353 Process Automation Controller Topics include installation considerations and mechanica
424. rd node node No gt x SNVT_lev_percent nv SNVT lev percent 4 pi Sra 01 YES nv x binding node u nv XTR Quality Test gt Qs X03125P1 BLOCK DIAGRAM March 2003 3 21 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 12 ALARM Alarm ALARM function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis and contain four 4 alarms associated with Input P normally the process input to the controller function block Each alarm can be configured as NONE HI LO HDEV LDEV DEV and OR Deviation type alarms compare Input P with Input D the deviation input normally the loop setpoint i e the setpoint to Alarms have priorities 1 to 5 with 1 the highest and are reported to the operator faceplate in order of priority first and ALARM 4 Alarm 4 Power Up ENabled s NO YES Alarm 1 PRIORity s 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Alarm 2 PRIORIty s 2 1 2 3 4 5 5 Alarm 3 PRIORity 5 1 2 9 4 5 Alarm 1 Status Alarm 2 Status Alarm 3 Status Alarm 4 Status YES 3 3 3 controller function block having the same range as Input G RanGe PoinTeR 5 0 LI M Alarm 1 LIMIT 5 Real 110 0 P An Out of Range OR alarm compares the process input LUM Alarm 2 LIMIT s Real 10 0 NL LI M Real 100 0 with the range limits specified by the range pointer parameter MMi Alama a
425. rd firmware version 1 30 and higher Code R W Description Range Register MB LIL AIRMN R ATDO1 MIN SCALE Real 48001 n a AIRMX R ATD01 MAX SCALE Real 48003 n a A1DPP R ATDO1 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48005 n a A1EU R ATDO1 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48006 n a 1 R ATD01 Year V2 0 5 1997 48009 n a 1 R ATD01 Month V2 0 5 1 12 48010 n a AIDY R ATD01 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48011 n a 1 R ATD01 Hour V2 0 5 0 23 48012 n a AIMN R ATDO1 Minute V2 0 5 0 59 48013 n a R ATD01 Second V2 0 5 0 59 48014 n a AIST R W ATDOI Sample Time x0 01 min 1 48000 48015 n a AISTC R ATDO1 Sample Time Complete 0 1000 x 1 48016 n a AIDI R ATD01 Data 1 latest 0 100 128 3968 48017 n a AID2 R ATD01 Data 2 0 100 128 3968 48018 n a A1D3 R ATD01 Data 3 0 100 128 3968 48019 n a A1D168 R ATD01 Data 168 0 100 128 3968 48184 n a A1D169 R ATD01 Data 169 0 100 128 3968 48185 n a A1D170 R ATD01 Data 170 0 100 128 3968 48186 n a Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A1D1 through A1D170 to 0 A2RMN R ATD02 MIN SCALE Real 48201 n a A2RMX R ATD02 MAX SCALE Real 48203 n a A2DPP R ATD02 Decimal Point Position 0 5 48205 n a A2EU R ATD02 Engineering Units 6 ASCII Char 48206 n a A2YR R ATD02 Year V2 0 5 1997 48209 n a 2 ATD02 Month 2 0 5 1 12 48210 A2DY R ATD02 Day V2 0 5 1 31 48211 n a A2HR R ATD02 Hour V2 0 5 0 23 48212 n a A2MN R ATD02 Minute V2 0 5 0 59 48213 n a A2SC R ATD02 Second V
426. re REMOVAL I Remove input power from Controller 2 Remove Display Assembly as described in previous section 3 If present disconnect the Ethernet cable from J4 on the Ethernet board 4 Grasp the loop in the front edge of the MPU Controller board and pull the board straight out of the case NOTE If the board is to be shipped or stored compare the board at hand to Figures 11 2 and 11 3 and set W7 or W8 as shown in the appropriate figure 5 Remove any installed accessory boards refer to Section 11 5 5 and Figure 11 5 11 14 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Maintenance 6 Place the MPU Controller board in a static shielding bag INSTALLATION 1 While wearing a grounded wrist strap remove MPU Controller board from static shielding bag 2 Check and change jumper settings as needed See Figures 11 2 and 11 3 for jumper locations and set W7 or W8 as shown Set W2 and W4 as described in Section 11 5 5 Accessory Boards 3 Fasten needed accessory boards to the MPU Controller board Refer to Section 11 5 5 4 Insert the MPU Controller board into the case and carefully guide the connector end of the board until it mates with the connector at the back of the case Only when the connectors are mated should additional force be applied to seat the board 5 Ifan Ethernet board is installed connect the free end of the Ethernet cable from inside the case to the Ethernet connector J4 on the board See Section 11 5 6 as necessary 6 Disco
427. re Versions 1 3 and 2 0 through 3 0 These enhancements appear mainly in Sections 2 and 3 They are identified by the phrase in firmware 1 3 and higher or the two digit firmware version e g V1 3 or V2 4 in text Keep your controller firmware current by subscribing to updates The latest firmware version often provides performance options e g additional function blocks parameter selections not available in an earlier version Function blocks have three types of inputs outputs digital analog and special data structure 1 Arrows with dark shading and white letters are digital outputs are displayed as 0 and 1 in the VIEW mode when using the local faceplate Digital outputs are typically used to designate function block status logical outputs and on off function block outputs Some examples are e Function block status status IS ES SI status AS NA MS ES SS and Quality Status QS e Logical Outputs AND 01 OR 01 NOR 01 or NOT 01 e On Off function blocks One Shot Timer 01 Retentive On Timer 01 Rising Edge Trigger 01 Alarms A1 A2 A3 and A4 and Comparator 01 2 Arrows with medium shading and black letters are analog Internally they are REAL floating point numbers and outputs of these types will be displayed in the VIEW mode when using the local faceplate with the decimal point located to allow greatest resolution between 0 00000 and 999999 or 0 0000 and 99999 Numbers out
428. rect range MIN INT and MAX INT values must be entered g g whenever a DATA TYP is changed Output OR contains the range scaling for the floating point block output O1 The OR output is a special data type that includes the MINSCALE MAXSCALE DPP and the ENGUNITS and can be connected to other blocks having a Range RG PTR input Range scaling information can be automatically obtained from the source of the data over Ethernet if the device has the scaling information packaged with the data This is a feature provided by AOE function blocks from other Siemens MOORE controllers AOE blocks are defined by using the Modbus Registers from table 3 below If this feature is not available the default setting of the RANGE parameter MAN should be used In this case range parameters are entered manually When the auto range feature is used the range in the AIE block may be out of sync for several seconds if on line changes are made to the AOE range The IP ADRES parameter is used to configure the IP address of the source device The MB ADRES parameter allows a Modbus address to be configured When connecting to other Siemens MOORE controllers the Modbus address 15 set to 1 In some cases other devices may use a different address or when going through a Modbus TCP IP gateway a Modbus network may have multiple devices each having a unique address The REG TYP parameter allows setting the source register as a Holding Register or an Input Register For many M
429. register 40041 This register contains the Modbus Index for the loop that can be configured with these extended parameters A small number of these parameters have also been mapped in the areas listed within the actual loop area for those Masters that cannot access the extended area In addition there are a number of registers reserved for the mappings of Modbus registers used in the Peer to Peer functionality of the Ethernet function blocks Sequencer Mask Configurations x10001 x18000 Real Time Trip Block Configurations x19001 19021 Sequencer Time amp Analog Configurations x20001 x20999 Timer Function Block Configurations x21001 x21009 Reserved Modbus Ethernet Block Register x29001 x29019 Reserved Modbus Ethernet Analog Inputs Static Data x30001 x30352 Reserved Modbus Ethernet Analog Outputs Static Data x30353 x30608 Reserved Modbus Ethernet Digital Inputs Static Data x30609 x30704 Reserved Modbus Ethernet Coil Inputs Static Data x30705 x30832 Reserved Modbus Ethernet Analog Inputs Dynamic Data x30833 x30896 Reserved Modbus Ethernet Digital Inputs Dynamic Data x30897 x30928 Reserved Modbus Ethernet Coil Inputs Dynamic Data x30929 x30960 Reserve
430. rete Output LIL 2 2 March 2003 UM353 1 Configuration Overview 2 5 ETHERNET DATA I O FUNCTION BLOCKS These function blocks are available in the quantities indicated within a controller when the optional Ethernet Network board is installed These blocks can be selected for use within individual loops but block names are unique station wide 1 01 32 Analog Input Ethernet V3 0 CWE01 32 Coil Write Ethernet V3 0 AOE01 32 Analog Output Ethernet V2 4 DIE0 32 Discrete Input Ethernet V3 0 AWE01 32 Analog Write Ethernet V3 0 DOE01 32 Digital Output Ethernet V2 4 01 32 Coil Input Ethernet V3 0 DWE01 32 Digital Write Ethernet V3 0 2 6 LonWorks REMOTE FUNCTION BLOCKS These function blocks are available in the quantities indicated within a controller when the optional LonWorks Remote I O board is installed LonWorks is available for use with Models 352P 353 and 354 controllers These blocks can be selected within individual loops but block names will be unique station wide This allows LonWorks network managers that identify variables using the block name within an individual node to be unique For example if LOOP01 uses AIP01 and 02 and an AIP block is selected in 2 the name will be AIPO3 Detailed information on the use of LonWorks can be found in Section 5 Model 352P only Select LonWorks by setting the Option 3 I O Jumper AIP01 25 Analog Input lev Percent DIS 6 Digital Input
431. reviously installed a controller with 1 30 firmware the Network Manager variable list will include the new 1 30 variables The controller however will reject an attempt to bind them 5 2 March 2003 UM3 53 1 LonWorks Communications Suggested Actions 4 When upgrading MPU Controller firmware 1 Generate a report of all network bindings 2 Uninstall the controller node from a network 3 Upgrade the controller firmware 4 Install the controller node 5 Refer to the above report and bind all network variables Note If the controller has already been upgraded it can still be uninstalled with the current version of the MetaVision 3 0x Network Manager but uninstalling prior to upgrading is recommended Other Network Managers may not allow this 5 Once a LonWorks option board is used in a 1 30 or higher controller and is uninstalled and removed from service mark the board as 1 30 firmware only March 2003 5 3 LonWorks Communications UM353 1 5 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Network Communications 6 0 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS This section provides an overview of the data that can be obtained from the station using Modbus LIL or Ethernet which provides Modbus over Ethernet protocol In the Modbus over Ethernet protocol all listed Modbus items are available but are embedded in the Modbus Ethernet protocol frame Refer to Section 7 for detailed list of the actual data 6 1 MODBUS DATA MAPPING Modbus is a mas
432. ription Range Register MB C P LIL Process 1 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40201 10 1 n l L P2I R Process2 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40202 10 1 n 1 1 L P3I R Process 3 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40203 10 1 n 2 1 L P4I R Process 4 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40204 10 1 3 1 L SW1 R W Status Word 1 see SW1 see coils n 4 1 L SW2 R W Status Word 2 see SW1 see coils n 5 1 Discrete Indicator ODD V2 2 Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L DISW R W Discrete Input Status Word see L DISW see coils n 1 L DSSW R W Discrete State Status Word see L DSSW see coils 1 1 L DOSW R W Discrete Output Status Word see L DOSW see coils 2 1 L SW R W Status Word see L SW see coils n 3 1 Discrete Indicator ODP V2 2 Code Description Range Register MB C P LIL L SW1 R W Status Word 1 see L SW1 see coils n 1 L SW2 R W Status Word 2 see LZSW2 see coils 1 1 2003 Data Mapping UM353 1 7 3 2 Variable Loop Integer Data Controller ODC Code R W Description Range Register MB C P LIL L TSPI R W Target Setpoint 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 40451 30 1 1 2 L HLI R W Setpoint High Limit 3 3 to 103 3 0 0FFF 4
433. rnet Section 8 Installation contains drawings and steps detailing mechanical and electrical installation Electrical connections to the controller are identified and numerous wiring diagrams are included Section 9 Local Faceplate Operation describes and illustrates the Display Assembly s operator controls and displays Use of these for on line operation for configurations and for autotuning is described Section 10 Controller and System Test has procedures for testing the controller and the installation Section 11 Maintenance lists the tools and test equipment to service a controller It also has preventive maintenance and servicing procedures including error codes Assembly replacement steps are included as are detailed jumper selection criteria and Jumper setting steps Section 12 Calibration provides step by step procedures for calibration of analog input and output circuits Section 13 Circuit Description furnishes a block diagram level description of the controller s circuits Section 14 Model Designation and Specifications shows controller model numbers a list of accessories mechanical electrical and environmental specifications and a list of current agency approvals Section 15 Abbreviations and Acronyms is a convenient reference for new users that explains many abbreviations and acronyms appearing in this manual IMPORTANT Save this User s Manual It should be available to those installing configuring oper
434. rollet mee E pi Pese e Ue RR nd 3 81 ii March 2003 UM353 1 Contents 3 2 78 PID PID Control ets sa aT 3 83 3 279 PIDAG PIDAG Controller tetti ettet eee 3 85 3 2 80 PRSEQ Program 5 o n a rhet tone u qA 3 87 3 2 81 OHD Quickset Hold ette E ied 3 89 3 2 82 ERR ER RID NE 3 90 3 2 83 Repeat Cycle Timers 4 eee dede dete AETHERE ARES 3 9 3 22 54 REM Rate Limiter V3 20 u y deti eei i e e i ei he eges 3 92 3 2 85 Retentive On Timer suited e ee eie eene ide redire bete 3 93 3 2 86 ROUT Relay Outputs u T TUSUNI ASI tenete uU nnne 3 93 32 T RSE RS ElpzElOp eee ert Su ec ee EE 3 94 3 2 88 Rising Edge Trigger eee nennen 3 94 3 2 89 RTT Real Time clock Trip V2 0 enne 3 94 32 90 SCE uter TR eee P eel te wie ein eee Piatt eet en 3 95 3 2 91 SEL Signal Selectot edocti erede E E 3 95 3 2 92 SETPT retro iet tede RU Re 3 96 32 03 SIN SSINB 5 aan Rt ne 3 97 3 2 94 SPLIM Setpomt Limit aen n HERE Vitres ds 3 98 3295S SRF SR Elip Flop ettet ette Hehe eet 3 99 3 2 96 SRT Square Root innrede Oa e e ebbe Sea ere Ped e e EE 3 99 3 2 0 HSUB gt sSu
435. rsonal computer PCOM Phase Communication FB PD PD Controller FB PG proportional gain PID PID Controller FB proportional integral derivative PIDAG PIDAG Controller FB proportional integral derivative adaptive gain PRSEQ Program Sequencer PTR pointer Q quality Quickset Hold FB QS quick set quality status QSPI Queued Serial Peripheral Interface R reset Rankine RCB Removable Configuration Board RCT Repeat Cycle Timer FB RD received data Rev revision RG range RLM Rate Limiter FB RN recipe number ROT Retentive On Timer FB ROUT Relay Output FB RSF RS Flip Flop FB RT remaining time RTD resistance temperature detector RTG Rising Edge Trigger FB S setpoint set SCL Scaler FB SEN sensor SB step backward SEL Signal Selector FB SETPT Setpoint FB SF step forward SIN Sine FB SL setpoint limit SLTA Serial Link Talk Adapter SN step number SPLIM Setpoint Limit FB SQ square root SR start ramp SRF SR Flip Flop FB SRT Square Root FB SS stainless steel standby synchronization ST status STA station STATN station SUB Subtraction FB subtract SW switch TAN Tangent FB TC thermocouple track command TD time derivative TH Track amp Hold FB TI time integral TIM timer TO tracked output TOT totalizer TSW Transfer Switch FB
436. rst cycle the autotuner will adjust the step to keep the process within the value of the DEV parameter On subsequent autotune exercises the step will use the value computed from the previous exercise unless the AT RESET parameter is set to YES or the controller has been power cycled The dynamic response recommended by the autotuner can be configured as Fast Medium or Slow The Medium setting will normally provide a response that has no or little overshoot to a setpoint step response When the POST AT parameter is set to YES the control loop will be returned to Auto using the recommended tuning values unless a warning occurred during the test More details on autotuning can be found in the Operation section 3 86 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 80 PRSEQ Program Sequencer PRSEQ function blocks are available on one per loop basis They can be used to generate simple setpoint profile or complex batch sequence involving multiple discrete input and output logic operations as well as setpoint profiles The number of steps is configurable using the STEPS parameter and the number of discrete inputs outputs using the GROUPS parameter Sixteen 16 discrete inputs outputs are provided for each group If these parameters are increased after the function block is initially configured the values of all previously entered step parameters will be retained If however a configuration is downloaded from the PC based Gra
437. rtional integral controller and is one of five controller types that can be used on one per loop basis It uses external feedback to provide integral action that allows interaction with other function blocks or external devices such as pneumatic controllers shutoff switches PIDAG eliminates windup that can occur with other controller types Derivative action is provided when the parameter TD is non zero The controller includes an autotune feature that can be initiated from the operator faceplate using the quick TUNE feature When input is high 1 the controller will operate in the normal auto mode and when low 0 causes reset R to track F GE This forces the controller output to track the feedback within controller limits and allow the controller to be switched back to auto without bumping the output The process range pointer parameter input points to function block that has range scaling such as the analog input that is providing the process variable This enables the controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the process range If this parameter is not configured the controller will use a range scaling of 0 00 100 00 Input I when changed from low 0 to high 1 or from high to low will cause the controller to initialize 1 e eliminate any proportional gain action during that scan cycle This can be used to prevent bumping the output when changes are made to the setpoint using a switch block PIDAG CON
438. s ODP 1 1 Groupl PressPB2 1 0 write of I presses W 1 2 Group I Auto Man Switch 1 0 ODP 3 Group 1 Feedback Status 1 0 False ODP IR 1 4 Group2 PressPBI1 1 0 write of I presses W 1 5 Group2 PressPB2 1 0 write of I presses W 1 6 Group 2 Auto Man Switch 1 0 ODP 1 7 Group2 Feedback Status 1 0 False ODP IR 1 8 Group3 PressPB1 1 0 write of I presses PB W 1 9 Group3 PressPB2 1 0 write of I presses W 1 10 Group3 Auto ManSwith 1 0 Manul ODP 1 11 Group 3 Feedback Status 1 True O Fase IR 1 12 Group4 PressPBI 1 0 write of 1 presses PB w 1 13 Group4 PressPB2 1 0 write of I presses W 1 14 Group 4 Auto Man Switch 1 0 Manul ODP RW 1 15 Group 4 Feedback Status 1 True 0 False 1 Digital Indicator Loop Status Word L SW2 channel n 1 parameter I 0 Group5 PressPBI 1 0 write of I presses W 1 1 GroupS PressPB2 10 write of 1 presses opp W 2 Group 5 Auto Man Switch 1 0 Manul R W 1 3 Group 5 Feedback Status 1 True O False ODP IR 1 4 Group6 PressPB1 1 0 write of I presses W 1 5 Group6 PressPB2
439. s placeholder wildcard ellipsis indicates that subsequent characters do not affect selection 2 Case Safety Ground Wire to green screw at top center of rear terminal area 3 and NCB Connect LIL Twinaxial Cable or twisted pair wiring Refer to Section 8 5 for additional information 4 IOA and IOB LonWorks bus connections Twisted pair wiring is typical 5 Ground Bus An external user supplied ground bus can ease connection of multiple grounds particularly when twinaxial cable shields are to be grounded FIGURE 8 8 Rear Terminal Layout and Terminal Assignments Side Entry Connectors March 2003 Installation UM353 1 TABLE 8 1 Rear Terminal Assignments CONTROLLER BOARD EXPANDER BOARD sin _ Power DC ROUTInc Relay Output I Normally Closed Power AC Neutral DC N ROUTIc Relay Output 1 Common Network Communication A JT1no Relay Output 1 Open Network Communication B OUT2nc Relay Output 2 Normally Closed Transmitter Power 26Vdc ROUT2c Relay Output 2 Common Transmitter Station Common JT2no Relay Output 2 Normally Open Transmitter Power 26Vdc XMTR AOUT3 Analog Output 3 Digital Output 1 DOUTI AOUTC Analog Output 3 Common Digital Outputs 1 2 Common DOUTC DINU1 Digital Input Universal 1 Digital Output 2 DOUT2 DINUI Digital Input Universal 1 Digital Input 1 DINI DINU2 Digital Input Universal 2
440. s 14 11 14 9 Standard Mountinp x Ree RA 14 11 14 92 Enclosure Mountings c eee eee terc evt 14 11 14 9 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility essere 14 11 14 10 AGENCY APPROVALS sese ene at aS a AE EAA A 14 11 14 10 1 CSA Hazardous Locations Precautions 14 12 14 10 2 Special Conditions for Safe u u al eee nennen nennen 14 13 March 2003 v Contents UM353 1 15 0 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYLMS 15 1 WARRANTY SOFTWARE RELEASE MEMO LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS FIGURE AND TITLE PAGE 1 1 Moore 353 Exploded oo nA GR a ee REA notes 1 2 1 25 Ethernet Architecture Example n re eei e t e ree AT 1 4 2 1 Configuration Road Map eee decet etie Hei dunce ee eee ee Fee debe ded dde 2 6 PCONMULboeic mugg eim Maths 3 81 8 1 Direct Entry Connectors Cover Installation and 2 24 1020 02 0000000000000000000000000040005000500 8 4 8 2 Side Entry Connectors Removing a Connector eere 8 5 8 3 Panel Cutout DImenSiopSu u anun PEE ee ORC lagi ulluy is 8 5 8 4 Moore 353 Dimensions Direct Entry Connectors ener 8 6 8 5 Moore 353 Dimensions Side Entry Connectors essere eene nnne nre enn 8 6 8 6 Case
441. s corrupted Configuration on Board is not compatible with MPU Controller board firmware level This will occur only when the Board comes from a controller with a different MPU Controller board firmware level than the current controller and some functions in the configuration database cannot be supported by the current firmware Configuration on Board is not compatible with MPU Controller board database This will occur only when the Board comes from a controller with a higher MPU Controller firmware level than the current controller Controller firmware can convert a database created with a lower firmware revision level but not a higher level The controller powered down with a Board installed but could not identify it on power up The board may have been removed or the board ID may be corrupted The LonWorks circuit board currently installed is not compatible with the LonWorks configuration contained on the Board Power down and replace Board Press ENTER to ACK error Controller will go on line using configuration in MPU memory Power down and install a Board containing a valid configuration Press ENTER to ACK error Controller will go on line using configuration in MPU memory that will also be loaded into the Board Install MPU firmware compatible with the Board configuration Press ENTER to ACK error Controller will go on line using configuration in MPU memory The configuration will remain intact until a parameter 1
442. s needed 3 Pull the Assembly from the panel about 1 5 38 mm 4 Look behind the Assembly and locate the display cable then open the connector locking levers on the Assembly mounted connector to eject the cable mounted connector 5 Clean the bezel with a mild nonabrasive liquid cleaner and a soft lint free cloth do not use a paper towel Set the Display Assembly aside 6 Pull individual boards or a board stack from the case by grasping a board by an exposed edge Do not use the display cable to pull the MPU Controller board from the case Since the board edge connector mates with a connector at the back of the case a moderate pull will be needed to extract the board 7 Remove debris from case and board s using a soft brush or low velocity deionized air 8 Insert removed board or board stack into the case and carefully guide the connector end of the board until it mates with the connector at the back of the case Only when the connectors are mated should additional force be applied to seat the board 9 Hold the Display Assembly close to the open case and mate the display cable with the connector on the Display Assembly circuit board The cable is keyed 10 Align the Display Assembly with the case and finger tighten the two faceplate screws To ensure water tightness use a torque screwdriver set to 6 inch pounds to tighten the screws Alternatively use a screwdriver to tighten the screws until a slight resistance is felt the
443. s normally associated with failure to receive global data due to a LIL failure or a misconfiguration of the source ANALOG INPUT LIL AL Output Range ANALOG INPUT LIL _ GLOBAL lt DATA 1 gt Output O1 Output QS 5 A SouRCE ADDress H null ISIR CE SouRCE CHaNnel null L IL LIL 5 null IM I N S CA L E SCALE Real 0 0 MA X S C AIL EE maximum SCALE Real 100 0 D P Decimal Pt Position preferred S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 IE INIGIUIN I IT IS ENGineering UNITS s 6 ASCII Char PRCT The AIL function can be assigned to a single LIL channel It will then have certain data that will be accessible over the LIL Parameter 1 is the received data RD in the 80 F80 format and will be re transmitted by this station on the assigned channel This LIL CHAN parameter can also be set to 0 The controller will still receive global data from the other station but the received data will not be re transmitted and the other channel data i e MINSCALE will not be accessible 1 2 3 4 5 6 n RD swsc MINSCALE U 8 9 10 11 12 MAXSCALE ENG UNITS March 2003 3 17 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 9 AIN Analog Inputs AIN_ function blocks convert a voltage input having a range defined during calibration into a block output signal t
444. s of up to 8 stations Tap boxes can be installed to serve as a connector interface between Link twinaxial cables and twisted pair wiring connected to screw terminals Tap boxes provide over voltage lightening protection by including eight transient voltage suppressors and 130V surge arrestor Link termination is also provided by two 1500 resistors 10 ft 3m Maximum Twisted Pair Length See Notes 3 4 and 5 Tap iPAC Control Model 352P Model 353 Tap Box Carrier Field Terminals or 352 or 354 Box Blue ood 31 ye 3 LK write LK y ZINGBI V gt 82 4 NGB y L gt SG AG I 0 gt lt Ky N 2 KE Earth Earth Earth See Note 1 Ground Ground Ground See Note 2 See Note 3 00270 Notes 1 Drain wire of shield connects to terminal SG A short jumper of 16 AWG insulated wire grounds shield to station earth ground 2 Drain wire of shield is cut back and insulated 3 Twisted pair wiring is used to interconnect stations separated by up to 2 ft 0 6 meters Twinaxial cable is used for distances greater than 2 ft 0 6 meters The maximum twisted pair length is 10 ft 3 meters 4 When there is no tap box at the end of a link connect a 150 ohm 5 resistor across the link conductors at the last station 5 See Local Instrument Link
445. s pressed to load default calibration data CRC Test 4 Software Station operation suspended until new code is downloaded Pressing ENTER will cause Compatibility all references to blocks relating to the option board to be removed from the configuration Test and removal of the board from the availability list 5 Database Station operation suspended until new constant data is downloaded Press ENTER to if Compatibility possible convert the database or load board specific default constant data Test 6 Board Not Station operation suspended Install the missing board or press ENTER to remove from Present Error the configuration all references to the missing board 7 Hardware Fatal error Repair or replace necessary Press ENTER to repeat test Communication QSPI Test 8 Board Remove the board causing the error and install a compatible board Compatibility Ethernet Board Upgrade Ethernet firmware to V3 0 or higher Test Real Time Clock Configuration Backup board and Removable Configuration Board RCB off line error codes are listed in Table 11 1 RTC CB and on line status codes are located in Table 11 2 and listed as errors 11 8 March 2003 UM353 1 Maintenance ERR280 ERR282 ERR284 ERR285 ERR286 ERR288 TABLE 11 1 RTC CB and RCB Boards Off Line Error Codes ERROR DESCRIPTION CORRECTIVE ACTION CODE Board failed NVRAM test Configuration on Board failed checksum test and i
446. s set to a predetermined batch S INPUT S loop tag block tag output null A INPUT R loop tag block tag output null amount decreasing action will provide a count down T meurrt 0 er counter This is sometimes preferred since the count LINIP UIT T2 INPUT T2 loop tag block tag output Exec Seq 001 to 250 output then represents the amount remaining in a batch ZDO is used for setting a small positive value insuring that the integrator will stop when the flow is shut off which might not otherwise happen if a flowmeter zero is out of calibration The function block has two trip presets PRESET 1 and PRESET 2 These can be set to cause a high output 1 from A1 or A2 when the count total equals or exceeds the preset values The preset values entered in configuration can also be set using the QUICK button if the parameter QUICKSET has been set to YES The QS DPP parameter allows fixing the decimal point during quickset to speed up changes to these settings A parameter value with no decimal point position the default is for applications dealing with the totalizer count as whole units An external preset can be used by providing an input to T1 and or T2 and when used the internal preset will be ignored Ifan external preset is used the value can be viewed but not changed in QUICKSET The ac
447. sed in section 8 3 Mechanical Installation Connector cover removal and separation of the fixed portion or a connector from the removable portion is described Section 8 4 2 Wiring Guidelines contains specific information about connector removal for wiring wire size wire stripping and other details that will be needed while wiring Read this section before beginning to wire a controller Sections 8 4 3 through 8 4 12 contain wiring diagrams and where needed step by step installation procedures to describe 1 and network wiring Section 8 4 13 provides power input wiring information Single controller and daisy chained power wiring are illustrated A WARNING Electrical shock hazard 9 Explosion hazard Y Can cause death or injury e Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on equipment e In potentially hazardous atmosphere remove power from equipment before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other circuit e Observe all pertinent regulations regarding installation in hazardous area 8 4 1 Wiring Guidelines Electrical Connections Power I O and LIL or Modbus network connections to a basic controller are completed through removable connectors with terminals H N and 3 26 When the controller includes an I O Expander board connectors with terminals 27 52 are also used A case with direct entry connectors has an Ethernet connector for use when an Ethernet board is included and the
448. set to any engineering value within 10 to 110 of the range defined by the pointer If a range is changed the current alarm settings will be changed to be the same within the new range For example if a HI alarm is currently set at 100 0 with a range of 0 0 to 100 0 and the range is changed to 300 0 to 400 0 the HI alarm will be moved to 400 0 Each alarm can be enabled or disabled when in the quickset ALARM mode The configuration allows an alarm to be enabled or disabled on a cold start When an alarm is disabled it will not operate but will retain settings for return to the enabled mode Complete operator faceplate functions relating to alarms are described in the sections describing the specific faceplate design alarms have the following features Deadband requires that the signal either drop below or exceed the limit setting by the amount of the deadband before the alarm clears goes low The alarm deadband is set as a fixed of the range pointer scale Delay In Time requires that the input remain above or below the limit setting for the delay time before the alarm trips goes high This can help prevent nuisance alarms that may be tripping due to process noise Delay Out Time requires that the input remain below or above the limit setting plus deadband for the delay time before the alarm will clear goes low This can help prevent inadvertent clearing of alarms due to process noise Ringback causes a previously
449. side this resolution will blink Analog outputs are typically output 01 for analog I O blocks and math functions Analog outputs may also be specific to a particular function block such as the Analog Output AO Step Number SN Step Time ST Remaining Time RT and Current Recipe CR outputs of the Program Sequencer 3 Arrows with medium shading and black letters but with a white tip are special data structures for range scaling information and will not be displayed in the VIEW mode Range scaling information is used when there is a conversion of units within a function block for example the Alarm block scales the alarm limits into process engineering units when the range pointer is configured to the process analog input block If unconfigured the units default to 0 100 The output range OR typically used on analog output function blocks includes MIN and MAX SCALE the DPP Decimal Point Position and the ENGUNITS Engineering Units The analog output block is typically used for a 0 100 output to a valve where a minscale of 0 4 mA output and a max scale of 100 20 mA output The output range is connected to the Range Pointer input R of functions blocks requiring scaling other than the default 0 100 For example an Analog input block could be scaled 0 5000 psig with output 01 connected to the AOUT input S and the AIN OR connected to the AOUT input R The Analog output would then output 4 mA at a minscale of 0 psig and 20
450. simulate an analog input for subsequent steps jumper the terminals shown below Connect a 250 ohm range resistor across the terminals shown below to convert the 4 20 mA output to a 1 5 volt input This will tie the valve output horizontal bargraph back in the loop as the process input P bargraph Refer to Section 8 as necessary CONTROLLER JUMPER TERMINAL INSTALL 2500 AT TERMINALS Model 352 Plus A4 to 7 From A4 to A5 Models 353 and 354 17 to 20 From 20 to 21 Custom Configuration Refer to Section 8 as necessary for any additional connections March 2003 10 1 Controller and System Test UM353 1 3 Apply power to the controller Upon power up a two step test is automatically performed on the alphanumeric display to light all segments WAIT will then appear the alphanumeric display while the controller performs power up diagnostics If a power up diagnostic test fails an error code will be displayed on the alphanumeric display Refer to Sections 11 3 and 11 4 for troubleshooting error codes If WAIT remains displayed for more than 1 minute the controller is not powering up correctly and power connections should be checked for loose wiring 10 1 2 Configuration 1 Determine the current configuration refer to Section 10 0 above Then perform one of the following steps To load FCO101 go to step 2 IMPORTANT Loading FCO101 will overwrite the current configuration and any entries made since shipment Skip s
451. ss a preventive measure reduces a Station s down time it is unnecessary 11 2 1 Environmental Considerations The controller has been designed to operate within specified environmental parameters temperature and humidity These parameters are listed in the Model Designation and Specifications section of this User s Manual Additional information concerning environmental contaminants is covered in the Installation section 11 2 2 Visual Inspection As part of a periodic maintenance program the controller should be visually inspected When viewing the station scan for abnormalities such as loose broken or stressed ribbon cables Look for damaged circuitry and heat stressed parts Check for excessive dirt or dust build up which may impede air flow and inhibit proper heat dissipation 11 2 3 Cleaning Circuit boards are conformally coated for protection against contaminants and should not be cleaned unless accumulated foreign material is causing a problem If cleaning becomes necessary 1 Protect the station s electronic components from electrostatic discharge Fasten a conductive wrist strap around your wrist and ground the strap to the station s case the panel or a static dissipative workmat See the next section for circuit board handling guidelines 2 Loosen the Display Assembly s two faceplate screws One screw is above the numeric display the other behind the flip down door at the bottom of the faceplate See Figure 11 1 a
452. ssseeeseoses sbevesstcosecateshssossteotsecssebedseseoesd 6 1 6 1 MODBUS DATA MAPPING enne 6 1 62 LIE DATA MAPPING aine 6 3 6 22 Station Sayana stiene APER a 6 3 6 2 2 Control Loop eene hee e ee e e eU eed Ee edt eie cade de 6 5 6 2 3 Sequence Loop Data imeri irine E eet Pee eer Pene aep e 6 6 6 2 4 Analog Indicator Loop Data sse ener ener 6 9 6 2 5 Discrete Indicator Loop Data eene nennen nnne nnne 6 10 6 2 6 Pu shbutton Loop Data eate tee ee E ETC 6 11 MAPPING rc r mee 7 1 7 1 CONNECTING TO APACS 39ACM MYCROADVANTAGE ProcessSuite i ware PC 7 1 ABB NO m 7 1 7 4 2 MY CROADVANTAGE am aaa leere titel eio rae Eee de Pee 7 1 11 33 ProcessSulte sic oie Qha o EE u 7 2 oe Ms hkl ot 7 2 F2 STATION DATA u L np m anam s 7 3 7 2 1 Integer Data T6 bit Integer n eerte eu 7 3 March 2003 iii Contents UM353 1 7 2 2 Station String Data 8 bit ASCII Char 2 Wotd 7 5 7 2 3 Station Coil Data 1
453. start the timing cycle Output O1 will first go high 1 for a time set by ON TIME and then it will go low 0 for a time set by OFF TIME It will continue to repeat this cycle until input S is asserted low 0 which forces O1 low 0 and ends the timing cycle ADAPTIVE ON TIME this feature is active only when input AT is configured It has a valid range of 0 0 to 1 0 and there are two separate modes of adaptive on time depending on the configuration of the OFF TIME parameter e OFF TIME 0 0 The time cycle will remain fixed and equal to the value of ON TIME The output will be high for a period equal to ON TIME x AT OFF TIME gt 0 0 The output will be low 0 for a period equal to OFF TIME and will be high for a period equal to ON TIME x AT The time cycle equals TIME x OFF TIME POWER UP With the PU LAST parameter set to YES during a hot or warm power up the block will initialize the input output states and elapsed time at the last values During a cold start they will be set to 0 With PU LAST set to NO during a hot start the block will initialize the input output states and elapsed time at the last values During a warm or cold start they will be set to 0 gt cycle Output 1 ON TIME gt 0 0 OFF ON OFF INput AT null TIMER an 1 Output 1 OFF TIME 0 0 ON TIME gt 0 0 ON
454. sted The warnings can be cleared by pressing the ACK button TABLE 9 2 Autotune Warnings WARNING DESCRIPTION Indicates that the DEV setting is not greater than 4 times the HYS setting 2 W Indicates that the process deviations during the first one and a half cycles where the autotuner first learns about the process gain were inconsistent greater than 4 times the HYS setting If this warning occurs while the DEV selection was set to A auto selection of deviation setting the use of manual entry should be considered Indicates that the average DEV values during the final phase of the autotuning exercise were not 9 6 March 2003 UM353 1 Operation 9 4 REMOVABLE CONFIGURATION BOARD The Removable Configuration Board be installed in this controller It retains a complete copy of the configuration being used by the controller in which the is installed Should that controller fail the can be removed and installed in the replacement controller The stored configuration can then be selected as the active configuration in the controller On power up the controller will test the and compare the configuration stored in the RCB to the controller s configuration If the RCB passes all tests and the configurations are identical the controller will power up normally and use the configuration from the MPU board If problem is detected or the configurations are different an ON LIN
455. sted in the Network Communications 00810253 i Emerg override PRIORity 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 Secon The LOOP configured the ODC or ODS interlocked PRIORity 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 function block for the loop determines the location of P RIOR Device Fail PRIORity 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 the status word and the status coils in the Modbus N I 2 Figure 3 1 the next page using symbols shown N T I R D ke 2 2 below Modbus states are mapped In coils and LIL INPUT INPUTHE loop tag block tag output null states mapped into two 16 bit status word as shown INPUT DN tag block tag output below Three global channels are used to send out the PISI Exec Sed No em en 000ta 299 two status words and an integer value from 1 7 that represents the status of the PCOM block 1 2 DONE 3 HELD 4 RUN 5 INTRLK 6 READY 7 OR The location of the first channel is configured using the LIL CHAN parameter represented by channel z in the LIL mapping tables Read Write States START 25 Read States wo Each communication state is read as a 1 or 0 Using Modbus a write of a 1 W1 0 WO will affect the communication state as defined by the associated logic in Figure 3 1 The W1 or WO is equivalent to a Mask
456. t has a dual purpose When the normal mode this button will step through and access either previously selected configuration parameters in the quick hold blocks configured within the Active Loop e g the HOLD value in QHOLD03 which was labeled to display TEMP LIM having a range of 300 0 to 600 0 or parameters defined as QUICKSET in certain function blocks e g RATIO Press the ENTER EXIT CONFIG button to return to the on line displays When in the configuration mode this button will provide a shift right function for configurable items e g will shift the decimal point right e STORE will store the configuration parameter to memory All configuration changes except for QUICK BIAS RATIO and quickset hold require a store before the change is applied to the configuration However the QUICK functions will also require a store for the value to be placed in permanent memory otherwise it will only remain in battery RAM Values in battery will be used on a hot or warm start A cold start will use the value in permanent memory 5 ALARM TUNE and QUICK are QUICKSET functions March 2003 9 3 Operation UM353 1 9 3 AUTOTUNE PROCEDURE If the AUTOTUNE parameter in the controller function block is set to YES the autotune procedure can be initiated using the TUNE pushbutton located behind the flip down door The Autotuner will substitute an ON OFF controller for the PD or PID function By making step ch
457. t in auto NA OR is in External Ratio Set ES The value of the RATIO will be computed as Captive Flow setpoint Wild Flow while in the tracking mode which occurs whenever the loop is not in auto NA OR is in Internal Set IS The tracking features can be removed by setting the TC inputs to UNCONFIG The Wild Flow signal will be displayed on Variable X and the actual Ratio CF WF will be displayed on Variable Y Wild Flow 0 00 100 00 PRCT DIV01 gt 5 01 B 0 50 1 50 CF WF ORO1 o _ ORO2 Captive Flow 0 00 100 00 AN2 AOUT1 Valve Rev 2 LOOPO1 SETPT Setpoint Function Block RATIO Ratio Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer Loop01 AIN2 OR HI LIMIT HI Range LIMIT 1 50 INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 AIN2 01 LO LIMIT LO Range LIMIT 0 50 INPUT TC Input TC Loop01 OR02 01 INPUT A Input A Loop01 AIN1 01 INPUT LU Input LU Loop01 SPLIM HS INPUT TC Input TC Loop01 OR01 O1 INPUT LD Input LD Loop01 SPLIM LS INPUT TV Input TV Loop01 SPLIM O1 ESN Exec Seq No 5 ESN Exec Seq No 20 PB2SW PB2 Switch Function Block INPUT MD Input MD Loop01 E I SE Ext Int Transfer Switch Function Block ESN Exec Seq No 10 INPUT ST Input ST Loop01 PB2SW PS INPUT E Input E
458. ted that the danger of electrical shock is present Explosion hazard Indicates that the danger of an explosion hazard exists Electrostatic discharge The presence of this symbol indicates that electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic assembly Conventions and Usage Notes In this User s Manual a Moore 353 can be referred to using the term Moore 353 Model 353 or simply 353 The terms controller and station are also used to prevent repetition e Several chapters of this manual are also used in manuals for sister controllers and may contain references to those controllers This manual describes the functionality provided by the current MPU Controller board firmware version Where necessary a firmware version is identified by a phrase such as in version x x and higher or simply V1 3 or V2 4 March 2003 ix Contents UM353 1 e Part numbers are for items ordered from the Process Industries Division of Siemens Energy amp Automation except as noted e Date format is Month Day Year except as noted e Time format is 12 hour a m p m except as noted Qualified Persons The described equipment should be installed configured operated and serviced only by qualified persons thoroughly familiar with this publication A copy of this publication is shipped with the equipment The current version in Portable Document Format PDF is available at http www sea siemens com ai
459. tep 2 if the installed configuration is to be retained To proceed with the installed configuration go to Section 10 1 3 2 load FCO101 either locally or to download it from a PC running the Graphical Configuration Utility refer to Section 2 7 for a procedure and to Section 4 for the block diagram and parameter values 3 Edit the configuration as desired Refer to Section 10 1 5 Modifying an FCO 10 1 3 Input Output Press the D button on the faceplate to scroll through Loop01 S Setpoint Loop01 V Valve Output and Loop01 P Process Input Note from the FCO101 block diagram that INPUT P is configured as the output from function block AINI INPUT S is configured as the output of function block SETPT and INPUT V is configured as the output of function block A M 10 1 4 Auto Manual In 101 the block is configured to switch Valve control from the PID controller in AUTO to the Pulser Knob in Manual Press the A M button to toggle the display between the Loop01 S setpoint parameter and the Loop01 V valve parameter Turn the pulser knob while displaying the valve parameter in manual to change the value on the numeric display as well as the horizontal bargraph turn the pulser knob while displaying the setpoint parameter in Auto to change the numeric value and the vertical S bargraph 10 1 5 Modifying an FCO In addition to FCO101 Single Loop Control there are several other factory configured options available such as
460. ter If a range change is made the current setpoint ramp rate target setpoint and power up setpoint will be moved to be the same values within the new range The setpoint block also has two inputs LU and LD that can be used to limit pulser changes in one direction This can be used if another function block is limiting the setpoint and it is desired not to allow the operator to adjust the setpoint block to a value beyond the external limit POWER UP The function block can be configured to power up in various conditions during a warm start If the PU LAST parameter is set to YES the block will power up with the last setpoint When SETPT does not power up in last position or on a cold start it will power up using the PU SETPT parameter Pulser ib Pulser Limit Track Variable TV O1 Output1 Track Command TC PU SETPT Ramp Generator TARGET Setpoint gt RAMP gt SR ON OFF USE Ramp RATE Ramp RATE Ramp TIME Start Ramp BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 96 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 93 SIN SINE SIN function blocks included in firmware 1 30 and higher accept a radian input and output the sine of that angle X SIN X 01 Input X Output 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM SINE ESN 000 InputX X SIN X gt Output 1
461. ter ASCII value can be entered to ANALOG INPUT LEV PERCENT LONWorks Network Output Range ANALOG INPUT Output 1 LEV PERCENT Quality Status DIGital FILTer S SQuare ROOT extract NO YES NO Network Variable NUMber nv 1102000 MINimum SCALE H Real 0 0 MAXimum SCALE Real 100 0 Decimal Pt Position preferred 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 ENGineering UNITS 5 6 Char ASCII PRCT 0 to 180 sec 0 sec identify the engineering units of the output signal Output scaling MINSCALE and MAXSCALE is provided to establish an engineering range of choice The number of the input network variable to the AIP block can be viewed in the configuration mode This is useful when other devices need this for binding The Output Range is a special data type that includes the MIN and MAX SCALE the DPP and the ENGUNITS that can be connected to other blocks with a Range RG PTR input The block output QS indicates the quality status of the output signal O1 and will go high when the output is of bad quality Bad quality usually indicates a loss of communications within the LonWorks network lt gt LonWorks Controller Network and Node s AIP Function Block ENG Units LonWorks option boa
462. ter slave protocol where a master device e g PC based operator workstation sends commands to one slave i e Moore 353 Process Automation Controller and waits for a response Each station has a unique network address 1 32 configured as part of the station parameters that identifies a specific controller Data is assigned to either a register 16 bit word or a coil 1 bit An IEEE floating point number Real is assigned to 2 consecutive registers with the first containing the most significant and the second the least significant portion of the floating point number The station supports Modbus function codes 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 and 16 Section 7 provides a listing of available data and specific locations within the Modbus map The following is the overview for the Modbus data mapping Station Coils rep x0001 x0071 Eoop Coltls eh u 0296 1495 Extended Loop Coils ODD Pushbuttons 2 1 x8701 x9100 Sequencer Loop I O Coils ref MSLCP pointer x1496 x2263 LonWorks Remote I O Coils Moore 352P 353 amp 354 354N x2401 x3976 Ubus Discrete I O States amp Forcing V2 1 Procidia x4001 x5500 Spares esset Geen eet aha RH Lees oh a RS x5501 x9100 Loop PCOM Block 9101 9999 Station Data 16 bit integer
463. ters See Sections 6 and 7 for network parameters Station Error Watch Dog The VIEW OD parameter when set to YES enables the operator s c P1 Process 1 RanGe PoinTeR s loop tag block tag display to be viewed and accessed locally In cases where it is P2 Process 2 RanGe PoinTER s bopagbiooktag Process 3 RanGe PoinTeR op tag block tag desired to view display operation parameters only from network P 4 Process 4 RanGe PoinTeR 9 bap tagblocktag Process 1 TAG s Process 2 TAG s Process 3 TAG s Process 4 TAG s Process 1 Alarm A LIMIT s Process 1 Alarm B LIMIT s Process 2 Alarm A LIMIT s Process 2 Alarm B LIMIT s Process 3 Alarm A LIMIT s Process Alarm B LIMIT s Process 4 Alarm A LIMIT s Process 4 Alarm B LIMIT s wee Real Process 1 Alarm A DeadBAND s 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 Process 1 Alarm DeadBAND s 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 Process 2 Alarm A DeadBAND 5 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 Process 2 Alarm B DeadBAND s 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 Process Alarm A DeadBAND s 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 Process 3 Alarm DeadBAND 5 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 Process 4 Alarm A DeadBAND 5 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 Process 4 Alarm DeadBAND 5 0 1 0 5 1 0 5 0 0 5 Process 1 Alarm A Power Up ENabled 5 NO YES YES Process 1 Alarm Power Up ENabled s NO YES ves Process 2 Alarm A Power Up ENab
464. th lead and lag functions The block can function as lag only by setting the TLEAD time to 0 0 The lag function is always active and has a minimum setting of 0 01 minutes Input E asserted high 1 will enable the Lead Lag function When asserted low 0 the Lead Lag function will be bypassed and the output will be set equal to the input If input E is not configured the block will be enabled LEAD LAG Analog Input A Enab A A GG LL ESN 000 LEAD LAG Output 1 Time LAG min S 0 01 10000 0 0 10 Time LEAD min 5 0 00 10000 0 0 00 INPUT A H loop tag block tag output null INPUT E H loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq H 001 to 250 POWER UP During a warm or cold start the dynamic elements and the output will be initialized to the value of the current input on the first scan EGER gt 01 Analog Input Lag 1 Output 1 E Enable BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 56 LMT Limit LMT function blocks are used to limit a real signal Input A will normally pass through the function block to the output O1 Ifthe input exceeds one of the limits the block will output the limit value If the HI LIMIT is set lower than the LO LIMIT the block will output the high limit value The output statuses will be high 1 when the
465. that require acknowledgment will return the display to the normal mode 1 lt loop tag gt S and will flash the message When events have been acknowledged they can be viewed using the ACK button The display can be returned to the MSG mode using the D button and will then display the first message in the Queue 5 Output LE is high 1 when a loop event is active Output SE is high when a station error is active Rev 2 lt D gt Loop tag gt S lt gt Recipe Msg Primary Msg Y Secondary Msg Y Conditional Msg 1 Y Conditional Msg n Rev 3 ACK 6 The LOOP in version 1 21 firmware this parameter was MB INDEX but they have the same function It will be used to index reads and writes to Modbus parameters The LIL has 25 parameters C1S C2S C3S C25S When an ODS block has been selected and the LOOP has been configured the corresponding C S March 2003 3 71 Function Blocks UM353 1 LIL parameter will contain the LIL starting Chan n location The LOOP must be entered to enable either LIL or Modbus communications An operator display must be configured in order to properly map station loop data to network data Sequencer loop network data is mapped onto registers or coils when the standard Modbus interface is used and to channels parameters when the optional LIL interface has been added Mappi
466. the three inputs Any unused input will be set high 1 0 0 0 0 a 1 1 3 BLOCK DIAGRAM MULTIPLICATION MUL ESN 000 Input A InptB B MULTIPLICATION Output 1 C INPUT A loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT B H loop tag block tag output null INPUT loop tag block tag output null ES Exec Seq No 001 to 250 NAND NND ESN 000 Input Input B B Input C D zzz ICE ccc Output 1 INPUT A loop tag block tag output null INPUT B H loop tag block tag output null INPUT C H loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 March 2003 3 61 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 62 NOR Logic NOR_ function blocks perform a logical NOR on the three NOR inputs Any unused input will be set low 0 oo OR ESN 000 Je Input A Input B FD NOR Output 1 B Input C Fr INPUT loop tag block tag output null INPUT INPUT loop tag block tag output null INPUT loop tag block tag output null ES Exec Se
467. the Lon node bound to that node r1 22 input If any of the individual quality inputs are high the NENNEN s anm X iens Quality Status block output will also be high Fe F lt d SNC eT node r6 binding 1 SNVT QE lt node r6 nv 21 gt E Fr Se nvz2 SNVT_ gt nv F binding QF lt T de 18 nv z2 0313950 QS lt BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 46 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 40 DOE Digital Output Ethernet V2 4 DOE_ function blocks are available when the optional Ethernet communication board is installed Up to 32 DOE blocks are available and are assigned in sequence with each u use station wide Do Input 0 D DIGITAL OUTPUT Up to 16 digital inputs can be configured The block will Input F D pack inputs 10 IF into a single integer word which can be accessed from another controller having Ethernet communication capability DIGITAL OUTPUT ETHERNET Ethernet Network I 0 INPUTO tag block tag output null I NIPUIT 11 INPUT 1 loop tag block tag output null i 2 I 2 INPUT20 loop tag block tag output null Each DOE block is automatically assigned Modbus IN PUT 3 iNPUT3 5 loop tag block tag output Ae registers that can be accessed from any device having the I 4
468. the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level CAL appears on upper display 16 Set the voltage source to the full scale input value 4 000 to 5 000 Vdc 12 2 March 2003 UM3 53 1 Calibration 17 Press STORE 18 For verification perform the following steps 1 Press STEP UP button Rotate Pulser Knob to select CAL VIEW parameter 2 Press STEP DOWN button to enter VALUE level Set precision voltage source to zero input voltage The display should read 0 3 Set source to full scale voltage The display should read 100 20 If all points have been calibrated and verified press EXIT button to leave the calibration mode and enter the operation mode If additional function blocks are to be calibrated and verified press the STEP UP button to enter the FUNCTION BLOCK level Perform steps 2 19 for each function block If security is enabled exiting the configuration mode will lock out the calibration mode until the security combination is re entered 12 2 ANALOG OUTPUT AOUT1 3 Analog output function blocks have been factory calibrated to 4 20 mAdc outputs If recalibration 1s necessary use the following procedure 1 Atthe controller s rear terminals connect an electronic calibrator or digital multimeter capable of displaying 4 00 and 20 00 mAdc to the selected analog output terminals AOUT1 or AOUT2 Refer to Section 8 Installation for terminal numbers and wiring guidelines Ensure that terminal screws are tight
469. the Station A flashing LED indicates that the event needs to be acknowledged e L Status LED Indicates that event is active in the displayed Loop A flashing LED indicates that the event needs to be acknowledged March 2003 9 1 Operation UM353 1 Priority e Priority I causes the station bargraphs and event LEDs to flash and requires acknowledgment to stop flashing This is the highest priority e Priority 2 also flashes the bargraphs but stops flashing when the event clears i e Self Clearing e Priority 3 causes the event LEDs L 4 S to flash and stops only when the event is acknowledged e Priority 4 also causes the event LEDs to flash but stops when the event clears e Priority 5 displays the event but does not require that it be acknowledged This is the lowest priority If the event is in the active loop the alphanumeric display will alternate between the loop tag and the unacknowledged condition e g TC2053 P lt gt HI Press the ACK button to acknowledge this condition and stop the flashing The ACK button after all events have been acknowledged can then be used to scroll through any active alarm or status conditions within the Active Loop Pressing the ACK button will scroll through the list of active events and wrap around to the start of the list when more than one event is active This function will time out if the ACK button is not pressed for 3 seconds and return to the normal display
470. the error condition is corrected March 2003 11 7 UM353 1 Display Format ERR L Test Type Board Type Error Type Error Indication Error Type Fatal The station cannot operate until the source of the error has been corrected 2 Non Fatal Correct error from faceplate or communication port Board Type 0 MPU Controller 1 Expander 2 LIL Network 3 LonWorks Remote I O 8 or RTC CB 9 Ethernet Network Test Type 0 RAM Test MPU Controller board Fatal error replace board Press ENTER to repeat test Option Board Station operation suspended Pressing ENTER will cause all references to blocks relating to the option board to be removed from the configuration and removal of the board from the availability list 1 Flash CRC Test MPU Controller board Station operation suspended until new code is downloaded Press ENTER to repeat test Option Board Station operation suspended until new code is downloaded Pressing ENTER will cause all references to blocks relating to the option board to be removed from the configuration and removal of the board from the availability list 2 Constant Data Station operation suspended until new constant data is downloaded Press ENTER to CRC Test load board specific default constant data 3 Calibration Data Station operation suspended until ENTER i
471. the numeric 11 24 6 display when stepping through the event log Other events E NE T T 0 7 such as alarms status conditions or errors can be similarly ev vlewed if logged to ESL function block T 5 INPUT R 0 a 1 5 E 00 5 NER 0 I 5 23 gt 0 4 9 7 Diagram Number of Events ESL 1 ESL 2 MIU Le ESL 3 INput 01 MeSsaGe 8 Char ASCII null INput 02 MeSsaGe 8 Char ASCII null INput 23 MeSsaGe 8 Char ASCII null INput 24 5 8 Char ASCII null loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output INPUT 23 INPUT 24 loop tag block tag output loop tag block tag output null loop tag block tag output NO March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 49 EXP NATURAL EXPONENTIATION EXP function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher perform the natural exponentiation function base The output will be the value raised to the power of input X Input X Output 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 50 EXT EXPONENTIATION EXT function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher will provide an output that equals the Y input raised to the power of X input All negative values of input Y will be treated as 0 0 When input
472. ther circuits Comply with all pertinent regulations regarding installation in a hazardous area March 2003 2 3 Configuration Overview UM353 1 A configuration is designed by first arranging the needed function blocks in a fashion similar to that of a PI amp D drawing Parameter and calibration values are determined next and then entered on a Configuration Documentation Form or into the Graphical Configuration software The controller may then be configured locally by entering the information on the form into the controller s configuration memory or remotely by downloading directly from the personal computer Nine common controller configurations have been stored in a built in library that can be entered from the FCO LIB function block at the STATION level Simple changes can then be made to accommodate individual needs As an example FCO101 Single Loop Controller includes the setpoint tracking feature but by simply disconnecting the TC input to the SETPT function block it becomes a fixed setpoint Single Loop Controller These FCOs are fully documented in Section 4 FCO101 Single Loop Controller w Tracking Setpoint FCO102 Single Loop Controller with Fixed Setpoint FCO103 External Set Controller with Tracking Local Setpoint FCO104 External Set Controller with Non Tracking Local Setpoint FCO105 Ratio Set Controller with Operator Setpoint Limits FCO106 Single Loop Controller w Operator Setpoint Limits FCO107 Dual Lo
473. tinued 2 Case with 52 Terminals Black Side Entry Connectors Discontinued 4 Case with 52 Terminals Gray or Green Direct Entry Connectors and Ethernet Connector 5 High Shock and Vibration Case with Ethernet Connector requires Electrical Approval N Not Required Operator s Display Panel Display Assembly F Fixed Analog amp Digital Displays Expansion N Not Required 1 Local I O Expander e g RTD Frequency Relay Option Board A 1 Remote I O Communications N Not Required L LonWorks Protocol Option Board A 2 N Not Required Option Board B 1 Network Communications N Not Required E Ethernet L Local Instrument Link LIL Option Board B 2 Real Time Clock Configuration Backup N Not Required Removable Configuration Board RCB Discontinued T Real Time Clock Configuration Backup Board RTC CB Modification Options Not Required X Controller Modified as detailed in order bill of material Reserved for Future Use Reserved for Future Use Design Level Design Level A Electrical Approval N Not Required 4 FM CSA Division 2 Class 1 Groups A B C amp D suitable for non incendive CE compliant W FM CSA Division 2 Class 1 Groups A B amp D suitable for non incendive CE compliant and ABS approved X FM CSA Division 2 Class 1 Groups A B C amp D suitable for non incendive 353A 4 N N Sample Model No Contact Siemens En
474. tion of the presets is also determined by the action setting of the integrator When DIR ACT is set to YES the presets will be direct acting and will cause outputs A1 or A2 to go high when the integrated total is equal to or higher than the preset If set to NO the total will cause A1 or A2 to go high when the total is equal to or lower than the preset The actual preset value is available on outputs T1 and T2 The function block can also provide a pulse output to drive a remote counter The pulse output function integrates the input signal using the same time base and output pulses at a rate determined by the PUL SCAL configuration parameter This parameter determines the change to the integrator total that must occur to cause a new output pulse In the above example if PUL SCAL equals 10 a total of 30 pulses will have occurred in the same time period The PUL SCAL value is also the multiplier that would be used to read the exact value of gallons to a remote counter The pulse output function operates on the absolute value of the analog input When both negative and positive values are to be totalized a CoMParator block can be used to sense the polarity of the analog input and the CMP output can then indicate a direction to the counter Be sure that the PUL SCAL setting does not require a pulse rate output greater than the scan cycle time of the controller under the maximum input conditions Using the same example if the maximum A input is 60 0 and the
475. tion with other function blocks external Ip ESN 000 devices such as pneumatic controllers and shutoff Range R gt Output Range switches while eliminating windup that can occur with Process PD ID P output other controller types Derivative action is provided when setpoint SD CONTROLLER the parameter TD is non zero Feedback Absolute Error Auto m When input A is high 1 the controller will operate in the normal auto mode and when low 0 will cause the output of the lag function to track the feedback signal This will RIGL RenGePonTeR 6 Dru D IR _ ACTing NO YES NO cause the controller output to track the feedback within the Time integral 8 0 001 to 4000 100 0 limits When the controller is switched back to auto the Time Derivative 0 00 to 100 00 min 000 M D G Derivative Gain 5 1 00 to 30 00 10 00 value at the input of the lag GE FB if the GE is non minimum SCALE 0 0 zero will cause the output to integrate to a new output at MAX S CAL E MAXimum SCALE 1000 D P P Decimal Point Position 0 0 the TI time constant IEINIGIUIN L T S ENGineering UNITS 6 PRCT P INPUT P loop tag block tag output 6 INPUTS loo
476. tions to help ensure reliable trouble free operation with minimum down time Refer to Section 14 8 for controller operating temperatures limits operating humidity and maximum moisture content March 2003 8 1 Installation UM353 1 TEMPERATURE Keep the air surrounding an operating controller below 50 C 122 F Check air temperature periodically to ensure that this specification is not being exceeded CAUTION Exceeding the specified operating temperature limits can adversely affect performance and may cause damage to the controller Forced air ventilation is recommended when controllers are mounted in a partially or completely enclosed panel or cabinet e g NEMA 1 as shown at right When clean air is present exhaust fans are often mounted across the top of a panel and louvers formed in the panel bottom Air is then drawn upward between the station cases When air contains particulate matter fans and filters are generally located at the panel bottom and louvers at the top Filtered air is now forced upward between the station cases Filters must be serviced periodically Fan with Only high quality quiet running fans should be used Finger Also the fans should not generate electrical noise Guard which could interfere with electronic instruments A sealed cabinet e g NEMA 12 or 4X containing Air Outlet equipment that does not generate significant heat Instrument should contain a recirculating fan for forcing air flow arou
477. to AIN1 as the RG PTR range pointer to determine the operating range of the function block Be aware that making changes to a configuration may require changing referenced RG PTRs For example in FCO105 Ratio Set Control the PID controller output range is determined by the range of AIN2 Try changing the default 0 100 range of analog input 1 AIN1 to 100 0 500 0 F using the Configuration Road Map in Section 2 or the following steps 1 Press ENTER EXIT COMF to display LOOP Press STEP DOWN twice to display VIEW Turn pulser knob or use arrow button to display EDIT FB Press STEP DOWN to display Function Block menu Turn the pulser knob or use right arrow button to display AINI Press STEP DOWN to display MINSCALE Press STEP DOWN to display current 0 of range Turn the pulser knob to display 1 in the last digit Display should read 0 00001 NDA SLN Now press the left arrow button Notice that decimal place will move one place every time the button 15 pressed Press the arrow button until the display reads 100 000 and press the STORE button 10 Press STEP UP 11 Turn the pulser knob or use the arrow button to display MAXSCALE 12 Press STEP DOWN to display 100 000 13 Press the right arrow button until display reads 0 00001 14 Turn the pulser knob to change the last digit to 5 Display should read 0 00005 15 Press left arrow button until display reads 500 000
478. to YES the default Condition Msg 04 Optional Inputs value enables the operator display to be viewed and accessed locally using the LOOP button Set the parameter to NO to view the display or operation parameters only with a network workstation and not allow operation from the local display This may be desired with a sequence logic loop where local operation is not needed but a workstation needs access to force I O or sequence parameters for recipe changes 2 Messages will be available over Modbus or LIL Refer OPERATOR Step Number SN DISPLAY for I Recipe Number SEQUENCER Condition Messages Condition Msg nn m Console Local af Emerg Local OPERATOR DISPLAY for SEQUENCER 00 for Loop Event Station Error CoNsole CoMputer Local Operation Not Local Watch Dog to the Network Communication section for mapped data R M S G of Recipe MeSsaGes 9 t P MeSsaGes 0 64 0 8 s SIG f of Secondary MeSsaGes 0 128 0 MISIG sof Condition MeSsaGes 0 64 0 3 The of Recipe messages can now be set to 0 so that a L O OP 100 6 01 to 25 nul i i 1 LIL CHANI LIL starting CHANnel n S 008 to 250 null Recipe Message does not appear in the message list View Operator
479. to design document and save configurations as well as download them to the controller through either the configuration port or using a Modbus LIL or Ethernet network connection The above steps are illustrated in Figure 2 1 Configuration Road Map The map also provides a broad overview of the configuration procedure e Press the ENTER CONF button to enter the configuration mode Press the button again to exit configuration e After entering the configuration mode LOOP or STATION can be selected e Atthe STATION level a factory configured option can be loaded station parameters can be configured security passwords can be entered the clock can be set communication parameters can be configured and inputs and outputs can be calibrated 2 4 March 2003 UM353 1 Configuration Overview e Calibration can also be performed within individual loops containing the input or output function blocks used in the LOOP Atthe LOOP level new loops can be added loops can be deleted or an existing loop can be edited When a new loop is created the controller will assign a default name e g LOOP01 The loop name can be changed to any valid 12 character ASCII value It is suggested that loop names be limited to 6 characters so that the complete tag name will appear in the alphanumeric display during normal operation A Loop can be edited by stepping down from the EDIT menu If more than one loop has been configured press the STEP DOWN butt
480. ton is pressed to view the parameter value the current TIME or DATE at that instant is displayed The CLOCK value can be changed using the pulser and the lt and gt arrow buttons to enter a new value The new value will initialize the clock when the STORE button is pressed 12251 91919 The time amp date cannot changed locally if the SRCE ADD parameter has been configured to a value other than 0 to have the time synchronized with a master station on the Local Instrument Link LIL SET T IME SET TIME 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 0 When the SRCE ADD parameter version 2 2 has been SET D A T E SET DATE 01011970 to 12313099 0 A D D SouRCE ADDress 0 64 0 configured to synchronize the time with a master controller on the LIL the controller will query the master controller at 12 midnight and synchronize its time with the master 3 1 5 ETHERNET Ethernet Communication Network V2 4 The ETHERNET function block is available when the Ethernet Communication Network option board is ETHERNET installed in the controller and the controller includes i firmware version V2 4 or higher Use this function block to configure Ethernet communication parameters The default IP addresses shown are used for factory testing in a network environment and s
481. trol The block diagram of the configuration of the two loops is shown below along with the changes made to the default parameter values of the configured blocks The process range of the Primary loop can be changed in Analog Input 1 and the range of the Secondary loop in Analog Input 2 Also the output range of the primary PID controller must be changed to match any new range in the secondary loop If the loop tag PRIM or SEC is changed all configured references will automatically be changed to the new tag SETPT Primary Process f PID gt gt ALARM PB2SW SPLIM 8 ORO1 Ls ORO2 Secondary Process 01 A 01 5 a AIN2 7 2 7 te Valve 2 ALARM Rev 2 SEC Secondary Primary Loop SETPT Setpoint Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer ALARM Alarm Function Block PRIM AINI OR RG PTR Range Pointer PRIM AINI OR INPUT TV Input TV PRIM AINI OI INPUT P Input P PRIM AINI OI INPUT TC Input TC PRIM A M NA INPUT D Input D PRIM SETPT O1 ESN Exec Seq No 5 ESN Exec Seq No 10 March 2003 4 13 Factory Configured Options UM353 1 Primary Loop cont PID PID Controller Function Block RG PTR Range Pointer PRIM AINI OR INPUTP Input P PRIM AINI
482. twork data is mapped into registers or coils when the standard Modbus interface is used and to channels parameters when the optional LIL interface has been added Mappings for both Modbus and LIL are listed in the tables included in the Network March 2003 3 65 Function Blocks UM353 1 Communications section The LOOP and LIL CHAN parameters enable configuration of a loop index number x for Modbus data or a starting channel n for LIL loop data Input CL controls local arbitration of changes to loop data from the network When input CL is not configured the three status outputs LO in 1 21 firmware this output was named L CN and CM will be set high 1 and changes can be made from a network command or the local faceplate When CL is configured it can be changed locally from a pushbutton switch such as PB1SW output PS configured as momentary and will change from local to console or console computer to local with each positive transition of the input Also when output LO goes high output CN will also go high and CM will go low indicating that the control source will change to Console whenever Local is disabled either by a positive transition on input CL or from a network command The Computer CM state can be set high using a network command The NL output will normally be connected to the MD input of pushbutton block PB1SW to indicate the C L switch position on the operator faceplate a green LED for C and a red LED
483. ua epa de 3 8 3 222 AC S ARCCOSINE blend d bane gerebat et 3 10 32 SJ ADD gt gt AdditiOn i ie eate Ue BR De Oe et DNI 3 10 3 2 4 AGA 3 Orifice Metering of Natural Gas 3 11 3 2 5 AG7 7 Measurement of Gas by Turbine 3 13 3 2 6 AG8 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas 3 14 3 2 7 Analog Input Ethernet V3 0 enne ennemi nns 3 15 3 2 8 Analog Input AN nnne nns 3 17 IZI AIN Analog INPUTS saks a oo dite etai 3 18 32 10 AINU Analog Inputs Uriversal oett 3 19 32 TW ATP Analog Input lev Percent teno ERR TAS WISI NO SEES 3 21 3 2 12 ALARM 3 22 30 19 AND AND TOB O dte dar 3 24 3 2 14 Analog Output Ethernet V2 4 n 3 25 3 2 15 AOL Analog Output 1 aie tee E E 3 25 3 2 16 AOP Analog Output _ R 3 26 3 2 17 Analog Outputs sce ccc L tee ette tee ih ua duct 3 27 3 2 18 ASN ARCSINE rette 3 28 3 2 19 Analog Trend Display n snn 3 28 3 2 20 ATN AR
484. ue and continue to run with the pre download value 3 90 March 2003 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 83 Repeat Cycle Timer RCT_ function blocks provide repeat time cycles that can be used in logic timing operations or with PID blocks to provide adaptive on times controlled by the PID block Output ET will provide the time in minutes that has elapsed during the current cycle ON OFF Output 15 the remaining time in the current cycle and will equal the total cycle time ON OFF when the timer has not been started With firmware 1 30 and higher the ON and OFF TIME is adjustable over the full range of the display which is 0 00000 to 999999 In earlier firmware the minimum time setting was 0 1 If the delay time is set to less than the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the scan time REPEAT CYCLE TIMER ESN 000 gt Elapsed Time Start REPEAT CYCLE TIMER Adapt Time AT Remaining Time Output 1 T IME OFF TIME minutes s Real 0 0 ON T I ME ON TIME minutes S Real 0 0 LAST Power Up LAST 5 NO YES YES INPUT S INPUTS loop tag block tag output null 11 INPUT 9 loop tag block tag output null Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 Input 5 asserted high 1 will cause the RCT block to
485. ulse Input B FALLING EDGE Output 1 TRIGGER LIN PIU T INPUTP H loop tag block tag output null E SIN Exec Seq No H 001 to 250 GAIN amp BIAS GB ESN 000 TN Input A A GAIN amp BIAS Output 1 INput A OUTput BIAS BIS IG ALEN input A GAIN 1 0 OUT IG AI OUTput GAIN 8 1 0 DiRect ACTing i IB HA INput BIAS S Real 0 0 p INput OUTput OUT OUTput BIAS s 0 0 A PT SET GAIN gt GAIN gt Y Output 1 01 DIR DIRect ACTing 5 NO YES YES i INPUT A loop tag block tag output null ES Exec Seq H 001 to 250 O1 Bi Bo BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 53 HLD_ Hold HLD_ function blocks provide an output equal to the HOLD VAL set in configuration for interconnection to HOLD other function blocks GE ER ICA f EsN 000 y HOLD gt Output 1 HOLD VALue gt o Output 1 ELOCK DIAGRAM HOLD VAL HOLD VALue 5 aaa Real null March 2003 3 56 UM353 1 Function Blocks 3 2 54 ID ID Controller ID 15 integral only controller and one of five controller types that can be used on a one per loop basis It uses ID CONTROLLER external feedback to provide integral action and therefore allows interac
486. umeric display and one behind the flip down door at the bottom of the faceplate 4 Pull the Assembly from the panel about 1 5 38 mm 5 Look behind the Assembly and locate the display cable from the MPU Controller board Open the connector locking levers on the Assembly mounted connector to eject the cable mounted connector 6 Place the Display Assembly in a static shielding bag and set it aside 7 Go to the following sections to remove a circuit board or replace the power input fuse INSTALLATION 1 Hold the Display Assembly close to the open case and mate the display cable with the connector on the Display Assembly circuit board Check that the locking levers on the connector fully engaged the cable mounted connector The cable is keyed 2 Align the Display Assembly with the case To ensure water tightness use a torque screwdriver set to 6 inch pounds to tighten the two faceplate screws Alternatively use a screwdriver to tighten the screws until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional gt turn DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN 3 Remove the wrist strap NOTE When changing a Display Assembly with the controller powered up and an error code present the displays will light in a random pattern except for the alphanumeric display which will show the error code Clear the error to clear the displays 11 5 2 2 To Replace the Bezel or Circuit Board REMOVAL 1 Place a properly grounded wrist strap on your wrist and remove the D
487. unction block is to be used as a thermocouple input 8 4 6 RTD Input Wiring Wiring for 2 3 and 4 wire RTDs is shown in Figure 8 18 Make connections as outlined in Section 8 4 3 Note the wire jumper between terminals 47 and 48 when a 2 wire RTD is installed Controller Terminals NC 45 45 45 N Isolated 3 Wire 4 Wire 46 RTP 46 RID 46 Universal 5 m Converter 5 Isolated 5 E 47 47 inputs 1 Isolated 8 48 48 48 Note See Table 8 1 for AINU2 terminals NC No Connection 0311551 FIGURE 8 18 Universal Analog Input 2 3 4 Wire RTD Inputs 2003 8 19 Installation UM353 1 8 4 7 Ohms and Slidewire Input Wiring Function blocks AINU1 and AINU2 can be configured for ohm or slidewire inputs Figures 8 19 and 8 20 show the needed connections Controller Terminals Controller Terminals EN Isolated t Isolated 45 SE Power gt 45 Y Power N Position 2 46 Universal 46 Universal Ohms Converter 5 Slidewire 2 Converter 5 Source Isolated Isolated 7 005 47 Inputs 5 47 Inputs Isolated Isolated 48 pA pend Vv 3148 Z 7 Note See Table 8 1 for AINU2 terminals X03119S1 Note See Table 8 1 for AINU2 ter
488. ure is available only when the EM MAN parameter is configured as YES The MAN ACCL parameter in firmware 1 30 and higher enables setting the acceleration rate applied to the pulser knob It can be configured for Slow Medium or Fast Slow is the default and is consistent with firmware versions less than 1 30 PRIORITIES The priority assigned to EM or SB PRIOR will affect the operation as follows the outputs ES and SS will go high with all priority assignments including 0 when event is active 1 Bargraphs event LEDs and condition will flash ACK button must be used to stop flashing 2 Bargraphs event LEDs and condition will flash Flashing will stop if ACK or if event clears 3 Event LEDs and condition will flash ACK button must be used to stop flashing 4 Event LEDs and condition will flash Flashing will stop if ACK or event clears 5 Event LEDs and condition will turn on when event is active and off when the event clears 0 No local display action occurs when event is active March 2003 3 9 Function Blocks UM353 1 3 2 2 ACS ARCCOSINE ACS_ function blocks in firmware 1 30 and higher accept an input between 1 0 and 1 0 Each provides an output signal in ARCCOSINE radians of which the input is the cosine ESN 000 InptX 01 ACOS X gt Output 1 X acos 9 01 Input X Output 1
489. ust be greater than the associated Xn points Input X is in engineering units and the Y points should be in the engineering units desired for the characterizer output CHARACTERIZER Output Y Output Coordinates X4 Xs Xe X10 Input Coordinates BLOCK DIAGRAM Input X 0313150 3 2 27 CMP Comparator function blocks compare analog input with external or internal limit setting and provide a high 1 output when the limit is exceeded ACTION the CMP block can be configured as direct or reverse action Direct action will cause the output to go high when input 15 equal to or greater than the limit Reverse action will cause the output to go high when input is equal to or less than the limit DIRect ACTing gt Analog Input NR EL External LIMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM N O1 gt Output 1 w Limit X03132S0 CHARACTERIZER CHR EsN 000 Input X CHARACTERIZER Input Coordinate 5 nput Coordinate X1 5 nput Coordinate X2 5 nput Coordinate X3 5 Input Coordinate X4 5 nput Coordinate X5 5 Input Coordinate X6 5 nput Coordinate X7 5 nput Coordinate X8 5 Input Coordinate X9 5 nput Coordinate X10 5 Output Coordinate YO 5 Output Coordinate 5 Output Coordinate Y4 5 Output
490. ut D Output Not D DLY DeLaY TIME minutes S Real 0 0 PU LAS Power Up LAST 5 NO YES YES INPUT ON H loop tag block tag output null LLINIPIUT E INPUT EN loop tag block tag output ES Exec Seq H 001 to 250 chas nhan and output D is not high With firmware 1 30 and higher ENable Input the TIME is adjustable over the full range of the display m which is 0 00000 to 999999 In earlier versions the minimum time setting was 0 1 If the delay time is set to less than the e TOU scan time of the station the delay time will equal the scan e ND time gt I POWER UP During a warm start when PU LAST is set to YES the block will initialize at the input output states and elapsed time at the instant power down occurred A cold start SAFE GE EE will initialize the input output states and elapsed time to 0 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 2 86 ROUT Relay Outputs ROUT function blocks provide SPDT contacts activated by function block input C The relay will turn on when the block input is high 1 and will turn off when low 0 Two relay outputs are available on the Expander Board RELAY OUTPUT _ Trout aqu ROUT no Coil D RELAY OUTPUT
491. utput Track Command fe Input State DINU Quality Status Two DINU_ blocks are available on the 1 expander board The fixed names IDs of these blocks and their terminal designations are listed in Section 8 4 Z D O Zero Drop Out Engineering Units Real 0 Output CT represents the scaled actual count x K total of FREQ FREQuencyMINimum Hz 4 0 FIRE Q IMA X FREQuency MAXimum Hz 1000 input pulses that occurred since the last reset This output 15 K kfactor SCALE 9 jio real number and can be used in a number of applications DI G DIGitalFILTer S Oto 180 0sec MIIINISICALL SCALE Real 0 0 such as a direct count input to the BAT batch totalizer Maximum SCALE Real 1000 function block or in math operations such as computing the D P P Decimal Poi Postion refered 9 000900 000 5 ENGineering UNITS 3 6 Char ASCII PRCT difference between counts In a ratio trim circuit PU Power Up LAST NO YES YES R INPUTR p tag block tag output null E I NIPIUIT D INPUTD loop tag block tag output Output IS is the current state of the input at the time the INPUT loop tag block tag output ul input Te
492. version 1 21 1s used to index reads and writes to Modbus parameters The LIL has 25 parameters C1S C2S C3S 255 When ODC block has been selected the LOOP has been configured the corresponding C S LIL parameter will contain the LIL starting Chan n location The LOOP must be entered to enable either LIL or Modbus communications Range pointers for both the process setpoint and valve bargraphs must be configured to define the range of the variable inputs to P S and V If these parameters are not configured the bargraphs will be scaled using the engineering range of 0 00 to 100 00 The range pointer for X and Y define the displayed decimal point position and the units code This information also defines the scaling of the loop information provided to a remote workstation over the network i e Modbus or LIL OPERATOR DISPLAY for CONTROLLERS Process Range PR Process LP Setpoint S Valve Range VR Valve VD OPERATOR FEN DISPLAY XRange XR ETA for Variable x XL CONTROLLERS Event REIN Y Range RE Station Error Variable Y Y User Status 1 m m Global User Status 2 Pulse oN Alarm Input A Management Pulse ofF CoNsole Console Local Emerg Local CoMputer 20 20 20 20 Na gt e gt lt xc ccc U O gt gt rr zzizz
493. version 1 30 Program ID was changed since new function blocks DIS and DOS contained a new network variable type SNVT state When controller firmware is upgraded to 1 30 or higher the controller will store a new Program ID in the EEPROM on the LonWorks board so that a Network Manager will recognize it as a different type of node Considerations 1 When a controller in an installed network is upgraded to 1 30 or higher the Network Manager will not recognize the network variables added by the new version The Network Manager will be able to bind variables present in the earlier version 2 A LonWorks board that has been used in a controller with 1 30 or higher firmware should not be used in a controller with firmware 1 21 or lower The LonWorks board EEPROM will contain the Program ID stored in it by the 1 30 firmware e Ifthe LonWorks board is mounted in a controller with 1 21 firmware and the controller is installed by a Network Manager that had not previously installed a controller with 1 30 firmware a problem will occur The Network Manager will read out the list of network variables available but the variables will be only those that were available in 1 21 In subsequent installations of controllers with 1 30 firmware the Network Manger will not read and therefore will not have access to the new 1 30 variables e Ifthe LonWorks board is mounted in a controller with 1 21 firmware and the controller is installed by a Network Manger that had p
494. w Deviation Alarm A4 Deviation Alarm A4 Overrange O J alamBlHig o O AlamBllow 004 AlarmBl Outof Range O AlamB2High _ AlarmB2OutofRange 0 AlarmB3 High AlarmB3 Low OutofRange 00000 AlamB4High 00 AlmmB4 low O AlamB4OutofRage Emergency Manual Emergency Local CY Standby Syne Override on eg O Emergency Override PCOM block sd _ Interlocked PCOM block 000000002 DevieFaled PCOMblok keq Dol i D i 5 BH B3LO IN B3OR No BH No BALO IN B40R Emeg Man No Em Local No Standby No Override No EMERG OR No INTRLK __ No SLOLim No Ul Status U2 Status W1 2 ATUNE W3 No No ATUNEE2 E3 No N Autotuner Error Only applies when HYS set to Process too noisy EInCon No EDBCRC N EPQua No iO0n NC AIEnn NU CIEnn NU No DIEnn NU No
495. will have the same effect as pressing and releasing the button on the faceplate If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position If the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle March 2003 7 21 Data Mapping UM353 1 Sequencer Loop ODS Code R W Description Range Coil MB C P LIL L HS R 1 Hold Sequencer 1 0 00296 48 1 n 4 1 0 L L R W 1 Loop Local 1 0 00297 48 1 n 4 1 1 L RSQ w 1 Reset Sequencer 1 0 00298 48 1 n 4 1 2 L TC R 1 Track 1 0 00299 48 1 n 4 1 3 L CN R W 1 Console 1 0 00300 48 1 n 4 1 4 L CM R W 1 Computer 1 0 00301 48 1 n 4 1 5 L SSF w 1 Step Forward normal 0 1 0 00302 48 1 n 4 1 6 L SSB w 1 Backward normal 0 1 0 00303 48 1 4 1 7 1 0 00304 48 1 n 4 1 8 L CH R 1 Configuration Hold 1 0 00305 48 1 n 4 1 9 L SSC R 1 Steps Completed 1 0 00306 48 1 4 1 10 0 00307 48 1 n 4 1 11 spare 0 00308 48 1 n 4 1 12 L PB1 R PBISW Input MD V1 3 1 0 00309 48 1 4 1 13 L PB2 R PB2SW Input MD V1 3 1 0 00310 48 1 n 4 1 14 L PB3 R PB3SW Input MD V1 3 1 0 00311 48 1 n 4 1 15 L A1 R 1 Alarm 1 is Active 1 0 003 12 48 1 n 5 1 0 L N1 R W 1 Alarm 1 is Not Acknowledged 1 0 00313 48 1 n 5 1 1 L E1 R W 1 Alarm 1 is Enabled 1 0 00314 48 1 n 5 1 2 LHA2 R 1 Alarm 2 is Active 1 0 00315 48 1 n 5 1 3 LHN2 R W 1 Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged 1 0 00316 48 1
496. will power up in the auto mode During a hot start the mode and manual value will equal the value prior to power down Each discrete input variable can be displayed on the local faceplate using the D button When first stepping into a loop using the Loop button the loop tag will be displayed e g DigDisp1 Pressing the D button will scroll through the discrete points displaying the point tag e g SV 103 in the alphanumeric and the value of the input on the left 3 positions of the digital display e g On and the output in the right most 3 positions e g OFF The A M button will display the point mode and enable switching the point between auto amp manual using the A M button The manual value can be changed by turning the pulser and pressing the ACK button If the ACK button is not pressed within 4 5 seconds the display will return to the actual output value Operator Display for Discrete indication amp control fom Input 0 D OG Output 0 Input 1 14 O Output 1 Input 2 B Operator Display O Output 2 Input 3 B for O Output 3 Input 4 B p Output 4 Input 5 B control O Output 5 Input 6 B O6 Output 6 Input 7 O Output 7 Input 8 B 08 8 9 Ir O9 Output 9 Input A OA Output A Input B B OB Output B Input C Output Input D D OD Output D Input E B O Output E Input F m O Output F D Watch Dog Input 0 TAG 5 6 ASCII Char 0 Input 1 TAG 5 Input 2
497. y N Counter he ede ee dde 3 45 3 2 39 DOD Digital Output lev Discret vu hu esce esent eiie 3 46 3 2 40 DOE Digital Output Ethernet 2 4 ener nnne 3 47 3 241 Discrete 3 47 3 242 DOS lt Digital Output State ass 3 48 3 2 43 DOUT Digital 3 49 32 44 DTM Dead Time Table 5 ies m ec e Ee FA UR RE eec dE 3 50 3 2 45 DWE Digital Write Ethernet 3 0 eene ener nnne 3 51 3 246 DYT gt Del y Timet eee RETURN 3 52 3 22 47 E I External Internal Transfer Switch re hrec et ter EE ete 3 53 3 2 48 ESL Events Sequence Logger rrersnrrennrseenrrennrsesnrrsnnrssennrennnsesnrresnnssennrennesennensenessnnersenesennessenessenrse 3 54 3 2 49 EXP NATURAL 3 55 3 2 50 EXT u DI Y SS Sa 3 55 3 2 51 FTG F llmg Edge Trig Ber u suu t ete ie 3 56 32 52 GB gt Gam fb editi aee akapa 3 56 EAMDEM a Sua sau m am ee 3 56 32 54 ID ID Controller a Tenere tee er EPOR RR UU aS 3 57 3 255 EE Lead L g iie hie RU eH CE FREE Po Tee HE N o P ean 3 58 SS PLE 3 58 3 22 37 LN NATURAL LOGARITHM tiet 3 59 3 22 58 LOG LOGARITHM BASE 10 destitit y m vete e dirett
498. y barriers the following precautions should be observed Switch off electrical power at its source in non hazardous location before connecting or disconnecting power signal or other wiring Pr cautions Frangais Emplacements dangereux de classe I division 1 et classe I division 2 Les pi ces de rechange doivent tre autoris es par l usine Les substitutions peuvent rendre cet appareil impropre l utilisation dans les emplacements dangereux Emplacement dangereux de division 2 Lorsque l appareil d crit dans la notice ci jointe est install sans barri res de s curit on doit couper l alimentation lectrique a la source hors de l emplacement dangereux avant d effectuer les op rations suivantes branchment ou d branchement d un circuit de puissance de signalisation ou autre 14 12 March 2003 UM353 1 Model Designation and Specifications 14 10 2 Special Conditions for Safe Use Always refer to the labels on the controller case for approvals and certifications applicable to that instrument FM Enclosure Requirements CE The apparatus must be mounted within an enclosure or assembly to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure is typically user supplied and therefore was not examined as part of this Approval but shall comply with the requirements of this section Accessibility The system must be installed within the enclosure so that its circuits are accessible by
499. y open pushbutton identified as PB1 on the local faceplate It can have a 6 character tag to identify the button function on a HMI display One normally closed pushbutton identified as PB2 on the local faceplate It can have a 6 character tag for display on an HMI e One two position selector switch identified as A M on the local faceplate It can have a 6 character tag for switch position identification on an HMI Each group also has a set of 6 character messages associated with the status of a feedback signal 1 0 Each pushbutton has a configuration parameter that controls how long the button function will be held in the pressed position The default value is second but can be set from 0 1 or scan time if greater than 0 1 to 10 seconds The LOOP parameter is used to index reads and writes to Modbus and LIL network parameters When using the LIL the LIL CHAN parameter must also be configured See Section 9 for more information on network parameters The VIEW OD parameter when set to YES enables the operator display to be viewed and accessed locally In cases where it is desired to view display or operation parameters only from a network workstation the parameter should be set to NO During a cold or warm start the A M switch will power up in the Auto position will power up in the position prior to power down Operator Display for Pushbuttons

Moore 353 USER'S MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents